Purchasing and unlocking Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 When you run the downloaded trial version of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, the start screen will present you with three options. Check the option you require and you will be presented with further instructions. Activate with serial number Select this option if you have already purchased your copy of Photo & Graphic Designer and enter the serial number that you were given in the email confirming your purchase.
What’s New in PGD 2013 & Pro X v8 We're happy to announce a major upgrade to Photo & Graphic Designer and Designer Pro .
Photo Tools Clone Tool (Clone and Magic Erase) The Clone Tool has been significantly improved. When you clone, copy or magic erase an area it now uses the current edited photo as the source, instead of the original photo (for manual clone and magic erase objects), which makes the whole process far more WYSIWYG.
Design & Usability Enhancements Shape Editing A pair of important new shape editing tools have been added, one of which adds or appends to an existing shape, the other erases parts of objects, and can act as a vector erase tool or as a soft eraser tool. Shape Builder Tool (Pro only) This tool enables you to 'paint' onto an existing shape to enlarge it, add new areas or adjust the shape or outline. It does this in a vector way, and is a much more direct and often easier way than using the Shape Editor tool.
Inline Graphics Designer now allows you to embed 'inline graphics' in text using a simple Paste operation. Embedded graphics are great for really small items on the line such as symbols, icons etc, e.g. and are treated just like a 'character', in other words they flow and follow the same formatting rules as a character embedded in the text.
The set of Pantone colors in the Color Gallery has been updated to Pantone's latest offerings.
Web Authoring / Web Publishing (Pro only) Automatic Object Positioning / Smart Page Resize In previous versions of Designer Pro you had to manually adjust the position of items on your page as you edited or added more text. Similarly you had to drag the bottom of the page down to make it longer as your content grew.
The new graphical bullet and numbered list feature (see below for more info on this feature) creates automatic presentation steps (each bullet or numbered item is treated as a separate step in the presentation). This makes a huge improvement to usability and productivity when creating lists.
Other minor enhancements Improved Incremental Publishing, making it smarter about publishing updates We've added an option to make the button order in a NavBar match the order of pages as shown in the Page & Layer Gallery. With this option on, if you re-order pages your NavBar buttons will reflect this change. (Pro only).
Introduction to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Welcome to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is a powerful and easy to use document creation and graphics tool, able to produce everything from top quality web graphics to highly detailed illustrations and multi-page documents for print and PDF output.
Program designed and developed by Xara Group Ltd. For more information about Xara and its products, click here. Alternatively, visit our web site: www.xara.com ©1995-2012 Xara Group Ltd. The Geotype font is provided by kind permission of Gary Bouton and remains © Gary Bouton. Take a look at www.theboutons.com Other fonts are provided by third parties who retain the copyright. In all cases, copyright is reserved by Xara or its licensors and is protected by international copyright law.
Welcome to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is a powerful and easy to use document creation and graphics tool, able to produce everything from top quality web graphics to highly detailed illustrations and multi-page documents for print and PDF output. If you're working with photos, then Photo & Graphic Designer can handle everything from a simple one-click auto-enhance of your photo to awesome digital photo compositions.
Photo & Graphic Designer terminology This section describes some of the terminology used in Photo & Graphic Designer. Document You can think of a document as a conventional sheet of paper (or a couple of it). Like a sheet of paper, you can draw lines and curves, place objects like shapes, cliparts and photos and write text (and erase them later). You can save the document for later use by storing it on disk or printing it. Page This is the white area in the document.
Attributes The various characteristics that define the appearance of objects on the page, such as color, line width, fill style etc are all called Attributes of the object. The Attributes of objects can be copied and pasted between different objects using the Paste Attributes menu command.
Document You can think of a document as a conventional sheet of paper (or a couple of it). Like a sheet of paper, you can draw lines and curves, place objects like shapes, cliparts and photos and write text (and erase them later). You can save the document for later use by storing it on disk or printing it. Page This is the white area in the document. You can place objects on the page margin, on the page, or overlapping both. However, only objects on the page are printed.
fill style etc are all called Attributes of the object. The Attributes of objects can be copied and pasted between different objects using the Paste Attributes menu command.
Page This is the white area in the document. You can place objects on the page margin, on the page, or overlapping both. However, only objects on the page are printed. A document can contain one or several single pages or double pages spreads. A double page is like two separate sheets of paper placed next to each other. Lines, shapes, and objects A line can be straight, curved or a mixture of both. A line must have a start and an end, thus it is always open. You can apply a thickness and color to a line.
Lines, shapes, and objects A line can be straight, curved or a mixture of both. A line must have a start and an end, thus it is always open. You can apply a thickness and color to a line. These are all lines A shape is a solid or closed object. The difference between a line and a shape These are all shapes is that a shape has no start or end. Because a shape is a closed object, you can fill it with a color or leave it empty with no color. You can apply a thickness and color to the line around the shape.
Bars There are three types of bars: the Main toolbar, the InfoBar, and then various other button bars which are sometimes just referred to as control bars, e.g. the Gallery button bar. Attributes The various characteristics that define the appearance of objects on the page, such as color, line width, fill style etc are all called Attributes of the object. The Attributes of objects can be copied and pasted between different objects using the Paste Attributes menu command.
Attributes The various characteristics that define the appearance of objects on the page, such as color, line width, fill style etc are all called Attributes of the object. The Attributes of objects can be copied and pasted between different objects using the Paste Attributes menu command.
Windows terminology We use many of the usual Windows conventions. For more information on using Windows, please refer to Windows help and support. The keyboard Keys are shown like this: "Ctrl" (this means the control key). Combinations of keys are shown as "Ctrl + A". This means: 1. Press and hold down "Ctrl". 2. Then press "A" (with "Ctrl" held down). 3. Then release both keys. The "Alt" keys Most keyboards have two "Alt" keys.
When you are asked to select a menu it will be described like this: Choose "Window -> Bars -> Rulers" This indicates that you should click the "Window" menu, go down to "Bars", and then click "Rulers".
The keyboard Keys are shown like this: "Ctrl" (this means the control key). Combinations of keys are shown as "Ctrl + A". This means: 1. Press and hold down "Ctrl". 2. Then press "A" (with "Ctrl" held down). 3. Then release both keys. The "Alt" keys Most keyboards have two "Alt" keys. There is a key labeled "Alt" towards the left of the keyboard, and a key labeled "Alt Gr" to the right.
Mouse actions Click: Press and release the mouse button. Double click: Click twice rapidly. Drag: Hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse. Drag & drop: Move the mouse over an item, then drag the item to the required place on the document and release the mouse to drop it in place. Ctrl + click, and Shift + click: hold down "Ctrl", or "Shift" as you click. The chapter "Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer " has information on configuring the mouse buttons.
Pointer This is the on-screen pointer (mouse pointer) that follows mouse movements. Menus When you are asked to select a menu it will be described like this: Choose "Window -> Bars -> Rulers" This indicates that you should click the "Window" menu, go down to "Bars", and then click "Rulers".
Menus When you are asked to select a menu it will be described like this: Choose "Window -> Bars -> Rulers" This indicates that you should click the "Window" menu, go down to "Bars", and then click "Rulers".
The clipboard This is a temporary store and is used like a physical clipboard. You can cut or copy part or all of your drawing onto the clipboard. You can then transfer the clipboard contents to another part of the same document or to another document or application. The clipboard can only hold one item or one set of items at a time. Placing something on it overwrites any existing contents.
Getting Help If you need some help using this program, here are some sources of information that may be of use: Program help - Choose "Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Help" from the "Help" menu to open Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Help (containing hundreds of pages of information). Status bar - Try reading the text on the status bar at the bottom of the main Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 window.
Support If you purchased Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 from Xara you can contact Xara support and if you purchased from MAGIX you can contact MAGIX support, full details are given below. Xara Support http://support.xara .com Our own support site includes a Troubleshooter for downloading, unlocking and installation issues, plus comprehensive FAQs (frequently asked questions) which are constantly updated and available 24 hours, 7 days a week; always the best source for instant answers.
Unlimited web support: As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support offered via the convenient MAGIX service portal on http://support.magix.net, including an intelligent help assistant, high-quality FAQs, patches and user reports that are constantly updated. The only requirement for use is product registration on www.xara.com The online community - on-the-spot support and a platform for exchange: MAGIX customers have free and unlimited access to the online community at www.
0203 3189218 Denmark: 699 18149 Sweden: 0852500858 Finland: 09 31581630 Norway: 0210 30665 North America 9 am to 4 pm EST Mon-Fri Phone: 1-305-722-5810 Support website http://support.xara .com Our own support site includes a Troubleshooter for downloading, unlocking and installation issues, plus comprehensive FAQs (frequently asked questions) which are constantly updated and available 24 hours, 7 days a week; always the best source for instant answers.
Support website http://support.xara .com Our own support site includes a Troubleshooter for downloading, unlocking and installation issues, plus comprehensive FAQs (frequently asked questions) which are constantly updated and available 24 hours, 7 days a week; always the best source for instant answers. Document info "File -> Document info" displays information about the selected document such as its size and any fonts or plug-ins used.
Document info "File -> Document info" displays information about the selected document such as its size and any fonts or plug-ins used. This is a good way to find out if you are missing a required font or plug-in that could prevent the document from displaying correctly. Anything you type into the comment field is stored as part of the file. This comment is displayed whenever you display the document info dialog box.
About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Choose "Help" > "About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013" . This displays general information about the program. If you contact the support, you may be asked for this information. Tooltips When you move over a button, the tooltip tells you the function of the button.
Tooltips When you move over a button, the tooltip tells you the function of the button.
Getting Started This section gives an overview of the main functionality of Photo & Graphic Designer. Later sections go into more detail about each tool. In this chapter Drawing Tools Object Based Design The Selector Tool Right-click menus Using Templates & Clipart Theme Colors Photos Text Page Size Saving & Exporting Your Work.
Drawing Tools Photo & Graphic Designer provides all the graphics tools you need to create just about any graphical object on your page, as well as a range of pre-designed graphical elements in the Designs Gallery. There are several basic drawing tools that let you create rectangles, ellipses, regular polygons stars or any shape you like. Photo & Graphic Designer provides vector drawing tools, which means you can resize, edit the outline shape and re-color with no loss of quality.
This allows you to use existing objects as a 'palette' of available styles. Click an object to select it, then draw new objects in that style. You can turn off this behavior in the General tab of the "Utilities" > "Options" dialog. Select the Give new objects most recent attributes checkbox. Now the current attributes will only change when you set them manually, as described above.
Current attributes An 'attribute' is some characteristic of an object which you can modify in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. For example a shape's attributes include its color, its outline width and its outline color. As mentioned above you can change the attributes of an object after you've drawn it, by selecting it and then changing its fill color, line width, or any of its other attributes.
Examples of attributes which are not copied automatically: Feather, transparency, shadow, bevel, contour, 3D extrude, live effects. Resetting current attributes You can reset all current attribute groups instantly by pressing "Esc" when you have no objects selected. If you have objects selected, pressing "Esc" clears the selection, so just press "Esc" again to reset the current attributes back to their default values.
Program Layout Info Bar - changes with each tool Zoom Designs Gallery Page & Layer Gallery Selector Tool Photo Editing Tool Drawing tools Text Tool Shadow Tool Color line Tabs for all open documents - icon identifies document type. Note: By default Photo & Graphic Designer opens a new document showing just one page. To view all the pages in your document, right click a page and choose Multiple Page View .
Web documents are displayed in single page mode by default and print documents in multi-page view mode. Switch between display modes by right clicking on the page or pasteboard and selecting or deselecting Multiple Page View from the drop-down menu. An example of multiple page view is shown to the left. You can drag and drop items between pages. When you make document-wide Theme color changes, you can see how the changes affect all pages. The current page is marked with 4 corner brackets.
Rounded rectangle with a graduated fill. Note: If you drag with the Fill Tool across a grouped item, such as a text panel, then everything in the group takes on the same fill style. To overcome this you must first select just the item you want to fill. You can do this several ways. A single click on the item with the Fill Tool will select just that item, as will a click in the Selector Tool with the "Ctrl" key pressed (this is called 'select inside' because it selects just the one item inside the group).
without needing any other graphics tools. This is an example of a rounded rectangle with grad color, grad transparency and feathered edges with some text placed on top of it. This has a graduated color fill, light to dark green going left to right. It also has a vertical graduated transparency fading from top to bottom. The feather gives it a soft edge. It takes a couple of seconds to create such an image, and it's automatically converted to the right graphic when you save your web page.
huge and it remains pin sharp: On top of that you can re-color using the Named Color system, and it will even stretch as required everything in Photo & Graphic Designer remains non-destructive (which means you can always edit it, with no loss of quality). Something that would take skill and time to produce using alternative graphics software, is trivially easy in Photo & Graphic Designer.
Zooming / Scrolling / Pushing your page These common operations are made very easy: To Zoom in or out, hold Ctrl and use the mouse-wheel To push the page, press your mouse-wheel and push (yes it's a button as well) To scroll use the mouse-wheel (or the scroll bars of course) Web documents are displayed in single page mode by default and print documents in multi-page view mode.
You can easily put a graduated color fill onto a shape using this tool (and a lot more besides). Select the tool and just drag across your object. The fill arrow can be adjusted by dragging the ends to alter the direction, angle and extent of the graduation. Rounded rectangle with a graduated fill. Note: If you drag with the Fill Tool across a grouped item, such as a text panel, then everything in the group takes on the same fill style. To overcome this you must first select just the item you want to fill.
The shadow below the ball drawing above has a feathered edge. Combining all of these controls you can very quickly produce amazing layered graphics for your website, all directly in Photo & Graphic Designer without needing any other graphics tools. This is an example of a rounded rectangle with grad color, grad transparency and feathered edges with some text placed on top of it. This has a graduated color fill, light to dark green going left to right.
a glow shadow. The whole thing is grouped. (You do not need to draw this button as it's provided in the Button category of the Designs Gallery ). The huge benefit of vector graphics, compared to 'bitmap' graphics created in pixel editing software such Photoshop, is that you can re-color, edit, rotate, and resize the button with no loss of quality.
Flyout Bars Some tools on the main toolbar are grouped together under a single icon. These icons have a small triangle indicator in the bottom right corner and when you move the mouse pointer over one of these icons a flyout bar appears. The bar holds the other tool icons that are in this group. Simply move the mouse pointer over each one to see a tooltip, and click to select the tool you want. If you select a modal tool from a flyout bar, that tool becomes the primary tool for that group.
Transparency Tool You can adjust the transparency of any graphic or photo to make it see-through. More than this, Photo & Graphic Designer supports graduated transparency. It works very like the graduated color fill. In the Transparency tool just drag across your shape and you can see the transparency fades. You can adjust the degree of transparency of each end of the fill arrow, by clicking on either end of the arrow, and adjusting the Transparency slider. See Transparency for more information.
and just drag on the object. You can adjust the shadow blur and transparency using InfoBar controls. Some text with a soft shadow. To adjust the position of an existing shadow, go into the Shadow Tool and drag on the shadow. Example Graphics This is a perfect example of what can be created in Photo & Graphic Designer. This button combines many of the features described above - it's drawn by combining just a few feathered shapes, and using graduated transparency (the white reflection effect).
Fill Tool You can easily put a graduated color fill onto a shape using this tool (and a lot more besides). Select the tool and just drag across your object. The fill arrow can be adjusted by dragging the ends to alter the direction, angle and extent of the graduation. Rounded rectangle with a graduated fill. Note: If you drag with the Fill Tool across a grouped item, such as a text panel, then everything in the group takes on the same fill style.
top bar. Try it on your rectangle shape. Select the shape and then click this Feather control on the right of the top bar. The shadow below the ball drawing above has a feathered edge. Combining all of these controls you can very quickly produce amazing layered graphics for your website, all directly in Photo & Graphic Designer without needing any other graphics tools. This is an example of a rounded rectangle with grad color, grad transparency and feathered edges with some text placed on top of it.
many of the features described above - it's drawn by combining just a few feathered shapes, and using graduated transparency (the white reflection effect). The text has a slight soft shadow and the button has a glow shadow. The whole thing is grouped. (You do not need to draw this button as it's provided in the Button category of the Designs Gallery ).
Transparency Tool You can adjust the transparency of any graphic or photo to make it see-through. More than this, Photo & Graphic Designer supports graduated transparency. It works very like the graduated color fill. In the Transparency tool just drag across your shape and you can see the transparency fades. You can adjust the degree of transparency of each end of the fill arrow, by clicking on either end of the arrow, and adjusting the Transparency slider. See Transparency for more information.
graphics or photo. Select the Shadow Tool and just drag on the object. You can adjust the shadow blur and transparency using InfoBar controls. Some text with a soft shadow. To adjust the position of an existing shadow, go into the Shadow Tool and drag on the shadow. Example Graphics This is a perfect example of what can be created in Photo & Graphic Designer.
Feather This is a graphical term for blending the edges of objects. Photo & Graphic Designer provides a feather control that enables any object, graphics, text or photo to be feathered - giving it a blurred edge that blends with the background. The Feather control is not a tool on the left, but one of the controls on the top bar. Try it on your rectangle shape. Select the shape and then click this Feather control on the right of the top bar. The shadow below the ball drawing above has a feathered edge.
Example Graphics This is a perfect example of what can be created in Photo & Graphic Designer. This button combines many of the features described above - it's drawn by combining just a few feathered shapes, and using graduated transparency (the white reflection effect). The text has a slight soft shadow and the button has a glow shadow. The whole thing is grouped. (You do not need to draw this button as it's provided in the Button category of the Designs Gallery ).
Shadow Tool A very popular graphics effect is to create a soft drop-shadow under a graphic or some text. This serves to lift the object away from the background. The Shadow Tool lets you add a soft shadow to any object, text, graphics or photo. Select the Shadow Tool and just drag on the object. You can adjust the shadow blur and transparency using InfoBar controls. Some text with a soft shadow. To adjust the position of an existing shadow, go into the Shadow Tool and drag on the shadow.
Example Graphics This is a perfect example of what can be created in Photo & Graphic Designer. This button combines many of the features described above - it's drawn by combining just a few feathered shapes, and using graduated transparency (the white reflection effect). The text has a slight soft shadow and the button has a glow shadow. The whole thing is grouped. (You do not need to draw this button as it's provided in the Button category of the Designs Gallery ).
Object Based Design All the types of elements are collectively referred to as objects. One of the unique benefits of Photo & Graphic Designer is that you have complete freedom to place any object anywhere on the page, and your document or website will faithfully reproduce this. The Selector Tool can be used to select any object on the page, and to move (just drag it), resize and rotate the objects.
Stacking Order All objects on the page are placed one on top of another. The most recently drawn or created object is always on top, that is, in front of any others. You can adjust the stacking position by right clicking and choosing Arrange or using the Arrange menu options. For example, when you draw a new rectangle it always appears to cover all the objects behind it.
The Selector Tool This tool is a general purpose tool that allows you to select, move, resize and rotate all objects on your web page. You can do all these things by just dragging on the objects on the page, or on the selection handles around the object, or you can enter precise numeric values. The selected object is shown with 8 handles around the outside, and the status line at the bottom of the screen also tells you what is selected. Drag on any corner handle to resize an object.
pages.
Nudging Objects The arrow keys can be used to nudge the selected object, one pixel at a time. If you hold "Shift", it nudges objects 10 pixels at a time. Rotating Objects There are two ways to rotate an object. Either click on the object a second time, so the selection handles change to show rotation handles, which you can then drag on to rotate the object.
Rotating Objects There are two ways to rotate an object. Either click on the object a second time, so the selection handles change to show rotation handles, which you can then drag on to rotate the object. Or, when it's showing the square selection handles, move the mouse pointer just inside the corner handles until you see the mouse pointer change to a rotation indicator - you can then also drag to rotate the selected object.
InfoBar When an object is selected, the InfoBar - just above your document - shows all the relevant controls for the current tool. This bar changes depending on which tool is selected. This is the InfoBar in the Selector Tool : The InfoBar, just above your document, shows controls for the selected tool. You can enter numeric values into any field. e.g. to reduce the size of an object by 20% you can enter 80% into the W field (which is a % size).
Copying Objects You can use the usual "Edit" > "Copy" ("Ctrl + C") and "Edit" > "Paste" ("Ctrl + V") options or right click an object and choose Copy , but a really quick way to copy any item is drag on it with the right mouse button. You can also copy and paste a page anywhere in your document from the current document or another document ? see Copying and pasting pages.
Right-click menus When you right-click any object in the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 workspace, a drop-down menu lists useful operations that are relevant to the object clicked on. For example, if you right-click a rectangle you've drawn previously, the drop-down menu allows you to perform actions only relevant to a rectangle. If you right-click a photo, however, some of the menu options that appear apply only to photos, while others are similar to the actions you can perform on a rectangle.
Using Templates & Clipart Open the Designs Gallery by clicking the Designs Gallery tab in the Galleries bar (or use "File" > "New from Designs Gallery" ). This shows folders containing collections of template designs, clipart and web widgets. Some templates are intended for printing (photo albums, calendars, newsletters, etc.), others for web use and most of the graphical clipart designs can be used in any types of document.
Adding New Pages To Your Website You can drag any template design from the Designs Gallery onto your page. If this is a page template, it will add a new page to your website, after first asking if you want to match any color changes. If you drag a clipart item such as a button, heading or photo object, this gets added onto the page where you dropped it, and again you will be asked if you want to match any color changes you've made.
Flash Animations Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes the ability to create Flash Animations. See the Flash section in the help.
Theme Colors Most templates use a small set of theme colors, and various shades of those theme colors (also referred to as 'Named colors'). Most themes provide a selection of alternative color schemes in the Designs Gallery along with all the pages, graphics and other items that make up the theme.
Note that when you change a Theme Color in this way, all the related shades used throughout the document will change as well. Coloring Shapes You can fill any drawn shape with a color, either by dragging the color from the Color Line and dropping it on to the shape, or by first selecting the object and then clicking on the Color Line.
Click the label icon to create a Named Color The power of a named color is that when you edit it later (right click the color in the Color Line, select Edit ) all objects using this color are instantly changed. Linked shades You can create colors that are lighter or darker shades of another color, so that when you alter the 'parent' color, all the lighter and darker shades change to match the new hue.
Click this button to reveal the extra controls. You can now select any light or darker shade of the parent color. The cross marks the parent color. Select Shade from this drop-down list and then the parent color. You can also create a Linked Shade that appears on the Color Line (so you can easily apply it to other objects). When you select to create a new Named Color you can choose to make this a linked 'Shade of another color'.
Coloring Shapes You can fill any drawn shape with a color, either by dragging the color from the Color Line and dropping it on to the shape, or by first selecting the object and then clicking on the Color Line. Alternatively right click the shape and choose Fill Color or click the small Color Editor icon (or press "Ctrl + E") to display the Color Editor, where you can set any color you like. You can give drawn objects a graduated color fill using the Fill Tool.
Click the label icon to create a Named Color The power of a named color is that when you edit it later (right click the color in the Color Line, select Edit ) all objects using this color are instantly changed. Linked shades You can create colors that are lighter or darker shades of another color, so that when you alter the 'parent' color, all the lighter and darker shades change to match the new hue.
Click this button to reveal the extra controls. You can now select any light or darker shade of the parent color. The cross marks the parent color. Select Shade from this drop-down list and then the parent color. You can also create a Linked Shade that appears on the Color Line (so you can easily apply it to other objects). When you select to create a new Named Color you can choose to make this a linked 'Shade of another color'.
Coloring Imported Clipart When you import a clipart graphic by dragging from the Design Gallery, using the "File" > "Import" option, or dragging a .web or .xar file onto your page, you will usually be asked whether you want to match the colors. If you select not to, then any named colors used in this graphic will be added to the Color Line. Clicking on any color on the Color Line will give you the option to edit the color. Coloring Photos If you try to color a photo it turns it into a 'contoned' photo.
Linked shades You can create colors that are lighter or darker shades of another color, so that when you alter the 'parent' color, all the lighter and darker shades change to match the new hue. For example a graduated color shade on a button, such as this: This is a simple rounded rectangle with a graduated color fill created with the Fill Tool. In the Fill Tool you can click on the either end of the arrow to set the color.
Coloring Photos If you try to color a photo it turns it into a 'contoned' photo. For example, to make any photo black and white, right click and choose "Contone" > "Make black and white" or select it and click on the white color patch on the end of the Color Line. You can set the light or dark color to be any two colors, not just white and black - right click, choose "Contone" > "Light " and click a color in the Color Editor.
you can click on the either end of the arrow to set the color. If you create the main green color as a named color, and then make a lighter or darker shade of the color, as a linked shade, when you now edit the named color the shades change as well, so you get simple re-coloring of complex shaded objects. To create a linked shade, open the extra controls in the Color Editor and select the 'Normal Color' drop-down menu and choose 'Shade of another color '. Click this button to reveal the extra controls.
Page Background Color To set the page background color, right click a page, choose Change Page Background and click a color in the Color Editor . Alternatively you can drag a color from the Color Line over the page and drop it on an empty part of the page. To set a repeating background texture, drag the photo or bitmap onto your document. Open the Bitmap Gallery, scroll to the photo you just loaded, click on it to select it, and then click the Background button on the gallery.
Click this button to reveal the extra controls. You can now select any light or darker shade of the parent color. The cross marks the parent color. Select Shade from this drop-down list and then the parent color. You can also create a Linked Shade that appears on the Color Line (so you can easily apply it to other objects). When you select to create a new Named Color you can choose to make this a linked 'Shade of another color'.
Creating your own Named Colors If you want to use a color many times throughout a document, you can create your own named color by clicking the Name label on the top of the Color Editor. This color will now appear on the Color Line. Click the label icon to create a Named Color The power of a named color is that when you edit it later (right click the color in the Color Line, select Edit ) all objects using this color are instantly changed.
Click this button to reveal the extra controls. You can now select any light or darker shade of the parent color. The cross marks the parent color. Select Shade from this drop-down list and then the parent color. You can also create a Linked Shade that appears on the Color Line (so you can easily apply it to other objects). When you select to create a new Named Color you can choose to make this a linked 'Shade of another color'.
Linked shades You can create colors that are lighter or darker shades of another color, so that when you alter the 'parent' color, all the lighter and darker shades change to match the new hue. For example a graduated color shade on a button, such as this: This is a simple rounded rectangle with a graduated color fill created with the Fill Tool. In the Fill Tool you can click on the either end of the arrow to set the color.
Photos You can replace any photo by dragging and dropping it from your File Explorer onto any photo in Photo & Graphic Designer. If you drop it onto the background then it is imported and placed on the page where you dropped it. All imported photos are shown as 500 pixels wide, but you can of course change this to be any size in the usual way with the Selector Tool . Drag and drop your photo over any existing picture to replace it.
Some templates in the Designs Gallery , particularly photo album styles, can have multiple photos replaced at once. Select multiple photo files using Windows File Explorer ("Ctrl + click" to add more files to the selection, or "Shift + click" to select a range of files). Then drag and drop them onto the page in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Photos are replaced one by one from the top of the page downwards.
500 pixels wide. But if you want this to be exactly 200 pixels wide, just enter 200px into the W size field of the Selector Tool . You can enter it in any unit, e.g., entering 2in will make it 2 inches wide.
Replacing Multiple Photos Some templates in the Designs Gallery , particularly photo album styles, can have multiple photos replaced at once. Select multiple photo files using Windows File Explorer ("Ctrl + click" to add more files to the selection, or "Shift + click" to select a range of files). Then drag and drop them onto the page in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Photos are replaced one by one from the top of the page downwards.
InfoBar width or height fields. When you drop a photo on the page (assuming you're not replacing an existing photo), it's sized to be 500 pixels wide. But if you want this to be exactly 200 pixels wide, just enter 200px into the W size field of the Selector Tool . You can enter it in any unit, e.g., entering 2in will make it 2 inches wide.
Importing Large Photos When importing high resolution photos (anything above 1920 pixels either wide or high) into a web document, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically resizes the photo down to HD screen size without asking you if you want to import a lower resolution version.
The Photo Tool The Photo Tool provides a range of ways to enhance and crop any photo. To crop a photo, just drag across the photo while in the Enhance Photo Tool . You can adjust the crop edges by dragging on the crop handles around the outside of the photo. Or use the Clip Tool for more control over crops.
Photo Resolution Photo & Graphic Designer always stores the full resolution image (unless you chose to import reduced resolution images when asked during import, as mentioned above). This means you can resize or crop your image as required with no loss of quality. If you want to size a photo, or any object, to a specific size, just enter the required size into the Selector Tool InfoBar width or height fields.
Text You can edit the text by selecting the Text Tool and clicking on the text. You have all the usual word processing facilities, and can paste text from the system clipboard. Double click will select a word, triple click will select a whole line - which can be useful for selecting all the text in a button. As usual the InfoBar provides a wide range of controls for this tool. Alternatively you can right click within text and choose Advanced Text Properties .
Creating New Text Objects There are three types of text object - a single line of text, a column of text or a rectangular text area. To create a simple line of text, select the Text Tool and then you can click anywhere on the background and start typing. To create a column click and drag horizontally on the background, and then start typing. You can adjust the column width at any time. To create a text area, click and drag diagonally.
this will also mark all unrecognized words with a red dotted underline. Right click on any marked word to be presented with suggested alternatives. Embedded Fonts Photo & Graphic Designer stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your .web file, or transfer the file to another computer they will see exactly what you see, even if the correct fonts are not installed on that computer.
Font Size The font size field shows the font size in pixels in web documents and in points in print documents. You can enter any size in points by entering a value with pt (for point) after it, or pix for pixels. Creating New Text Objects There are three types of text object - a single line of text, a column of text or a rectangular text area. To create a simple line of text, select the Text Tool and then you can click anywhere on the background and start typing.
with the anchor point. Spell Checker On the Text Tool InfoBar is a button that selects the spell checker options and language. If you select Check Spelling as you type this will also mark all unrecognized words with a red dotted underline. Right click on any marked word to be presented with suggested alternatives. Embedded Fonts Photo & Graphic Designer stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your .
Creating New Text Objects There are three types of text object - a single line of text, a column of text or a rectangular text area. To create a simple line of text, select the Text Tool and then you can click anywhere on the background and start typing. To create a column click and drag horizontally on the background, and then start typing. You can adjust the column width at any time. To create a text area, click and drag diagonally.
options and language. If you select Check Spelling as you type this will also mark all unrecognized words with a red dotted underline. Right click on any marked word to be presented with suggested alternatives. Embedded Fonts Photo & Graphic Designer stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your .web file, or transfer the file to another computer they will see exactly what you see, even if the correct fonts are not installed on that computer.
Bulleted and numbered lists Use the bullet and numbered list buttons on the Text Tool info bar to quickly enter bulleted or numbered lists. You can right click on a numbered list and choose List properties… from the context menu to change the numbering scheme for your list. You can also use any graphic as the bullet or number in your list. See the Text Tool chapter for more information. Soft Shadows, Color Filled Text, Transparent Text You can apply any of these effects using the appropriate tools, e.g.
exactly what you see, even if the correct fonts are not installed on that computer. But this only embeds the characters that are used in the document (it's not a full font that is included). So on computers with the fonts missing, any text that is added in the missing fonts may be missing the correct character shapes. Text Tip: There are a lot of shortcuts available in the Text Tool. Refer to the reference section on keyboard shortcuts to see them all.
Soft Shadows, Color Filled Text, Transparent Text You can apply any of these effects using the appropriate tools, e.g., if you drag across some text in the Fill Tool it will give it a graduated color, or if you drag on it with the Shadow Tool it will give it a soft shadow. Text Repel Around Objects If you right click on an object like a photo and select the menu option 'Repel text under' ' you can make text flow around the object that is on top of the text.
Text Repel Around Objects If you right click on an object like a photo and select the menu option 'Repel text under' ' you can make text flow around the object that is on top of the text. Many of the objects, such as photos, side panels, buttons and headings used in the templates from the Designs Gallery are automatically repelling - the text will always flow around these objects as you drag them around.
Anchored Objects If you want a graphical object to appear next to a particular part of a block of text, you can anchor the object to the text so it moves with it. Right click the object and choose Anchor to text. Using the Selector Tool click and drag the anchor symbol that appears in the top left of the object to the location in the text where you would like the object anchored. Now if you edit or move the text, the anchored object moves with the anchor point.
Spell Checker On the Text Tool InfoBar is a button that selects the spell checker options and language. If you select Check Spelling as you type this will also mark all unrecognized words with a red dotted underline. Right click on any marked word to be presented with suggested alternatives. Embedded Fonts Photo & Graphic Designer stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your .
Embedded Fonts Photo & Graphic Designer stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your .web file, or transfer the file to another computer they will see exactly what you see, even if the correct fonts are not installed on that computer. But this only embeds the characters that are used in the document (it's not a full font that is included).
Page Size You can set any page size you like by selecting the Page size tab of the Options dialog (right click > "Page Options" or choose Page Options from the File menu). The dialog offers a range of commonly used page sizes in the drop-down list, some intended for web use and others for print use. Or Choose the custom option to enter any other page size. You can directly adjust the height and width of your page by just dragging on the bottom or right margin of the page.
Changing The Page Size of Templates You can change the vertical size of the pre-designed templates by just dragging on the bottom edge of the page. As you do this, footer objects will automatically stay with the bottom of the page and any background panels will stretch automatically also, so the page design is maintained for any page length.
Saving & Exporting Your Work. Use the Save or Save As menu options to save your work in progress. This saves a file with the .xar extension, which is the native file format for Photo & Graphic Designer. You are recommended to regularly save your work as you go along, particularly if you don't have the automatic backup facility turned on (see below). If you want to edit or update your document in future, you must save a .
Automatic Backups The Backups tab in the Utilities->Options dialog allows you to turn automatic backups on and off. When this is turned on, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will take regular backups of your open modified documents at times when you are not actively using the program. It's recommended that you work with this option turned on, so that you don't lose large amounts of work in the event of an unexpected interruption such as a power cut.
Groups You can group together any selection of objects on the page. Groups act much like a single object, in that you can drag them around the page, resize and rotate them as if they were one object. Many of the items in the template designs from the Designs Gallery such as buttons, text panels, and photo objects are grouped items. For example, you can draw a simple button from scratch by drawing a rectangle with the Rectangle tool, and then placing a text label on top of this with the Text tool.
Soft Groups There is another type of group, called a 'Soft Group', which is a more loosely connected set of objects. See the Object Handling chapter for details. Synchronized Text There is another useful feature of Soft Groups. If you have the same text on two or more objects within a Soft Group, the text will be synchronized when you edit it.
Synchronized Text There is another useful feature of Soft Groups. If you have the same text on two or more objects within a Soft Group, the text will be synchronized when you edit it.
Repeating Objects It's common to have items like navigation buttons, headers or logos repeating on all pages of your document or website. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides the ability to repeat any item in the same place on any of your web pages. When you update one of the copies, all changes are automatically replicated across all pages. See the Repeating Objects section of the Object Handling chapter for details.
Layers As mentioned earlier all objects have a stacking order on the page - from the backmost to the frontmost item. These objects are stacked over each other. In addition, all items can be placed into named layers. Each layer can have any number of objects, and has the ability to be turned on or off. When the layer is turned off all objects on that layer become invisible. The layers are controlled from the Pages & Layer Gallery on the Galleries bar to the right of the workspace.
Moving Objects Between Layers There are several ways to move objects between layers. First select the object or objects you want to move, then; Cut the object ("Ctrl + X" or right click and Cut). Ensure the target layer is the current layer (shown with , click the layer if it's not) and then right click and choose Paste or Paste in Place . Note that if you cut or copy multiple items that are on different layers, the layer structure is preserved when you paste.
Creating Buttons, Banners And Other Web Graphics Photo & Graphic Designer is great tool for creating any standalone web graphics for use with other programs or other web authoring tools. You can draw these objects from scratch using the drawing tools, or use ready made web clipart from the Designs Gallery. Just draw, design or import an item from the Designs Gallery onto a blank page.
Document handling In this chapter Starting a new document Opening an existing document Selected document and title bar Control bars InfoBar Main toolbar Rulers The status line The indicators X/Y co-ordinates Normal/full screen modes Opening a second window Changing the zoom value Sliding the document within the window Changing the page size Multi-page Documents Saving the document Support folders Closing the document Automatic Backups On-screen grid Rulers Measurement units Decimal point & thousands separat
Starting a new document Choose File -> New This opens a sub menu with several pre-defined but blank template documents to start from. You'll find a range of blank templates under the File->New menu for creating them. Primarily, there are three different types of documents in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Icon Document type Menu option Use for..
When your new document opens, its tab is added to the top of the workspace with an icon showing which type of document it is, as shown in the example below. You can save your own templates with the "File" > "Save Template" command ? see Changing the template document for details.
Opening an existing document To open an existing document: Drag & drop a file. Select the file in Windows Explorer or on your desktop, and drag it over an existing open document to import it into that document, or any other part of the Photo & Graphic Designer window to open the document. Or double click a Photo & Graphic Designer file. Or to open a recently used file, select it from "File" > "Open recent" Or select "File" > "Open" (shortcut "Ctrl + O").
Main toolbar This is a control bar that initially contains all the tools available in Photo & Graphic Designer (see left). You can customize the toolbar, or move tools to other control bars. Some of the toolbar icons have a small triangle indicator in the bottom right corner. This indicates that there is a flyout bar containing more tool icons. Hold your mouse pointer over the icon to see the flyout bar appear.
Selected document and title bar You can have more than one file open at a time in Photo & Graphic Designer, which displays all open documents as tabs at the top of the workspace. The current document is displayed in the workspace and its name is highlighted gray in the document tabs. The current document type is indicated in the top left corner of the Photo & Graphic Designer window, next to the menu options. The current document receives all input.
This is a control bar that initially contains all the tools available in Photo & Graphic Designer (see left). You can customize the toolbar, or move tools to other control bars. Some of the toolbar icons have a small triangle indicator in the bottom right corner. This indicates that there is a flyout bar containing more tool icons. Hold your mouse pointer over the icon to see the flyout bar appear. You can then move the mouse pointer over each icon in the bar to see a tooltip indicating what each one does.
Control bars These contain buttons that you can use to operate Photo & Graphic Designer. You can customize control bars in several ways, such as re-ordering, creating, and hiding bars. The default window shows the standard button bar with commonly used buttons: You can customize the standard control bar in the same way as other control bars. Those icons with a triangle indicator in the bottom right corner have "fly-out bars" on them.
. Page 131
InfoBar This is a special control bar. Its contents change when you select different tools. InfoBars specific to certain tools are described in their relevant chapters. You cannot customize the InfoBar. The InfoBar for the Selector Tool Main toolbar This is a control bar that initially contains all the tools available in Photo & Graphic Designer (see left). You can customize the toolbar, or move tools to other control bars.
Main toolbar This is a control bar that initially contains all the tools available in Photo & Graphic Designer (see left). You can customize the toolbar, or move tools to other control bars. Some of the toolbar icons have a small triangle indicator in the bottom right corner. This indicates that there is a flyout bar containing more tool icons. Hold your mouse pointer over the icon to see the flyout bar appear.
Rulers You can hide the rulers, change their zero point (origin), and use them to create guidelines. For more information, see Rulers .
The status line Selected objects Available options Indicators Mouse pointer X-Y This appears at the bottom of the window. The status line tells you about the selected objects, available options, live drag/snapping indicators, and the X/Y position of the pointer. The indicators These appear on the right of the status line: Live drag indicator This indicator shows whether live drag is active or not (it is active by default). Double click the indicator to toggle live drag on/off.
The indicators These appear on the right of the status line: Live drag indicator This indicator shows whether live drag is active or not (it is active by default). Double click the indicator to toggle live drag on/off. When active, if you reposition, resize, or rotate an object, the whole object moves (not just an outline), making it far easier to judge the effect of your edits in real time. Drawing in the Freehand, Straight Line, Quickshape, Rectangle and Ellipse Tools is also live with this option on.
X/Y co-ordinates Photo & Graphic Designer shows measurements relative to the bottom left corner of the page area or spread. However, this is configurable. For more information refer to "Object Handling ".
Normal/full screen modes In normal screen mode part of the window is occupied by the title bar, menu bar, and scroll bars. This can be inconvenient if you want the maximum possible editing area. Photo & Graphic Designer has a second screen mode, fullscreen, which displays a more streamlined screen. You can configure each screen mode as you wish. For example, each can have its own configuration of the control bars. The configuration is remembered and applies whenever you swap between screen modes.
Opening a second window You may want to open a second window onto the same document to: Get an enlarged or reduced view of the document; Show another part of the document; Have two views of the same area at different quality settings (quality settings are described later.) Choose "Window" > "New View" to open another window. You can have several windows open on the same document. Selecting which window to display Each window that you have currently open is displayed as a tab below the infobar.
Selecting which window to display Each window that you have currently open is displayed as a tab below the infobar. Click on a tab to display the window or click on the Window menu and choose a window name at the bottom. Ordering multiple windows "Window -> Arrange views" and "Window -> Cascade" help you organize multiple windows. Each window has its own title bar but no control bars. Click on a window to make it the current window. Pressing "Ctrl + Shift + F6" steps through the windows in sequence.
Ordering multiple windows "Window -> Arrange views" and "Window -> Cascade" help you organize multiple windows. Each window has its own title bar but no control bars. Click on a window to make it the current window. Pressing "Ctrl + Shift + F6" steps through the windows in sequence. Arrange views displays the windows arranged vertically or, for more than three windows, as tiles. Cascade displays the windows staggered behind each other.
Minimizing multiple windows Minimizing one of several windows displays an icon on the background of the main Photo & Graphic Designer window. Double click the icon to reopen the window. Minimizing and then reopening several windows can scatter icons on the background. "Window -> Arrange" icons tidies up scattered icons.
Changing the zoom value It's often useful to enlarge your view of the document to examine details or reduce your view to get an overall impression. Scalings above 100% show an enlarged view (similar to looking through a magnifying glass); below 100% a reduced view. The only change is your view of the document; the size of the document itself and the objects in it are unchanged (changing the document size is described later). To change the zoom value you can use either the Zoom Tool , mouse, or control bars.
zoom values are retained. Shortcut "1" Click the Zoom to 100% button. The zoom factor is changed to 100%. Shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + J". Click the Zoom to drawing button. The window shows all the objects in the document. Shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + P". Click the Zoom to Page button. The window shows the entire page or pair of pages. Shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + Z". Click the Zoom to Selection button. The selected object or objects fill the window. Type a value into the text box.
Using the Zoom tool To zoom: Select the Zoom Tool from the Main Toolbar. Or press "Alt + Z" to toggle between the current tool and the Zoom Tool. Or press and hold down "Alt + Z" to temporarily swap to the Zoom Tool (release "Alt + Z" to return to the previous tool). Or press "Shift + F7" to select the Zoom Tool. Changing the zoom value using the mouse If you have a mouse wheel: Hold "Ctrl" and scroll your mouse wheel to change the zoom level.
Type a value into the text box. Press " ¿" to implement the change, or select preset zoom values including those above (page, drawing, selected, previous) in the drop-down menu.
Changing the zoom value using the mouse If you have a mouse wheel: Hold "Ctrl" and scroll your mouse wheel to change the zoom level. You can also configure a mouse button to zoom in or out. Furthermore, you can change the mouse wheel action between scrolling and zooming in "Utilities" > "Options" > "Mouse tab" or right click and choose "Page Options" > "Mouse" tab. The opposite action is available then by pressing "Ctrl". Alternatively, select the Zoom Tool , and Click to zoom in (enlarge).
Changing the zoom using the zoom InfoBar/control bar There is a flyout bar on the standard toolbar which gives you quick access to zoom functions, without having to go into the Zoom Tool. There is also a flyout bar on the Zoom Tool icon on the main toolbar. Hold the mouse pointer over the zoom icon on the standard toolbar to see the flyout bar. To change the zoom: Shortcut "Ctrl + R". Click the Previous zoom button. This is the zoom value before the current setting.
Sliding the document within the window The quickest and easiest way to move around the document is to use the middle mouse button (normally the mouse wheel) if you have one. Click and hold the middle button down and then move the mouse. Release the button to return to your previous tool. To move the document within the window you can also: Use the scroll bars and arrows at the side of the window.
Changing the page size You can change the size of the current page to a standard size: 1. Right click the page and choose Page options -> Page Size tab or choose "Utility -> Options". 2. Choose the required paper size. "Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer " has full details of the options dialog box. Paper size You can either choose the Custom option from the paper size list and then enter the width and height, or choose a standard size.
Bleed Part of your drawing may continue over the edge of the page: You only want to print the area on the page: If the document is to be printed by a commercial printer, you must allow for mechanical tolerances of the printing machinery. You do this by allowing a bleed around your document. Everything in the bleed is printed, but is trimmed off after printing. Traditionally bleeds are 0.5cm. If in doubt, ask your printing company.
Paper size You can either choose the Custom option from the paper size list and then enter the width and height, or choose a standard size. Or you can go into the Selector Tool and drag on the bottom edge or right edge of the page to change the page height or width respectively. Position the mouse pointer over the edge of the page ? you will see the mouse pointer change when you are in the right position, then click and drag. The current page size is shown in the status bar as you drag.
Orientation Portrait orientation displays the longest sides vertically. Landscape orientation displays the longest sides horizontally. If you entered a custom page size, landscape turns the page sideways. Outer margin This lets you set the width of the pasteboard around the page or spread.
Outer margin This lets you set the width of the pasteboard around the page or spread. Bleed Part of your drawing may continue over the edge of the page: You only want to print the area on the page: If the document is to be printed by a commercial printer, you must allow for mechanical tolerances of the printing machinery. You do this by allowing a bleed around your document. Everything in the bleed is printed, but is trimmed off after printing. Traditionally bleeds are 0.5cm.
Bleed Part of your drawing may continue over the edge of the page: You only want to print the area on the page: If the document is to be printed by a commercial printer, you must allow for mechanical tolerances of the printing machinery. You do this by allowing a bleed around your document. Everything in the bleed is printed, but is trimmed off after printing. Traditionally bleeds are 0.5cm. If in doubt, ask your printing company.
Double page spread Your illustration may run across two facing pages in a multi-page publication. This is called a "double-page spread".
Multi-page Documents Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports multi-page documents to make DTP and website building projects simple. You can easily create documents that are comprised of many pages, for example newsletters, PDF eBooks, brochures, small magazines or even complete HTML websites. When working on a website document, each page in the Photo & Graphic Designer document is exported as one page of the website.
To copy the current page, clear any current selection by pressing Esc or by clicking on an empty part of the page or pasteboard. The status line says "No objects selected". Right click an empty part of a page and choose Copy Page (or press "Ctrl + C"). When you paste a copied page, it is added immediately following the current page. To paste use "Ctrl + V" or right click the page and choose Paste > Page from the context menu.
The current page If you click a page in a multi-page document it will become the current page. The current page is relevant when inserting, duplicating, or moving pages as described in the following sections. The current page in the document is shown by indicators on the page's corners. Inserting pages into your document Right click a page and choose New Page or New double page spread . A new blank page is inserted after the page.
To insert a new page into your document using a pre-designed template, open the Designs Gallery , drag your chosen page template thumbnail, and drop it onto your document. The new page is added immediately following the page that you drop on. Duplicate a page To create a copy of the current page after the page, right click the page and choose "Duplicate current page" .
Inserting pages into your document Right click a page and choose New Page or New double page spread . A new blank page is inserted after the page. or Right click a page and choose Duplicate current page or Duplicate current double page spread . A duplicate of the current page is inserted after the page. The new page will be the same as the original page, including its size and orientation, and will include all its content so that you can use it as a template for new content.
To create a copy of the current page after the page, right click the page and choose "Duplicate current page" . You can also use this toolbar button: The new page will be the same as the original page, including its size and orientation, and will include all its content so that you can use it as a template for new content. You can also duplicate a page using the Page & Layer Gallery. Select the page in the Page & Layer Gallery and click the Duplicate button. The new page is added after the current page.
Copying and pasting pages You can copy and paste whole pages in the current document or paste pages to another document. This copies the page dimensions, layers and other page attributes in addition to all the objects on the page. To copy the current page, clear any current selection by pressing Esc or by clicking on an empty part of the page or pasteboard. The status line says "No objects selected". Right click an empty part of a page and choose Copy Page (or press "Ctrl + C").
New page from template To insert a new page into your document using a pre-designed template, open the Designs Gallery , drag your chosen page template thumbnail, and drop it onto your document. The new page is added immediately following the page that you drop on. Duplicate a page To create a copy of the current page after the page, right click the page and choose "Duplicate current page" .
Duplicate a page To create a copy of the current page after the page, right click the page and choose "Duplicate current page" . You can also use this toolbar button: The new page will be the same as the original page, including its size and orientation, and will include all its content so that you can use it as a template for new content. You can also duplicate a page using the Page & Layer Gallery. Select the page in the Page & Layer Gallery and click the Duplicate button.
Moving pages within the document If you wish to change the order of pages in your document you can do so. Right click a page and choose "Move page/double page spread up" or "Move page/double page spread down" . You can also change the order of pages in the Page & Layer Gallery . Click the Pages button in the Pages & Layer Gallery so it shows a simple list of pages. Then you can drag and drop pages up and down in the gallery to change the page order.
Removing pages from your document To delete the current page from your document right click and choose "Delete current page/double page spread" . Or to cut the current page, right click an empty part of the page and choose Cut Page . Or select the page in the Pages & Layer Gallery and click the Delete button. The current page and all its content will be deleted. In the case of a spread, the entire spread will be deleted along with its content.
export. Eg. index.htm, index_2.htm, index_3.htm, etc. Using page names makes it easier to identify each page. You can set the name of the current page using the Page tab of the Utilities->Web Properties dialog. Set the "Page filename" field. Or you can use the Page & Layer Gallery . Click on a page name to select it, then click again to start editing the page name. Note that page names are forced to lower case and some characters are disallowed.
The result of converting a double page spread document to individual pages, and then back again. Note: it is possible for objects to overlap the pages of a spread (i.e. on pages 1 and 2 in the illustration above) but not over separate pages or spreads (i.e. 1 and 3; if you did want to do this, you would need to copy the object from page1 and paste it on to page 3 so that it appears there as well).
Navigating between pages As well as the usual methods of moving through your document (such as scrollbars and the mouse wheel), there are also some other ways to navigate through the pages using the set of keys to the right of your keyboard: Page up: Moves up the document. The amount moved depends on your zoom level. The further you are zoomed out the bigger the move. Ctrl + Page up: Go to and center on the previous page. Page down: Moves down the document. The amount moved depends on your zoom level.
Double page spreads in multi-page documents Your illustration may run across two facing pages. This is called a double-page spread. Single Double page You can have single pages or double-page spreads in your multi-page document, as illustrated above, but only one or the other within a document. To switch between single or double-page spreads, right click the page and choose "Page options", and then check or uncheck the "Double-page spread" option.
Page & Layer Gallery You can also use the Page & Layer Gallery to conveniently manage the pages in your document. It allows you to view, add, duplicate, delete, re-order and rename pages all from a single view. For more information see Page & Layer Gallery .
Pages with different sizes and layers You can choose whether the pages in your document should be all the same size or not, and whether or not all pages should have the same layers. See the Document section on the Page Size tab of the Utilities->Options dialog or right click a page and choose "Page options" . Naming pages When creating website documents it is important to give each page a name, which is then used to name the HTML file which is exported for each page.
The result of converting a double page spread document to individual pages, and then back again. Note: it is possible for objects to overlap the pages of a spread (i.e. on pages 1 and 2 in the illustration above) but not over separate pages or spreads (i.e. 1 and 3; if you did want to do this, you would need to copy the object from page1 and paste it on to page 3 so that it appears there as well).
Naming pages When creating website documents it is important to give each page a name, which is then used to name the HTML file which is exported for each page. If pages are not named the exported filenames will be distinguished from each other only by an index number appended to the filename provided at the time of export. Eg. index.htm, index_2.htm, index_3.htm, etc. Using page names makes it easier to identify each page.
The result of converting a double page spread document to individual pages, and then back again. Note: it is possible for objects to overlap the pages of a spread (i.e. on pages 1 and 2 in the illustration above) but not over separate pages or spreads (i.e. 1 and 3; if you did want to do this, you would need to copy the object from page1 and paste it on to page 3 so that it appears there as well).
Double page spreads in multi-page documents Your illustration may run across two facing pages. This is called a double-page spread. Single Double page You can have single pages or double-page spreads in your multi-page document, as illustrated above, but only one or the other within a document. To switch between single or double-page spreads, right click the page and choose "Page options", and then check or uncheck the "Double-page spread" option.
Page & Layer Gallery You can also use the Page & Layer Gallery to conveniently manage the pages in your document. It allows you to view, add, duplicate, delete, re-order and rename pages all from a single view. For more information see Page & Layer Gallery .
Page & Layer Gallery You can also use the Page & Layer Gallery to conveniently manage the pages in your document. It allows you to view, add, duplicate, delete, re-order and rename pages all from a single view. For more information see Page & Layer Gallery .
Saving the document This section covers saving in Photo & Graphic Designer's own format (native format). Refer to Importing and Exporting for details of exporting in other formats. We recommend that you always save documents regularly. A complicated document may represent many hours of work and power failures or computer crashes always happen at just the wrong moment. Make sure you have the automatic backup facility turned on, so that regular backups are taken of your open documents as you work.
Save option (on the File menu) ("Ctrl + S", or click the Save button on the standard control bar.) This provides a quick way to save a document using the same file name. The option is disabled unless the document has unsaved changes, i.e. you have made changes, but haven't saved them to disk. For a new document that has not been saved to disk, this option acts like "Save as" (described below).
Save as (on the File menu) This opens a dialog box letting you save the document under a different name or to a different directory. This option is useful for making backups of Photo & Graphic Designer documents. Save all (on the File menu) This acts like a series of Save or Save As commands to save all currently open files.
Save all (on the File menu) This acts like a series of Save or Save As commands to save all currently open files.
Support folders Some documents which are used to create websites need to reference external files which cannot be embedded in the .xar design file. For example you may have a Flash (.swf) file which is used on your website and so you'll want to keep that file with the design file because you can't export a fully working website from the design file without also having the Flash file.
Support folder naming The design file and its corresponding support folder are tied together by their names. The support folder for "mySite.xar" is always "mySite_xar_files". This naming convention makes it obvious which support folder belongs to which design file. So if you rename, copy or move a design file, always remember to do the same to the corresponding support folder, if it exists! And if you send a design file to someone else, send any support files folder along with it.
Support folder contents When you use the Placeholder Tab of the Web Properties dialog to insert a reference to an external file into your website design (using the Browse buttons), Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will automatically copy that file into the design's support folder for you. If the support folder doesn't already exist, it will be created.
Exporting websites with support folders When you export a website document, any files in the corresponding support folder are copied to the folder which contains all the generated images for your website. So if you export "mySite.xar" to "index.htm", then any files in folder "mySite_xar_files" are copied into the "index_htm_files folder".
Closing the document To close the document: Choose "File" > "Close". Or press "Ctrl + F4", or "Ctrl + W". Or click the smaller, lower X of the two in the top right hand corner.
Automatic Backups Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will optionally save regular backup copies of your open documents while you work. To turn automatic backups on or off, open the "Utilities" > "Options" dialog and choose the Backups tab. Backup open documents To turn backups on select this checkbox and choose how often you would like backups to be taken.
Warning : Note that if you have multiple documents that share the same filename in different folders on your computer, their backups will also share the same names in the backups folder. Therefore try and use unique filenames for your designs to avoid the backups of one design overwriting another with the same name. Untitled documents Documents that you have created and not saved are backed up using the name "Untitled" followed by a number and the date/time.
decide to keep a backup document you should use "File" > "Save As" to save it elsewhere with a suitable name.
Backup open documents To turn backups on select this checkbox and choose how often you would like backups to be taken. The suggested period is 10 mins, which means each open document will be backed up if it's more than 10 mins since the last backup of that document was taken (or since the document was created or opened). Note that once the configured period since the last backup has expired, the next backup is only saved when the program has been idle for at least 15 secs.
The Backups tab in the Options dialog also allows you to turn on automatic backup and restore . When this option is on, when the you close Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 you will not be prompted to save any modified documents that you have open. Instead all open documents are backed up to the backups folder and the program closes. Then when you next start the program, the same documents are automatically reloaded so that you can continue working where you left off.
Backup location User the Browse button if you want to change the folder where your backups are stored. You can access the backup documents saved here at any time using the "File" > "Open recent" > " Backups" menu option. This opens a file dialog onto your backup folder so that you can browse, open, or delete any of your backup files. Revisions By default up to 10 revisions of each design are kept in your backups folder, but you can choose to change this number in the revisions field.
Backups on system shut down If you shut down Windows without first closing the program, all open documents are backed up to the backup folder even if 'Backup open documents on program close' is not turned on. This allows system shutdown to proceed without Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 interrupting it by prompting you about unsaved or modified documents. On next program startup you'll be asked whether or not you want to restore the documents that were open at the time of the system shut down.
Revisions By default up to 10 revisions of each design are kept in your backups folder, but you can choose to change this number in the revisions field. Older revisions in excess of the number chosen are deleted automatically. Each backup file is named using the name of the document from which it is taken, suffixed by the date and time at which the backup was taken.
Recovering backups You can access your document backups using the "File" > "Open recent" > "Backups" menu option. This opens a file dialog onto your backup folder so that you can browse, open, or delete any of your backup files. It's a good idea to use this file dialog to clear out any old unwanted backups periodically. Note that when you load a backup document, it is not automatically associated with the design file from which the backup was taken. It's treated as an independent document in its own right.
Untitled documents Documents that you have created and not saved are backed up using the name "Untitled" followed by a number and the date/time. This name and number corresponds to those shown in the titlebar when you are editing new unsaved documents. Warning : Since all new unsaved documents are named Untitled1, Untitled2, etc. backups of these documents are likely to be overwritten relatively quickly.
Backup open documents on program close The Backups tab in the Options dialog also allows you to turn on automatic backup and restore . When this option is on, when the you close Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 you will not be prompted to save any modified documents that you have open. Instead all open documents are backed up to the backups folder and the program closes. Then when you next start the program, the same documents are automatically reloaded so that you can continue working where you left off.
Recovering from abnormal program closures If you have automatic backups turned on and the program closes abnormally (perhaps due to a power failure for example) the program should detect this when it is next restarted. It will then offer you the chance to restore the most recent backup version of each document that was open at the time of the last backup. Abnormal closure will not be detected if no automatic backup completed since the last normal program closure.
Backups on system shut down If you shut down Windows without first closing the program, all open documents are backed up to the backup folder even if 'Backup open documents on program close' is not turned on. This allows system shutdown to proceed without Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 interrupting it by prompting you about unsaved or modified documents. On next program startup you'll be asked whether or not you want to restore the documents that were open at the time of the system shut down.
Recovering backups You can access your document backups using the "File" > "Open recent" > "Backups" menu option. This opens a file dialog onto your backup folder so that you can browse, open, or delete any of your backup files. It's a good idea to use this file dialog to clear out any old unwanted backups periodically. Note that when you load a backup document, it is not automatically associated with the design file from which the backup was taken. It's treated as an independent document in its own right.
On-screen grid To help you lay out your document, Photo & Graphic Designer can display a grid on the screen (the grid appears only on the screen; it is never exported or printed.) The grid helps you align objects (similar to using graph paper as a drawing aid). Right click and choose "Show Grid/Guides" > "Show Grid" to turn display of the grid on/off or choose "Snap to" > "Snap to Grid". You can also choose "Window" > "Snap to Grid" .
Rulers Rulers are turned off by default. To turn them on: Right click and choose "Show Grid/Guides" > "Show Rulers" to turn display of the grid on/off. Press "Ctrl + Shift + R". Or select "Window" > "Bars" > "Show Rulers". Photo & Graphic Designer uses rulers to: Control text margins, tabs and indents in the Text Tool. Let you know which part of the page you are viewing; Show the current pointer X/Y position; Apply guidelines.
Displaying/hiding rulers Right click and choose "Show Grid/Guides" > "Show Rulers" ("Ctrl + Shift + R") to turn rulers on/off. Any change applies to the current window and subsequent windows you open. It does not affect other open windows. Changing the ruler zero points It is often easier to measure objects if you align the origin (0,0) point of the rulers with the object. To move the origin (0,0) point, drag the square at the intersection of the two rulers.
Changing the ruler zero points It is often easier to measure objects if you align the origin (0,0) point of the rulers with the object. To move the origin (0,0) point, drag the square at the intersection of the two rulers. You can drag vertically or horizontally along the rulers or over any part of the Photo & Graphic Designer editing window. As you do, a dotted line will outline the new position. This also moves the grid origin so that divisions on the ruler always align with the grid.
Measurement units You can define the units in which to display measurements. The default display units are: points (1/72 of an inch) for text and line widths; centimeters for most measurements. You can enter dimensions in the other units by using a suffix or prefix (dependent on the unit type). For example, 2.5in for 2.5 inches. You can enter dimensions using two units. For example, 2pi 4pt for a dimension of 2 picas, 4 points.
For units that do not relate to distance (for example US$), type in an appropriate scaling factor. For example, 10US$ as equivalent to 10 millimeters. Deleting a unit You can only delete a unit you have created, not a standard unit. Display the Options dialog box. If necessary, click the Units tab. 1. Choose the unit you want to delete from the Unit Definition list. 2. Click Delete Unit. Applying a scaling factor For example, you may want to specify dimensions in kilometers when drawing a map.
Millipoints A millipoint is 1/1,000th of a point (1/72,000th of an inch). All Photo & Graphic Designer measurements are stored internally in millipoints and then converted to the appropriate units when displayed. Dimensions other than millipoints are rounded if necessary. If you want to work in exact units without rounding, display measurements in millipoints. "Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer " has full details of the options dialog box.
1. Choose the unit you want to delete from the Unit Definition list. 2. Click Delete Unit. Applying a scaling factor For example, you may want to specify dimensions in kilometers when drawing a map. You can apply a 1:10,000 scaling factor to kilometers. A line 10cm long on the map is reported as a dimension of 1km. 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Select Use scale factor. 3. Type in the appropriate scaling. For example, 10cm to 1km.
Options dialog box Measurement units for the selected document are controlled by the Options dialog. Choose "Utilities -> Options" or right click a page and choose "Page Options -> Units". Changing the default display units Display the options dialog box. If necessary, click the units tab. Font units are used for text sizes. Page units are used for other measurements. Creating a new unit You may want to specify measurements in units not provided as standard.
1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Select Use scale factor. 3. Type in the appropriate scaling. For example, 10cm to 1km. Alternatively, type 1 into the drawing field and 10,000 into the real-world field. Deleting a scaling factor This is similar to applying scaling: 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Deselect "Use scale factor". 3. Click "OK".
Changing the default display units Display the options dialog box. If necessary, click the units tab. Font units are used for text sizes. Page units are used for other measurements. Creating a new unit You may want to specify measurements in units not provided as standard. For example, racecourses are measured in furlongs (220 yards). Or a financial diagram may use US$. Display the Options dialog box. If necessary, click the Units tab. 1. Click New unit. The unit properties window will appear: 2.
1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Select Use scale factor. 3. Type in the appropriate scaling. For example, 10cm to 1km. Alternatively, type 1 into the drawing field and 10,000 into the real-world field. Deleting a scaling factor This is similar to applying scaling: 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Deselect "Use scale factor". 3. Click "OK".
Creating a new unit You may want to specify measurements in units not provided as standard. For example, racecourses are measured in furlongs (220 yards). Or a financial diagram may use US$. Display the Options dialog box. If necessary, click the Units tab. 1. Click New unit. The unit properties window will appear: 2. Type in the unit name (e.g. US dollars). This name appears in menus. 3. Type in the Abbreviation ($). This is used when entering or displaying the units. 4. Select Prefix ($ 12.
This is similar to applying scaling: 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Deselect "Use scale factor". 3. Click "OK".
Deleting a unit You can only delete a unit you have created, not a standard unit. Display the Options dialog box. If necessary, click the Units tab. 1. Choose the unit you want to delete from the Unit Definition list. 2. Click Delete Unit. Applying a scaling factor For example, you may want to specify dimensions in kilometers when drawing a map. You can apply a 1:10,000 scaling factor to kilometers. A line 10cm long on the map is reported as a dimension of 1km. 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options".
Applying a scaling factor For example, you may want to specify dimensions in kilometers when drawing a map. You can apply a 1:10,000 scaling factor to kilometers. A line 10cm long on the map is reported as a dimension of 1km. 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Select Use scale factor. 3. Type in the appropriate scaling. For example, 10cm to 1km. Alternatively, type 1 into the drawing field and 10,000 into the real-world field.
Deleting a scaling factor This is similar to applying scaling: 1. Choose "Utilities -> Options". If necessary, click the Scaling tab. 2. Deselect "Use scale factor". 3. Click "OK".
Decimal point & thousands separator characters The characters used as a decimal point (1.23) and as a thousands separator (1,000) are those set in the Windows Control Panel. (In Windows XP, the relevant section is the "Regional and Language options".) Similarly, the number of digits following the decimal point is also set in "Regional and Language options".
View quality slider This slider (on the Standard control bar) affects how the document appears on the screen. It has no effect on the actual document or on printing. There are 5 different quality settings: Outline only . This is now fully anti-aliased for higher quality screen display. Outline with blend steps. Full color (no anti-aliasing). High quality (full anti-aliasing and image smoothing) Very high quality Bi-cubic photo display considerably improves the quality of scaled down photos.
The constrain key The "Ctrl" key has a special function in Photo & Graphic Designer. It constrains the action of the current operation in some way. For example, normally you can rotate an object to any angle. But in Photo & Graphic Designer,if you hold down "Ctrl" while you rotate an object, the rotation is constrained to a subset of the possible angles.
Galleries Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 uses galleries to provide convenient access to external libraries of content like templates, fonts, colors, clip-art, line attributes, and bitmaps/photos. This section of the manual gives general information on features which are common to multiple galleries. Individual sections of this manual describe features specific to a particular gallery.
Moving and docking a gallery You can 'detach' any gallery from the gallery bar and move it to a more convenient location anywhere in the workspace. You can also dock the gallery (or a gallery group, see Grouping Galleries) in the top, bottom, left or right of the workspace. You can move a gallery anywhere in the workspace To move a gallery: 1. Open a gallery and click the Auto Hide button to pin the gallery.
Dragging a gallery causes docking arrows to appear in the center, top, bottom, left and right of the workspace. Dock the gallery by dragging it to an arrow. Example of a gallery that has been docked to the left of the workspace To dock a gallery: 1. Click and drag the gallery to the arrow pointing towards the location where you want to place the gallery. For example, if you want the gallery at the top of the screen, move it to the upward pointing arrow at the top of the workspace. 2.
Note: To move all galleries back to their default position, choose Control Bars from the Window menu, click Galleries then Reset . Using galleries To fold or unfold a section in a gallery: Click the Fold/Unfold icon. Or double click the title strip. Or right click a section to display a pop-up menu. Select Fold/Unfold section. The pop-up menu also has options to scroll to the previous section or next section. This illustration shows the gallery is unfolded. Other galleries are similar.
Selecting items To select an item: Click an item to select it. Or click an item, then "Shift + click" on another item; all items in between the two points will be selected. Or "Ctrl + click" to add that item to the selection. Re-ordering items in the gallery In some galleries, "More" > "Sort" opens a dialog box. You can sort by name and, depending on the gallery, by other criteria. The primary key controls the initial sort.
2. Click "Remove". If you later want the section again, add its folder to the gallery (described earlier). Moving content from previous versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Sometimes when Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is updated from one version to another, some content is dropped from the Designs Gallery to make space for new content.
Displaying a gallery To display a gallery: 1. Click or hover the mouse pointer over the vertical tab for the gallery to the right of the workspace (the gallery bar). The gallery opens automatically. When you move the mouse pointer away from the gallery, it automatically closes. 2. To keep a gallery open while you work, click the Auto Hide (pin) button in its top right corner. The Auto Hide button changes so the pin points downwards to indicate that the gallery is now 'pinned' to the workspace. 3.
the group. Bitmap Line Fill Font Color Name When you click and drag on a dockable gallery's title bar, a number of arrows appear on the workspace, indicating where you can dock the gallery. Dragging a gallery causes docking arrows to appear in the center, top, bottom, left and right of the workspace. Dock the gallery by dragging it to an arrow.
To dock a gallery: 1. Click and drag the gallery to the arrow pointing towards the location where you want to place the gallery. For example, if you want the gallery at the top of the screen, move it to the upward pointing arrow at the top of the workspace. 2. When the mouse pointer reaches the arrow, a gray transparent box highlights the gallery's new location. 3. Let go of the mouse button to dock the gallery. Now when you close or 'auto hide' the gallery, its tab will be displayed in the new location. 4.
applies the selected item in the gallery. Click on an item to select it. More opens a menu where you can then choose: Find is described later in searching for an item name. Sort is described later in re-ordering items in a gallery. Properties provides control over size of the icons and amount of information displayed in the gallery. Add (clipart, fill, and fonts galleries) is described later in adding to a gallery.
2. In the gallery, click "Disc Designs/Fills/Fonts". This opens a dialog box. 3. Use the dialog box to select the folder you want to add. 4. Click "Update" to update the section in the gallery. Deleting sections from a gallery To delete a section from a gallery (Clipart, Fill & Fonts galleries only): 1. Click on the title strip of the section or sections you want to delete. 2. Click "Remove". If you later want the section again, add its folder to the gallery (described earlier).
Moving and docking a gallery You can 'detach' any gallery from the gallery bar and move it to a more convenient location anywhere in the workspace. You can also dock the gallery (or a gallery group, see Grouping Galleries) in the top, bottom, left or right of the workspace. You can move a gallery anywhere in the workspace To move a gallery: 1. Open a gallery and click the Auto Hide button to pin the gallery.
Dragging a gallery causes docking arrows to appear in the center, top, bottom, left and right of the workspace. Dock the gallery by dragging it to an arrow. Example of a gallery that has been docked to the left of the workspace To dock a gallery: 1. Click and drag the gallery to the arrow pointing towards the location where you want to place the gallery. For example, if you want the gallery at the top of the screen, move it to the upward pointing arrow at the top of the workspace. 2.
Note: To move all galleries back to their default position, choose Control Bars from the Window menu, click Galleries then Reset . Using galleries To fold or unfold a section in a gallery: Click the Fold/Unfold icon. Or double click the title strip. Or right click a section to display a pop-up menu. Select Fold/Unfold section. The pop-up menu also has options to scroll to the previous section or next section. This illustration shows the gallery is unfolded. Other galleries are similar.
Selecting items To select an item: Click an item to select it. Or click an item, then "Shift + click" on another item; all items in between the two points will be selected. Or "Ctrl + click" to add that item to the selection. Re-ordering items in the gallery In some galleries, "More" > "Sort" opens a dialog box. You can sort by name and, depending on the gallery, by other criteria. The primary key controls the initial sort.
2. Click "Remove". If you later want the section again, add its folder to the gallery (described earlier). Moving content from previous versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Sometimes when Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is updated from one version to another, some content is dropped from the Designs Gallery to make space for new content.
Using galleries To fold or unfold a section in a gallery: Click the Fold/Unfold icon. Or double click the title strip. Or right click a section to display a pop-up menu. Select Fold/Unfold section. The pop-up menu also has options to scroll to the previous section or next section. This illustration shows the gallery is unfolded. Other galleries are similar. The buttons along the top depend on the gallery (e.g. Fill and Transp are specific to the Bitmap Gallery .
To select an item: Click an item to select it. Or click an item, then "Shift + click" on another item; all items in between the two points will be selected. Or "Ctrl + click" to add that item to the selection. Re-ordering items in the gallery In some galleries, "More" > "Sort" opens a dialog box. You can sort by name and, depending on the gallery, by other criteria. The primary key controls the initial sort.
Moving content from previous versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Sometimes when Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is updated from one version to another, some content is dropped from the Designs Gallery to make space for new content. If you discover that some content you liked and used is missing from the latest version of the program, you can import it from an installation of an earlier version. Designs Gallery content is installed into the "Clipart" folder of the main program folder. Eg. C:\Pr
Selecting items To select an item: Click an item to select it. Or click an item, then "Shift + click" on another item; all items in between the two points will be selected. Or "Ctrl + click" to add that item to the selection. Re-ordering items in the gallery In some galleries, "More" > "Sort" opens a dialog box. You can sort by name and, depending on the gallery, by other criteria. The primary key controls the initial sort.
2. Click "Remove". If you later want the section again, add its folder to the gallery (described earlier). Moving content from previous versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Sometimes when Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is updated from one version to another, some content is dropped from the Designs Gallery to make space for new content.
Re-ordering items in the gallery In some galleries, "More" > "Sort" opens a dialog box. You can sort by name and, depending on the gallery, by other criteria. The primary key controls the initial sort. For some sort parameters such as file type or name length, there may be two or more files with the same type or name length. These files can be further sorted using the secondary key. Searching for an item name You can search, for example, for all names containing the word red: 1. Choose "More" > "Find". 2.
content you liked and used is missing from the latest version of the program, you can import it from an installation of an earlier version. Designs Gallery content is installed into the "Clipart" folder of the main program folder. Eg. C:\Program Files\Xara\Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013\Clipart\ The sub-folder names inside the Clipart folder loosely correspond to the names of the categories as they appear in the Designs Gallery.
Searching for an item name You can search, for example, for all names containing the word red: 1. Choose "More" > "Find". 2. Type "red" into the text box. 3. Select "Search Names & Keywords" to search only the item names, e.g. file, color, etc., or "Search All Information" to search the names and keywords available in some galleries. Adding to a gallery You may want to add extra items to these galleries (Designs, Fill & Fonts galleries only). To do this: 1.
steps:1. Identify the location of the old Clipart folder and the decide which sub-folders inside it you want to keep. 2. Copy the sub-folders to a convenient location on your machine. 3. Select the "Disc designs…" button in the Designs Gallery and in the dialog that appears navigate to the sub-folder. If you want to add the "food" folder for example, you need to navigate right into the food folder, before clicking Add in the dialog. 4.
Adding to a gallery You may want to add extra items to these galleries (Designs, Fill & Fonts galleries only). To do this: 1. Copy the files you want to add into a new directory (folder) using the Windows Explorer. o For the Designs Gallery these files can be any of a wide range of vector or bitmap file types. o For the Fill Gallery they can be any of the bitmap formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (listed in importing and exporting).
you can uninstall the old version of the program if it is no longer required. You can following a similar process to that above to copy fills and fonts from previous versions to the Fill and Font galleries. Fills are installed into a "Fills" folder in the program folder and fonts in a "Fonts" folder.
Deleting sections from a gallery To delete a section from a gallery (Clipart, Fill & Fonts galleries only): 1. Click on the title strip of the section or sections you want to delete. 2. Click "Remove". If you later want the section again, add its folder to the gallery (described earlier).
Moving content from previous versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Sometimes when Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is updated from one version to another, some content is dropped from the Designs Gallery to make space for new content. If you discover that some content you liked and used is missing from the latest version of the program, you can import it from an installation of an earlier version. Designs Gallery content is installed into the "Clipart" folder of the main program folder. Eg. C:\Pr
Naming objects You can apply names to any object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 using the "Apply, remove or inspect names of objects" button on the Selector tool infobar. Alternatively right click an object and choose Names from the drop-down list. Naming is a general mechanism which has a variety of uses, some of which are described below. Most commonly names are used to form loose sets of objects. Example uses of names Record information about the objects, e.g.
names is only shown if all objects in the selection have exactly the same set of names applied. Otherwise "" is displayed, indicating that there are differences in terms of the names applied to different objects in the selection. To remove a name from the selected object(s), click the name in the Names Applied list to select it and then click the Remove button.
Adding names To add a name to an object, select the object and open the Names dialog using the button on the Selector Tool infobar or right click on the object and choose Names... Type the new name into the Apply name field, or use the drop down list on the same field to select a name which is already used elsewhere in the current document. Click Add. You should see the name appear in the Names applied list. Names applied The Names Applied field shows you the names applied to the current selection.
Names applied The Names Applied field shows you the names applied to the current selection. If more than one object is selected, a list of names is only shown if all objects in the selection have exactly the same set of names applied. Otherwise "" is displayed, indicating that there are differences in terms of the names applied to different objects in the selection. To remove a name from the selected object(s), click the name in the Names Applied list to select it and then click the Remove button.
The Name Gallery The Name Gallery gives you information about the current document, and is an easy way to manage the various elements of your document. It lists: Named objects in the document ? you can name objects using either the Name Gallery or the Selector Tool. Fonts used in the document ? if you have text in your document, then the used fonts will be listed. Bitmaps used in the document ? a list of bitmaps currently used.
name from the Name Gallery and from any objects using that name. Export exports the selected named objects. Redefine changes which objects use a name.
Exports, slices, and stretches properties In this list box you can select which property of the used names are shown in the Name Gallery. Exports These options are used when export graphics as a series of slices and for batch exporting. A click on the arrow displays a dialog box that lets you select the file name, destination folder and file format to export in. By default the file name is the same as the name in the Name Gallery.
you want to stretch (like the button in the example above). The arrow to the right of the check box shows if the stretching options are set up (solid arrow) or not (hollow arrow). Click the arrow to display the Extend Dialog Box which lets you select those objects from the list of named objects to control the stretching. (In the above example you would select the name for the text.
Exports These options are used when export graphics as a series of slices and for batch exporting. A click on the arrow displays a dialog box that lets you select the file name, destination folder and file format to export in. By default the file name is the same as the name in the Name Gallery. Note that clicking "Apply" just stores the selected options, and that it doesn't save a bitmap; do this by exporting the image with the Export button. (Extension displayed depends on the file format chosen.
center (Scale ).
Slices When you choose the Slices check box those named objects slice underlying objects. For more information on image slicing read the Image slicing section in the "Web Graphics & Websites" chapter. Note : When exporting images as slices, the chosen destination folder from the exports property is ignored. All the sliced graphics must be in the same folder, and the destination folder is that selected for the HTML file when you export the slices.
Stretches You can use named objects to stretch other named objects, e.g. the text on a button. Both the text and the button are named objects, with the text flagged as stretching the button. When you change the length of the text (for example by typing in more characters), the button automatically resizes to match. When you choose Stretches properties, a check box to the right of object names shows those objects you want to stretch (like the button in the example above).
Selecting objects using the Name Gallery You can use the Name Gallery to select objects that use any of the items (names, bitmaps, colors, or fonts) listed in the gallery. This can speed up making changes, e.g. you want to change from one named color to another.
Undo and Redo What are undo and redo? We all make mistakes or change our minds. Photo & Graphic Designer makes it easy to correct mistakes or cancel unwanted changes. Every action you make is recorded in an undo list which lets you undo not just the last operation, but also to step back by undoing successive operations. In this way, you can experiment freely knowing that you can always undo anything that doesn't look correct. The undo command "Undo " cancels the effects of the last operation.
What are undo and redo? We all make mistakes or change our minds. Photo & Graphic Designer makes it easy to correct mistakes or cancel unwanted changes. Every action you make is recorded in an undo list which lets you undo not just the last operation, but also to step back by undoing successive operations. In this way, you can experiment freely knowing that you can always undo anything that doesn't look correct. The undo command "Undo " cancels the effects of the last operation.
The undo command "Undo " cancels the effects of the last operation. To undo an operation: Click Undo on the standard control bar. Or choose "Edit" > "Undo" (the exact wording tells you what the next undo step is, i.e. undo scale). Or press "Ctrl + Z". Or press the comma key (in any tool except the Text Tool). You can repeat the undo command to step back through the sequence of previous operations. The redo command Redo cancels the last undo command.
The redo command Redo cancels the last undo command. To redo the last operation: Click the Redo button on the standard control bar. Or choose "Edit" > "Redo" (the exact wording tells you what the next redo step is, i.e. redo scale). Or press "Ctrl + Y". Or press the period (full stop) key (in any tool except the Text Tool). You can only redo immediately after undo. You cannot redo after changing the document (for example, by moving or adding an object).
Changing the size of the undo list By default the size of the undo list is set to 100MB, You can change this value, or make the list size unlimited (or limited only by available memory on your computer). To change the list size: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose "Utilities -> Options". Select the "Tune ups" tab. Select a "Limited" undo size. Type in the required value followed by o "M" or "m" for a value in megabytes (4M). o "K" or "k" for a value in kilobytes (200K). o Or no suffix for a value in bytes (3000).
Copying & Pasting between Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and other programs When you copy any object, vector graphics object, text or photo, it's made available to the system-wide clipboard, so that pasting into another application will usually paste the selected object into the other applications. However since each program treats the clipboard differently, and some programs provide a greater degree of control over the pasted contents, you may get different results in different programs.
Microsoft Outlook 2003 This pastes an image of the clipboard into your email, and cleverly converts it to a compressed JPEG in order to reduce the size of the email. This works very well and means you can simply copy any drawing, selection or image and paste directly into your email and it will appear exactly the same size as in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 (at 100% zoom) and is automatically optimized for sending in an email.
Drawing Lines and Shapes In this chapter Drawing a line or shape The Freehand & Brush Tool Editing lines/shapes with the Freehand & Brush Tool The Straight Line & Arrow tool Eraser tool The Shape Editor tool Extending the line Finishing the line Adding a new point handle Selecting multiple point handles Deleting points Moving point handles—Shape Editor Tool Smoothing a line Constraining the line Changing curves Changing a straight line to a curve (and vice versa) Joining lines Splitting a shape Changing the
Drawing a line or shape You can use any of these tools to draw lines and shapes: The Freehand & Brush Tool ("F3"). The Straight Line & Arrow Tool The Shape Editor Tool ("F4"). The Freehand & Brush Tool is the easiest way to draw simple lines, curves, and shapes, and it acts rather like a pencil. The Straight Line & Arrow Tool is best if you want to draw single segment straight lines, or add arrow heads and tails to any types of lines. The Shape Editor Tool is best for drawing precise curves and lines.
The Freehand & Brush Tool You can use this tool to draw in a freehand manner, as you would with a pencil. It can also be used to create brush strokes, which is described later. And it includes the option to draw variable width lines using a compatible pressure sensitive drawing device such as a graphics tablet. While using this tool the status line provides reminders on how to use the tool. 1. Position the pointer where you want the line to start. 2. Press and hold down the mouse button.
Joining two lines Select both lines, ("Shift + click" on the second line to add it to the selection) and you can now just draw from the end of one line to an end of the other. A small + sign next to the pencil icon (appearing after a pause) indicates you are over the end. Closing a freehand shape (to create a filled shape) If you connect the start and end of a line, then it becomes a filled shape. You can now alter the fill color by dragging colors from the Color Line or using the Color Editor.
Erasing while drawing Before you release the mouse button you can erase part of the line by holding "Shift". The pencil icon reverses so the eraser at the end is downwards. You can now erase back along the line. Release "Shift" and you can continue drawing. Drawing straight segments in the Freehand Tool While drawing a freehand line hold down "Alt", move the pointer to a new position and release "Alt" to draw a straight line.
Drawing straight segments in the Freehand Tool While drawing a freehand line hold down "Alt", move the pointer to a new position and release "Alt" to draw a straight line. You can continue drawing a line or hold down "Alt" again to draw another straight segment. Remember, you can use "Ctrl" to constrain the angle of the line. If you only want to draw lots of single segment straight lines, use the Straight Line Tool described below.
Extending a line Make sure the line is selected (a single click on the shape or line in the Freehand & Brush Tool will do this). Now if you move over the end of the line, a small + sign next to the pencil icon will indicate you can just draw to add a new freehand section to the line. Joining two lines Select both lines, ("Shift + click" on the second line to add it to the selection) and you can now just draw from the end of one line to an end of the other.
Joining two lines Select both lines, ("Shift + click" on the second line to add it to the selection) and you can now just draw from the end of one line to an end of the other. A small + sign next to the pencil icon (appearing after a pause) indicates you are over the end. Closing a freehand shape (to create a filled shape) If you connect the start and end of a line, then it becomes a filled shape. You can now alter the fill color by dragging colors from the Color Line or using the Color Editor.
Closing a freehand shape (to create a filled shape) If you connect the start and end of a line, then it becomes a filled shape. You can now alter the fill color by dragging colors from the Color Line or using the Color Editor.
Editing lines/shapes with the Freehand & Brush Tool You cannot directly modify shapes created by the Quickshape, Rectangle, or Ellipse Tools. First convert them to editable shapes using "Arrange" > "Convert to editable shapes". See "Shape handling " for more information. You can use the Freehand & Brush Tool to edit lines (or outlines of shapes) by simply redrawing the section of line you want to replace. For example: To edit the object: Select the object that you wish to edit.
on the Freehand tool infobar. 2. Clear the current selection (click an empty part of the canvas, or press Escape). 3. Choose a suitable line width from the line width dropdown list on the top bar. The width you select will be the width of the line that is drawn when you are applying maximum pressure. 4. An alert appears asking if you want to make the selected line width the default for new objects. Press the Set button to confirm. 5. Start drawing using your tablet device.
Commit points You'll often notice as you draw along an edge in a photo that sometimes the last few pixels of the line you've drawn will 'jump' around as it searches for different routes. You can 'commit' the edge at any time by pressing the space bar when a correct route has been found. Then continue and trace mode will find more routes between the last commit point and the mouse pointer. Commit points are automatically added for you every 50 screen pixels.
Sketch Mode This option is useful if you are rapidly sketching lots of separate lines close to each other, perhaps using a drawing tablet. Hold the mouse pointer over an existing line, or end point, and you'll notice that there is a short pause before the mouse pointer changes to indicate that the line will be edited or extended. This pause means you can still edit existing lines if you want, but you won't do so unintentionally when you actually mean to sketch new lines.
Trace mode on/off Turn on trace mode using the toggle button on the infobar. Draw with the Freehand tool over a photo and you should see that the line tries to follow edges in the image. You can also turn trace mode on and off while you are actively drawing a line, by pressing the T key. The mouse pointer changes to indicate whether trace mode is on or off.
Pressure sensitive drawing Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports pressure sensitive drawing using a compatible tablet device that supports pressure sensitivity. Most modern tablets should be compatible. This allows you to draw variable width strokes - the more pressure you apply the wider the stroke. High Pressure Low Pressure To draw a variable width stroke using your tablet: 1. Enable pressure sensitive drawing by pressing the Enable/disable Pressure Recording button on the Freehand tool infobar.
Commit points You'll often notice as you draw along an edge in a photo that sometimes the last few pixels of the line you've drawn will 'jump' around as it searches for different routes. You can 'commit' the edge at any time by pressing the space bar when a correct route has been found. Then continue and trace mode will find more routes between the last commit point and the mouse pointer. Commit points are automatically added for you every 50 screen pixels.
Trace mode Trace mode helps you to draw lines which follow visible edges in photo images. For most photos it's best to turn smoothing down from the default value, so that the line more closely follows complex edges with less smoothing of the line as you draw. Trace mode on/off Turn on trace mode using the toggle button on the infobar. Draw with the Freehand tool over a photo and you should see that the line tries to follow edges in the image.
Brush styles The Freehand & Brush Tool can also be used to apply different brush stroke styles along the path of the line. Instead of being a solid, fixed-width line, you can change it to be a variable-width line, or one of a near-infinite range of fancy brush styles, like airbrush, felt tip marker, and many more.
The Straight Line & Arrow tool This tool makes it easy to draw single segment straight lines and to add arrow heads and tails to any lines in a way that is much easier and more powerful than doing the same thing with the Line Gallery .
Why a straight line tool? Prior to the addition of this simple tool, many users new to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 had great difficulty doing something as simple as drawing a straight line using the other drawing tools! That's because the Shape Editor is more geared to drawing multi-segment lines and shapes and the Freehand Tool to drawing freehand. Hence the need for this tool, which makes it obvious how to do something elementary.
Drawing & editing straight lines Simply click and drag on the page to draw a straight line. You can click on any existing line to select it, and once selected you can click-drag on either end to move the end of the line around. Adding arrowheads & tails The infobar has two dropdown lists on the left which allow you to choose an arrow head or tail style for each end of the selected line.
Adding arrowheads & tails The infobar has two dropdown lists on the left which allow you to choose an arrow head or tail style for each end of the selected line. Arrow head Arrow tail Arrow head/tail size Reverse path The slider on the infobar allows you to change the size of the arrow head and tail on the current selected line. Or you can enter a percentage value into the size text field to the right of the slider.
Reverse path Press the Reverse path button on the infobar to switch around the head and tail of the selected line. Adding more line segments Lines created with the Straight Line Tool are of course fully compatible with the other drawing tools. So if you want to add more segments to a line, make it curved, or perhaps even turn it into a closed shape, use the Shape Editor Tool .
Adding more line segments Lines created with the Straight Line Tool are of course fully compatible with the other drawing tools. So if you want to add more segments to a line, make it curved, or perhaps even turn it into a closed shape, use the Shape Editor Tool .
Eraser tool This is really two tools in one and can be used to perform hard-edged vector erasing of shapes and photos, or soft erasing (using the opacity mask feature). When used with a hard edge, it can be used to adjust the vector edge of shapes and photos. It's a fast and direct way of adjusting the vector outline of a shape inwards. If you stroke around the edge of a shape with your mouse, it just moves the outline inwards.
Group'. In the Page & Layer gallery you can see the group contains an opacity mask object, and inside that is the shape or shapes you used to erase with. You can even select them using the Gallery and perform further edits on them. Once an object becomes an Opacity Mask Group then further erase operations, whether soft or hard, are applied as soft mask operations inside this group.
The Shape Editor tool The Shape Editor Tool is the main tool used for both creating precise curves, lines, and shapes, as well as editing or altering lines and shapes. Add/Change/Edit Indicator Make curve Make line Smooth join Sharp join Break at points Delete points Reverse paths Positions of handles Smoothing The InfoBar, shown above, provides a wide range of controls as well as precise numeric control.
2. If necessary select the Make line button on the InfoBar ("L"). This ensures the next click will draw a straight line segment. Either click where you want the next point handle to be, or click and drag, and then release the mouse button when the line is correct. This creates a line segment and selects the new end point handle.
To draw a straight line segment Using the Shape editor Tool, start a straight line: 1. Click where you want to start the line. You can start a line at either end; you don't have to work left to right, or top-to-bottom. This creates a point handle, and is displayed as a red square to indicate that it is the selected handle. 2. If necessary select the Make line button on the InfoBar ("L"). This ensures the next click will draw a straight line segment.
Mixing curved and straight lines To create an object which is a mixture of straight and curved segments, just switch between the Make Curve and Make Line buttons as you create the object (you can also press "L" or "C" on the keyboard.) Note: You can also use the keyboard shortcut "X" to create a Cusp Join or "S" to create a Smooth Join while using the Shape Editor Tool . These affect the way two line segments come together.
To draw a curved line segment: This is similar to starting a straight line (described above). 1. Click where you want to start the line. 2. If necessary select the Make curve button (shortcut "C".) 3. Either click or drag (as described for straight lines) to create a second point handle, and a curve segment will be added to the line. A curve segment has Curve handles associated with the selected point handle. You can drag these to adjust the angle and radius of the curve.
Extending the line Make sure an end point handle is the selected handle (red outline) and then just click again to add a new line or curve section. Each successive click places a new point handle and draws a new line segment to the selected point handle. This applies also to Shape Editor and Pen Tools. To use the Pen Tool, choose Control Bars from the Window menu and click the Button Palette checkbox, or press "Shift + F5" on your keyboard.
Finishing the line Shift + click completes the line (keeps it selected), or press "Esc" to finish the line and de-select it. After this, additional clicks will start a new line. This applies also to Shape Editor and Pen Tools. To use the Pen Tool, choose Control Bars from the Window menu and click the Button Palette checkbox, or press "Shift + F5" on your keyboard.
Adding a new point handle The Shape Editor Tool has three modes, depending on whether no point handles are selected (a click will start a new line), an end handle is selected (a click will add a new section), or one or more other point handles are selected (you can drag or change the handles). The InfoBar shows the current mode. New: Click to start a new line, Add: Click to extend the line, Change: Drag or delete point handles to change. This applies to the Shape Editor Tool only.
To the end of a line: Make sure the line is selected, then: 1. If necessary, click on the end point to select it. 2. Position the pointer and click to add a new section. To the middle of a line: Make sure the line is selected, then; 1. Click on the line to add a new point handle into the line 2. Drag the point handle to the required position. To the start of a line: If the end point is selected, clicking on the start point closes the shape (this is described in "Closing a shape ").
To the middle of a line: Make sure the line is selected, then; 1. Click on the line to add a new point handle into the line 2. Drag the point handle to the required position. To the start of a line: If the end point is selected, clicking on the start point closes the shape (this is described in "Closing a shape "). To add a new control handle to the start of a line: 1. Finish the line using "Shift + click". 2. Click on the start handle. 3. Position the pointer and click.
To the start of a line: If the end point is selected, clicking on the start point closes the shape (this is described in "Closing a shape "). To add a new control handle to the start of a line: 1. Finish the line using "Shift + click". 2. Click on the start handle. 3. Position the pointer and click.
Selecting multiple point handles You may want to select several point handles to delete them, move them as a group, or change a region of points to curved or straight lines. To do this: 1. Select one point handle in the normal way by clicking on it. 2. "Shift + click" the other point handles to select them ("Shift + click" also deselects.) o Or "Ctrl + Shift + click" on a point handle to select all point handles on the line. o Or drag the mouse pointer diagonally to create a selection rectangle.
Selector Tool You have limited shape editing abilities using the Selector Tool if you have the Show object edit handles button selected.
Deleting points Select the point handle(s) as described above and either click the Delete points button (Shape Editor Tool InfoBar), or press "Del".
Moving point handles—Shape Editor Tool You can move one or more selected handles: Drag the handles using the mouse. Or use the arrow keys on the keyboard. Or to move a single handle, type new values into the text boxes on the InfoBar (see below). Using the text boxes on the InfoBar The center pair of text boxes always shows the X/Y co-ordinates of the selected point. The surrounding X/Y fields show the co-ordinates of the curve handles on either side of the selected point.
Using the text boxes on the InfoBar The center pair of text boxes always shows the X/Y co-ordinates of the selected point. The surrounding X/Y fields show the co-ordinates of the curve handles on either side of the selected point. X/Y co-ordinates are relative to the bottom left corner of the page by default for print document and top left for web documents. You can change this in the "Grid and ruler" tab in the options dialog.
Moving point handles—Selector Tool You can only select and move point handles when the Show edit handles button is selected.
Smoothing a line Imported shapes or shapes from tracers may have unnecessary points on a line. Lines with too many points can be unwieldy and can slow down rendering. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can smooth the line to remove unnecessary points. Select all the points on the part of the line you want to smooth (see above). Drag selecting around the region in the Shape Editor Tool is probably the easiest way to select a large number of points.
Constraining the line When dragging a point handle, holding down the constrain key ("Ctrl") will constrain the movement to multiples of the constrain angle (controlled from the options dialog, general tab). When dragging a curve handle the angle is constrained.
Changing curves Using the curve handle Dragging the curve handle will adjust the curvature of the adjoining curve segments. Move the curve handle towards or away from the point handle to pull the curve in the required direction. Dragging the line segment You can also change the curve by dragging the line segment between points. Notice the difference between dragging the line to change its shape, and clicking on the line to add a new point handle.
with "Shift" held down. As you drag one curve handle the other one will move to be exactly opposite it and the same distance from the point handle.
Using the curve handle Dragging the curve handle will adjust the curvature of the adjoining curve segments. Move the curve handle towards or away from the point handle to pull the curve in the required direction. Dragging the line segment You can also change the curve by dragging the line segment between points. Notice the difference between dragging the line to change its shape, and clicking on the line to add a new point handle. Dragging a straight line segment changes it to a curved line segment.
Dragging the line segment You can also change the curve by dragging the line segment between points. Notice the difference between dragging the line to change its shape, and clicking on the line to add a new point handle. Dragging a straight line segment changes it to a curved line segment. Making sharp corners Normally, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 draws a smooth curve through a point handle. For this, the two curve handles either side of a point handle are linked.
Making sharp corners Normally, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 draws a smooth curve through a point handle. For this, the two curve handles either side of a point handle are linked. Moving either curve handle also moves the other. Sometimes you will want a sharp corner, and to achieve this, you need to unlink the curve handles: 1. Double click the point handle, 2. Or select the point handle and either: Click the Cusp join button, or press "Z". You can now move each curve handle independently.
Making smooth curves To convert a sharp join into a smooth curve: 1. Double click the point handle, 2. Or select the point handle and either: Click the Smooth join button, or "S". The two curve handles become linked and move to opposite sides of the point handle. This may change the shape of the curve. Balancing curves Balancing makes the two curve handles the same distance from the point handle, which gives smoother, more symmetrical curves.
Balancing curves Balancing makes the two curve handles the same distance from the point handle, which gives smoother, more symmetrical curves. To balance a curve, select the point handle, then drag one of the curve handles with "Shift" held down. As you drag one curve handle the other one will move to be exactly opposite it and the same distance from the point handle.
Changing a straight line to a curve (and vice versa) 1. Select the point handles at both ends of a line segment. For several line segments select all bordering point handles. 2. Click the Make curve or Make line button on the InfoBar, or press "L" or "C" (these shortcuts only work in the Shape Editor Tool). After changing the line type, you may need to move the curve handles for a smooth transition between curved and straight line segments. You can select several line segments and convert them all.
Joining lines You can only join lines if both are selected (the point handles are shown on both lines): Using the Selector Tool, hold down "Shift" and click on the lines to select them (if you are already in the Shape Editor Tool, you can press "Alt + S" to temporarily go into the Selector Tool, "Shift + click" to select the second line, then "Alt + S" again to return to the Shape Editor Tool). Selecting objects is described fully in "Selecting objects ".
Splitting a shape If you want to split (break) a line or shape: Either select an existing point handle on the line or outline of the shape, or create a new one where you want to break the line. Just click on the line in the Shape Editor Tool (see above). Click on the Break at points button, or press "B". If you split a line, there is no visible change. However, if you move the point handle, then only part of the line moves. If you split a shape, it changes to being a line. Any fill disappears.
Changing the line width (thickness) To change the line thickness or the outline thickness of a shape, first select the object or objects: Type a new line width into the text box on the standard control bar or choose the default line thickness from the menu. Line thickness is traditionally measured in points, abbreviated to pt. 1 point is 1/72nd of an inch (about 0.3mm), which is slightly less than the thickness of one screen pixel when viewed at 100% zoom.
Variable width lines From the Freehand & Brush Tool InfoBar you can select a drop-down menu that shows a selection of alternative variable line thickness profiles. As you move the mouse over the selection, an enlarged preview is shown on the right. Selecting one of the styles will change the line (or outline of a shape) from being a constant thickness line, to a variable thickness. This is great for creating pen and ink style artwork, and is often used in the creation of cartoons.
Line Gallery The Line Gallery can be used to apply a range of line styles or attributes, such as brush strokes, dash patterns, arrow heads, and more. To display the Line Gallery : Choose "Utilities" > "Line Gallery" Or click the Line Gallery tab on the Galleries tab. The Line Gallery is split into sections. To open or close any section, click on the small folder icon in the gallery window.
Arrowheads The best way to apply an arrowhead is to use the Straight Line & Arrow Tool , as described earlier in this chapter. However you can also use the line gallery. Drag and drop the arrowhead from the gallery onto the appropriate end of the line. Alternatively, to apply an arrowhead: Double click on the arrowhead in the gallery. Or select the required arrowhead and click Apply. Photo & Graphic Designer has two types of arrowhead designs: beginning and end.
Change join type This control on the top of the Line Gallery sets the style of corners. To change an existing line, select the line. To change the current join type, deselect all lines. Select the required type from the menu. Change line cap This control at the top of the Line Gallery sets the style of the ends of the line. To change an existing line, select the line. To change the default line cap, deselect all lines. Select the required type from the menu.
Change line cap This control at the top of the Line Gallery sets the style of the ends of the line. To change an existing line, select the line. To change the default line cap, deselect all lines. Select the required type from the menu.
Brushes Brush strokes control the appearance of lines (for example, to apply an air-brush effect). Select a brush preset Select a preset for a stroke shape/pressure profile Using an existing brush To use an existing brush type for a line: 1. Click to select an existing brush. Click on the arrow to display a preview window of the default set of brush designs and previously created custom brushes (if available) from all open documents. 2.
Spacing: Gap between the objects in the brush. Offset: Distance between the original line and the objects in the brush. Scaling: Size of objects in the brush. Rotation: Rotation of the objects in the brush as they follow the line. Transparency: Transparency of the brush. Fill properties: Miscellaneous options, including color options. Transparency is described in "Transparency" and colors are described in "Color handling ".
Using an existing brush To use an existing brush type for a line: 1. Click to select an existing brush. Click on the arrow to display a preview window of the default set of brush designs and previously created custom brushes (if available) from all open documents. 2. If required, select a stroke shape to change the appearance of the line (and to also mimic using a pressure-sensitive tablet). 3. Draw the line as required, and it will use your chosen brush and stroke shape.
. Save your edits with the save button, with the save as new button a new brush is created. Attention: Although you can edit a default brush, you can not save the edits into this brush for use beyond this session. The default brushes are always restored on the start of the program. If you want to edit one of the default brushes, for use at a further time, then you have to save it as a new one.
Creating a new brush To create a new brush type: 1. Design your desired brush in Photo & Graphic Designer then select it. 2. Click Create Brush. 3. Give your brush an appropriate name. You can then draw with your new brush straight away. The new brush is listed in the brushes preview window. Brushes are stored in the document. If you want to re-use a brush in another document, you have to load the document containing your custom brush first. Only the default brushes are always available.
Editing a brush To access advanced editing options for a brush: 1. Select the brush that you wish to edit. 2. Click edit brush. Here you can alter: Spacing: Gap between the objects in the brush. Offset: Distance between the original line and the objects in the brush. Scaling: Size of objects in the brush. Rotation: Rotation of the objects in the brush as they follow the line. Transparency: Transparency of the brush. Fill properties: Miscellaneous options, including color options.
Selecting Objects In this chapter The Selector Tool Selecting objects Double-click shortcuts to tools Identifying a selected object Hiding objects Locking objects Soloing objects Page 339
The Selector Tool The Selector Tool is the main tool for selecting, moving, scaling, and rotating objects. It is typically used more than any other tool and is the central tool for manipulating documents.
the Selector Tool to perform a selection or other operation, and quickly switch back to the previous tool. If you are using another tool, you can easily switch to the Selector Tool : Press and release "Alt + S" to switch to the Selector Tool. Press again to return to the previous tool.
The InfoBar All the buttons on the InfoBar are described in the following sections except: Show edit handles which is described in "Drawing lines". Show fill handles which is described in "Fills". Apply, remove or inspect names of objects which is described in "Document handling". The first two buttons let you edit the outlines and fills of objects without the need to switch tools.
Alt + S Because the Selector Tool is the most used tool, there is an additional shortcut that lets you switch to the Selector Tool to perform a selection or other operation, and quickly switch back to the previous tool. If you are using another tool, you can easily switch to the Selector Tool : Press and release "Alt + S" to switch to the Selector Tool. Press again to return to the previous tool.
Selecting objects To select a single object, click on any visible part of the object. Change object selection Once an object is selected, you can use the following keys to change the selection: End selects the back object. Home selects the front object. "Tab" selects the next object towards the back. "Shift + Tab" selects the next object towards the front. Front and back objects are described in "Object handling ". Marquee selection To select multiple objects, press and hold down the mouse button.
becomes selected. Note that some operations are not permitted with select inside. For example, you are not permitted to delete the end object of a blend (because the blend would then be meaningless). Marquee selection does not work for select inside, because "Ctrl" is used to toggle the two marquee selection modes.
Change object selection Once an object is selected, you can use the following keys to change the selection: End selects the back object. Home selects the front object. "Tab" selects the next object towards the back. "Shift + Tab" selects the next object towards the front. Front and back objects are described in "Object handling ". Marquee selection To select multiple objects, press and hold down the mouse button.
Marquee selection does not work for select inside, because "Ctrl" is used to toggle the two marquee selection modes. Moving objects selected under or inside If you need to move a selected object that's either under others or inside a group, then just dragging doesn't work as it will select and drag a different object. To overcome this hold "Ctrl + Alt" and start dragging. This will always drag the existing selected object. You can let go of the keys once you've started dragging.
Marquee selection To select multiple objects, press and hold down the mouse button. Dragging the mouse draws a selection rectangle, by default all objects wholly within the selection rectangle are selected. If you have an object in the way which is preventing you from drawing a rectangle because you end up moving the object, hold down "Shift" while dragging out the selection rectangle. By default, dragging a selection rectangle selects only those objects which are completely inside the rectangle.
Selecting and layers You cannot select objects in locked or invisible layers. See "Page & Layer Gallery " for more details on layers. Selecting all objects To select all objects: Choose "Edit" > "Select all", Or press "Ctrl + A". Deselecting an object To deselect all objects: Click anywhere on an unused part of the document, Or choose "Edit" > "Clear selection", Or press "Esc". To deselect one object from several: "Shift + click" on the object. This deselects that object.
Extend Selection To select additional objects: "Shift + click" on them. Or "Shift + drag" the mouse pointer. This draws a selection rectangle and adds objects within the rectangle to the selection. Select under Hold down "Alt" to select objects hidden by other objects. By "Alt + clicking" you can step through several overlapping objects. Select inside Groups and blends are described later. Text stories are described in "Text handling". Molds are described in "Distorting objects ".
Click anywhere on an unused part of the document, Or choose "Edit" > "Clear selection", Or press "Esc". To deselect one object from several: "Shift + click" on the object. This deselects that object. Other objects remain selected. Selecting with Soft Groups When you click on an object which is a member of a soft group, all members of the soft group become selected. This is one of the main purposes of Soft Groups ? to keep closely related objects together even when they are on different layers.
Select under Hold down "Alt" to select objects hidden by other objects. By "Alt + clicking" you can step through several overlapping objects. Select inside Groups and blends are described later. Text stories are described in "Text handling". Molds are described in "Distorting objects ". You can select an object that's inside a group or other container object by holding down "Ctrl" while you click on it. This is called selecting inside.
Selecting with Soft Groups When you click on an object which is a member of a soft group, all members of the soft group become selected. This is one of the main purposes of Soft Groups ? to keep closely related objects together even when they are on different layers. If you want to select just one member of a Soft Group, use Ctrl to select inside, as described above. See the "Soft Group (Soft Groups, Soft Groups )" section in "Object Handling" for more information.
Select inside Groups and blends are described later. Text stories are described in "Text handling". Molds are described in "Distorting objects ". You can select an object that's inside a group or other container object by holding down "Ctrl" while you click on it. This is called selecting inside. The object you click on will always become selected, even if it's deep down inside several levels of nested groups.
select inside, as described above. See the "Soft Group (Soft Groups, Soft Groups )" section in "Object Handling" for more information.
Moving objects selected under or inside If you need to move a selected object that's either under others or inside a group, then just dragging doesn't work as it will select and drag a different object. To overcome this hold "Ctrl + Alt" and start dragging. This will always drag the existing selected object. You can let go of the keys once you've started dragging. Or you can use the arrow keys ï€ on the keyboard to nudge the object.
Selecting and layers You cannot select objects in locked or invisible layers. See "Page & Layer Gallery " for more details on layers. Selecting all objects To select all objects: Choose "Edit" > "Select all", Or press "Ctrl + A". Deselecting an object To deselect all objects: Click anywhere on an unused part of the document, Or choose "Edit" > "Clear selection", Or press "Esc". To deselect one object from several: "Shift + click" on the object. This deselects that object.
Selecting all objects To select all objects: Choose "Edit" > "Select all", Or press "Ctrl + A". Deselecting an object To deselect all objects: Click anywhere on an unused part of the document, Or choose "Edit" > "Clear selection", Or press "Esc". To deselect one object from several: "Shift + click" on the object. This deselects that object. Other objects remain selected.
Deselecting an object To deselect all objects: Click anywhere on an unused part of the document, Or choose "Edit" > "Clear selection", Or press "Esc". To deselect one object from several: "Shift + click" on the object. This deselects that object. Other objects remain selected. Selecting with Soft Groups When you click on an object which is a member of a soft group, all members of the soft group become selected.
Selecting with Soft Groups When you click on an object which is a member of a soft group, all members of the soft group become selected. This is one of the main purposes of Soft Groups ? to keep closely related objects together even when they are on different layers. If you want to select just one member of a Soft Group, use Ctrl to select inside, as described above. See the "Soft Group (Soft Groups, Soft Groups )" section in "Object Handling" for more information.
Double-click shortcuts to tools For some types of object, double-clicking on them will take you into the tool which is most applicable to that object. So for example if you want to edit some text, double click on it to go into the Text Tool, so you can start editing it immediately.
Identifying a selected object The selected object shows Selection markers and usually Selection bounds handles or Rotation handles (although this can be turned off). Selection markers Each selected object displays a single selection marker to show it is selected. This is a useful reminder when selecting and deselecting several objects. Status line The status line at the bottom of the window also describes what is selected. Selection bounds handles Selection bounds handles enclose the overall selection.
Tab With any selected object, pressing "Tab" and "Shift + Tab" will move through the selected objects (previous and next object in the document).
Selection markers Each selected object displays a single selection marker to show it is selected. This is a useful reminder when selecting and deselecting several objects. Status line The status line at the bottom of the window also describes what is selected. Selection bounds handles Selection bounds handles enclose the overall selection. These are controlled by the selection bounds button on the InfoBar.
Status line The status line at the bottom of the window also describes what is selected. Selection bounds handles Selection bounds handles enclose the overall selection. These are controlled by the selection bounds button on the InfoBar. Selection bounds handles let you scale and stretch selected objects see Shape handling, Object handling, and Distorting objects for more details. Successive clicks on an object alternate between showing selection bounds and rotation handles.
Selection bounds handles Selection bounds handles enclose the overall selection. These are controlled by the selection bounds button on the InfoBar. Selection bounds handles let you scale and stretch selected objects see Shape handling, Object handling, and Distorting objects for more details. Successive clicks on an object alternate between showing selection bounds and rotation handles.
Finding objects in the Page & Layer Gallery You can quickly locate an object in the Page & Layer Gallery by selecting it and then clicking the Locate button at the top of the Page & Layer Gallery. The Page & Layer Gallery automatically expands the required nodes and highlights the selected object. See "Page & Layer Gallery " for more information. Rotation handles Rotation handles enclose the overall selection. These are controlled by the Rotation Handles button on the InfoBar.
Rotation handles Rotation handles enclose the overall selection. These are controlled by the Rotation Handles button on the InfoBar. Rotation handles let you rotate and skew selected objects; see "Object handling " for more details. Successive clicks on an object alternate between showing selection bounds and rotation handles. Tab With any selected object, pressing "Tab" and "Shift + Tab" will move through the selected objects (previous and next object in the document).
Tab With any selected object, pressing "Tab" and "Shift + Tab" will move through the selected objects (previous and next object in the document).
Hiding objects Using the Page & Layer Gallery you can make objects, groups or entire layers invisible temporarily. Once an object is invisible, it can't be selected either, so this is useful if you want to work on objects near to, above or below other objects that you don't want to change. For example if you have a large semi-transparent shape on top of some of your artwork, you can hide that object to make it easier to work on the artwork below it.
Locking objects You can also lock objects in your design so that they still appear on the canvas, as normal, but are not selectable. This is useful to make it easier to select other objects near, above or below an object that is getting in the way, but where you still want to be able to see that object. For example you might have a large shape sitting behind some smaller shapes that you want to work on.
Soloing objects You can click the Solo button next to an object in the Page & Layer Gallery, to temporarily make all other objects invisible. This makes it easier to work on a specific object if you don't want or need to be able to see the other objects around it. Also, to find a specific object you can click and drag across the solo mode buttons in the gallery. As you drag, only the item under the mouse pointer is displayed on the page, so you can quickly scan for the object you want to find.
Object Handling In this chapter Moving objects Removing objects from the document Duplicating and cloning Moving objects forward and backwards Rotating objects Scaling (resizing) objects Flipping objects Snapping Guide Objects and Guidelines Summary of shortcuts on the numeric keypad Grouping and ungrouping objects Photo Groups Editing inside groups Other types of groups Soft Groups Alignment Copying Styles: Paste Attributes ClipView Repeating Objects Page 373
Moving objects To slide an object across the page 1. Choose the Selector Tool. 2. Drag the object to the required position. Hold down "Ctrl" to restrict the direction of movement to one of the constrain angles. The constrain angles are user definable. Refer to "Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer " Hold down "Ctrl + Alt" and you can drag the selected object even if the pointer is not over it. This is useful when the selected object is hidden behind another object or part of a group.
Usually you can move an object a small amount by using the arrow?keys to nudge the object (these keys sometimes have other uses, especially in the Text Tool ). Nudging is not affected by either magnetic or grid snapping (snapping is described later).
Pastes any text on the clipboard into your document without any formatting. Paste format/attributes Preserves the format (e.g., font and font size) or style attributes (e.g., line and fill color) of the pasted object. Paste position This option applies the position of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which moves to the exact same position as the copied object.
Pressing Delete will make an elliptical hole in the photo. Pressing Ctrl +C (copy) will copy the elliptical part of the photo to the clipboard. Pressing Ctrl +X (cut) will cut out the elliptical part of the photo and place it on the clipboard.
Drop copy During a move (and while still holding the left mouse button down) click the right mouse button or press + on the numeric keypad to drop a copy of the object. The original object doesn't move. You can do this as many times as you wish to create a series of duplicated objects. You can also hold down the right mouse button and drag a copy of the object. Left click to leave a copy at the current mouse position.
layer by first making it the current layer and then choosing "Edit" > "Paste" > "Paste in layer" or "Paste in place in current layer" . The layer from which the objects were copied is ignored in this case. However if the objects you copy are on several different layers , then the layer structure is maintained when you paste. This allows you to copy layered data within a document or to a different document. Any layers which are missing in the target document are created automatically by this operation.
Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed. Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it.
Fills Usually, moving an object also moves the fill with it: Normal move left to right with a linear filled object. This also applies to rotating, skewing, scaling and stretching objects. Photo & Graphic Designer can also move the object but not the fill origin. To do this click the "−" key on the numeric keypad during the move. The same move, but pressing "−" (minus) during the drag.
layer, to a new document, the MouseOff and MouseOver layers will be created if they don't already exist and the button objects copied onto them. "Ctrl + Shift + V" or "Edit" > "Paste in place" pastes the clipboard contents into the same X/Y position from where they were cut or copied or the same position relative to the bottom of the page in the case of footer objects. This only applies to objects cut or copied from within Photo & Graphic Designer.
The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Cut, copy and delete with a mask If there is an active mask present, it modifies the behavior of the cut, copy and delete operations. Only the unmasked area of the selected objects is cut, copied or deleted. This provides a quick way of cutting up photos or whole drawings. Pressing Delete will make an elliptical hole in the photo.
Nudging objects Usually you can move an object a small amount by using the arrowï€ keys to nudge the object (these keys sometimes have other uses, especially in the Text Tool ). Nudging is not affected by either magnetic or grid snapping (snapping is described later).
In addition you may see the following paste options, depending on the clipboard contents: Paste unformatted text Pastes any text on the clipboard into your document without any formatting. Paste format/attributes Preserves the format (e.g., font and font size) or style attributes (e.g., line and fill color) of the pasted object. Paste position This option applies the position of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which moves to the exact same position as the copied object.
Pressing Delete will make an elliptical hole in the photo. Pressing Ctrl +C (copy) will copy the elliptical part of the photo to the clipboard. Pressing Ctrl +X (cut) will cut out the elliptical part of the photo and place it on the clipboard.
Cut, copy and paste These let you move or copy an object in the same document or between different documents. The procedure is: 1. Select the object. 2. To remove the object, choose "Edit" > "Cut" (or "Ctrl + X"). To copy the object but not remove it, choose "Edit" > "Copy" (or "Ctrl + C"). Either option puts the object (or a copy of it) onto the clipboard. 3. Choose "Edit" > "Paste", "Ctrl + V", or "Insert". This pastes the clipboard contents into the document.
resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object. If you have multiple items selected when you 'paste size', each of those objects is made the target size, instead of the selection as a whole. So for example if you copy a 200x200 pixel photo, then select 10 other photos and 'paste size', all 10 photos each become 200x200 pixels. This gives a quick way to make a bunch of objects a particular size.
Cut, copy and delete with a mask If there is an active mask present, it modifies the behavior of the cut, copy and delete operations. Only the unmasked area of the selected objects is cut, copied or deleted. This provides a quick way of cutting up photos or whole drawings. Pressing Delete will make an elliptical hole in the photo. Pressing Ctrl +C (copy) will copy the elliptical part of the photo to the clipboard.
Removing objects from the document First select the objects you want to remove. You can then either cut the objects to the clipboard or delete them. Cutting objects Choose "Edit" > "Cut", or press "Ctrl + X".The contents of the clipboard are overwritten and you can paste the deleted object(s) somewhere else if desired. Deleting objects Right click and choose Delete or choose Delete from the Edit menu, or press the "Delete" key, or click the delete button on the Standard control bar.
Cutting objects Choose "Edit" > "Cut", or press "Ctrl + X".The contents of the clipboard are overwritten and you can paste the deleted object(s) somewhere else if desired. Deleting objects Right click and choose Delete or choose Delete from the Edit menu, or press the "Delete" key, or click the delete button on the Standard control bar. In this case the deleted objects are not put onto the clipboard. If you accidentally delete an object, undo retrieves it.
Deleting objects Right click and choose Delete or choose Delete from the Edit menu, or press the "Delete" key, or click the delete button on the Standard control bar. In this case the deleted objects are not put onto the clipboard. If you accidentally delete an object, undo retrieves it.
Duplicating and cloning Both these options create a copy of the selected object. The original object is deselected and the duplicate or clone becomes the selected object. You can also duplicate an object during moving, rotating, scaling, or skewing. During the drag action (and while still holding the left mouse button down) click the right mouse button or press "+" on the numeric keypad to drop a copy of the object. The original object doesn't move.
Duplicating Choose "Edit -> Duplicate", or press "Ctrl + Alt + D", or select the object in the Page & Layer Gallery and click the Duplicate button. The copy is displaced slightly, usually down and to the right, from the original. The duplicate distance is user definable, see "Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer " Cloning Choose "Edit" > "Clone", or press "Ctrl + K". This places a copy exactly on top of the original. Cloning is an easy way to create concentric shapes.
Cloning Choose "Edit" > "Clone", or press "Ctrl + K". This places a copy exactly on top of the original. Cloning is an easy way to create concentric shapes. This example uses an original large letter "A" with a black fill and a 4pt thick white outline and a clone with no fill and a 1pt black line.
Moving objects forward and backwards Complex documents have objects stacked on top of each other, such as this target: The target on the left is made from three circles stacked on top of each other. To ensure that objects overlay each other in the correct order, you often need to rearrange their order from front to back. The front object always covers lower objects, and objects always cover other objects which are further back. Each new object you create is always created on top of older ones.
Read more in "Page & Layer Gallery " Page 397
Rotating objects This is part of the Selector Tool. When in rotate mode, the transformation center (around which the object rotates) initially appears in the center of the object, as shown by a small target like this. Simply click on a object again to put the selector into rotate mode, or click the rotation handles button on the InfoBar. To move the transformation center: Drag the transformation center target where required. Or use the 3x3 matrix on the InfoBar for accurate positioning.
Type an angle into the rotate box and press " ¿". Positive angles rotate anti-clockwise and negative angles rotate clockwise. Click the arrows to the right to nudge the rotate angle. Rotating objects in Resize Mode It is possible to rotate and skew an object even if not in rotate mode. Using resize mode, move the mouse pointer into the according small areas near the selection area handles as illustrated above.
Rotating using the mouse The Selector Tool must be in rotate/skew mode (the selection handles are arrow shaped). Dragging the side handles stretches the object. This is described in Stretching and squashing objects . Drag on a corner arrow. As you drag, the object rotates around the transformation center. The InfoBar shows the current rotate angle. "Shift + drag" to rotate the object around its center (the transformation center is ignored). Hold down "Ctrl" to restrict rotation to the constrain angles.
Rotating by exact angles (using the InfoBar) Type an angle into the rotate box and press " ¿". Positive angles rotate anti-clockwise and negative angles rotate clockwise. Click the arrows to the right to nudge the rotate angle. Rotating objects in Resize Mode It is possible to rotate and skew an object even if not in rotate mode. Using resize mode, move the mouse pointer into the according small areas near the selection area handles as illustrated above.
Rotating objects in Resize Mode It is possible to rotate and skew an object even if not in rotate mode. Using resize mode, move the mouse pointer into the according small areas near the selection area handles as illustrated above. The mouse pointer changes into a rotate or skew icon, showing you that you are now able to rotate or skew the object by dragging with the mouse.
Scaling (resizing) objects This is part of the Selector Tool . Scale Line Widths button The Scale line widths button on the Selector Tool infobar is used in many operations where the width and height of the selected objects are important. It controls whether the line attributes (not just line widths) are taken into account when working out the size and position of the selected object(s). With the Scale line widths button set, scaling an object also scales its line widths.
With this button unset, you can change the aspect ratio as you scale the object, in other words, you can stretch object one way or another when dragging a corner resize handle or when entering a new size. Scaling using the mouse The Selector Tool must be in scale mode (the selection bounds handles are squares). If necessary, click on the object to change to scale mode. Drag one of the corner handles. The object scales as you move the pointer diagonally. The InfoBar shows the current scaling.
The 2 controls on the right of the Selector tool infobar show the perimeter and area of the current selected shape(s). Perimeter is shown in the current units for the document and area is shown in the current units squared. These fields are not editable.
Scale Line Widths button The Scale line widths button on the Selector Tool infobar is used in many operations where the width and height of the selected objects are important. It controls whether the line attributes (not just line widths) are taken into account when working out the size and position of the selected object(s). With the Scale line widths button set, scaling an object also scales its line widths. With this button unset, line widths remain unchanged.
The Selector Tool must be in scale mode (the selection bounds handles are squares). If necessary, click on the object to change to scale mode. Drag one of the corner handles. The object scales as you move the pointer diagonally. The InfoBar shows the current scaling. The object will scale between the dragged handle and the opposite one. To use any other point of the object as the fixed point move the transformation center to it and use the InfoBar buttons to scale .
Lock Aspect button With the Lock aspect button set, the width/height aspect ratio remains constant as you scale the object. In other words, the shape remains in the same proportions as the original. It's recommended that this button remains selected most of the time in order to ensure that when you resize objects they do not become squashed.
button is on, this scales the object and maintains the aspect ratio. You can enter the size in any unit, such as 1 cm. Scaling with the InfoBar buttons (or number boxes) always scales around the transformation center. You can position this anywhere else in the object, as described in "Rotating objects ". Perimeter & Area The 2 controls on the right of the Selector tool infobar show the perimeter and area of the current selected shape(s).
Scaling using the mouse The Selector Tool must be in scale mode (the selection bounds handles are squares). If necessary, click on the object to change to scale mode. Drag one of the corner handles. The object scales as you move the pointer diagonally. The InfoBar shows the current scaling. The object will scale between the dragged handle and the opposite one. To use any other point of the object as the fixed point move the transformation center to it and use the InfoBar buttons to scale .
area is shown in the current units squared. These fields are not editable.
Scaling using the InfoBar Type into the Scale Text boxes and press " ¿". Scalings below 100% reduce the object. 50 halves the size of the object. Scalings above 100% enlarge the object. 200 doubles the object size. If Lock Aspect is set, you can type into either text box to resize the object by the desired percentage. If this button is unset, you can enter separate values for both the width and height. Alternatively, type the required size of the object into the W or H text boxes.
Perimeter & Area The 2 controls on the right of the Selector tool infobar show the perimeter and area of the current selected shape(s). Perimeter is shown in the current units for the document and area is shown in the current units squared. These fields are not editable.
Flipping objects This is part of the Selector Tool. Clicking on the Flip buttons flips the object vertically or horizontally around the transformation center. The scale and aspect ratio do not change; the object just flips.
Snapping Snapping makes it easier to position edges, or specific points on objects, exactly where required. It can be used to align edges to a specific point or line, or to evenly space objects, using the grid. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 offers three types of snapping. Snap to grid Magnetic snapping (snap to objects) Snap to guidelines or guide objects Grid snap is useful for making objects evenly spaced, or making the sizes exact multiples of a given value.
that it partly overlaps the inside of the shape and partially goes outside). With scale line widths on, the width of the outline is deemed to be important and so 'snap to grid' will snap the bounds of objects, including outlines, to the grid. Snap to objects will allow you to snap using the bounds or the outline center lines. If the outlines as they appear on screen are small, so there is little difference between these two snapping positions, bounds snaps are favored.
over different background colors. The snapping distance is controlled by the Mouse tab of the Options dialog box ("Utilities" > " Options" or right click a page and choose Page Options ). You can specify two snap distances in the "Magetic snap radii" section, which control how close things need to be before they will snap together. The size of a circle around points (point) and the distance either side of lines (lines).
Angled snapping Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is not restricted to axis-aligned snapping. With Angled snapping turned on, the snapping system can snap parallel lines, whatever their alignment, and find the intersections between crossing line constraints. So for example you can snap the edge of a shape that runs at 30º with the edge of another running at the same angle. Angled snapping is not on by default, because in most cases it's not useful.
Snap to grid When Snap to Grid is selected, grid points act like magnets. Right click on the pasteboard and choose "Snap to" > "Snap to Grid" or use the menu option "Window" > "Snap to grid", (or press "." (decimal point) on the numeric keypad). You can control the grid spacing from the options dialog (right click and choose Page Options or use the menu command "Utilities" > "Options ") on the Grid and Ruler tab.
Magnetic object snapping (snap to objects) Magnetic object snapping makes it much easier to accurately position objects relative to each other or relative to the page center or edges. So, for example, if you want several lines to start at exactly the same point, or want a line to exactly join the edge of a circle, then using "magnetic object snap" is useful.
You can specify two snap distances in the "Magetic snap radii" section, which control how close things need to be before they will snap together. The size of a circle around points (point) and the distance either side of lines (lines). It's usually best to make the point value larger than the line value, so that it's easier to snap to the end points of lines. Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer has full details of the Options dialog.
between crossing line constraints. So for example you can snap the edge of a shape that runs at 30º with the edge of another running at the same angle. Angled snapping is not on by default, because in most cases it's not useful. To activate it while dragging, simply press the 'A' (for Angle) key. Press again to turn off. Snapping notes Note : Only the objects that are fully or partly visible in the current view are considered for snapping. You cannot snap to objects outside the view (except the page).
Snapping and line widths The Scale line widths control on the Selector Tool InfoBar affects whether snapping happens to the bounds of objects including their outlines. The above example shows a shape with a very thick gray outline. It also shows (thin black line) the outline of the shape itself (you can see the thick outline is drawn equally on either side of the center line so that it partly overlaps the inside of the shape and partially goes outside).
Snap indicators are shown whenever a snap occurs. That is whenever a point of interest on the object you are dragging comes in range of a point of interest in the document (which could be on another object or be part of the page). Photo & Graphic Designer snaps to the point of interest and the mouse pointer changes to show a magnet symbol so you know a snap has happened. Also further indications are shown dynamically on screen to help you see what snap has occurred.
A contribute to snapping just as if they were not grouped. Angled snapping. See Angled snapping below. Snapping to original position When 'snap to objects' is on and you drag an object to move it, the bounding box of the original position of the object is indicated by a red dashed rectangle. This also contributes to snapping making it easy for you to (for example) move an object in one dimension only. However note that you can also constrain the angle of any drag by holding down "Ctrl" while you drag.
Magnetic object snapping (snap to objects) Magnetic object snapping makes it much easier to accurately position objects relative to each other or relative to the page center or edges. So, for example, if you want several lines to start at exactly the same point, or want a line to exactly join the edge of a circle, then using "magnetic object snap" is useful.
You can specify two snap distances in the "Magetic snap radii" section, which control how close things need to be before they will snap together. The size of a circle around points (point) and the distance either side of lines (lines). It's usually best to make the point value larger than the line value, so that it's easier to snap to the end points of lines. Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer has full details of the Options dialog.
between crossing line constraints. So for example you can snap the edge of a shape that runs at 30º with the edge of another running at the same angle. Angled snapping is not on by default, because in most cases it's not useful. To activate it while dragging, simply press the 'A' (for Angle) key. Press again to turn off. Snapping notes Note : Only the objects that are fully or partly visible in the current view are considered for snapping. You cannot snap to objects outside the view (except the page).
Snapping modes You can change the behavior of snap to objects while dragging by tapping a key to toggle different modes on and off. These mode changes are effective only for the duration of the current drag. S Toggle 'snap to objects' on and off. This temporarily overrides the Windows->Snap to objects setting. G Group snapping.
Guide Objects and Guidelines Guide objects and guidelines are objects on a special layer, the guides layer. A guide layer is automatically created when you create a guideline (see below), or you can create one manually by right clicking in the Page & Layer Gallery and selecting Create Guide Layer (see "Page & Layer Gallery " for more information on layers). Use Snap to guides in the Window menu (or key 2 on the numeric keypad) to turn on snapping to guide objects.
4. Click new. 5. Type in the required position. Deleting a guideline Using the Selector Tool drag the guideline onto the appropriate ruler (the vertical ruler for vertical guidelines, horizontal ruler for horizontal). Or, right click on the guideline and then choose Delete .
Placing objects onto the Guides Layer First ensure there is a guide layer in the Page & Layer Gallery, see above. You can create objects directly on the guides layer by selecting it and creating objects as usual. You can also cut or copy objects from another layer and then paste those objects into the guides layer. To paste the objects in the same relative position on the guides layer use the keyboard shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + V".
Creating a guideline Guidelines are vertical or horizontal lines and are a quick and easy way to align a series of objects on the page. Turn rulers on ("Ctrl + L"). Drag from a ruler onto the page. Or Double click on the ruler to create a guideline aligned to the click point. This automatically creates a guides layer and puts the guidelines on that layer. Or, using the Page & Layer Gallery : 1. Right click in the Page & Layer Gallery and choose Properties. 2. If necessary, click the Guides tab. 3.
Deleting a guideline Using the Selector Tool drag the guideline onto the appropriate ruler (the vertical ruler for vertical guidelines, horizontal ruler for horizontal). Or, right click on the guideline and then choose Delete .
Summary of shortcuts on the numeric keypad + / * 2 . Makes a copy while dragging, resizing, skewing, and so on. The original object doesn't change. Toggles leaving line widths unchanged during scaling and scaling with changing line widths. Toggles leaving fills unchanged during moves, scaling, skewing, etc. Toggles object magnetic snap on and off. Toggles snap to guides on and off. Toggles snap to grid on and off.
Grouping and ungrouping objects The Shadow and Transparency Tools offer different results depending on whether objects are grouped or not. For more information see "Transparency" and "Shadows ". You will often create complex shapes from several different objects. The "Arrange" > "Group" menu option (or right click selected objects and choose Group ) lets you lock those objects together to form what appears as a single object.
nearest the front. The Page & Layer Gallery shows you the structure of a group. Expand the group node in the Page & Layer Gallery to see the members of the group in the gallery, in their stacking order. If you want to group objects together while keeping them on different layers, use a Soft Group instead of a Group. See the Soft Groups (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) section of this chapter for details.
To create a group 1. Select all the objects you want in the group. 2. Right click and choose Group or choose Group from the Arrange menu (or "Ctrl + G") to create the group. Ungrouping objects 1. Select the group. 2. Right click and choose Ungroup or choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu (or "Ctrl + U"). After this, all the individual objects in the group remain selected. To add more objects to a group 1. Select the group. 2. Ungroup ("Ctrl + U") 3. Select the extra objects. 4.
Ungrouping objects 1. Select the group. 2. Right click and choose Ungroup or choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu (or "Ctrl + U"). After this, all the individual objects in the group remain selected. To add more objects to a group 1. Select the group. 2. Ungroup ("Ctrl + U") 3. Select the extra objects. 4. Group again ("Ctrl + G") You can also incorporate a group into a second group by omitting step 2. Photo & Graphic Designer remembers the original grouping information.
To add more objects to a group 1. Select the group. 2. Ungroup ("Ctrl + U") 3. Select the extra objects. 4. Group again ("Ctrl + G") You can also incorporate a group into a second group by omitting step 2. Photo & Graphic Designer remembers the original grouping information. If you ungroup the objects later, the original group remains. Removing objects from a group 1. Ungroup the objects. 2. "Shift + click" on the objects you want to remove. This deselects them; the other objects remain selected.
Removing objects from a group 1. Ungroup the objects. 2. "Shift + click" on the objects you want to remove. This deselects them; the other objects remain selected. You can then choose "Arrange" > "Group " to regroup the remaining objects. Selecting a single object from within a group This feature is useful for changing an object's color, for example. "Ctrl + click" on the object (you can also use this to select a "group within a group").
Selecting a single object from within a group This feature is useful for changing an object's color, for example. "Ctrl + click" on the object (you can also use this to select a "group within a group"). Pressing "Tab", or "Shift + Tab" moves the selection within the group, to the next, or previous object. Once you have selected an object inside a group, you can also use "Alt + click" to select the object under the selected one. This is called "select inside".
Groups and layers There's more about layers in "Page & Layer Gallery ". If all the objects to be grouped are in one layer, the group is created in that layer. The group is at the level of the highest member of the group, i.e. the group does not automatically become the front object. If the objects are in more than one layer, then the group is created in the layer containing the object nearest the front. The Page & Layer Gallery shows you the structure of a group.
Photo Groups Photo Groups are very similar to groups, except that they are made up of a base photo object plus any number of other objects on top, and they are can be treated as if they were ordinary photos by most Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 tools. Photo Groups are used to keep a photo together with one or more vector objects which modify it in some way.
Editing inside groups If you want to edit the objects inside a group, there are broadly two ways to approach this. You can either select the objects inside the group and work on them directly in your document, or you can double click on the group to open its contents in a separate document view. Selecting inside If you hold down Ctrl and click on an object in the Selector tool, that object will be selected even if it's inside one or more groups. That's called a "select inside" operation.
Groups cannot contain layers and so if you introduce any layers while editing a group, those layers will be 'flattened' when you save the changes back to the parent document. In other words all the objects will be moved to the original single layer on save and any layer structure you introduced lost. Similarly a group can't contain multiple pages and so any pages you add while editing will be ignored and lost when you save back ? only the first page is relevant.
Editing group contents If you want to edit several objects inside a group, it can get tedious having to keep Ctrl+clicking on each one first. So instead you can instantly open the group's contents in a separate sub-document view, to make editing much easier. Double click on a group and a new document view opens (or right click on it and choose Open from the context menu).
the parent document is saved to the backup folder and the program closed down. So when you next start the program, the main document will be loaded and it will include all the group edits that were unsaved at the time of closure.
Other types of groups Special types of groups are used by some tools and functions to keep objects together and/or to give an object some special behavior. When you anchor an object to text for example, the object is placed in an Anchored Group, as shown on the status line when you select such an object. Similarly when you make an object repeating (see Repeating Objects ) the objects are placed inside a "Repeating group".
Soft Groups Ordinary Groups as described in "Grouping and ungrouping objects" sit on a single layer, they cannot span layers. Soft Groups are an alternative way of linking objects together where the objects can be across several different layers. Selecting one member of a Soft Group also selects all other members of the same Soft Group ? even members that are on invisible or locked layers.
Creating Soft Groups To create a Soft Group, select all the objects that are to be included in it and then choose " Arrange->Apply soft group " (or press "Ctrl+Alt+G"). Note that if the Soft Group is to include members on invisible or locked layers, you'll need to make those layers temporarily visible and editable using the Page & Layer Gallery in order to select the objects and Soft Group them.
Removing Soft Groups To disband a Soft Group, select it and choose "Arrange" > "Remove soft group " (or press "Ctrl + Alt +U"). The objects don't get deleted, they are just no longer linked together by a Soft Group. Text Synchronization In some circumstances text objects in a soft group are kept synchronized so that if you edit the text of one, the others update too.
Text Synchronization In some circumstances text objects in a soft group are kept synchronized so that if you edit the text of one, the others update too. This feature was added before support for Live Copies was introduced and Live Copies are much more flexible and powerful, so this feature is less useful than it used to be.
Alignment This lets you accurately align or distribute two or more objects. Quick aligning Select the objects you want to align, and right click the selection to choose Align from the drop-down menu, and then do one of the following: Align the objects vertically by choosing Left edges, Centers or Right edges. Align the objects horizontally by choosing Top edges, Centers or Bottom edges.
Bounds of Back object : The boundaries are the outer edges of the backmost selected object. This object is not affected by the alignment. You can use this to define the "reference" object when you want to align several objects in a row, for instance. With the normal "Selection bounds" options on the leftmost object is the reference object (the one that won't move) Page(s): If the objects are on a single page, the boundaries are the edges of the page.
vertical position options align objects: Top edges distribution: the tops of the objects are evenly spaced. Bottom edges distribution is the inverse?the bottom of the objects are evenly spaced. Centers distribution : the centers of the objects are evenly spaced. Equi-spaced distribution: the objects are evenly spaced from each other. The horizontal position options are similar but operate in the horizontal direction.
Within This section of the dialog controls the boundaries within which you align or distribute the objects. The options are: Selection bounds : The boundaries are the outer edges of the selected objects. Their relative position on the page or spread has no effect. Bounds of Back object : The boundaries are the outer edges of the backmost selected object. This object is not affected by the alignment.
"Ctrl + mouse click" leaves the horizontal position unchanged and arranges the objects in a to a top, centrally, or bottom aligned row. "ñ+ mouse click" leaves the vertical position unchanged and arranges the objects in a left, centrally, or right-aligned column. Distribute The distribute options will position all the selected objects evenly across the "Within" area (usually within the selection bounds, but it could be the page or spread). Again all the distribute options work in a similar way.
Aligning To align objects, for example, so their left edges are aligned to the left. 1. Select the objects and right click the selection. 2. Choose "Align" > "Left Edges" from the drop-down list. The selected objects move to align the left edges. Alternatively: 1. Choose "Align" > "Alignment" or press "Ctrl + Shift + L" or choose Alignment from the Arrange menu to open the Object Alignment dialog. 2. Select the required Within option, e.g. Selection bounds. 3. Select Align Left for horizontal positions. 4.
Select Horizontal positions: Distribute centers Select Vertical position: Align top Click Apply And they will now look like this, all equally spaced horizontally and aligned to the top. Remember if you make a mistake you can always undo the operation.
Distribute The distribute options will position all the selected objects evenly across the "Within" area (usually within the selection bounds, but it could be the page or spread). Again all the distribute options work in a similar way. The following examples show how the different vertical position options align objects: Top edges distribution: the tops of the objects are evenly spaced. Bottom edges distribution is the inverse?the bottom of the objects are evenly spaced.
Copying Styles: Paste Attributes This lets you copy attributes (such as line pattern or fill color) between objects. It is a quick way of applying multiple attributes to an object. The square has a specific color, shadow, line and fill style. Copying it and then pasting its attributes on to the circle in the middle, results in the circle to the right. 1. Select the object from which you wish to copy the attributes. 2. Copy the selection to the clipboard. ("Edit" > "Copy", or "Ctrl + C".) 3.
ClipView ClipView lets you hide or 'clip' parts of a shape within another larger shape. The effect is similar to the Intersect shapes option, described in the chapter on Shape handling . The difference is that the Intersect shapes option actually cuts the objects, whereas ClipView just hides the parts outside the ClipView object. What's more you can then adjust the position of the objects inside the ClipView. To create a ClipView: 1. The 'window' object must be behind the other objects in the ClipView.
Removing a ClipView Just select the object and the menu "Arrange -> Remove ClipView", or press "Alt + Q". Soft edged ClipView With the whole ClipView object selected, you can adjust the Feather slider control on the top bar, to give the whole clipped object a soft feathered edge. Note : You can have ClipView objects inside ClipView objects.
Setting the ClipView background color The fill color of the original object used as the ClipView is the background color. So either set this to the desired color before setting the ClipView or perform a "select inside" ("Ctrl + click") on the background, and then adjust the color. Selecting different parts of a clipview There are 3 ways to select a clipview in order to manipulate it or its contents. You can select the whole clipview object, just the clipping object, or the objects being clipped.
Selecting different parts of a clipview There are 3 ways to select a clipview in order to manipulate it or its contents. You can select the whole clipview object, just the clipping object, or the objects being clipped. If you just click on the clipview, the whole clipview object is selected and you can delete, move or otherwise transform it just like any other object using the Selector Tool. Right click on the clipview and the context menu that appears has two more selection options.
Select clipping shape This selects only the shape that you used to do the clipping. Effectively this is the 'window' through which you see the other object(s) in the clipview. Once it's selected you can move it around or otherwise transform it, to adjust your clipview. Select clipped objects This selects all the objects in the clipview that are being clipped. Therefore once these are selected, you can drag them around inside the clipview to adjust their position relative to the clipping shape.
Select clipped objects This selects all the objects in the clipview that are being clipped. Therefore once these are selected, you can drag them around inside the clipview to adjust their position relative to the clipping shape. Selecting objects in the Clipview You can perform a "select inside" by holding "Ctrl" and clicking on the desired object. This is very like selecting objects inside a group described earlier in this chapter (ClipView objects are a type of group).
Selecting objects in the Clipview You can perform a "select inside" by holding "Ctrl" and clicking on the desired object. This is very like selecting objects inside a group described earlier in this chapter (ClipView objects are a type of group). You can now perform most edit operations on the object. Removing a ClipView Just select the object and the menu "Arrange -> Remove ClipView", or press "Alt + Q".
Removing a ClipView Just select the object and the menu "Arrange -> Remove ClipView", or press "Alt + Q". Soft edged ClipView With the whole ClipView object selected, you can adjust the Feather slider control on the top bar, to give the whole clipped object a soft feathered edge. Note : You can have ClipView objects inside ClipView objects.
Soft edged ClipView With the whole ClipView object selected, you can adjust the Feather slider control on the top bar, to give the whole clipped object a soft feathered edge. Note : You can have ClipView objects inside ClipView objects.
Repeating Objects It's common to have items like navigation buttons, headers or logos repeating on all pages of your website. Or to have the same logo, header or footer on each page of a printable document. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides the ability to repeat any item in the same place across any of your pages in a document. When you update one of the copies, Photo & Graphic Designer automatically replicates those changes across all pages.
containing 'repeating group', similar to a normal group. If you drill down to a layer containing a repeating object in the Page & Layer Gallery , you can see that there's a repeating group containing each repeating object on that layer. Photo & Graphic Designer places each repeating object inside a repeating group If you want to edit an item inside this repeating group, press "Ctrl + click" on the item to select it inside the repeating group.
choosing "Repeat position" > "Top" or "Repeat position" > "Bottom". To restore normal automatic positioning behavior to a repeating object, right click it and choose " Repeat position" > "Automatic" . Stopping objects repeating Right click an object and choose Stop updating to turn off the repeating nature of an object, or all of its copies in your website. Choosing Stop updating from the Arrange menu also allows this.
Editing the contents of a repeating object When Photo & Graphic Designer creates a repeating object, the repeating items are placed in a containing 'repeating group', similar to a normal group. If you drill down to a layer containing a repeating object in the Page & Layer Gallery , you can see that there's a repeating group containing each repeating object on that layer.
For some repeating objects, this automatic decision making about whether the object should be positioned relative to the top or bottom of pages may be inappropriate. So if required you can force any repeating object to be positioned relative to the top or bottom of pages by right clicking on it and choosing "Repeat position" > "Top" or "Repeat position" > "Bottom". To restore normal automatic positioning behavior to a repeating object, right click it and choose " Repeat position" > "Automatic" .
Headers/Footers You may have pages in your site of varying lengths and want some repeating objects to be positioned relative to the top of each page and others (e.g. footers) positioned relative to the bottom of each page. You can configure Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to do this, so header and footer repeating objects will move with respect to the top and bottom of each page. The position of a repeating object on the page determines whether it is considered to be a header or footer.
Stopping objects repeating Right click an object and choose Stop updating to turn off the repeating nature of an object, or all of its copies in your website. Choosing Stop updating from the Arrange menu also allows this. You'll be asked whether you want to just stop the selected object repeating or all copies of the object in the website. Choose the All option. Now the different copies of that object can be independently edited and the next time one is changed it won't update any of them.
Deleting repeating objects If you don't want a copy of the repeating object on a page, just delete it from that page. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 displays a prompt asking whether to delete just that copy or all copies of that repeating object. Pressing "Ctrl + Delete" will delete just the selected repeating object without asking whether you want to delete all instances or just this one.
Shape Handling In this chapter Closing a shape Joining shapes Combining shapes Creating regular polygons (the Quickshape Tool) Creating stars (polygons with indented sides) Editing stars Creating rectangles and squares Creating circles and ellipses Making shapes editable Page 480
Closing a shape A shape is a closed object with no start or end handle. Only shapes can be color filled. To close a shape: 1. Create an open object with the end point handle close to the start handle. All the point handles (except the end handle) should be in their required positions. 2. Position the pointer over the end handle. 3. Drag the end handle over the start handle and release the mouse button. The two handles snap together. Or: 1.
Closing a freehand shape You can directly create a closed shape by ending a line back at the beginning over the start handle. A + by the pointer shows when it is positioned over the start handle.
Joining shapes "Arrange -> Join shapes" lets you create holes in solid shapes. Because overlapping parts of the same shape are drawn with no fill color (i.e. you can see through the overlapping parts), you can use this effect to create holes in shapes but retain the ability to break them apart later. For example, to create a donut shape: 1. Create an ellipse (described later). 2. Create a second ellipse over the first. (The color of the second ellipse has been changed to make it obvious.) 3. Select both. 4.
Breaking joined shapes Choose "Arrange -> Break shapes". This breaks the joined shape into separate objects, but the original attributes will not be restored to the separated objects. You can also break several joined shapes in one operation.
Combining shapes The Combine shapes option (select the objects, right click and choose Combine shapes ) provides you with a range of advanced options to combine shapes to make new shapes, such as adding, cutting, or slicing. You can use combine shapes on any type of object, including bitmaps. When subtracting, intersecting and slicing, you can either use the topmost selected shape to do the "cutting" of the lower shapes, or you can use a mask.
For example, to produce the shape on the right from the three shapes on the left: 1. Create the two circles and the rectangle. 2. Select all three shapes. 3. Right click and choose "Combine shapes" > "Add shapes". The new shape takes line attributes and colors from the top shape (in this case the rectangle in the illustration).
Creating holes in shapes Right click and choose "Combine shapes" > "Subtract shapes" . This is similar to using join shapes (described above). The differences are: The top shape (or mask shape if the mask layer is used) becomes a hole through the other shapes. The line attributes and colors of the underlying shapes are unchanged. Combine shapes physically alters the lines. The only way to restore the original shapes is by using undo. The number of overlapping shapes has no effect.
Slicing shapes Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 lets you easily slice shapes into two or more pieces, and you can use either a solid object or a line for slicing. For example, to cut a segment from a circle: 1. Create a circle and put a triangle on top or on the mask layer. 2. Select them both (not required if using the mask layer). 3. Right click and choose "Combine shapes" > "Slice (cut) shapes". The edges of the triangle cut the circle into two shapes. The triangle disappears. 4.
Merging several shapes into one For example, to produce the shape on the right from the three shapes on the left: 1. Create the two circles and the rectangle. 2. Select all three shapes. 3. Right click and choose "Combine shapes" > "Add shapes". The new shape takes line attributes and colors from the top shape (in this case the rectangle in the illustration).
Intersecting shapes With intersecting shapes , the new object is created from those parts of lower shapes that are covered by the top object, or by the mask shape on the mask layer. Select the shapes you want to mask and the front (mask) shape. Or put the mask shape on the mask layer using mask mode. Right click and choose "Combine shapes" -> "Intersect shapes" . This creates a new shape. The top shape or mask disappears. The line attributes and colors of the underlying shapes are unchanged.
Slicing shapes Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 lets you easily slice shapes into two or more pieces, and you can use either a solid object or a line for slicing. For example, to cut a segment from a circle: 1. Create a circle and put a triangle on top or on the mask layer. 2. Select them both (not required if using the mask layer). 3. Right click and choose "Combine shapes" > "Slice (cut) shapes". The edges of the triangle cut the circle into two shapes. The triangle disappears. 4.
Creating regular polygons (the Quickshape Tool) The Quickshape Tool lets you quickly create almost any regular, symmetrical shape with sharp or rounded corners. You can then drag the edges to bend the sides, and at any time you can change the number of sides or make the object an ellipse, a polygon, or a star. Creation Modes: Radius/Diameter/Bounds Polygon Ellipse Stellate Round corners Restore edges Number of sides Editable items menu Editing fields 1. Select the Quickshape Tool ("Shift + F2"). 2.
Or double click a control handle. Editing a polygon The Selector Tool lets you move, rotate, resize, and skew a polygon as normal (the Selector Tool is described in Object handling .) Using the Quickshape Tool, you can resize or rotate: Drag the corner handles. Or select Size & rotation in the Editable Items menu. Type the required values into the text boxes. Size Rotation You can also nudge the values using the buttons to the right. To move: Drag the handle in the center of the polygon.
Polygons with rounded corners Select the Round corners button or double click on a corner point. The polygon has extra handles (radius handles) where the rounding starts. To increase or decrease the radius, drag any of the radius handles. To remove the round corners: Click the Round corners button. Or double click a control handle. Editing a polygon The Selector Tool lets you move, rotate, resize, and skew a polygon as normal (the Selector Tool is described in Object handling .
Change the number of sides by typing the number into the menu or selecting from it.
Editing a polygon The Selector Tool lets you move, rotate, resize, and skew a polygon as normal (the Selector Tool is described in Object handling .) Using the Quickshape Tool, you can resize or rotate: Drag the corner handles. Or select Size & rotation in the Editable Items menu. Type the required values into the text boxes. Size Rotation You can also nudge the values using the buttons to the right. To move: Drag the handle in the center of the polygon. Or use the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Creating stars (polygons with indented sides) Select the Quickshape Tool. To create a star or to make the selected polygon stellated: Stellated/stellation = star shaped. Select the Starred Shapes button . Or double click on a side. Left: polygon with starred off. Right : starred on. Removing stellation Click the starred shapes button. Or double click on the star handle. Note : double click on the star handle, not the control handle.
Removing stellation Click the starred shapes button. Or double click on the star handle. Note : double click on the star handle, not the control handle.
Editing stars You can edit stars in the same ways as ordinary polygons (described earlier). To increase or decrease the depth of stellation: Drag a star handle or select stellation radius & offset on the editable items menu. Type the required values into the text The original shape is on the left. boxes. Or drag the sides to make them curved: The original shape is on the left. You can also nudge the values using the buttons to the right.
Creating rectangles and squares To create a rectangle: Use the Rectangle Tool ("Shift + F3", or "M"). Click and drag on the canvas to draw a rectangle. Creating a square To create a square rather than a rectangle, hold down "Ctrl" while dragging. Creating and editing rounded corner rectangles To give your rectangle rounded corners, select it and then press the "Curved corners" button on the Rectangle Tool infobar.
Creating a square To create a square rather than a rectangle, hold down "Ctrl" while dragging. Creating and editing rounded corner rectangles To give your rectangle rounded corners, select it and then press the "Curved corners" button on the Rectangle Tool infobar. You can then drag on the selection handles shown on the corners to adjust the diameter of the rounded corners. You can resize rectangles using either the Rectangle Tool (by dragging on the handles shown at the corners) or the Selector Tool .
Creating and editing rounded corner rectangles To give your rectangle rounded corners, select it and then press the "Curved corners" button on the Rectangle Tool infobar. You can then drag on the selection handles shown on the corners to adjust the diameter of the rounded corners. You can resize rectangles using either the Rectangle Tool (by dragging on the handles shown at the corners) or the Selector Tool .
Creating circles and ellipses To create an ellipse or circle: Select the Ellipse Tool ("Shift + F4", or "L"). The Radius and diameter buttons automatically create circles. Radius Diameter Bounds creation With the Bounds creation button selected, drag on the canvas to draw an ellipse. Hold down "Ctrl" while dragging to create a circle rather than an ellipse. Select the Radius option to draw circles. The start point of a drag determines the circle's center. Select the Diameter option.
Making shapes editable Choose "Arrange -> Convert to editable shapes " ("Ctrl + Shift + S") to convert predefined objects like bitmaps and rectangles, ellipses, quickshapes, and text into shapes. This lets you edit their outline like a normal shape. This has several applications: You can manipulate just a part of predefined objects after making them editable. You can manipulate text in almost unlimited ways, adding new curves and ornamentation almost at will.
Distorting Objects In this chapter Stretching and squashing objects Skewing objects The Mold tool Feathering Page 505
Stretching and squashing objects This is similar to scaling objects except that the object is scaled in one direction only. Stretching and squashing are basically the same action ? stretching makes the object larger, squashing makes it smaller. Stretching/Squashing using the mouse The Selector Tool must be in scale mode. (The selection handles are squares.) If necessary, click on the object to change to scale mode. Drag one of the side handles.
Skewing objects This is part of the Selector Tool. Left is the original object, to the right with a horizontal skew Skewing using the mouse Switch the Selector Tool to rotate/skew mode. (The selection handles are arrow shaped) by clicking on the object. Drag a side arrow to skew the object. As you drag, the object skews in the direction of movement (vertical or horizontal). The InfoBar shows the current skew angle. "Shift + drag" to skew the object around its center.
The Mold tool The Mold Tool is used to distort shapes. It is used for both perspectivizing (that is, rotating in three dimensions) and enveloping (like distorting a rubber sheet). Mold tool InfoBar Mesh Remove mold Detach mold Rotate mold Copy mold Enveloping Paste envelope mold Perspectivizing Paste perspective mold The InfoBar contains two sets of preset mold shapes. Just click a button to apply the preset mold.
Perspective The Mold Tool lets you perspectivize shapes to give an impression of depth. You can perspectivize all types of objects including text and bitmaps. Note that bitmaps lose perspective if you later blend them or convert them to editable shapes. 1. Select the object or objects. 2. Select the Mold Tool (shortcut "Shift + F6"). 3. Choose one of the perspective options: The right-hand button (paste perspective) is described later.
Removing perspective Click Remove to remove perspective. If the selected object has more than one perspective or envelope mould applied, only the most recent mold is removed. Rotating the object within the mold Sometimes you will find that the mold is the correct shape but the object needs rotating within it. You can rotate the object by clicking the rotate object button.
Enveloping The Mold Tool lets you envelope shapes in a wide variety of ways. The effect is similar to a rubber sheet or balloon that you can stretch in any direction. You can envelope all types of objects except bitmaps. Sample enveloped text Enveloping is similar to applying perspective. That is: 1. Select the object or objects. 2. Select the Mold Tool (shortcut "Shift + F6"). 3. Choose one of the envelope options: The right-hand button is similar to paste perspective described earlier.
Editing mold shapes You can edit the contents of a mold (essentially a group) using editing inside groups. Editing is not possible using direct selection inside (molds do not allow objects inside them to become selected). To edit a mold inside, right click on the mold and choose Open mold from the context menu. You can edit the shape of envelope or perspective molds with the Shape Editor Tool (or the edit handles with Selector Tool , if shown).
Feathering Sometimes you want to blur the edges of an object so it blends, or fades, into a background object. This is called "feathering". An example is merging two bitmaps together when you want to avoid a sharp edge between them. The feather control is on the right side of the top bar. To feather an object: 1. 2. 2. 2. Select the object or objects you want to feather. Either enter a numeric size for the feather into the text box Or Click the arrow to show the pop-up slider.
Page & Layer Gallery In this chapter The Page & Layer Gallery Pages Layers Layer Operations Special Layers Objects Hiding Layers and Objects Locking Layers and Objects Solo Mode Show All & Unlock All Moving Objects Between Layers Page 514
The Page & Layer Gallery By default the Page & Layer Gallery is displayed open on the right hand side of the Photo & Graphic Designer window when you open or create a new document. If you prefer, you can unpin, move, dock or close the gallery - see Galleries for more information. If you have previously closed the Page & Layer Gallery, which is open by default, you can reopen it by clicking the Page & Layer Gallery tab on the Galleries bar, or press F10.
another. (Note this is only supported for ordinary groups, not anchored or repeating groups for example). In addition the Page & Layer Gallery shows a thumbnail of each page and a tiny thumbnail of each item on the page. Hover the mouse pointer over an item to view a larger thumbnail. This shows the MouseOff layer has been expanded to show the contents of that layer. This shows a navbar group and other various groups, text line and text column items, and a couple of shadow group items.
Hovering the mouse pointer over the tiny thumbnails will display a larger one so you can easily identify each object on the page. Note the right two columns indicate (and control) whether the items are editable (a pale arrow) or locked (padlock icon) and whether they are visible on the page (pale open eye icon) or hidden (darker closed icon). Clicking on these icons will change the visibility and / or the locked or editable nature of each object.
Pages Clicking the Pages button on the top of the Page & Layer Gallery (or right clicking in the gallery and choosing Show page level ) will open pages mode, displaying only the pages in the document and collapsing all other opened levels. When in pages mode and the gallery is docked, the width of the gallery is reduced to its minimum, to take up as little space as possible. Also the number of buttons at the top of the gallery is cut down to just those applicable to pages.
Layers Everything in your document has a stacking order but with more complex documents that have dozens, maybe hundreds or thousands of items, your work area can be become cluttered. Using layers you can group a collection of items together and then turn the whole collection on or off (make it visible or hidden) in one easy operation. Layers can be made invisible, to hide parts of your document. You can give layers names, and you can easily create new layers or delete them.
This example Page & Layer Gallery shows the current layer is called MouseOff (the current page is called news). So if you draw anything new it will be placed on the MouseOff layer. It also shows a shadow group item selected in the document (highlighted in blue) inside another group which is on a completely different layer called Holiday photo 2. Four layers are hidden (called Holiday photo 4, Holiday photo 3, Holiday photo 1 and MouseOver). The 'Page background' layer is locked.
making it the current layer does not normally change its visible or locked state. But there is a preference in the General tab of the Options dialog (right click a page and choose Page Options or choose Options from the Utilities menu) to make the current layers always visible and editable (unlocked). If you select this option then whenever you select any layer in the Page & Layer Gallery it's made visible and unlocked.
The Current Layer When you create any new object on the page, it's placed in one of the layers, called the active layer or simply the current layer. On a blank document this will either just be called Layer 1 or, in the case of web documents, it's called MouseOff. The current layer is shown with a selection arrow . Important: All new drawn items, shapes, photos, text, and all pasted items, are placed on the current layer marked with the symbol.
This example Page & Layer Gallery shows the current layer is called MouseOff (the current page is called news). So if you draw anything new it will be placed on the MouseOff layer. It also shows a shadow group item selected in the document (highlighted in blue) inside another group which is on a completely different layer called Holiday photo 2. Four layers are hidden (called Holiday photo 4, Holiday photo 3, Holiday photo 1 and MouseOver). The 'Page background' layer is locked.
making it the current layer does not normally change its visible or locked state. But there is a preference in the General tab of the Options dialog (right click a page and choose Page Options or choose Options from the Utilities menu) to make the current layers always visible and editable (unlocked). If you select this option then whenever you select any layer in the Page & Layer Gallery it's made visible and unlocked.
Layers on websites In websites saved from Photo & Graphic Designer, layers are used for mouseover or pop-up effects (in the web browser the contents of these layers are displayed when you click on or move over items on the page). You can find more details on this in the Web Graphics and Web Sites chapter in the Layers, Mouseover (Rollover) & Pop-ups section. Layers in PDF documents Layers are useful for producing overlays.
Layers in PDF documents Layers are useful for producing overlays. For example on a floor plan of a building, you might have overlays showing the fire points, power outlets or wiring. By putting such items on named layers you can easily show or hide them. When saving a document as a PDF , you can select to enable layers in your PDF document, and so then using the Layers control in PDF reader you can turn the layers on or off.
Soft Groups and Layers Soft Groups (Soft Groups, Soft Groups) are unusual because they are groups of objects that can span different layers. (Normal groups have to be contained within one layer). When you select any part of a soft group the other parts are also selected, even if they are on hidden or locked layers.
Layer Operations Clicking the Layers button on the top of the Page & Layer Gallery (or right clicking in the gallery and choosing Layer Mode) will display only the layers on the current page. This is a mode - the Layers button stays depressed. While in layers mode, as you move to different pages the layers for the current page are always shown and all other page nodes are collapsed. Click the Layers button (or right click and choose Layer Mode ) again to turn off layers mode.
Using the Layer tab you can: Create a new layer or edit an existing one. Make the layer editable and visible by default. Define the layer as a web page background that will not appear when printed. Specify that all objects in the layer will only repel text objects within the same layer. This prevents text on the layer being repelled by objects in other layers and is useful for popup layers in web pages.
Layer Properties This opens the Layer Properties dialog. Creating layers and editing layer properties Using the Layer tab you can: Create a new layer or edit an existing one. Make the layer editable and visible by default. Define the layer as a web page background that will not appear when printed. Specify that all objects in the layer will only repel text objects within the same layer.
Note: The Presentation layer checkbox is only enabled if you are in a presentation document. To convert a web document into a presentation document, see Web Presentations. Using this tab you can apply animated transition effects to a layer, if it's used as a pop-up layer on a web page, or if it's a presentation layer. The layer then appears with the transition effect when it's revealed in the exported web page. Use the slider to set a transition time from 0-5 seconds.
Special Layers There are several special types of layer. They appear in the Page & Layer Gallery and can be turned on and off as usual, but behave slightly differently. Background Layers are non-printing layers that appear at the bottom of the document, under everything else. When you apply a color to the page background (drag and drop color from the color line) this will create a Page background layer automatically. Normally this is locked.
Objects Inside each layer (sometimes we just say 'on' the layer) are all the items that make up your document; lines, shapes, text, photos, etc. By expanding the layer level the usual way (click the icon) you are presented with a list of all objects in the same order they appear on the page, top to bottom. Because new objects are always placed in front of (on top of) all other objects on the current layer, they will appear at the top of the list.
Each of these effects creates a new object attached to the original item. For example when you apply a shadow to a shape, really what's happening is that a separate shadow object is created and tightly grouped with the shape - so they are permanently attached to each other. The same applies to a bevel and contour. In the Page & Layer Gallery these items are shown as Shadow Group, Bevel Group or Contour Group.
Shadows, Bevels & Contours Each of these effects creates a new object attached to the original item. For example when you apply a shadow to a shape, really what's happening is that a separate shadow object is created and tightly grouped with the shape - so they are permanently attached to each other. The same applies to a bevel and contour. In the Page & Layer Gallery these items are shown as Shadow Group, Bevel Group or Contour Group.
Finding Objects With any item selected on the page, click the Locate button on the top of the Page & Layer Gallery to locate the item in the gallery. Hiding Layers and Objects The rightmost two columns of icons in the Page & Layer Gallery control the visibility and locking of layers and all objects on the page. Clicking on the open eye icon will hide the layer or object on the page, and the icon will turn to a closed eye . Clicking again will revert the layer or object to be visible.
Hiding Layers and Objects The rightmost two columns of icons in the Page & Layer Gallery control the visibility and locking of layers and all objects on the page. Clicking on the open eye icon will hide the layer or object on the page, and the icon will turn to a closed eye . Clicking again will revert the layer or object to be visible. When any item is hidden, it becomes invisible on the page and can no longer be seen or selected. The way to get hidden items back is to click its closed eye icon.
Locking Layers and Objects Clicking the open padlock icon on the right end of an object or layer row will lock the layer or object (icon changes to a closed padlock ). Now you cannot select this object or any object on that layer. Any clicks on locked items will go straight through it, as if it's not there, and select items underneath. Clicking the padlock icon will unlock that object or layer again. Alternatively you can click the More.. button and select the Unlock all on page option.
Solo Mode If you click any of the icons in the column next to each layer, it will 'solo' this layer which means it hides everything else, except this layer. You can now work on this layer in isolation. Clicking the icon again will restore everything back to how it was before. You can also click and drag down the column of icons to quickly browse through the layers in isolation from everything else. To exit the Solo mode, click the button again.
Show All & Unlock All These two controls on the top of the Page & Layer Gallery are a short-cut to show all items on the current page or unlock all items. They are a temporary override of all the individual object and layer settings. Clicking the controls again will restore the previous state. So this is a quick way of showing or unlocking everything, on all layers, performing some operation, and then restoring the previous state.
Moving Objects Between Layers There are several ways to move objects between layers. First select the object or objects you want to move, then; Cut the object ("Ctrl + X" or right click and Cut). Ensure the target layer is the current layer (shown with , click the layer if it's not) and then right click and choose Paste or Paste in Place . Note that if you cut or copy multiple items that are on different layers, the layer structure is preserved when you paste.
Color Handling Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 gives wide control over applying, creating and altering the colors of objects. For simple documents, you can just choose colors from the on-screen color palette, the Color Line. More advanced color operations are described later.
The color line The Color Line is displayed at the bottom of the window. It shows you the current fill and line colors, provides access to the color editor and provides a palette of pre-defined colors including a special "no color". Color swatch: The outer part of the color swatch on the left-hand end of the Color Line shows the line color and the center shows the fill color. These are the colors of any selected objects, or the current color attributes if no objects are selected.
rounded rectangles, so it's much easier to distinguish which are normal independent Named Colors and which are linked to a parent. See Creating a Tint, Shade or Linked color . Palette colors: There are 46 pre-defined palette colors. There are 5 shades of 7 standard hues and 10 shades of grey, black and white. Palette colors are not editable (i.e they are not Named Colors) and are designed as a simple, limited selection of colors to apply to objects (either by dragging on to the object or clicking).
Colors on the color line Named (Theme) Colors: First comes the Named Colors (if present in the document, see below). Named colors are used to give templates and designs theme colors, so that the color scheme of a design can easily be changed without editing every object in it individually. Linked Colors are represented differently on the color line by smaller rounded rectangles, so it's much easier to distinguish which are normal independent Named Colors and which are linked to a parent.
color / Set contone light color. See Bitmap coloring for more information. When right clicking the "no color" swatch, the fill and line color options are replaced by: Clear fill color / Clear line color . This sets the selected object's relative attributes to "no color". When applied to a contoned photo/bitmap, this restores the original image colors.
Re-ordering colors on the color line Only named colors can be re-arranged on the Color Line. "Ctrl + drag" colors along the Color Line. This also reorders the Color Gallery .
Color line context menu Right click on a color on the Color Line to show a context sensitive menu with the following options: Edit Opens the color editor with the selected color (not available for palette colors) Set fill color / Set line Set the fill or line color of the selected object with color this color Rename Rename a named color (not available for palette colors) Delete Delete a named color (not available for palette colors) If the selected object is a bitmap, the fill and line color options are rep
Applying fill & line colors by drag & drop To apply a fill color to an object (selected or unselected), drag a color from the Color Line and drop it into the center of the shape. Alternatively right click and choose Fill color to display the color editor. To set the line or outline color, drop it on the line, not the center. To change the current fill color, drag a color into a blank space. To change the page background color, "Ctrl + drag" a color onto the page background.
Editing an object’s color To edit the fill color of the selected object(s): Choose "Utilities" > "Color editor" ("Ctrl + E"). Or click the Edit color icon on the Color Line. Or right click the object and choose Fill Color Or double click on the current line and fill color icon on the Color Line (the edge of the leftmost panel).
The Color Editor (simple) The color editor has a simple and advanced mode. Eye dropper color picker Advanced options Drag here to chose a shade of the selected hue Drag here to select a color hue The easiest way to create a new color is to select the hue along the bottom color strip. All possible shades of this hue are then shown in the top section, so just click or drag in the top section to select the new color.
Using the eye-dropper to pick colors Instead of selecting hues and shades on the Color Editor you can instead pick a color from any part of the document or any part of the computer screen?even from other windows and programs. To do this just click and drag on the eye dropper icon. As you drag you see the color editor continuously picks up the color under the eye dropper. Release the mouse button when you have the desired color.
Advanced color operations Click the Show advanced options icon on the color editor to reveal the lower part of the dialog that provides more options.
The Color Editor in detail Shows what you are editing New named color Show/hide advanced options Eye dropper color picker Previous color Current color Color panel (Color model dependent) HSV hue selector Numeric values (Color model dependent) RGB hex color value Color model (HSV, RGB, CMYK or grayscale) 3D editor mode option (only RGB & CMYK) No color patch (only available when editing local color) Make Named Color local to Frame/Layer Rename named color Color editor help Type of color: Normal, Spot (if av
3D color editor When editing RGB or CMYK colors the editor can be put into an advanced 3D mode that displays colors in a color cube. Some people may prefer to work this way.
Previous and Current color As you drag on the color editor the two small color swatches in the upper right of the color editor show the current color and the previous (before you started changing the color). This is useful if you want to make a small change and want to compare the old and new colors. 3D color editor When editing RGB or CMYK colors the editor can be put into an advanced 3D mode that displays colors in a color cube. Some people may prefer to work this way.
3D color editor When editing RGB or CMYK colors the editor can be put into an advanced 3D mode that displays colors in a color cube. Some people may prefer to work this way.
Specifying colors in the Color Editor You can enter precise RGB (or HSV or CMYK) color values in a number of ways. The most common requirement for web graphics is to enter a hex RGB color. You can do this with the color editor showing either HSV colors (the default) or showing RGB colors. To select the RGB picker, right Shows the expanded color editor, with the click on the dialog and select RGB. HSV picker on the left, RGB picker on the This allows you to enter RGB right.
Limit to Browser palette When clicked this button will shift the selected color to be one of the 216 common web browser palette colors. This is a legacy system that is no longer particularly important or relevant, as nearly all computers can display millions of colors, and there's no benefit in restricting web graphics to only this limited palette.
The color models Color models let you define a color in terms of different color components. RGB and HSV are typically used for screen use. If you know your document is going to be printed and require very specific CMYK color values, then you can use CMYK colors. Unlike some graphics software, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 allows you to mix RGB, HSV and CMYK colors in the same document.
CMYK colors and transparency effects When using any effect that involves transparency, including feathering, color calculations are performed in RGB. This is also true of live effects. Transparency is described in Transparency . This means that if objects are defined using CMYK colors, that any part of them that involve transparency of these effects will be output in RGB colors, and this can cause slight color shifts when printed on some devices.
Colors on the screen and on the printer One problem with computer screens is that their colors do not match the available colors on a printer. Screens emit combinations of red, green, and blue. The brightness control has a dramatic effect on displayed colors. Printed images reflect combinations of cyan, magenta, yellow and black. Tip: To get bright blue on a printer, select a color on screen that is almost pure cyan (printer's cyan is much more blue than screen cyan).
Local colors and Theme colors Photo & Graphic Designer has two types of color: Local colors are used in only one place in the document. Each object has a separate color and nothing is shared. This is useful if you want to change the color of an object without affecting other objects. Local colors are the easiest method and best for simple documents that use relatively few colors. "Applying color" and "Editing an object's color" above describe local color handling.
Theme color schemes Many of the web themes offered in the Designs Gallery and in separately purchasable Template Packs include alternative color schemes which can easily be applied to websites which use the same theme, to transform the color scheme instantly. The color schemes are normally found in the Designs Gallery in each theme under Website Template Themes , after all the page layouts and separate graphic elements that make up the theme.
Creating your own color schemes It's very easy to create your own color scheme files, which you can pass on to other Photo & Graphic Designer users for them to apply to websites created with the same theme. 1. Load one of the page templates for the theme. Choose one which shows off all the colors of the theme most effectively. You can add more elements to the page if required, to help show off the range of theme colors. 2.
Creating new named colors If you want to use the same color in different parts of the drawing, and there is any chance you might want to change that color in future, it is highly recommended that you create a named color . This is easy in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013: Select an object whose color you want to use and then click New named color in the Color editor . Click to create a new named color Give the color a suitable name, like "car color" and click create.
Editing named colors There are three ways to display the color in the Color Editor so it can be edited: Choose from the menu in the Color Editor. Or right click on the color on the Color Line and choose Edit from the menu that appears. Or drag & drop a color from the Color Line onto the Color Editor. Or drag & drop a color from the Color Gallery (described later) onto the Color Editor. You can then edit the color as required.
" option. This adds new named colors into your design, with a number appended to the color names to distinguish them from the colors already in the current design. This allows the imported objects to keep their original colors. Note that if you import objects from lots of different designs and choose "Don't Match " each time, you will end up with a large number of separate Named Colors on your color line.
Renaming named colors While editing a Named Color, right click on the Color Editor and select Rename Or select the color in the Color Gallery and select the Name button, or Or right click the color on the Color Line and select Rename. Deleting named colors To delete a named color: 1. In the Color Gallery, select the color or colors you want to delete. 2. Click delete in the Color Gallery. or: Right click on the color on the Color Line and choose Delete .
asking you again. However this only applies during the current session, so after a program restart you will be asked again on the next import if there is a color clash. Using the Match option means that you can choose a template, change its theme colors and then import more templates of the same theme and the imported designs will immediately pick up your modified theme colors.
Deleting named colors To delete a named color: 1. In the Color Gallery, select the color or colors you want to delete. 2. Click delete in the Color Gallery. or: Right click on the color on the Color Line and choose Delete . Deleting unused color To clear the Color Line of unused colors, open the Color Gallery and select a range of colors (click on one and "Shift-click" on another) and then select the "Delete" button. This will ask whether you want to remove just the unused colors.
For example, import a red graphical button from the Designs Gallery, change its main theme color from red to green, then import a red logo graphic of the same theme and choose the "Match" option. When the logo appears in your design, instead of being red it will have picked up your chosen green theme color automatically. Since most themes have their main theme color named "Theme color 1", you will also usually get good results when importing graphics from different themes and matching the colors.
Deleting unused color To clear the Color Line of unused colors, open the Color Gallery and select a range of colors (click on one and "Shift-click" on another) and then select the "Delete" button. This will ask whether you want to remove just the unused colors. However note that by default unused named colors are automatically deleted when a document is saved or loaded. You can change this option in the View tab of the Utilities->Options dialog.
When you click this button, a new named color is created which is identical to the one you have selected. This new color is then applied to all objects in the current frame or layer that use the selected named color. This means that with one click you can localize a color to the frame/layer. You can then independently edit the original color and this localized color. This feature is useful when you are creating animations and you want an object's color to change part way through the animation.
Importing named colors When a design is imported into the current document (e.g. import from the Designs Gallery , import a XAR file or paste objects in from another design) if there are any named colors in the imported design which have the same names but different color values as colors in the current design, an alert appears as follows: If you want the imported objects to inherit the colors of your current design, choose the "Match " option.
This button is dimmed unless you are editing a named color that is also used in another frame or layer.
Make Named Color local to Frame/Layer When you click this button, a new named color is created which is identical to the one you have selected. This new color is then applied to all objects in the current frame or layer that use the selected named color. This means that with one click you can localize a color to the frame/layer. You can then independently edit the original color and this localized color.
Normal colors, Tints, Shades and Linked colors Normal colors These are the normal stand-alone colors you apply to objects. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can also define colors that are linked to another color, that is when the parent color changes the linked color will change as well. There are three ways you can link a color to its parent Tints, Shades, and Linked colors . These are very powerful techniques that allow, for example, single-click re-coloring of complex shaded drawings.
Normal colors These are the normal stand-alone colors you apply to objects. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can also define colors that are linked to another color, that is when the parent color changes the linked color will change as well. There are three ways you can link a color to its parent Tints, Shades, and Linked colors . These are very powerful techniques that allow, for example, single-click re-coloring of complex shaded drawings. Some of the example clipart uses this technique.
Tints Tints are based on other colors (called the parent color) and are always a paler version of the parent. They have two main uses: Where you have paler shades of a parent color and you may want to change the parent color in future with the tints automatically updating. To extend the range of colors available from printing inks. For example, a 25% red tint gives a pink color. Therefore using just a red ink you can have both a pure red and a pink using only one ink.
Shades These allow both lighter and darker colors to be created all based on a parent color. Changing the color of the parent changes all associated shades. For example, a drawing of a car might use shades for the highlight and shaded regions of the car body. A single edit to the parent changes all the colors of the entire body but keeps the shading correct. Setting up shades this way is more time consuming but it is a very powerful way of altering colors.
Linked colors Linked colors are similar to shades but give greater flexibility. These are also based on a parent color but you define which attributes you want the linked color to share with its parent. For example you can create a linked color that is a more or less saturated version of the parent, but the hue and lightness / darkness follow the parent.
Creating a Tint, Shade or Linked color Tints, shades and Linked color have to have a master "parent" color, which needs to be a named color, so that when you change this parent color, the tint will change as well. So, if necessary, first create a named color (see Creating new named colors ). To create a tint, shade or linked color: 1. Select the object or objects to which you want to apply the color. 2. Open the Color Editor showing the advanced options. 3.
Editing the parent color The key point of using tints, shades and linked colors is that they track any changes to the parent color. To see this working try editing the Named color that is the parent (drag it from the Color Line to the Color Editor and alter the color). You will see the objects with the tint, shade or linked color change in sync with the parent.
Importing colors and palettes You can import the following color table and palette files: CorelDRAW Palette .CPL and .PAL Adobe Color Tables .ACT Adobe Color Swatches .ACO PaintShop Pro Palettes .PAL Microsoft Palettes .PAL You can import the colors of a palette file into a document, or place them in the Color Gallery so they are always available. To import a palette file into an existing document drag the file icon from Explorer and drop it onto the document window away from the Color Line.
The Color Gallery The Color Gallery displays all the named colors used in the current, and other open documents. It also lets you create, edit, copy and delete named colors . To access the Color Gallery : Choose Utilities -> Galleries -> Color Gallery ("F9"). Or click the Color Gallery button on the Galleries bar. The Color Gallery shows colors for all documents currently loaded.
Text Handling In this chapter Introduction Terminology The Text Tool The Font Menu Simple text Text in a column Text areas Text along a curve Editing text Spell checker Find & Replace Synchronising text across multiple text objects Tabs, Margins and Indents Repelling text objects Anchored Graphics Embedding Graphics Text Styles Applying text attributes Text links Text inside groups for websites Copying text appearances Copying/Pasting formatted text (RTF) Seeing fonts in use Changing text into editable shap
Introduction The text editing facilities of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are very like your text editor or word processor, but in addition it provides a range of features you won't find in those programs: You can enlarge or magnify text to a huge degree. You can apply the range of normal Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 attributes and effects: fills, feather, transparency, color fades, bevels, shadows, Live Effects and still continue to edit the text.
Terminology Font or Typeface : A set of characters with a consistent style. Font family : A set of similar fonts. For example Garamond and Garamond Italic are different fonts from the same Garamond family. Justification: An alternative way of describing text alignment. Left aligned text is sometimes called left justified, or flush-left, or ragged right. Fully justified text has text aligned or "flush" to both left and right margins.
The Text Tool Use the Text Tool ("F8") to enter or edit text. Text Tool InfoBar Left Side Font Font Size Style Bold Italic Underlined Text Tool InfoBar Right Side Justify Subscript/Superscript Line Spacing Bulleted Lists Numbered Lists Outdent Indent Spell Checker Text Tool InfoBar flyout Space before paragraph Space after paragraph Baseline shift Tracking Aspect ratio Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports three basic type of text objects Simple text lines: Click on the page, and type.
The Font Menu The font menu lists all installed fonts, and is split into three sections. The top section displays those fonts that are currently used in the document. The second section shows the "web safe" fonts. These are the fonts you can safely use in web pages, because all commonly used web browsers will support these fonts. See Web Safe Fonts section. The final section displays an alphabetical list of all other installed fonts.
Next to the font size menu is a small pop-up slider control, like that used elsewhere in Photo & Graphic Designer. This provides a direct, live font size control, and will adjust the font size of the selected text in real-time as you drag the slider. Click to display font size pop-up As with the pop-up sliders used elsewhere this can be used two ways. "Click + release" on the arrow and the pop-up will appear and stay on screen.
Web Safe Fonts These fonts are safe to use in websites because the vast majority of computers and other devices will have these fonts installed. You can use other fonts if you embed them in your website and if the font license permits it ? see the Website font embedding section below. Live Font Preview As you move the mouse pointer over any entry in the font menu, the selected text in the document is instantly updated to preview the font.
Live Font Preview As you move the mouse pointer over any entry in the font menu, the selected text in the document is instantly updated to preview the font. This is not a permanent change until you actually click on the required font. Moving the mouse pointer over the menu will revert back to the initial font until you move over another entry. This is great for very rapidly previewing large numbers of fonts.
Live Font Size preview Next to the font size menu is a small pop-up slider control, like that used elsewhere in Photo & Graphic Designer. This provides a direct, live font size control, and will adjust the font size of the selected text in real-time as you drag the slider. Click to display font size pop-up As with the pop-up sliders used elsewhere this can be used two ways. "Click + release" on the arrow and the pop-up will appear and stay on screen.
Instant font menu navigation While the font menu is displayed, you can type the initial characters of the font name, and the menu will be scrolled to that section of the list. E.g. if you type "ver" it will instantly scroll and locate the Verdana font. Bold, Italic & Synthesized fonts Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not allow you to apply italic or bold to text if the necessary italic/bold font is not installed. Photo & Graphic Designer 3.
Bold, Italic & Synthesized fonts Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not allow you to apply italic or bold to text if the necessary italic/bold font is not installed. Photo & Graphic Designer 3.2 and earlier versions would allow this and would artificially synthesize an italic or bold appearance as required. The results produced by doing this were generally poor quality.
Simple text If you wish to type a small amount of simple text, position the pointer where you want to enter text and click. A red cursor appears where you clicked and you can now start typing on the keyboard. If you make a mistake, use "Delete" and "Backspace" in the usual way. Pressing "Enter" completes the line and starts a new line of text below it. The inter-line spacing is controlled by the line spacing text box on the InfoBar.
Text in a column If you are entering larger amounts of text, over multiple lines, using a column is more useful. Changing the width of the column will automatically re-flow the text. To type a column of text: 1. Select the Text Tool. 2. Move the mouse pointer where you want the column to start. 3. Drag right to create a horizontal line the width of the column. This red line just shows you the width of the column. It is never exported or printed. 4. Type in the text.
Changing the width of the column Drag either of the two red handles at the ends of the line. Changing the angle of the column "ñ+ drag" either of the red handles at the end of the line to change the angle of the column. Alternatively, "Ctrl + drag" to restrain the line to the constrain angles. Or alternatively you can use the Selector Tool to rotate the object in the usual way. For more on constrain angles, see Introduction to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 .
Changing the angle of the column "ñ+ drag" either of the red handles at the end of the line to change the angle of the column. Alternatively, "Ctrl + drag" to restrain the line to the constrain angles. Or alternatively you can use the Selector Tool to rotate the object in the usual way. For more on constrain angles, see Introduction to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 .
Text areas In the Text Tool if you click and drag diagonally on the page you will create a rectangular text area. The blinking cursor will be positioned in the top left corner and you can type or paste text. A text area can contain a "flowing" text story. This is where a single piece of text flows from one text area to another. It's called flowing text because, like water, as you add or remove text in one area it overflows into connected text areas or flows back from text areas.
a resize will resize the text and areas together. But if you resize a text area that is part of a flowing series of text areas, then only the container size is altered and the text inside remains the original size, and will be re-formatted to fit the new size. This is like resizing a text area with the Text Tool. If you want to resize all text in a text story, select it all with "Ctrl + A", and apply the required font size.
Connecting text areas—text flow When text overflows the bottom of the text area, an overflow indicator is shown on the bottom of the area. If you drag this over any other text area, the overflow text will flow into the new text area, and the two areas become connected. This is shown with a flow arrow. Dragging the overflow indicator from one text area to another will connect the two areas so text flows from one to another. You can link as many together as you require.
Text flow is unaffected if you rotate any of the text areas Hold down "Ctrl" while rotating to constrain the text rotation angle to 90° angles and screen aligned angles. Word count The word and character count total of the current text is shown in the status line. This also shows the number of overflowing words. If any region of text is selected, it shows the count of this selection instead.
Resizing text areas Using the Text Tool , you can click and drag on any of the corner control handles. The text in the area will be reformatted to fit the new size. Alternatively you can use the Selector Tool to resize the text object, but in this case the behavior is different. If you resize a text object using the Selector Tool, the text itself changes size. This is consistent with the normal operation of the Selector Tool .
Word count The word and character count total of the current text is shown in the status line. This also shows the number of overflowing words. If any region of text is selected, it shows the count of this selection instead.
Text along a curve To place text along a curve of your choice: 1. Create either basic text, text in a column or a text area (see above). 2. Select your text object and one curve. 3. Choose "Arrange" > "Fit text to curve". Alternatively, select a curve or line and then in the Text Tool , click on the line, where you want the text to start, and type. This automatically fits the text along the line.
Create an ellipse. Convert to editable shapes. In the shape editor, select the top half (top three control points) and select the "Break at points" function. Remove the top half to leave just the lower half as seen. In the Text Tool click at about 6 o'clock and type. Right click and select Reverse text on curve to flip the text to the other side. Drag the red margin handles in from either end. Select the center text alignment option.
Adjusting the left and right margin of text on a curve If you just start typing or place a column of text on a curve, you can change the start and end position of the red handles. Just drag them along the curve as required. If you center text it will be between these two margins. Swapping sides of the line Right click on the text and select the Reverse text on curve menu option.
Swapping sides of the line Right click on the text and select the Reverse text on curve menu option. Alternatively, if you reverse the direction of the line (Shape Editor Tool, Reverse paths button on the InfoBar), then the text will move to the other side of the line or, in the case of a closed shape, move from the inside to the outside of the shape. An example Create an ellipse. Convert to editable shapes.
An example Create an ellipse. Convert to editable shapes. In the shape editor, select the top half (top three control points) and select the "Break at points" function. Remove the top half to leave just the lower half as seen. In the Text Tool click at about 6 o'clock and type. Right click and select Reverse text on curve to flip the text to the other side. Drag the red margin handles in from either end. Select the center text alignment option.
Editing text Double clicking on a text object in any tool takes you into the Text Tool and places the cursor at the click position in the text. All the normal word processor-style cursor and mouse operations can be used. For example: Click where you want to place the cursor. Use the left and right arrow keys to move left, right, up or down. Use "Ctrl + left and right arrow keys" to move left or right one word. Press "Home" or "End" to move to the start or end of the line.
Entering dummy text ('Lorem Ipsum') You can insert a paragraph of dummy "Lorem ipsum" text by typing "Ctrl + Shift + L" ("L" for Lorem) while using the Text Tool . To insert a larger block of text, just press the key combination a few times.
Selecting the whole text object There is a quick shortcut for selecting the whole text object. Instead of using "Ctrl + A" or dragging across all the text, simply press the "Esc" key. This removes the cursor but selects the whole text (the status line will confirm 1 text object). This makes it easy to apply an effect or attribute to the whole text story. For example, to change the font size of the whole text object, just press "Esc" and select the new size from the InfoBar.
Swap case Pressing "Ctrl + W" will swap the case of the character after the cursor and move the cursor on. So, if you've accidentally typed a section of text with the caps lock key on, just place the cursor at the start and press and hold "Ctrl + W". You can swap the case of a selected region of text, the same way. The cursor will not be moved.
Smart Quotes When you type quote ' or double quote " characters, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will automatically convert these into the more appropriate and aesthetically accurate opening or closing quotes. So this changes 'this' into 'this' and "quotes" into "quotes". It's smart enough to understand the use of single quotes within words to signify missing characters, so that 'don't' becomes 'don't' .
Entering special characters There are a number of useful shortcuts to allow insertion of special characters, like © or ™. See Special characters (in Text Tool) section in "Menus and keyboard shortcuts". All these shortcuts (with the exception of the hard space) are compatible with Microsoft Word. Entering dummy text ('Lorem Ipsum') You can insert a paragraph of dummy "Lorem ipsum" text by typing "Ctrl + Shift + L" ("L" for Lorem) while using the Text Tool .
Entering dummy text ('Lorem Ipsum') You can insert a paragraph of dummy "Lorem ipsum" text by typing "Ctrl + Shift + L" ("L" for Lorem) while using the Text Tool . To insert a larger block of text, just press the key combination a few times.
Spell checker The Text Tool includes a spell checker. To turn it on, select the Spell Checker icon on the Text Tool infobar, which opens a menu. Select "Check spelling as you type ". Now all unrecognized words in your document and as you type are shown with a red dashed underline. To correct a misspelled word, right click on it and the context menu shows you suggested correct spellings of the word at the top of the menu. Simply select one of the suggestions to replace the word.
Language selection The menu shown when you click on the Spell Checker icon on the infobar lists all the languages for which you have dictionaries installed. By default the language corresponding to the current locale setting is selected. To change the language associated with a text object, select the text object, then in the Text Tool choose the required language from the Spell Checker menu. Now the text object will be checked against the dictionary for the language you chose.
User dictionary Words that you use regularly which are not in the dictionary provided with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can be added to your own personal dictionary. Right click on the word and choose "Add to user dictionary ". Now the word is no longer shown as being misspelled. The user dictionary applies to all documents that you use on your computer and it applies to all languages.
Find & Replace The Find & Replace function performs live search so that as you type the search string the text is searched and highlighted in real-time. To search for some text select the menu "Edit" > "Find/Replace..." or "Ctrl + Alt + F" and the following dialog is displayed: Enter the search string and it's shown highlighted in the text. You can choose to search just the current text story, page or the whole document (all text flows on all pages).
Synchronising text across multiple text objects Sometimes you may want the same text to appear in multiple text objects and for those objects to always have the same text, so that if one is edited they are all updated. You can achieve this using Live Copies if the only difference between the text objects is in the way they are transformed (ie. only their position, scale, rotation or skew needs to differ). See Live Copies in the Object Handling chapter for details.
Tabs, Margins and Indents Rulers To adjust tabs, margins and indents you need to turn on rulers in your document. To do this: Choose "Windows" > "Show Rulers" or right click a page and choose "Show Grid/Guides" > "Show Rulers". Or press "Ctrl + ñ + R". Or press "Ctrl + L" (when not in the Text Tool). The enhanced text features will only appear on the ruler when you are using the Text Tool and when the text cursor is in a text story or the text object is selected when in the Text Tool .
Full justification will always fit the text onto the line, if necessary overlapping characters. If you have clicked on the line or fitted a column of text to a curve or line then you have left and right margin indicators (small red squares) that can be dragged along the line to adjust the margins used for justification. Tabs By default, text stories are created with tabs set 0.5 cm apart. This means you can just press "Tab" and your text will be moved along to the next tab stop.
The decimal points in the text will be aligned with the tab. This is useful for lists and, however long the number, the decimal points (periods) will be tab-aligned. How to creating hanging indents Hanging Indents, as they are known, are where the first line of a paragraph has a negative margin or a margin that hangs to the left of the normal left margin. Numbered or bulleted lists are examples of hanging indents. To create hanging indents: 1. Drag the left margin inwards. 2.
Rulers To adjust tabs, margins and indents you need to turn on rulers in your document. To do this: Choose "Windows" > "Show Rulers" or right click a page and choose "Show Grid/Guides" > "Show Rulers". Or press "Ctrl + ñ + R". Or press "Ctrl + L" (when not in the Text Tool). The enhanced text features will only appear on the ruler when you are using the Text Tool and when the text cursor is in a text story or the text object is selected when in the Text Tool .
margin indicators (small red squares) that can be dragged along the line to adjust the margins used for justification. Tabs By default, text stories are created with tabs set 0.5 cm apart. This means you can just press "Tab" and your text will be moved along to the next tab stop. You only need to define new tab stop positions if you want alternative tab spacing.
How to creating hanging indents Hanging Indents, as they are known, are where the first line of a paragraph has a negative margin or a margin that hangs to the left of the normal left margin. Numbered or bulleted lists are examples of hanging indents. To create hanging indents: 1. Drag the left margin inwards. 2. Click on the ruler away from the left margin (creates a new tab stop) and drag this tab stop to be exactly over the left margin. 3.
Margins and indents Any changes you make are made to the current paragraph of text. (i.e. the paragraph containing the text cursor) or, if you have a selected region of text, to the paragraphs of the selected region. You can apply changes to all text in a text story by selecting all the text within that story ("Ctrl + A"). To change more than one text story, select the text objects while in the Selector Tool then change to the Text Tool and make the required changes. Left margin .
For example: The triangle indicates a custom tab To set more than one tab click multiple times on the ruler. To move a custom tab drag it along the ruler. To remove a tab drag it off of the ruler (default tabs will come back). Custom tab types You can set different types of custom tab. By default, custom tabs are left align tabs. This means that text will be aligned with the tab on the left of the text. To change the tab type, click the tab icon on the ruler.
indented to the left margin.
Text along a curve If you have fitted a single line of text to the curve using the Fit text to curve option, then the curve line is the margin. If the text is longer than the line it will just flow off the end. Full justification will always fit the text onto the line, if necessary overlapping characters.
The text will be centered on the tab. Decimal point align: The decimal points in the text will be aligned with the tab. This is useful for lists and, however long the number, the decimal points (periods) will be tab-aligned. How to creating hanging indents Hanging Indents, as they are known, are where the first line of a paragraph has a negative margin or a margin that hangs to the left of the normal left margin. Numbered or bulleted lists are examples of hanging indents. To create hanging indents: 1.
Tabs By default, text stories are created with tabs set 0.5 cm apart. This means you can just press "Tab" and your text will be moved along to the next tab stop. You only need to define new tab stop positions if you want alternative tab spacing. These default tabs are shown as faint Ls on the ruler: Standard tabs, indicated by faint "L"s Custom tabs To create a custom tab position, just click on the ruler where you wish to place the new tab. It will replace default tabs up to that point on the ruler.
How to creating hanging indents Hanging Indents, as they are known, are where the first line of a paragraph has a negative margin or a margin that hangs to the left of the normal left margin. Numbered or bulleted lists are examples of hanging indents. To create hanging indents: 1. Drag the left margin inwards. 2. Click on the ruler away from the left margin (creates a new tab stop) and drag this tab stop to be exactly over the left margin. 3.
Custom tabs To create a custom tab position, just click on the ruler where you wish to place the new tab. It will replace default tabs up to that point on the ruler. For example: The triangle indicates a custom tab To set more than one tab click multiple times on the ruler. To move a custom tab drag it along the ruler. To remove a tab drag it off of the ruler (default tabs will come back). Custom tab types You can set different types of custom tab. By default, custom tabs are left align tabs.
2. Click on the ruler away from the left margin (creates a new tab stop) and drag this tab stop to be exactly over the left margin. 3. Now each line will start outdented?you can insert any special character or number and press "Tab" to move to the left margin. And (as with this paragraph) all subsequent lines of text are indented to the left margin.
Custom tab types You can set different types of custom tab. By default, custom tabs are left align tabs. This means that text will be aligned with the tab on the left of the text. To change the tab type, click the tab icon on the ruler. The following custom tab types are available. You are not limited to just one type in a story, and can choose a different type then set additional tabs. Left align: The text will be aligned with the tab to the left.
How to creating hanging indents Hanging Indents, as they are known, are where the first line of a paragraph has a negative margin or a margin that hangs to the left of the normal left margin. Numbered or bulleted lists are examples of hanging indents. To create hanging indents: 1. Drag the left margin inwards. 2. Click on the ruler away from the left margin (creates a new tab stop) and drag this tab stop to be exactly over the left margin. 3.
Repelling text objects You can make any object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 repel text so that text underneath it automatically flows around the object, instead of appearing underneath it. This makes it easy to lay out pages containing long passages of text combined with photos and graphics. Once you've set them to repel, you can adjust the positions of your graphics and photos and the text will automatically adjust and reflow around them.
the H (horizontal) box and width in the V (vertical) box. Click OK . To turn off repelling right click the object and choose the Repel text under option again to deselect it. Or right click and select Repelling & Anchoring to display the Text repelling & anchoring dialog again. Click the Repel text around this graphic checkbox to deselect it and click OK . Note that single lines of text do not respond to repelling objects, only text areas and text columns do.
Making an object repel To make an object repel text, right click it and select the Repel text under option. Any text in the same layer underneath the object will be repelled with a default margin of 5 pixels between the text and object. Note that repelling text objects only repel text that is underneath the objects, not any text that is on top. Alternatively right click on the object and select Repelling & Anchoring to display the Text repelling & anchoring dialog.
Anchored Graphics You can position any graphic, or group, so it's tied (anchored) to a position in some text, so that as the text moves because of editing, the graphic object will move to remain at the same relative position. However anchoring should only normally be used for objects that sit outside the margins of the text (eg. A photo sitting to the right or left of a text column), or behind the text. Use Embedding for objects that sit within the text bounds (see below). 1.
This is an example column of text with various graphic elements hanging to the left. Each of these is anchored to the start of a line of text immediately to its right. It's possible to anchor any graphic object or group, including groups containing text, such as the example side-panel, shown above. It's also possible to anchor objects to appear on top of, or below the text. The example pale blue flower graphic, shown above, is anchored this way and will flow with the text.
The anchor point of an anchored object is only visible if you click the anchored object in the Selector Tool or click in the surrounding text area in the Text Tool . When you click in a region of text with the Text Tool, it shows any anchors points within an inverted 'T' symbol, and also draws an arrow from the anchor point to the anchor symbol in the top left of each anchored object. So the easiest way to see all the anchor points for any text is to click in it with the Text Tool .
Moving Anchored Objects As new text is added or deleted, the object moves as the text flows, but will always maintain its new position relative to the anchor point. You can move an anchored graphic by dragging on it as usual. This changes its position relative to the anchor point, but does not move the anchor point, which remains visible at the end of the anchor symbol arrow as you click/move the graphic.
Tool. Use this embedding technique in preference to Anchoring where you can, because it is more efficient in terms of the processing required to format the text.
Soft Groups You can anchor Soft Groups (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) the same way, even where part of the group is on another layer. For example web buttons with mouseover effects or pop-ups on different layers can be anchored in this way. Viewing the anchor point The anchor point of an anchored object is only visible if you click the anchored object in the Selector Tool or click in the surrounding text area in the Text Tool .
Viewing the anchor point The anchor point of an anchored object is only visible if you click the anchored object in the Selector Tool or click in the surrounding text area in the Text Tool . When you click in a region of text with the Text Tool, it shows any anchors points within an inverted 'T' symbol, and also draws an arrow from the anchor point to the anchor symbol in the top left of each anchored object. So the easiest way to see all the anchor points for any text is to click in it with the Text Tool .
Inline anchored objects If you want to embed a small graphic into a line of text, such as an icon graphic like this ; inline with the text, so it flows with the text, drag or paste the image in as an anchored object that repels and position its anchor point anywhere in the copy. It's recommended you use non-breaking space characters ("Ctrl + Space bar"). Embedding Graphics You can insert any object into text so that it behaves just like a character in the text.
Embedding Graphics You can insert any object into text so that it behaves just like a character in the text. Simply copy the object to the clipboard (Ctrl+C), go into the Text Tool and position the text caret where you want to insert the object, then paste (Ctrl+V). You can select, copy, paste and delete the embedded object along with the text around it, just as if it was a character in the text. However you can also still select it and transform it directly using the Selector Tool.
Text Styles Text Styles are a powerful way to alter the appearance of text throughout a document with a few clicks. A Text Style is a named collection of attributes, such as font, size, color, line spacing and other text attributes. For example, the main heading at the top of this document might have a style called 'Heading 1', the smaller sub-heading, such as for this section, and all other equivalent section headings, a Style called 'Heading 2'.
these highlighted words with a single Style update. Paragraph styles can define all text attributes except for bulleted/numbered list properties. Character styles can only define text attributes that can be applied to individual characters, such as text color, font size, font weight, etc. Updating Text Styles To update a Style definition: 1. Select some text already in the style you want to update. 2. Apply whatever changes you require, say an alternative font, or font size. 3.
This dialog shows a new style, (NewStyle2) being created that is a Paragraph Style, based on an existing Heading 2 style. The Next paragraph option determines what style will be used for the subsequent paragraph when typing. The lower section of the dialog shows the complete definition of this Style. In this case you can see it's based on Heading 2, with only a color change.
Text Styles InfoBar There is a Styles drop-down menu on the Text Tool InfoBar, that allows you to create Styles, apply them to any text, and to update the definition of the Style. By default there is a small set of pre-defined Styles, including 'Normal text' and three heading styles, Heading 1 to Heading 3. Paragraph Style and Character Style Text Styles comes in two varieties. Paragraph Styles apply to whole paragraphs, and are also typically used for headings.
In Photo & Graphic Designer, you can base one style upon another. For example, if you wanted another variant of Heading 2 style, that was identical in every respect, except a different color, then when you create the new style you would make it based on "Heading 2" in the Create Style dialog. This means that if you update "Heading 2" to be, for example, a new font or size, your new Style would also take on that new font or font size.
text, so this Style consists of a complete definition, listing all possible text attributes. In this case when entering text in this Style, the 'Next paragraph' (i.e. when Return is pressed) will be in the same style again. Deleting Styles - Styles that are not used anywhere in a document are automatically deleted when you save and re-load a document. However the default styles (Normal text and Heading 1 to 3) are never deleted.
Paragraph Style and Character Style Text Styles comes in two varieties. Paragraph Styles apply to whole paragraphs, and are also typically used for headings. It's not possible to apply a Paragraph Style to a smaller section than a paragraph, so you cannot, for example, apply a Paragraph Style to a single word within a paragraph. If you try, then the whole surrounding paragraph will take on this Style.
a whole paragraph, before selecting the Create Style menu option. This dialog shows a new style, (NewStyle2) being created that is a Paragraph Style, based on an existing Heading 2 style. The Next paragraph option determines what style will be used for the subsequent paragraph when typing. The lower section of the dialog shows the complete definition of this Style. In this case you can see it's based on Heading 2, with only a color change.
If you want to change the definition of a style, such as the style it's based on, or just look at its definition, use the Properties… option in the style menu. You need to select some text that has the style applied before you do this, to indicate the style you want to edit. The Style Properties dialog appears, which looks the same as the Create Style dialog shown above. The style description at the bottom of the dialog describes how the style differs from the style on which it is based.
Updating Text Styles To update a Style definition: 1. Select some text already in the style you want to update. 2. Apply whatever changes you require, say an alternative font, or font size. 3. Select "Update style" from the Style drop-down menu on the Text InfoBar.
To create a Style that is based on no other Style, that is to say, it inherits no attributes from another style, select (No style) from the Based on: option, as below. This dialog shows I am creating a NewStyle2, that is a Paragraph Style and based on no other style. The lower section lists all the attributes that make up this Style, so you can see I've used Palatino font, 12px in size and it has a margin indent.
Styles based on other styles In Photo & Graphic Designer, you can base one style upon another. For example, if you wanted another variant of Heading 2 style, that was identical in every respect, except a different color, then when you create the new style you would make it based on "Heading 2" in the Create Style dialog. This means that if you update "Heading 2" to be, for example, a new font or size, your new Style would also take on that new font or font size.
This dialog shows I am creating a NewStyle2, that is a Paragraph Style and based on no other style. The lower section lists all the attributes that make up this Style, so you can see I've used Palatino font, 12px in size and it has a margin indent. The remaining attributes listed here have also been taken from selected text, so this Style consists of a complete definition, listing all possible text attributes. In this case when entering text in this Style, the 'Next paragraph' (i.e.
Creating new Styles To create a completely new Style, change a selection of text to appear how you want and then select the Create Style menu from the Style list drop-down on the Text Tool InfoBar. If you want to create a new Paragraph Style it's recommended that you select and apply your changes to a whole paragraph, before selecting the Create Style menu option. This dialog shows a new style, (NewStyle2) being created that is a Paragraph Style, based on an existing Heading 2 style.
Removing Styles The Styles list in the Styles menu includes the entry No style . Selecting this removes the Style (paragraph and/or character Style) from the selection and also resets the selected text back to default formatting. Style Properties If you want to change the definition of a style, such as the style it's based on, or just look at its definition, use the Properties… option in the style menu.
Removing Styles The Styles list in the Styles menu includes the entry No style . Selecting this removes the Style (paragraph and/or character Style) from the selection and also resets the selected text back to default formatting. Style Properties If you want to change the definition of a style, such as the style it's based on, or just look at its definition, use the Properties… option in the style menu.
Style Properties If you want to change the definition of a style, such as the style it's based on, or just look at its definition, use the Properties… option in the style menu. You need to select some text that has the style applied before you do this, to indicate the style you want to edit. The Style Properties dialog appears, which looks the same as the Create Style dialog shown above. The style description at the bottom of the dialog describes how the style differs from the style on which it is based.
Applying text attributes Changing the font size There are several ways to change the font size: Type a new value into the size text box on the InfoBar and press ¿. Or select from the Font size drop-down list on the InfoBar. Or use the Font size pop-up slider. Or manually increase/decrease font size with the "Ctrl + Shift + >" and "Ctrl + Shift + <" keyboard shortcuts. This applies only if all selected text parts are of the same font size. Or use the Selector Tool to scale the whole text object.
Justification or text alignment Justification always applies to the complete line. Any selected region is ignored. Left justification: Align the left-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Center justification: Centers the text around the click position. Right justification: Align the right-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Full justification: This only applies when text is along a curve or in a column and when there is at least one full line of text to justify.
Example of a nested bulleted list To move a bullet point from a sub-list into its parent bulleted list, simply place the text cursor in it and press the outdent button. So it's easy to make and edit arrangements of nested bulleted lists using the indent and outdent buttons. Numbered lists You can create and edit numbered lists in just the same way as described for bulleted lists above, using the numbered list button.
2. Type a value into the Tracking text box (values are in 1/1000ths of ems). From the keyboard you can increase or decrease the tracking by pressing "Alt + Right arrow", or "Alt + Left arrow". Each key press changes the tracking by 10/1000. Kerning Kerning lets you alter the space between two characters (so affects horizontal spacing).
Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Changing the font size There are several ways to change the font size: Type a new value into the size text box on the InfoBar and press ¿. Or select from the Font size drop-down list on the InfoBar. Or use the Font size pop-up slider. Or manually increase/decrease font size with the "Ctrl + Shift + >" and "Ctrl + Shift + <" keyboard shortcuts. This applies only if all selected text parts are of the same font size. Or use the Selector Tool to scale the whole text object.
Left justification: Align the left-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Center justification: Centers the text around the click position. Right justification: Align the right-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Full justification: This only applies when text is along a curve or in a column and when there is at least one full line of text to justify. When using simple text the initial click position on the page is taken as the origin for text justification.
To move a bullet point from a sub-list into its parent bulleted list, simply place the text cursor in it and press the outdent button. So it's easy to make and edit arrangements of nested bulleted lists using the indent and outdent buttons. Numbered lists You can create and edit numbered lists in just the same way as described for bulleted lists above, using the numbered list button. You can also choose the numbering scheme to be used for each list, using the List properties dialog.
Auto-kerning off Auto-kerning on Manual kerning Kerning is measured in "ems" (enter values in 1/1000ths of "ems".) You can either type the kerning value in the text box, or click the arrows to nudge the values. It shares the same key shortcuts as above. If there is just a cursor, it alters the kerning, but if there's a selected range of text, then it alters the tracking. Each key press alters it by 10/1000ths of a em. Baseline shift Baseline shift allows you to move part of a line up or down.
Condensing and expanding characters (aspect ratio) The aspect ratio is the ratio between the height and width of the text. Ratios over 100% make the text wider than normal; under 100% make the text narrower. To change the aspect ratio: Type a new value into the Aspect text box on the InfoBar and press " ¿". Or use the Selector Tool to stretch or squash the complete line of text. It is not recommended to use values below 80% or above 130%.
Full justification: This only applies when text is along a curve or in a column and when there is at least one full line of text to justify. When using simple text the initial click position on the page is taken as the origin for text justification. Subscript & superscript Click the appropriate button on the InfoBar. Normal text subscript superscript Indents and Outdents Indent a paragraph of text. Outdent a paragraph of text.
In the dialog you can choose from a variety of numbering schemes and also enter the value that should be used for the very first entry in the list. Then the number is automatically incremented for the second and subsequent entries in the list. Line spacing Line spacing allows you to change the space between two lines (so affects vertical spacing). Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt).
The baseline is the imaginary line at the bottom of characters. Select the characters for which you wish to change the baseline shift then enter a value in the Baseline shift text box. The effect of selecting AG and then applying a downwards baseline shift (i.e. -5pt). Baseline shift is measured in points but you can use any of Photo & Graphic Designer's standard measurement units. Note that baseline shift is an absolute value, in points, and does not change if you change the font size.
Bold & Italic Click the Bold or Italic button on the InfoBar ("Ctrl + B" or "Ctrl + I") This applies the bold or italic variant of the current font. Attention: Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not allow you to apply italic or bold to text if the necessary italic/bold font is not installed. However you can easily emulate the same effect. To embolden a font, just give it a small line width and apply a line color. To slant a font, use the skew / slant feature of the Selector Tool.
Outdent a paragraph of text. Bulleted Lists You can turn any text into a bulleted list by selecting the text and then selecting the bulleted list button on the infobar. Each paragraph of text becomes a separate bullet. If you press return to finish a line at the end of one bullet point, the next line starts with a bullet point too. To finish entering a bulleted list, hit return on the end of the last bullet and then immediately hit return again on the new bulleted line.
Line spacing allows you to change the space between two lines (so affects vertical spacing). Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt). You can either type the line space value in the text box or click the arrows to nudge the values. A percentage setting has the benefit of scaling accordingly if you change your font size. If a percentage is applied to a line of text with more than one font size, the largest font size is used.
The last two fields on the end of the Text Tool InfoBar allow you to set the spacing above and/or below paragraphs. This is particularly useful where you want half line spaces between paragraphs. Like Microsoft Word, when you use both spacing above and below paragraphs, the spacing between paragraphs is whichever is the greater value (it's not cumulative). Paragraph spacing above paragraphs will move the first paragraph down in a frame of text.
Text Underlining Click the underline button on the InfoBar to apply an underline to the selected text. The underline color and size is automatically derived from the text color and size. Underlining links When you add a web address URL to some text, see the Web address dialog. You can decide to automatically underline all links. This is a check box option on the web address dialog ("Ctrl + Shift + W").
normal text again. You can nest bulleted lists by pressing the indent button on the infobar. This indents the current bulleted line and changes the bullet character to a different style, to distinguish it from the parent bullet. Example of a nested bulleted list To move a bullet point from a sub-list into its parent bulleted list, simply place the text cursor in it and press the outdent button. So it's easy to make and edit arrangements of nested bulleted lists using the indent and outdent buttons.
equally within a region of text. An EM is the width of the capital letter "M" in the current font and font size. It is therefore relative to the font size and not a fixed value. 1. Select the region to which you want to apply tracking. 2. Type a value into the Tracking text box (values are in 1/1000ths of ems). From the keyboard you can increase or decrease the tracking by pressing "Alt + Right arrow", or "Alt + Left arrow". Each key press changes the tracking by 10/1000.
Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Justification or text alignment Justification always applies to the complete line. Any selected region is ignored. Left justification: Align the left-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Center justification: Centers the text around the click position. Right justification: Align the right-hand edge of the text to the initial click position. Full justification: This only applies when text is along a curve or in a column and when there is at least one full line of text to justify.
Example of a nested bulleted list To move a bullet point from a sub-list into its parent bulleted list, simply place the text cursor in it and press the outdent button. So it's easy to make and edit arrangements of nested bulleted lists using the indent and outdent buttons. Numbered lists You can create and edit numbered lists in just the same way as described for bulleted lists above, using the numbered list button.
2. Type a value into the Tracking text box (values are in 1/1000ths of ems). From the keyboard you can increase or decrease the tracking by pressing "Alt + Right arrow", or "Alt + Left arrow". Each key press changes the tracking by 10/1000. Kerning Kerning lets you alter the space between two characters (so affects horizontal spacing).
Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Subscript & superscript Click the appropriate button on the InfoBar. Normal text subscript superscript Indents and Outdents Indent a paragraph of text. Outdent a paragraph of text. Bulleted Lists You can turn any text into a bulleted list by selecting the text and then selecting the bulleted list button on the infobar. Each paragraph of text becomes a separate bullet. If you press return to finish a line at the end of one bullet point, the next line starts with a bullet point too.
In the dialog you can choose from a variety of numbering schemes and also enter the value that should be used for the very first entry in the list. Then the number is automatically incremented for the second and subsequent entries in the list. Line spacing Line spacing allows you to change the space between two lines (so affects vertical spacing). Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt).
The baseline is the imaginary line at the bottom of characters. Select the characters for which you wish to change the baseline shift then enter a value in the Baseline shift text box. The effect of selecting AG and then applying a downwards baseline shift (i.e. -5pt). Baseline shift is measured in points but you can use any of Photo & Graphic Designer's standard measurement units. Note that baseline shift is an absolute value, in points, and does not change if you change the font size.
Indents and Outdents Indent a paragraph of text. Outdent a paragraph of text. Bulleted Lists You can turn any text into a bulleted list by selecting the text and then selecting the bulleted list button on the infobar. Each paragraph of text becomes a separate bullet. If you press return to finish a line at the end of one bullet point, the next line starts with a bullet point too.
subsequent entries in the list. Line spacing Line spacing allows you to change the space between two lines (so affects vertical spacing). Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt). You can either type the line space value in the text box or click the arrows to nudge the values. A percentage setting has the benefit of scaling accordingly if you change your font size. If a percentage is applied to a line of text with more than one font size, the largest font size is used.
Paragraph Spacing The last two fields on the end of the Text Tool InfoBar allow you to set the spacing above and/or below paragraphs. This is particularly useful where you want half line spaces between paragraphs. Like Microsoft Word, when you use both spacing above and below paragraphs, the spacing between paragraphs is whichever is the greater value (it's not cumulative). Paragraph spacing above paragraphs will move the first paragraph down in a frame of text.
Bulleted Lists You can turn any text into a bulleted list by selecting the text and then selecting the bulleted list button on the infobar. Each paragraph of text becomes a separate bullet. If you press return to finish a line at the end of one bullet point, the next line starts with a bullet point too. To finish entering a bulleted list, hit return on the end of the last bullet and then immediately hit return again on the new bulleted line.
Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt). You can either type the line space value in the text box or click the arrows to nudge the values. A percentage setting has the benefit of scaling accordingly if you change your font size. If a percentage is applied to a line of text with more than one font size, the largest font size is used. For example, if a line contains 90% and 100% text, the line spacing is calculated on 100%.
This is particularly useful where you want half line spaces between paragraphs. Like Microsoft Word, when you use both spacing above and below paragraphs, the spacing between paragraphs is whichever is the greater value (it's not cumulative). Paragraph spacing above paragraphs will move the first paragraph down in a frame of text. Advanced text properties Right click on a text object and select "Advanced text properties… " to bring up the Advanced text properties dialog.
Numbered lists You can create and edit numbered lists in just the same way as described for bulleted lists above, using the numbered list button. You can also choose the numbering scheme to be used for each list, using the List properties dialog. Place the text cursor in one of the numbered list points, press the right mouse button and choose 'List properties… " from the context menu.
in the text box, or click the arrows to nudge the values. It shares the same key shortcuts as above. If there is just a cursor, it alters the kerning, but if there's a selected range of text, then it alters the tracking. Each key press alters it by 10/1000ths of a em. Baseline shift Baseline shift allows you to move part of a line up or down. Positive values move the text upwards, negative downwards. The baseline is the imaginary line at the bottom of characters.
Line spacing Line spacing allows you to change the space between two lines (so affects vertical spacing). Line spacing is measured in percentages (120%) or points (12pt). You can either type the line space value in the text box or click the arrows to nudge the values. A percentage setting has the benefit of scaling accordingly if you change your font size. If a percentage is applied to a line of text with more than one font size, the largest font size is used.
Paragraph Spacing The last two fields on the end of the Text Tool InfoBar allow you to set the spacing above and/or below paragraphs. This is particularly useful where you want half line spaces between paragraphs. Like Microsoft Word, when you use both spacing above and below paragraphs, the spacing between paragraphs is whichever is the greater value (it's not cumulative). Paragraph spacing above paragraphs will move the first paragraph down in a frame of text.
Tracking Whereas kerning (see below) changes the spacing between two characters, tracking changes the spacing equally within a region of text. An EM is the width of the capital letter "M" in the current font and font size. It is therefore relative to the font size and not a fixed value. 1. Select the region to which you want to apply tracking. 2. Type a value into the Tracking text box (values are in 1/1000ths of ems).
Advanced text properties Right click on a text object and select "Advanced text properties… " to bring up the Advanced text properties dialog. Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Kerning Kerning lets you alter the space between two characters (so affects horizontal spacing). Most good fonts have auto-kerning which means they already move appropriate pairs of characters together slightly, as you can see from this diagram: Auto-kerning off Auto-kerning on Manual kerning Kerning is measured in "ems" (enter values in 1/1000ths of "ems".) You can either type the kerning value in the text box, or click the arrows to nudge the values. It shares the same key shortcuts as above.
Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Baseline shift Baseline shift allows you to move part of a line up or down. Positive values move the text upwards, negative downwards. The baseline is the imaginary line at the bottom of characters. Select the characters for which you wish to change the baseline shift then enter a value in the Baseline shift text box. The effect of selecting AG and then applying a downwards baseline shift (i.e. -5pt).
Paragraph Spacing The last two fields on the end of the Text Tool InfoBar allow you to set the spacing above and/or below paragraphs. This is particularly useful where you want half line spaces between paragraphs. Like Microsoft Word, when you use both spacing above and below paragraphs, the spacing between paragraphs is whichever is the greater value (it's not cumulative). Paragraph spacing above paragraphs will move the first paragraph down in a frame of text.
Advanced text properties Right click on a text object and select "Advanced text properties… " to bring up the Advanced text properties dialog. Here you can turn off auto-kerning on the selected text object if desired. See the kerning section above for information on kerning. You can also specify that the selected text should be converted to shapes before being sent to the printer, which is useful if there are any problems printing with the font used.
Text links You can apply a link to any part of a text object, so that when the document is exported as HTML the text shows as a clickable link in web browsers. Use the Text Tool to select the words or characters that you want to apply the link to, then choose Web Properties from the Utilities menu. This brings up the Web Properties dialog. Click the Link tab. On this tab you can choose whether to link to a URL, to another page of your website, or even to a pop-up layer.
Text inside groups for websites When a document is exported as a website, all groups get exported as images. So any text inside groups can't be selected and copied as text by a visitor to your site. For graphical buttons, headings, logos etc. this is usually desirable as the text just forms part of the graphic. But you may have more substantial pieces of text inside groups which you want to remain as text in your exported web page.
Copying text appearances It's easy to copy the style of any text to any other region of text using the Paste format/attributes feature: Select the source region from where you want to copy the style. This can be as little as a word (just double click). Select "Edit" > "Copy" ("Ctrl + C"). Select the region of text to which you want to apply the style. Select "Edit" > "Paste format/attributes" ("Ctrl + ñ + A").
Applying attributes to whole text stories When you have the cursor in a simple or column text object, pressing "Esc" will select the whole text object. You can then apply an attribute, say a color, and the whole text object is altered. This is often quicker than performing "Select all" ("Ctrl + A"). With text areas this method only works if all text areas of the story are selected. You can do this in the Selector Tool clicking and "Shift + clicking" on the different text areas to select them.
Copying/Pasting formatted text (RTF) You can copy "rich text" (as it's sometimes known) from other applications such as word processors or editors and paste into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 as text, and the fonts, margins, line spacing and text links will be preserved. This makes it dramatically easier to retain the style and appearance of your text.
Seeing fonts in use It is sometimes useful to see what fonts are used in your document, particularly if you are sharing files with other Photo & Graphic Designer users who may not have the same fonts installed. For a complete list of fonts used in your document choose "File" > "Document info ". Any fonts that are used in the document but are not currently installed on your computer have not installed by them.
Changing text into editable shapes You may want to convert some text into editable character outlines for further manipulation or if you wish to give the document to someone who does not have the fonts used in your document. To do this: 1. Change to the Selector Tool. 2. Select the text. 3. Choose "Arrange -> Convert to editable shapes" ("Ctrl + Shift + S"). This converts the individual characters into a series of straight and curved lines.
The Fonts Gallery The Fonts Gallery serves a number of useful purposes: It's an easy way to preview the style of all fonts on your system. It lists all the fonts included on the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 CD (whether or not they are installed). You can install fonts from the CD (or hard disk), or un-install fonts You can apply fonts by drag-and-drop To display the Fonts Gallery click its tab in the galleries bar to the right of the Photo & Graphic Designer window.
If you apply a font that is not installed it asks if you want the font installed. Installing or uninstalling a font The first part of the gallery shows fonts already installed. Remaining sections show fonts on the CD (either from the CD or from the hard disc made at install time). 1. Click on a font name to select it. You can select additional fonts by either "?+ clicking" to select a group or "Ctrl + clicking" to add an individual font to the selection. 2.
Applying a font from the Fonts Gallery This is an alternative to using the Text Tool InfoBar . You can either: Select the font in the gallery and click Apply to apply to the selected text object, or double click a font Or drag & drop the font name onto any text (selected or not). The pointer changes shape when in position. If you apply a font that is not installed it asks if you want the font installed. Installing or uninstalling a font The first part of the gallery shows fonts already installed.
Installing or uninstalling a font The first part of the gallery shows fonts already installed. Remaining sections show fonts on the CD (either from the CD or from the hard disc made at install time). 1. Click on a font name to select it. You can select additional fonts by either "+ clicking" to select a group or "Ctrl + clicking" to add an individual font to the selection. 2. Click Install or the Uninstall button on the top of the gallery.
Fonts and PDF When you create a PDF ("File -> Export… "), you get the option to embed fonts into the PDF file. Font embedding ensures that anyone who receives the PDF can view and print the document with the correct font, but it does make the PDF files larger. PDF Export options This is only possible for those fonts that are marked by their creators as having permission for embedding. You are warned if it's not possible to embed fonts.
Font embedding Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 stores the character shapes of all the fonts used in your document. This means if you give someone else your design file, or transfer the file to another computer, the text will still look exactly right, even if the correct fonts are not installed on that computer. But this only embeds the characters that are used in the document (the full font is not included).
Browser text compatibility It is a sad fact that different browsers display the same text slightly differently, usually at a slightly different size or line length (so for example 10pt text is not displayed at 10pt size but at the nearest whole pixel size instead (13 pixels). Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is designed to emulate the behavior of the most common browsers and adjusts intermediate sizes to be whole pixels, and adjusts the line lengths to closely emulate the text on Windows browsers.
Fills In this chapter Introduction The Fill Tool Flat fills Linear fills Circular fills Elliptical fills Conical fills Diamond fills Three-color fills Four-color fills Bitmap fills Fractal fills Multi-stage color graduations The Fill Gallery Page 730
Introduction Photo & Graphic Designer has these types of color fill: Flat fills - the shape has an even color or tone over its surface. Linear fills - the color gradually changes from one color to another. Circular fills - the color change radiates out from a single point in a circular pattern. Elliptical fills - similar to circular fills except the change radiates out in an elliptical pattern. Conical fills - the color change rotates around a single point.
of a group (which is not very likely), you need to select the group using the Selector Tool first.
The Fill Tool In this chapter Creating a graduated color fill Fill Tool InfoBar Creating a graduated color fill The process of creating a different fill is almost identical for all the fill types: 1. Select the object or objects to which you want to apply the fill. 2. Select the Fill Tool ("G"). 3. Select the fill type from the dropdown menu. 4. Click-drag across the object to create the fill. Or, drag one of the fill handles to adjust the fill size and position.
Fill tiling options are not available for conical. All other fill types can be made to repeat. This can produce some useful effects. A repeating elliptical fill inside an ellipse shape Fill effect is used for all fill types, except 3 and 4-color fills. It controls how the fill colors fade from the start color to the end color: Fade: Fades between the two colors in a linear fashion Rainbow: Blends along the shortest edge of the HSV color wheel.
individual pixels of the bitmap. You rarely need a resolution greater than 150 DPI, even for typeset output. Fill handle color (except bitmap fills): Indicates the color applied to the selected fill handle.
Creating a graduated color fill The process of creating a different fill is almost identical for all the fill types: 1. Select the object or objects to which you want to apply the fill. 2. Select the Fill Tool ("G"). 3. Select the fill type from the dropdown menu. 4. Click-drag across the object to create the fill. Or, drag one of the fill handles to adjust the fill size and position. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides a smooth interactive live preview of the fill as you drag.
Fill tiling options are not available for conical. All other fill types can be made to repeat. This can produce some useful effects. A repeating elliptical fill inside an ellipse shape Fill effect is used for all fill types, except 3 and 4-color fills. It controls how the fill colors fade from the start color to the end color: Fade: Fades between the two colors in a linear fashion Rainbow: Blends along the shortest edge of the HSV color wheel.
individual pixels of the bitmap. You rarely need a resolution greater than 150 DPI, even for typeset output. Fill handle color (except bitmap fills): Indicates the color applied to the selected fill handle.
Fill Tool InfoBar Fill type Fill tiling Fill effect Bitmap name Profile Fill handle/resolution Handle color/Grain Fill type selects the type of fill. Selecting from this menu: with a selected object, applies the fill to the object; without a selected object, sets the current fill type which will then be used for newly drawn objects. Fill tiling is used when applying bitmap and fractal fills. The options are described later in bitmap fills. Fill tiling changes the repetition of the fill effect.
3. You either select a predefined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) creates a linear transition between the start and end of the fill. Show three different black-to-white graduated color fills and the corresponding profile dialogs. The center, default, is a linear black-to-white transition. Fill handle : Indicates if the start or end handle is selected. This field is blank for flat fills.
Flat fills To apply or change a flat fill: 1. Select flat fill from the fill type menu. 2. Choose a color from the Color Line or Color Gallery. The Color Line and Color Gallery are described in Color handling .
Linear fills To apply a linear fill: 1. Select linear fill from the fill type menu (not necessary if the object currently has a flat fill). 2. Position the pointer where you want to start the fill (this can be outside the object). 3. Drag the mouse pointer to where you want the fill to end (again, this point can be outside the object). The arrow drawn on the selected object is called the fill arrow. It indicates the direction and extent of the fill. You can select either end of the arrow by clicking it.
Moving the start or end handle of the fill To change the direction and extent of the fill: 1. Move the pointer over the handle you want to move. When over the handle, the pointer changes shape. 2. Drag the handle. Changing the colors in a fill To change a color in a fill: Drag & drop the color from the Color Line onto a fill handle (you do not have to select the handle first.) Or, drag & drop the color onto the object. Each fill has an imaginary center line halfway along the fill arrow.
Changing the colors in a fill To change a color in a fill: Drag & drop the color from the Color Line onto a fill handle (you do not have to select the handle first.) Or, drag & drop the color onto the object. Each fill has an imaginary center line halfway along the fill arrow. Dropping the color on the start handle side changes the start handle color, and the end handle side changes the end handle. Or, if one of the end handles is selected (it's shown highlighted) just click on a color.
Circular fills For circular fills, applying the fill, moving handles and changing colors are the same as for linear fills. The start handle is the center of the fill. Circular fills are useful for creating highlight effects. Changing the height/width ratio of the object automatically changes a circular fill into an elliptical fill (see below).
Elliptical fills Applying an elliptical fill is similar to applying linear fills. As you drag the mouse pointer, you first create a circle with two end handles. You can then drag the end handles to create a suitable ellipse. " ?+ drag" preserves the aspect ratio of the fill. "Ctrl + drag" constrains rotation to the preset constrain angles. Moving handles and changing colors are the same as for linear fills. A quick way to apply a elliptical fill: "Shift + drag" to create a elliptical fill.
Conical fills When you apply a conical fill, the fill arrow displays as a semi-circle with two end handles. You can then rotate either end handle around the start handle to create suitable shading. The size of the semi-circle is irrelevant-it has no effect on the fill. "Ctrl + drag" constrains rotation to the preset constrain angles. You can also drag the center handle to change the position of the fill. Moving handles and changing colors are the same as for linear fills.
Diamond fills Applying diamond fills is similar to applying elliptical fills. As you drag the mouse pointer, the fill boundary appears as a square with two end handles. You can then drag the end handles to resize the diamond. "Shift + drag" unlocks the aspect ratio of the fill, allowing you to move the fill handles independently. "Ctrl + drag" constrains your selection to the preset constrain angles.
Three-color fills Three-color fills give the effect of three colored spotlights lighting the object. As you drag the mouse pointer, the fill displays as a triangle with three end handles. By default there is a 60° angle between the two fill arrows. "n+ drag" to create triangles with different angles to form the fill triangle you require. Unlike other three-handle fill types, three-color fills can have a different color applied to each handle (the center and the two end points).
Four-color fills Four-color fills are similar to three-color fills and give the effect of four colored spotlights lighting the object. When you apply a four-color fill, the fill boundary displays as a square with four end handles. You can then drag the handles to scale and rotate the rectangles. "n+ drag" to create parallelograms instead of rectangles. Hold down Ctrl while dragging to constrain the rotation of the fill.. You can apply different colors to all four fill handles/lines.
Bitmap fills Fill Type Fill Tiling Not used Bitmap name Resolution Not used The Bitmap Gallery is described in The Bitmap Gallery in the Photo Handling chapter, for the Fill Gallery see below . Bitmap fills are one of the most powerful fill types. It allows any photo or texture to be used as a fill for any shape and you have direct immediate control over the size, angle, position and tiling. You can color bitmap fills.
while replacing a photo in this way causes the position, scale and rotation of the bitmap fill to be preserved. Bitmap coloring You can color any bitmap or photo fill by just clicking on a color on the Color Line (make sure no fill handles are selected, by just clicking on the image). This will create a Contone (technically a Duotone) which uses colors between black and the selected color. Alternatively right click on the object and choose Contone > Set Light Color or Contone > Make Black and White.
1. Drag the photo or bitmap file from Windows Explorer (or from the Bitmap Gallery if it is already used in the document) over the ellipse, and drop it while holding down "Shift". The Fill Tool becomes the current tool. 2. You can now adjust the angle and size of the image by dragging on the Fill Handles. The above example has a simple shadow - see the chapter on the Shadow Tool for more information.
Replacing Bitmap Fills If a shape already contains a bitmap, or is a photo, then you can just drag and drop a new bitmap from any source, such as Windows Explorer, and it will replace the existing bitmap. The new image is 'best fitted' into the shape so that it just fits in. By default, doing this will also replace all other instances of that photo on the current page, if they are in the same soft group.
To fill the ellipse on the left with the photo in the center; 1. Drag the photo or bitmap file from Windows Explorer (or from the Bitmap Gallery if it is already used in the document) over the ellipse, and drop it while holding down "Shift". The Fill Tool becomes the current tool. 2. You can now adjust the angle and size of the image by dragging on the Fill Handles. The above example has a simple shadow - see the chapter on the Shadow Tool for more information.
Bitmap coloring You can color any bitmap or photo fill by just clicking on a color on the Color Line (make sure no fill handles are selected, by just clicking on the image). This will create a Contone (technically a Duotone) which uses colors between black and the selected color. Alternatively right click on the object and choose Contone > Set Light Color or Contone > Make Black and White. You can also right click the color line and select either the 'Set Contone Light Color' or 'Set Contone Dark Color '.
becomes the current tool. 2. You can now adjust the angle and size of the image by dragging on the Fill Handles. The above example has a simple shadow - see the chapter on the Shadow Tool for more information.
Resizing and re-positioning bitmap fills Once the fill has been created, you can drag anywhere on the image to re-position the fill inside the shape. When you mouse over the outer fill handles the mouse pointer changes into a "rotate" mouse pointer. Dragging on these handles will stretch and rotate the bitmap fill with the current aspect ratio locked; hold down " Å„" while dragging to change the horizontal and vertical size independently and to skew the fill.
An example To fill the ellipse on the left with the photo in the center; 1. Drag the photo or bitmap file from Windows Explorer (or from the Bitmap Gallery if it is already used in the document) over the ellipse, and drop it while holding down "Shift". The Fill Tool becomes the current tool. 2. You can now adjust the angle and size of the image by dragging on the Fill Handles. The above example has a simple shadow - see the chapter on the Shadow Tool for more information.
Fractal fills Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports two types of fractal fill which are mathematically created naturalistic fill patterns. They are great for simulating sky and clouds or other natural textures. Each time you create a new fractal fill a new pattern is created. To replace an existing fractal with a new pattern choose fractal from the fill menu again. The Grain control on the InfoBar provides control over the graininess of the pattern.
Multi-stage color graduations Many of the graduated color fill types support multi-stage graduation fills, which means instead of just fading from one color to another, you can go through a number of different color fill stages. To add a new color stage to a graduation, select the Fill Tool so the fill arrow shows and then: Either drag a color onto the fill arrow where required. Or double click on the fill arrow to create a new fill handle, and now click a color or display the Color Editor.
The Fill Gallery The Fill Gallery contains bitmap textures suitable for use as bitmap fills. Only when you use a fill is it copied into the document. To display the Fill Gallery : To display the Fill Gallery click its tab in the galleries bar to the right of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Or you can toggle display of the Fill Gallery by choosing Utilities > Galleries > Fill Gallery or pressing "Shift + F11". Import - imports the selected bitmap into the document.
There are some differences between either dragging a bitmap from the Bitmap or Fill Gallery: When dragging bitmaps from the Fill Gallery and dropping on shapes to create a bitmap fill, the fill will be tiled and the bitmap won't be best-fitted into the shape. This different behavior to that seen when dragging from the Bitmap Gallery is because normally textures are applied from the Fill Gallery and these should normally be tiled and not best-fitted.
Transparency The Transparency Tool lets you specify how much of the underlying colors and objects appears through an object. Shape Transparency type Tiling Bitmap name Profile Handle/Resolution Amount of transparency You have control over the level of transparency from fully opaque to fully transparent. Photo & Graphic Designer goes further than other drawing packages by offering a wide range of different graduated transparencies.
Applying flat transparency It's called "flat" transparency because all parts of the objects have the same transparency, as opposed to graduated transparency. 1. Select the object or objects 2. Select the Transparency Tool ("F6") 3. Drag the transparency slider on the InfoBar Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides live-preview. As you drag the transparency slider the objects on the document are changed so you can see the effect immediately.
Other colors - darken underlying colors towards saturated color (light red over light red results in mid-red: green over red results in black). If you want to use a colored object to darken underlying colors, you may find Darken transparency type easier to use. Technically the process is subtractive in RGB color space. Bleach Bleach has no clear analogy in the physical world. It is useful for highlights when the light source is not white.
Luminosity uses the grayscale equivalent of the color to control the luminosity (or Value) of underlying objects. Note that Luminosity has no effect on gray, white or black underlying objects. The color of the object with Luminosity applied: Gray & White - increase the luminosity of underlying objects. White has the greatest effect, producing saturated color. Black - remains as a black object. Other colors - convert the color to the equivalent shade of gray. (Yellow gives light gray, Red dark gray.
Applying flat transparency It's called "flat" transparency because all parts of the objects have the same transparency, as opposed to graduated transparency. 1. Select the object or objects 2. Select the Transparency Tool ("F6") 3. Drag the transparency slider on the InfoBar Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides live-preview. As you drag the transparency slider the objects on the document are changed so you can see the effect immediately.
Other colors - darken underlying colors towards saturated color (light red over light red results in mid-red: green over red results in black). If you want to use a colored object to darken underlying colors, you may find Darken transparency type easier to use. Technically the process is subtractive in RGB color space. Bleach Bleach has no clear analogy in the physical world. It is useful for highlights when the light source is not white.
Luminosity uses the grayscale equivalent of the color to control the luminosity (or Value) of underlying objects. Note that Luminosity has no effect on gray, white or black underlying objects. The color of the object with Luminosity applied: Gray & White - increase the luminosity of underlying objects. White has the greatest effect, producing saturated color. Black - remains as a black object. Other colors - convert the color to the equivalent shade of gray. (Yellow gives light gray, Red dark gray.
Applying graduated transparency Graduated transparency works in a very similar way to graduated color fills. You just drag on the objects in the Transparency Tool to create a fading transparency. You have a very similar range of transparency shapes, the simplest being linear, but you can also have circular, elliptical, conical, fractal and bitmap transparencies, and others. To create a graduated fade: 1. Select the object or objects 2.
a pale-red: green over red gives yellow.) If you want to use a colored object to lighten but not color-shift underlying colors, you may find Lighten transparency type easier to use. Technically the process is additive in RGB color space. Contrast Usually you would use C on a separate object to modify the color of underlaying objects (that is, you would use an object as a filter). Depending on the color chosen, it increases the contrast of underlying colors (make them brighter or duller).
color model. The color of the object with Hue applied: Gray, White, & Black - has no effect. These colors lie at the center of the color wheel and so have no hue. If the underlying color is gray, white, or black - Hue transparency type has no effect. Other colors - replace the Hue of the underlying color with the Hue of this object. Use the Saturation and Value of the underlying color. For more information on HSV refer to Color handling .
Multi-stage graduated transparency Just as you can add multiple stages to a graduated fill, you can do the same with a graduated transparency. This allows you to fade, for example, from opaque to 50% transparent then back up to 25% transparent, back to opaque, etc. You can set the level of transparency at each stage, by selecting a handle and then adjusting the transparency slider. Add additional stages by double-clicking on the graduated transparency line then adjusting the slider.
is, you would use an object as a filter). Depending on the color chosen, it makes the colors of underlying objects brighter or duller. The color of the object with Saturation applied: Gray (below a 50% tint of black) & White - increases saturation in the colors of underlying objects towards pure color. Gray (above a 50% tint of black) & Black - reduces saturation (colorization) towards black. Other colors - convert the color to the equivalent shade of gray. (Yellow gives light gray, Red dark gray.
For more information on colors see Color Handling . Enhance See Enhance below for more information on Enhance transparency.
Transparency types The most common type of transparency, and the only type that many other applications understand is called "Mix transparency". But Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports different type that affect the objects in different ways. Photo & Graphic Designer has these types of transparency: Mix The color of the object mixes with the color of underlying objects. The effect is similar to spraying a thin coat of color (or paint) over underlying objects.
object with Darken/Lighten applied: White - no effect on the colors of underlying objects. Gray & Black - darkens/lightens the colors of underlying objects. Other colors - convert the color to the equivalent shade of gray. (Yellow gives light gray, Red dark gray.) Then darken/lighten the colors of underlying objects. Brightness Depending on the color chosen, Brightness makes the colors of underlying objects lighter or darker.
Enhance Enhance transparency allows you to modify any part of your design using the Enhance Photo Tool, just as if it was a photo. For example you can draw a shape over any part of your design, apply enhance transparency to it and then adjust the brightness of just the area of your design which is covered by the shape. Applying Enhance transparency To apply enhance transparency:1. Draw or select the shape to which you want to apply the enhance transparency effect. 2.
2. On the Transparency Tool InfoBar click Profile. This opens the Profile dialog. 3. You either select a predefined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) creates a linear transition between the start and end of the transparency. Bitmaps Bitmap & Fill Galleries are described in Photo Handling and Fills . When you select a transparency type of Bitmap, a default bitmap is initially used.
Applying Enhance transparency To apply enhance transparency:1. Draw or select the shape to which you want to apply the enhance transparency effect. 2. Go into the Transparency Tool and select "Enhance" from the transparency type list on the infobar. 3. The shape seems to have disappeared from your page! That's because it will only apply enhancements to objects underneath it, and you've yet to specify the enhancements it will apply. The object should still be selected however. 4.
Bitmap & Fill Galleries are described in Photo Handling and Fills . When you select a transparency type of Bitmap, a default bitmap is initially used. Click on Bitmap Name in the transparency InfoBar, or use the Bitmap or Fill Galleries to change the bitmap used (click the Transp button in the gallery or drag-and-drop from the gallery). By default, the lighter colors in a bitmap are the most transparent (you can, of course, alter the relative amounts of transparency later).
Photo editing with Enhance transparency When you apply enhance transparency as described above, the shape remains as an independent object that is not tied to any photos or other objects in your design (unless you go on to manually group it with other objects of course). Because you will most commonly want to use this effect when editing photos, there is a better way to use Enhance transparency which is more suited to working with photos.
Profile You can change the rate of change of transition between the start and end of transparencies. This applies to all single stage graduated transparency types except three point and four point (where the option is not available) To change the profile of a transparency: 1. Select the object. 2. On the Transparency Tool InfoBar click Profile. This opens the Profile dialog. 3. You either select a predefined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile.
Bitmaps Bitmap & Fill Galleries are described in Photo Handling and Fills . When you select a transparency type of Bitmap, a default bitmap is initially used. Click on Bitmap Name in the transparency InfoBar, or use the Bitmap or Fill Galleries to change the bitmap used (click the Transp button in the gallery or drag-and-drop from the gallery). By default, the lighter colors in a bitmap are the most transparent (you can, of course, alter the relative amounts of transparency later).
Handle/resolution If you have a handle selected, this box tells you what handle it is. With no handles selected, and when using a bitmap transparency, it controls the DPI.
Applying transparency to several objects If you group objects and apply transparency, the whole group is treated as one object and the entire group is made transparent. But if the objects are not grouped and you apply transparency, each individual object is given a separate transparency and you get an entirely different effect when the objects are overlaid.
Mixing individual and group transparencies You can combine the methods above to create complex transparency combinations. For example you could set an object to 50% transparency, then group it and apply a transparency to the group as well. You are also able to apply a transparency to a group first, and then later apply attributes to individual objects within a group. Just hold down "Ctrl", click the individual object and change its attributes. Group transparency on blends For more on blends see Blends .
Group transparency on blends For more on blends see Blends . When adding a transparency to a Blend object, the transparency will be applied to the blend as a whole. It is treated like group transparency. If you want the transparency to be applied to each individual step of the blend, first make the objects transparent, and then blend.
Opacity Masks As described above, the Transparency Tool allows you to apply either flat or graduated transparency to any object or group. But sometimes you need more advanced control over the transparency (or opacity) of an object. Opacity masks are a very powerful way of achieving this. The Opacity Mask system takes any object, or group of objects, and uses the color (usually black to white shading) of these objects to define which parts of any other object are transparent or opaque.
and make the softness setting on the infobar a value greater than 0 (when softness is 0 a 'hard erase' is performed, which is used for permanently cutting objects and this does not use an opacity mask). Choose an appropriate nib size on the infobar and draw over the objects. An opacity mask is created automatically and your erase strokes are used as the mask. Editing inside an opacity mask group You can select objects inside the Opacity Mask Group directly on canvas.
Unclipped (default) Clipped to mask object Uses only alpha (Ctrl+Alt+A) This makes the rendering of the opacity mask ignore color saturation levels and use only transparency levels in the mask object(s) to set the transparency on the opacity mask group. Inverted (Ctrl+Alt+V) This inverts the nature of the transparency produced by the mask objects, as demonstrated by this simple example. Default Inverted See the Photo Handling chapter for an example of opacity masks in action and for other tips.
Applying using the clipboard Select the object which is to be the mask and copy it to the clipboard. Then select the object, photo, or group to which you want to apply this mask and select Edit -> Paste Opacity Mask . There are two options, the first will position the opacity mask into the center of the selected object. The second option 'Paste opacity mask in place' will paste it into the selected object based on the original position of the mask.
Invert opacity mask This inverts the nature of the transparency in the opacity mask group, so transparent parts become opaque and vice versa. This operation actually just changes the Clipped and Inverted settings described below, since fully inverting the opacity mask group involves changing both those settings.
Apply directly Place the object to which you want to apply the mask behind the object(s) that you want to apply as a mask. Then select both the mask object(s) and the object to which the mask is to be applied, and invoke Arrange->Apply opacity mask . The backmost object is taken as the target for the mask and all other objects in the selection make up the opacity mask. So if you want to apply a mask to multiple objects this way, you need to group them first and place them behind the mask objects.
Intitial opacity mask Inverted Detach opacity mask from selection This operation extracts the masking objects from the opacity mask group, making them become normal objects on the page and makes the opacity mask group into an ordinary group. Clipped (Ctrl+Alt+C) This option makes the opacity mask group be clipped to the outline of the mask object(s).
Soft erasing using the Shape Eraser tool Just select the object(s) you want to erase, go into the Shape Eraser Tool and make the softness setting on the infobar a value greater than 0 (when softness is 0 a 'hard erase' is performed, which is used for permanently cutting objects and this does not use an opacity mask). Choose an appropriate nib size on the infobar and draw over the objects. An opacity mask is created automatically and your erase strokes are used as the mask.
Clipped (Ctrl+Alt+C) This option makes the opacity mask group be clipped to the outline of the mask object(s). Unclipped (default) Clipped to mask object Uses only alpha (Ctrl+Alt+A) This makes the rendering of the opacity mask ignore color saturation levels and use only transparency levels in the mask object(s) to set the transparency on the opacity mask group. Inverted (Ctrl+Alt+V) This inverts the nature of the transparency produced by the mask objects, as demonstrated by this simple example.
Editing inside an opacity mask group You can select objects inside the Opacity Mask Group directly on canvas. Ctrl+click operations will select the objects that are being masked, not the mask objects that form the mask itself. To select the mask objects directly, use Ctrl+Alt+click. The first Ctrl+Alt+click selects the whole opacity mask group. Ctrl+Alt+click again and it will select the group of mask objects, so you can then drag around the whole mask inside.
Unclipped (default) Clipped to mask object Uses only alpha (Ctrl+Alt+A) This makes the rendering of the opacity mask ignore color saturation levels and use only transparency levels in the mask object(s) to set the transparency on the opacity mask group. Inverted (Ctrl+Alt+V) This inverts the nature of the transparency produced by the mask objects, as demonstrated by this simple example. Default Inverted See the Photo Handling chapter for an example of opacity masks in action and for other tips.
Advanced options If you right click on an opacity mask group, the context menu includes an "Opacity mask" sub-menu with the following operations. Open opacity mask This is described above ? it allows the masking objects to be edited in a separate document view. Invert opacity mask This inverts the nature of the transparency in the opacity mask group, so transparent parts become opaque and vice versa.
Default Inverted See the Photo Handling chapter for an example of opacity masks in action and for other tips.
Shadows In this chapter The Shadow Tool Applying a shadow Changing the shadow color or fill effect Converting shadows to shapes Removing a shadow Applying a shadow to several objects Selecting objects using the Shadow Tool Copying shadows onto other objects Page 803
The Shadow Tool The Shadow Tool (shortcut "Ctrl + F2") lets you apply, remove, and modify semi-transparent (or "soft") shadows. The transparency of soft shadows increases towards the edges, which gives a very realistic effect. Shadows are resolution independent so you can scale them without losing quality.
Applying a shadow Applying a shadow To apply a shadow: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the Wall, Floor or Glow button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar. 4. You can drag the shadow away from or towards the object to create more or less distance between the object and the imaginary wall. Alternatively to create a wall shadow you can: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Drag from the center of the object in the direction of the shadow. Applying a floor shadow 1.
3. On the Shadow Tool InfoBar either drag the blur slider or type a value into the text box on the right. Change the transparency of the shadow A semi-transparent shadow is more realistic than a solid shadow. But you can change the transparency level of the shadow to suit your needs. To change the transparency: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. On the Shadow Tool InfoBar, drag either the transparency slider or type a value into the text box on the right.
Applying a shadow To apply a shadow: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the Wall, Floor or Glow button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar. 4. You can drag the shadow away from or towards the object to create more or less distance between the object and the imaginary wall. Alternatively to create a wall shadow you can: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Drag from the center of the object in the direction of the shadow. Applying a floor shadow 1. Select the object. 2.
Change the transparency of the shadow A semi-transparent shadow is more realistic than a solid shadow. But you can change the transparency level of the shadow to suit your needs. To change the transparency: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. On the Shadow Tool InfoBar, drag either the transparency slider or type a value into the text box on the right. Changing the shadow profile After applying a shadow, you can change how the shadow transparency changes across the blur.
Applying a floor shadow 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the Floor button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar. 4. Drag towards or away from the object to change the size or radially to change the direction. Applying a glow effect Adding a glow or halo behind an object can create dramatic graphics. To create a glow effect: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the Glow button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar. 4.
Changing the shadow profile After applying a shadow, you can change how the shadow transparency changes across the blur. You can have a linear transition (which is the default profile and usually gives the most realistic results) or a profiled transition. To change the shadow profile: 1. Create the shadow. 2. In the Shadow Tool, click Profile. This opens the Profile dialog box. 3. You can either select a pre-defined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile.
Applying a glow effect Adding a glow or halo behind an object can create dramatic graphics. To create a glow effect: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the Glow button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar. 4. Drag towards or away from the object to change the size of the glow. Blur the edges of the shadow This changes the size of the shadow. A small blur gives the effect of a sharp light source, a large blur, a diffused or distant light source.
custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) creates a linear transition.
Blur the edges of the shadow This changes the size of the shadow. A small blur gives the effect of a sharp light source, a large blur, a diffused or distant light source. It is recommended that shadows are always blurred slightly as this is more realistic. To blur the shadow edge: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. On the Shadow Tool InfoBar either drag the blur slider or type a value into the text box on the right.
Change the transparency of the shadow A semi-transparent shadow is more realistic than a solid shadow. But you can change the transparency level of the shadow to suit your needs. To change the transparency: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. On the Shadow Tool InfoBar, drag either the transparency slider or type a value into the text box on the right. Changing the shadow profile After applying a shadow, you can change how the shadow transparency changes across the blur.
Changing the shadow profile After applying a shadow, you can change how the shadow transparency changes across the blur. You can have a linear transition (which is the default profile and usually gives the most realistic results) or a profiled transition. To change the shadow profile: 1. Create the shadow. 2. In the Shadow Tool, click Profile. This opens the Profile dialog box. 3. You can either select a pre-defined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile.
Changing the shadow color or fill effect After applying a shadow to an object, you can change the shadow's color or fill effect. You can apply any of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's color effects including multi-stage fills. How to change the shadow color: For more on colors and the Color Line refer to Color handling . The easiest way is to drag & drop a color from the Color Line onto the shadow (make sure you drop the color onto the shadow and not the object).
Converting shadows to shapes You can convert a shadow into a group containing the shadow and the object (or objects) casting the shadow. The shadow is converted to a simple shape and, after ungrouping, can be edited. Note that after converting a shadow to a shape, you cannot use the Shadow Tool to edit it, as it is no longer a shadow. To convert a shadow to shapes: 1. Select the shadow or the object (or objects) casting the shadow. 2. Choose Arrange -> Convert to editable shapes.
Removing a shadow To remove a soft shadow: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Shadow Tool. 3. Select the No shadow button on the Shadow Tool InfoBar.
Applying a shadow to several objects The result of applying a shadow depends on whether the objects are grouped: If the objects are grouped, overlapping shadows merge (they do not get darker if they overlap). If the objects are ungrouped, each object has a separate shadow. Overlapping areas of shadow are darker. If you have several shadowed objects selected, any changes apply to all the shadows.
Selecting objects using the Shadow Tool Before you can apply or edit a shadow on an object, you must first select that object. The regular way of selecting objects is to use the Selector Tool but you can also use the Shadow Tool, simply click on the object while in the Shadow Tool.
Copying shadows onto other objects Once you've got a shadow looking how you want it on one object, you can copy it onto other objects using "Paste Format/attributes". Simply copy the object that has the shadow ("Edit" > "Copy"), select the object or objects you want to paste the shadow onto and choose "Edit" > "Paste Format/attributes" .
Bevels In this chapter The Bevel Tool Applying a bevel Applying a bevel to several objects Modifying a bevel Removing a bevel Page 822
The Bevel Tool The Bevel Tool (shortcut "Ctrl + F3") gives objects an appearance of depth instead of being flat on the page. Bevels are resolution-independent so you can scale them without losing quality. Bevel type Slider type list Slider and numeric value for selected parameter Outer bevel Inner bevel Join style You can apply bevels to most types of object. The exceptions are: Part of a block of text (such as a single letter)-the bevel is instead applied to all the text.
Applying a bevel To apply a bevel to a single object: 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list. Note that None removes any applied bevels.
Applying a bevel to several objects The result of a bevel on several objects depends on if the objects are grouped: If the objects are grouped, overlapping bevels merge together. The bevel color is the same as the rear-most object in the group. If the objects are ungrouped, each object has a separate bevel. The bevel color is the same as the object color.
Modifying a bevel You can change the angle and elevation of the light and change the shape, direction and size of the bevel edge. Bevel direction Bevels can be inside the object or outside. Outside bevels make objects larger; inside bevels do not change the object size. To change bevel direction: 1. Select the object. 2. Click either the Inner or Outer button. Changing the bevel light source The bevel effect is created by a light shining across the object and highlighting the shape (profile) of the bevel.
Changing the bevel size How to change the bevel size: 1. Select the object. 2. Drag any of the outside arrows to enlarge the bevel. Alternatively: 1. Select the object. 2. From the Slider type list choose Size. 3. Either drag the slider or type a value into the text box. Changing the bevel shape 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list.
Bevel direction Bevels can be inside the object or outside. Outside bevels make objects larger; inside bevels do not change the object size. To change bevel direction: 1. Select the object. 2. Click either the Inner or Outer button. Changing the bevel light source The bevel effect is created by a light shining across the object and highlighting the shape (profile) of the bevel. You can change the direction and height of the light and its strength (the contrast).
How to change the bevel size: 1. Select the object. 2. Drag any of the outside arrows to enlarge the bevel. Alternatively: 1. Select the object. 2. From the Slider type list choose Size. 3. Either drag the slider or type a value into the text box. Changing the bevel shape 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list. Changing the bevel color or fill effect After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the bevel's color or fill effect.
Changing the bevel light source The bevel effect is created by a light shining across the object and highlighting the shape (profile) of the bevel. You can change the direction and height of the light and its strength (the contrast). Changing the light angle (horizontal direction): 1. Select the object. 2. Drag the arrowhead to change the position of the light source. You cannot move the center of the arrow, only the arrowhead. For precise angles, select Light angle from the Slider type list.
Changing the bevel shape 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list. Changing the bevel color or fill effect After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the bevel's color or fill effect. You can apply any of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's color effects including multi-stage fills. For more on colors and the Color Line, refer to Color handling .
Changing the light strength (contrast) To change the light strength: 1. Select the object. 2. Select Contrast from the Slider type list. Then drag the slider or type into the text box. If you have several beveled objects selected, any changes apply to all the bevels. The colors used in the bevel affect the contrast. For example, strong (saturated) colors require more contrast than weak colors to get the same effect. For best results, you will probably have to adjust the contrast for each object.
2. Use the Color editor to edit the color. Changing the bevel join style After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the shape of the corners (joins). How to change the bevel join style: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the appropriate join button on the Bevel Tool InfoBar.
Changing the light elevation (vertical angle) This lets you move the light anywhere from immediately above the object (90º) to the side of the object (0º). 1. Select the object. 2. Select Light elevation from the Slider type list. Then drag the slider or type into the text box. For rounded bevels we recommend a light elevation of 30º. At this angle the bevel blends smoothly with the object. Changing the bevel size How to change the bevel size: 1. Select the object. 2.
2. Click the appropriate join button on the Bevel Tool InfoBar.
Changing the bevel size How to change the bevel size: 1. Select the object. 2. Drag any of the outside arrows to enlarge the bevel. Alternatively: 1. Select the object. 2. From the Slider type list choose Size. 3. Either drag the slider or type a value into the text box. Changing the bevel shape 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list.
Changing the bevel shape 1. Select the object 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. 3. Choose the bevel shape you want from the Bevel type list. Changing the bevel color or fill effect After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the bevel's color or fill effect. You can apply any of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's color effects including multi-stage fills. For more on colors and the Color Line, refer to Color handling .
Changing the bevel color or fill effect After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the bevel's color or fill effect. You can apply any of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's color effects including multi-stage fills. For more on colors and the Color Line, refer to Color handling . How to change the bevel color: The easiest way is to drag-and-drop a color from the Color Line onto the bevel (make sure you drop the color onto the bevel and not the object.
Changing the bevel join style After applying a bevel to an object, you can change the shape of the corners (joins). How to change the bevel join style: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the appropriate join button on the Bevel Tool InfoBar.
Removing a bevel To remove a bevel: 1. Select the object(s) from which you want to remove the bevel. 2. Choose the Bevel Tool. Choose None from the Bevel Type list.
Contours In this chapter The Contour Tool Contouring objects Converting contours to shapes Removing a contour Page 841
The Contour Tool The Contour Tool ("Ctrl + F7") lets you create interesting effects around the edges of objects. The Contour Tool creates a series of concentric outlines either on the inside or the outside of a selected shape.
Contouring objects To contour an object: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3. Then: Drag any of the eight handles that surround the selected objects. As you drag, you see the outline of the contour. Or drag the contour width slider. Or type a new value into the text box. Contours can be either inside or outside of objects (outside contours make the objects larger). To swap the contour direction: 1. Select the contoured object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3.
Tool. Click on the contour to select it. Changing the contour join style After applying a contour to an object, you can change the shape of the corners (joins). How to change the contour join style: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the appropriate join button on the Contour Tool InfoBar. Miter Round Bevel Changing the contour attribute profile After creating a contour you can change how the attributes (such as color or line thickness) change.
You can use contours to change the size of objects by making the outline thicker or thinner. This has advantages over resizing for shapes like the letter "C": On the left is the original object. The center letter is resized using a contour, the right letter is resized by scaling the object up. To resize using contours: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3. Give the object a contour of the required size. 4. Click Inset path on the Contour Tool InfoBar.
Changing the number of steps in a contour Contours are initially created with five intermediate steps. You can increase the number of steps to make each step less obvious. Alternatively, you can reduce the number of steps so you can clearly see each step. You can either enter the number of intermediate steps or enter the distance between steps. To change the number of steps in a contour: 1. Select the contoured object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3.
custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) is the default and creates a regular rate of change. Changing the contour position profile After creating a contour you can change how the intermediate steps are spaced. You can have regular spacing or closer at one end than the other or closer in the center. To change the position profile: 1. Create the contour. 2. In the Contour Tool click Position Profile. This opens the Profile dialog box. 3.
Changing the contour color After applying a contour to an object, you can change the contour's color. For more on colors and the Color Line refer to Color handling . How to change the contour color: The easiest way is to drag-and-drop a color from the Color Line onto the contour (make sure you drop the color onto the contour and not the object). Alternatively this method is slightly more complex but you have full control over the color: 1.
Applying a contour to several objects If the objects are grouped, overlapping contours merge together. The contour color is the same as the rear-most object in the group. If the objects are ungrouped, each object has a separate contour. The contour color is the same as the object color. The contour steps are not separate objects. To make them selectable, you need to convert the contour to editable shapes (see below).
Changing the contour join style After applying a contour to an object, you can change the shape of the corners (joins). How to change the contour join style: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the appropriate join button on the Contour Tool InfoBar. Miter Round Bevel Changing the contour attribute profile After creating a contour you can change how the attributes (such as color or line thickness) change. You might want a regular rate of change or a more pronounced change towards one end or the center.
advantages over resizing for shapes like the letter "C": On the left is the original object. The center letter is resized using a contour, the right letter is resized by scaling the object up. To resize using contours: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3. Give the object a contour of the required size. 4. Click Inset path on the Contour Tool InfoBar. The contour steps disappear and the object is now the size of the contoured object.
Changing the contour attribute profile After creating a contour you can change how the attributes (such as color or line thickness) change. You might want a regular rate of change or a more pronounced change towards one end or the center. To change the attribute profile: 1. Create the contour. 2. In the Contour Tool click Attribute profile. This opens the Profile dialog box. 3. You can either select a pre-defined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile.
Changing the contour position profile After creating a contour you can change how the intermediate steps are spaced. You can have regular spacing or closer at one end than the other or closer in the center. To change the position profile: 1. Create the contour. 2. In the Contour Tool click Position Profile. This opens the Profile dialog box. 3. You either select a pre-defined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile.
Applying a contour to several objects If the objects are grouped, overlapping contours merge together. The contour color is the same as the rear-most object in the group. If the objects are ungrouped, each object has a separate contour. The contour color is the same as the object color. The contour steps are not separate objects. To make them selectable, you need to convert the contour to editable shapes (see below).
Using contours to resize objects You can use contours to change the size of objects by making the outline thicker or thinner. This has advantages over resizing for shapes like the letter "C": On the left is the original object. The center letter is resized using a contour, the right letter is resized by scaling the object up. To resize using contours: 1. Select the object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. 3. Give the object a contour of the required size. 4. Click Inset path on the Contour Tool InfoBar.
Converting contours to shapes You can convert a contour into a group containing all the contour steps. Each step is converted to a shape and, after ungrouping, can be edited. Note that after converting a contour to shapes, you cannot use the Contour Tool to edit it as the object is no longer a contour. To convert a contour to shapes: 1. Select the contour. 2. Choose Arrange -> Convert to editable shapes.
Removing a contour If a contour does not give the desired effect, you can easily remove it: 1. Select the contoured object. 2. Choose the Contour Tool. Click on the Remove button on the Contour Tool InfoBar.
Masks Operations that can use a mask include; Content Aware photo scaling Photo color select/erase tool Photo clone/magic erase tool Cut / Copy / Delete operations Duplicate and Clone Combine Shapes (Arrange menu) In this chapter To Create A Mask Soft Masks Operating On The Mask Shapes Operations That Use The Mask Copying Shapes To The Mask Layer Page 858
To Create A Mask First select the object(s) to which you wish to apply a masked operation. Then select the Mask mode button, below the main toolbar on the left of the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 window. Or select the menu option "Window" > "Mask mode on". This will cover the whole drawing area with a pink semi-transparent mask, so you always know when mask mode is on. It also hides all unselected objects, to make it clear which objects in your design are to be operated on using the mask.
Soft Masks A soft mask is a mask that includes varying levels of masking, instead of consisting simply of just masked parts and unmasked parts. For example part of an image may have a 50% mask applied, so that a subsequently applied operation has only a 50% effect on that part of the image. Or a mask shape could have a graduated mask that smoothly graduates from 0% masking to 100% masking.
Operating On The Mask Shapes When you've drawn any shape on the mask, it's selected and acts pretty much like any normal line or shape. Drawing additional shapes will just add to the mask. The status line will indicate whether selected objects are on the mask layer or not. Pressing Escape will clear any selection (so there are no selected objects). If you have multiple separate objects on the mask layer, you can click on the outline (on the marching ants outline) to select any one particular shape.
Moving the mask objects Dragging anywhere on the pink mask will move all shapes on the mask layer. Where you have multiple shapes selected on the mask layer and want to operate on one shape only, clear the selection (press Esc) and then click on the edge of or inside the specific shape you want to select.
Operations That Use The Mask This section outlines some of the operations that work with masks and refers to other sections of the help for information on others. ClipView You can clip your drawing or photo to be inside the mask shape. Select the object(s) you want to clip, switch on mask mode and draw the required shape on the mask. Now when you select "Arrange" > "ClipView" (or press the key short cut "Q") the drawing will be clipped to the visible areas of the mask.
Opacity Mask section of the Transparency chapter for details on Opacity Masks. Duplicate, Clone This will copy only the visible un-masked parts of the drawing or photo. The Clone option places a copy exactly on top of the original. Content Aware photo scaling To protect part of a photo from being scaled, switch the mask on, draw around the area with the Freehand tool. Now go into the Content Aware photo scaling tool (Photo tool fly-out bar on the main toolbar).
ClipView You can clip your drawing or photo to be inside the mask shape. Select the object(s) you want to clip, switch on mask mode and draw the required shape on the mask. Now when you select "Arrange" > "ClipView" (or press the key short cut "Q") the drawing will be clipped to the visible areas of the mask. ClipViews are live and non-destructive in that the whole drawing is retained inside the Clipview object. . See the Object Handling chapter for details.
Content Aware photo scaling To protect part of a photo from being scaled, switch the mask on, draw around the area with the Freehand tool. Now go into the Content Aware photo scaling tool (Photo tool fly-out bar on the main toolbar). See the Content Aware Scaling feature for more information. Photo enhance tool Use a mask to apply brightness, contrast, saturation, temperature and blur/sharpen changes to any part of a photo.
Cut, Copy, Delete These operations are useful when used with masks, to cut pieces from photos, but you can use them on any objects. Select the object(s) you want to apply the operation to, then turn on mask mode and draw your mask shape(s). Then perform the cut/copy/delete operation. This shows a photo with mask on and an ellipse drawn on the mask. After a Cut or Delete the visible part of the photo is cut or deleted, as shown on the right. On the left example the mask has been inverted.
Photo enhance tool Use a mask to apply brightness, contrast, saturation, temperature and blur/sharpen changes to any part of a photo. Just draw the mask shape in mask mode, then go into the Photo Tool and start using the enhance controls on the infobar. Use soft masks to graduate the photo enhance effects. See the Photo Tool and Photo Handling chapters for more information.
Duplicate, Clone This will copy only the visible un-masked parts of the drawing or photo. The Clone option places a copy exactly on top of the original. Content Aware photo scaling To protect part of a photo from being scaled, switch the mask on, draw around the area with the Freehand tool. Now go into the Content Aware photo scaling tool (Photo tool fly-out bar on the main toolbar). See the Content Aware Scaling feature for more information.
Content Aware photo scaling To protect part of a photo from being scaled, switch the mask on, draw around the area with the Freehand tool. Now go into the Content Aware photo scaling tool (Photo tool fly-out bar on the main toolbar). See the Content Aware Scaling feature for more information. Photo enhance tool Use a mask to apply brightness, contrast, saturation, temperature and blur/sharpen changes to any part of a photo.
Photo enhance tool Use a mask to apply brightness, contrast, saturation, temperature and blur/sharpen changes to any part of a photo. Just draw the mask shape in mask mode, then go into the Photo Tool and start using the enhance controls on the infobar. Use soft masks to graduate the photo enhance effects. See the Photo Tool and Photo Handling chapters for more information.
Photo clone tool The clone tool will take a mask shape and convert it into a clone shape, which copies one part of a photo to another part. See the Clone Tool section of the Photo Tool chapter for details. Combine Shapes There are a set of operations under the "Arrange" > "Combine Shapes" menu that allow you to combine shapes in a number of different ways. These work with the mask.
Combine Shapes There are a set of operations under the "Arrange" > "Combine Shapes" menu that allow you to combine shapes in a number of different ways. These work with the mask. For example to slice a piece of a photo out (cookie cutter style), draw your cookie cutter shape on the mask, and select "Arrange" > "Combine Shapes" > "Slice" Mask Notes: The mask is really a special type of layer. If you open the Page & Layer Gallery you will see a mask layer appear when you switch on mask mode.
Copying Shapes To The Mask Layer You may prefer to draw your mask shape while not in mask mode, or to use an existing shape on your mask layer. This is particularly useful when working with soft masks, where you are applying levels of transparency to the mask objects. With the mask mode off, select the shape, and copy, or cut it. Now switch the mask mode on, and Paste. Use Paste in Place if you want the shape to appear in exactly the same place it was copied from.
Blends In this chapter Blends Using the Blend Tool Removing blends Page 875
Blends This operation blends one object into another by a series of intermediate objects. This is sometimes known as interpolation, in--betweening, tweening, or morphing. A five-stage blend of a star into an arbitrary shape. Blends have several different uses. This section describes firstly some of the uses and then using the Blend Tool. A blend is treated like a group and you can move and copy the blend as you would a group. Groups are described in Object handling .
Uses of blends To create a repeating design, such as a series of rules: For this you'd typically create an object, duplicate it to create the end object and then blend between them. Or a pattern: To transform one object into another. The star to shape blend above is an example of this. By using more intermediate stages you can create complex shading and highlighting effects.
Using the Blend Tool To create a blend: 1. Select the Blend Tool ("F7") 2. Move the pointer over a visible part of the start object. 3. Drag the pointer over the end object. As you drag the pointer a "blend line" appears. 4. When over a visible part of the end object, release the mouse button. For object-to-object blends the blend line is colored black. When blending between control handles, it is colored red.
A second way to adjust the blend is to add control handles to one object. The left-hand example is a blend between two triangles. The right-hand example has an extra control handle in the lower triangle. The blend was then made to that control handle. A third way is using the 1 to 1 node mapping button. This only has an effect if the two objects have the same number of control handles. Usually Photo & Graphic Designer adds or removes handles as necessary to transform one shape into another.
Producing highlight effects By increasing the number of blend steps you can create some complex highlight shading effects. One of the most powerful features of Photo & Graphic Designer is that it allows blends from just about any shape to any other shape, with dissimilar numbers of handles. However, blends between objects with sharp corners can produce unwanted twists in the blend. The two shapes have different numbers of handles, and a blend from one to the other produces the result on the right.
2. You either select a predefined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) creates regular spacing. Blending along a curve To make your blend follow a curved line or shape: 1. Select both the blend and a line or shape. 2. Select the Blend Tool. 3. Select the Blend along a curve button. You will most likely want to hide the line or shape, and just leave the items going along an invisible curve. To do this: 1.
Rainbow: Blends along the shortest edge of the HSV color wheel. For example, a blend from yellow to cyan runs yellow-green-cyan. (This option has no effect when the two colors are black, white or gray.) Alt rainbow: Similar to rainbow except the blend is along the longest edge of the color wheel. For example, yellow to cyan runs yellow-red-magenta-blue-cyan. The HSV color wheel is described in Color handling . This menu is identical to the fill effect menu in the Fill Tool.
Selecting the start or end object After creating the blend you may want to change some attribute of either the start or end object such as its color or line width or position. To change an object's attributes: 1. Select the Selector Tool. 2. "Ctrl + click" on the start or end object to "select inside" 3. Make the required changes. The Selector Tool is described in Selecting objects . To change the color, drag-and-drop the color from the Color Line onto the object.
To change the number of steps in your blend, just enter a value in the Steps box. It is also possible to change the distance between steps, but this option is only available when creating a blend along a curve (see below). The Anti-Alias button on the InfoBar When producing highlight effects, anti-aliasing the intermediate steps has no visible benefit. However, it slows down screen redraws by up to 30% on slow computers.
width of none. Rotating along a curve If you have blended along a curve, you can make the objects rotate to match the curve. To do this, select the Rotate along curve button on the Blend Tool InfoBar . Blends and PDF or PostScript files When printing or exporting to a PDF file, using a large number of blend steps can result in large files (megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps.
With the view quality slider in the second position you can see all the intermediate steps of a blend as outlines.
Multi-stage blends You are not limited to blending between only two objects. Photo & Graphic Designer can blend between several objects. The original three objects, left, and the resultant blends right (It also shows blending between different types of object.) The produce a multi-stage blend just blend from the fist to the second, and then again from the second to the third, etc. Producing highlight effects By increasing the number of blend steps you can create some complex highlight shading effects.
Profiles Position profile lets you select how to space the intermediate steps in a blend. You can have regular spacing or closer at one end than the other or closer in the center. Attribute profile lets you select how attributes (such as transparency, colors or line thickness) change in a blend. You can have a regular rate of change, greater change at one end, or greater change in the center. Changing profiles To change a profile: 1.
(megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps. Editing the shapes in a blend The intermediate steps of a blend are calculated on-the-fly and are not selectable or editable. Use the menu, Arrange -> Convert to Editable shapes to convert the individual blend steps to separate objects. (The result is grouped so you would need to ungroup before editing the individual steps.
Producing highlight effects By increasing the number of blend steps you can create some complex highlight shading effects. One of the most powerful features of Photo & Graphic Designer is that it allows blends from just about any shape to any other shape, with dissimilar numbers of handles. However, blends between objects with sharp corners can produce unwanted twists in the blend. The two shapes have different numbers of handles, and a blend from one to the other produces the result on the right.
required profile dialog box. 2. You either select a predefined profile from the dropdown list or drag the sliders to create a custom profile. The top option in the dropdown list (the straight line) creates regular spacing. Blending along a curve To make your blend follow a curved line or shape: 1. Select both the blend and a line or shape. 2. Select the Blend Tool. 3. Select the Blend along a curve button.
Fade: Fades between the two colors. Rainbow: Blends along the shortest edge of the HSV color wheel. For example, a blend from yellow to cyan runs yellow-green-cyan. (This option has no effect when the two colors are black, white or gray.) Alt rainbow: Similar to rainbow except the blend is along the longest edge of the color wheel. For example, yellow to cyan runs yellow-red-magenta-blue-cyan. The HSV color wheel is described in Color handling .
The number of steps To change the number of steps in your blend, just enter a value in the Steps box. It is also possible to change the distance between steps, but this option is only available when creating a blend along a curve (see below). The Anti-Alias button on the InfoBar When producing highlight effects, anti-aliasing the intermediate steps has no visible benefit. However, it slows down screen redraws by up to 30% on slow computers.
3. "+ click" (or right click) on the No color button on the Color Line, (described later in Color handling), or, select a line width of none. Rotating along a curve If you have blended along a curve, you can make the objects rotate to match the curve. To do this, select the Rotate along curve button on the Blend Tool InfoBar .
With the view quality slider in the second position you can see all the intermediate steps of a blend as outlines.
The Anti-Alias button on the InfoBar When producing highlight effects, anti-aliasing the intermediate steps has no visible benefit. However, it slows down screen redraws by up to 30% on slow computers. Therefore, deselecting the Anti-Alias button means that Photo & Graphic Designer never anti-aliases the intermediate steps of this blend. Profiles Position profile lets you select how to space the intermediate steps in a blend.
If you have blended along a curve, you can make the objects rotate to match the curve. To do this, select the Rotate along curve button on the Blend Tool InfoBar . Blends and PDF or PostScript files When printing or exporting to a PDF file, using a large number of blend steps can result in large files (megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps.
With the view quality slider in the second position you can see all the intermediate steps of a blend as outlines.
Profiles Position profile lets you select how to space the intermediate steps in a blend. You can have regular spacing or closer at one end than the other or closer in the center. Attribute profile lets you select how attributes (such as transparency, colors or line thickness) change in a blend. You can have a regular rate of change, greater change at one end, or greater change in the center. Changing profiles To change a profile: 1.
When printing or exporting to a PDF file, using a large number of blend steps can result in large files (megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps. Editing the shapes in a blend The intermediate steps of a blend are calculated on-the-fly and are not selectable or editable. Use the menu, Arrange -> Convert to Editable shapes to convert the individual blend steps to separate objects.
Blending along a curve To make your blend follow a curved line or shape: 1. Select both the blend and a line or shape. 2. Select the Blend Tool. 3. Select the Blend along a curve button. You will most likely want to hide the line or shape, and just leave the items going along an invisible curve. To do this: 1. Select the blend. 2. "Ctrl + click" (select inside) to select just the line, or choose the Shape Editor Tool. This selects just the line or shape. 3.
white or gray.) Alt rainbow: Similar to rainbow except the blend is along the longest edge of the color wheel. For example, yellow to cyan runs yellow-red-magenta-blue-cyan. The HSV color wheel is described in Color handling . This menu is identical to the fill effect menu in the Fill Tool. Viewing blends as outlines Window -> Quality controls how blends are displayed: At Outline only the start and end objects appear. The intermediate objects are not drawn.
Rotating along a curve If you have blended along a curve, you can make the objects rotate to match the curve. To do this, select the Rotate along curve button on the Blend Tool InfoBar . Blends and PDF or PostScript files When printing or exporting to a PDF file, using a large number of blend steps can result in large files (megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps.
With the view quality slider in the second position you can see all the intermediate steps of a blend as outlines.
Blends and PDF or PostScript files When printing or exporting to a PDF file, using a large number of blend steps can result in large files (megabytes in some cases) which can be very slow to print or view. If necessary reduce the number of blend steps. Editing the shapes in a blend The intermediate steps of a blend are calculated on-the-fly and are not selectable or editable. Use the menu, Arrange -> Convert to Editable shapes to convert the individual blend steps to separate objects.
Editing the shapes in a blend The intermediate steps of a blend are calculated on-the-fly and are not selectable or editable. Use the menu, Arrange -> Convert to Editable shapes to convert the individual blend steps to separate objects. (The result is grouped so you would need to ungroup before editing the individual steps.) Doing this is less efficient because to change the blend you will have to re-blend from the start object to the end object.
Color Blend Effect The Color Blend Effect menu on the Blend Tool InfoBar gives you a control over intermediate colors: Fade: Fades between the two colors. Rainbow: Blends along the shortest edge of the HSV color wheel. For example, a blend from yellow to cyan runs yellow-green-cyan. (This option has no effect when the two colors are black, white or gray.) Alt rainbow: Similar to rainbow except the blend is along the longest edge of the color wheel.
Viewing blends as outlines Window -> Quality controls how blends are displayed: At Outline only the start and end objects appear. The intermediate objects are not drawn. At Outline with blend steps start, end and intermediate objects are drawn as outline. At Full color the outlines and fill colors of the intermediate objects are drawn. At High & Very High Quality all the information is shown anti-aliased if the Anti-Alias button (described above) is active.
Removing blends Removing a standard blend Select the blend, then click Remove on the Blend Tool InfoBar. Removing blend from a curve Select the blend, then deselect the Blend Along a Curve button.
Removing a standard blend Select the blend, then click Remove on the Blend Tool InfoBar. Removing blend from a curve Select the blend, then deselect the Blend Along a Curve button.
Removing blend from a curve Select the blend, then deselect the Blend Along a Curve button.
Live Effects In this chapter Introduction Applying a Live Effect Page 912
Introduction Live Effects are bitmap effects that can be applied to any object using Xara Picture Editor tools or Adobe® Photoshop® plug-ins. The list of available Live Effects is displayed in the Live Effects Tool InfoBar by clicking the New button.
Applying a Live Effect To apply a Live Effect: 1. Select the object or objects in the usual way. 2. Select the Live Effects Tool. 3. Click the New button on the left side of the InfoBar. This displays a partitioned list of available effects in a menu. The first set of effects listed in the menu are Picture Editor effects. The second set are effects provided by the built in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Feather and Shadow Tools.
resizing/rotating a bitmap. As an example of this, imagine a plug-in that always applies horizontal ripples (the "Television" Live Effect shown does something similar). Apply this effect to a shape, and you'd then see horizontal lines across it. If you then rotated the shape, would you want the ripples to rotate with it? If so, lock the effect before the rotation. Or would you want the horizontal ripple effect to be re-applied to your now rotated rectangle? If so, leave the effect unlocked.
You can change the resolution that's used to render effects in the Effects & Plug-ins tab of the Options dialog. For more on the Options dialog see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer. To change the resolution of an effect that has already been applied, use the DPI control on the Live Effects toolbar.
have the ability to re-apply themselves.
Locked vs. Live Effects When using "old-style" Adobe Photoshop plug-ins (also known as "unscriptable" plug-ins), the effect is locked in place once applied and editing of the underlying shape is not possible. We call these locked effects. To edit an object that has had a locked effect applied, it is first necessary to remove the effect, edit the shape, and then apply the effect again.
that generated the effects. To lock an effect, select the object or objects and in the Live Effects InfoBar click the Padlock icon. To unlock an effect that has been locked this way, just click the Padlock icon again. You can still alter the resolution of the effect. For printing, you may want to use a higher resolution than if the work is just for screen use. Editing Live Effects The dropdown list shows the effects applied to the currently selected object in the order that they were applied.
dialog shown lists the effects used, just after the list of fonts used in the design. It will also indicate any of the effects used in the design that are not installed. These effects will be missing from the design unless they are locked. Adding more Live Effects Many Adobe Photoshop plug-ins will work with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and with the Xara Picture Editor, and it's easy to add new ones.
Editing shapes If you apply a Live Effect to a shape or text, the object remains fully editable. Each time you edit it in any way, the Live Effect is automatically re-applied to the object. For locked effects this is not possible, and you must remove the effect using the Delete button on the Live Effect InfoBar, edit the shape, and then re-apply the effect. Adobe Photoshop vs. Xara Picture Editor plug-ins The Live Effects Tool supports two basic types of plug-in.
The dropdown list shows the effects applied to the currently selected object in the order that they were applied. Select the effect you want from the dropdown list and click the Edit button. This will bring up the controls for that effect-in the case of a Photoshop plug-in this is usually a pop-up window that allows you to alter the appearance of the effect.
To add a new Xara Picture Editor plug-in, copy or install it under a folder of its own in the Xara Picture Editor\XPEplug-ins folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation, e.g. C:\Program Files\Xara\Xtreme\Xara Picture Editor\XPEplug-ins\ Then restart Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and/or the Xara Picture Editor . To add new Photoshop plug-ins, you can copy or install them under the Xara Picture Editor\PSplug-ins folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation.
Adobe Photoshop vs. Xara Picture Editor plug-ins The Live Effects Tool supports two basic types of plug-in. Photoshop plug-ins (old-style and new-style) and Xara Picture Editor plug-ins. For example the Enhance effect is the same tool that appears in the Xara Picture Editor, but can now be used directly on any object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
Because all these effects are bitmap effects, the object to which the Live Effect is applied is first rasterized (converted to a bitmap) and then passed to the plug-in, which applies the effect and returns a modified bitmap. You can control the resolution of the bitmap using the Live Effects InfoBar control. Live Effect resolution For screen and web use it's best to leave the resolution at the default 96 DPI; the same as the screen resolution.
folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation. Alternatively, use the Setup button in the Live Effects Tool to add the location of the folder on your computer that contains the plug-in files. Or add the plug-ins to a folder which is already listed in the Setup dialog. You can access the same list of plug-in folder locations from the Effects & Plug-ins tab of the Options dialog ("Utilities -> Options"), or via the PS Plug-ins Tool of the Xara Picture Editor .
Locking effects When you resize or rotate an object which has a Live Effect applied, Photo & Graphic Designer takes this to be an edit and re-generates the effect. This may not be what you want, so it's useful sometimes to be able to lock an effect. Old-style Photoshop plug-ins are Locked as soon as you apply them. This means the underlying shape can't be edited. You can also lock a Live Effect and then when you resize or rotate the object the effect remains fixed, as if you were resizing/rotating a bitmap.
the longer it takes to generate or re-generate the effect (because it has to work with a much larger bitmap) and the more memory is required. You can set the resolution of a Live Effect to "Automatic", instead of choosing a fixed DPI value. With this setting, the effect will be automatically re-generated when required, at the most appropriate resolution.
Copying Live Effects For more on Copy and Paste, see Object Handling . You can copy Live Effects in your design from one object to another using Paste Attributes , just as you can copy other object attributes. Simply select the object with the effect(s) you want to copy and select "Edit -> Copy". Select the object or objects you want to copy the effects onto, and select "Edit -> Paste Attributes".
Editing Live Effects The dropdown list shows the effects applied to the currently selected object in the order that they were applied. Select the effect you want from the dropdown list and click the Edit button. This will bring up the controls for that effect-in the case of a Photoshop plug-in this is usually a pop-up window that allows you to alter the appearance of the effect.
Xara Picture Editor, and it's easy to add new ones. Xara also intends to provide some new Xara Picture Editor plug-ins which will also work with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. To add a new Xara Picture Editor plug-in, copy or install it under a folder of its own in the Xara Picture Editor\XPEplug-ins folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation, e.g. C:\Program Files\Xara\Xtreme\Xara Picture Editor\XPEplug-ins\ Then restart Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and/or the Xara Picture Ed
How Live Effects work Because all these effects are bitmap effects, the object to which the Live Effect is applied is first rasterized (converted to a bitmap) and then passed to the plug-in, which applies the effect and returns a modified bitmap. You can control the resolution of the bitmap using the Live Effects InfoBar control. Live Effect resolution For screen and web use it's best to leave the resolution at the default 96 DPI; the same as the screen resolution.
. To add new Photoshop plug-ins, you can copy or install them under the Xara Picture Editor\PSplug-ins folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation. Alternatively, use the Setup button in the Live Effects Tool to add the location of the folder on your computer that contains the plug-in files. Or add the plug-ins to a folder which is already listed in the Setup dialog.
Live Effect resolution For screen and web use it's best to leave the resolution at the default 96 DPI; the same as the screen resolution. If you require a higher resolution image, for example if you're printing or wanting to export a high-resolution bitmap, then you can increase this to 150 DPI or even higher. The higher the resolution, the longer it takes to generate or re-generate the effect (because it has to work with a much larger bitmap) and the more memory is required.
Options"), or via the PS Plug-ins Tool of the Xara Picture Editor . Check the Xara web site regularly for recommended plug-ins that work well with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013: http://www.xara.com/products/Xtreme/plugins/ Copying Live Effects For more on Copy and Paste, see Object Handling . You can copy Live Effects in your design from one object to another using Paste Attributes , just as you can copy other object attributes.
Saving and transferring files When you transfer a file to someone else, unless they have the same plug-ins installed on their computer, they will not see the effects (this is similar to the problem of fonts; the recipient needs to have all the fonts used in the design to see an accurate representation of the text in the document). In order to guarantee that recipients can see the effects in your design, lock them before saving.
Document Info and Live Effects For more on Document Info, see Text Handling . You can quickly see which effects have been used in a design by selecting "File -> Document Info". The dialog shown lists the effects used, just after the list of fonts used in the design. It will also indicate any of the effects used in the design that are not installed. These effects will be missing from the design unless they are locked.
Adding more Live Effects Many Adobe Photoshop plug-ins will work with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and with the Xara Picture Editor, and it's easy to add new ones. Xara also intends to provide some new Xara Picture Editor plug-ins which will also work with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. To add a new Xara Picture Editor plug-in, copy or install it under a folder of its own in the Xara Picture Editor\XPEplug-ins folder of your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 installation, e.g. C:\Program Files\X
Copying Live Effects For more on Copy and Paste, see Object Handling . You can copy Live Effects in your design from one object to another using Paste Attributes , just as you can copy other object attributes. Simply select the object with the effect(s) you want to copy and select "Edit -> Copy". Select the object or objects you want to copy the effects onto, and select "Edit -> Paste Attributes".
Photo Handling In this chapter Introduction Photo Objects Photo Groups Importing Photos Photo resolution Zero-memory Copies The Bitmap Gallery Embedded JPEG files Blending & Merging photos An Example Using a Mask Photo display quality Saving & Exporting Photos Photo Edit Attributes Editing the outline of Photos Cropping photos Screenshots Coloring photos Color Selection/Removal Integration with external Photo Editors Resize, rotate and position a photo within its frame Horizon Straighten Viewing a scaled ph
Introduction Photos are an integral part of almost all creative work nowadays, from websites, to flyers, brochures, DTP work and more. Photo handling in Photo & Graphic Designer is very different than you may be used to with other graphics programs. In Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 you can color, crop, copy, blend, mask, enhance, clone, feather (fade the edges of) photos as much as you like.
Photo Objects In Photo & Graphic Designer photos (or bitmaps) are just another type of object on the page. You can drag and drop photos onto the page from your file explorer, and then you can resize, rotate, copy and move them around just like any other object. Importantly you can adjust the transparency, even graduated transparency, feather edges and clip and cut shapes out of photos with ease. The transparency feature lets you blend, merge or create composite photos.
Photo Groups If you edit a photo using some tools such as the integrated Red Eye tool or Clone Tool, the photo becomes grouped with other objects that modify the image in some way. For example with the Red Eye tool, the ellipse shapes that are used to modify the red eye areas of the photo are grouped with the photo itself. This is called a Photo Group and you'll see this on the status line when you select such a modified photo.
Importing Photos Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports a very wide range of photo or bitmap types including JPEG, PNG, TIFF and RAW digital camera images, as well as many more types. The term "bitmap" is the general term encompassing all types, but interchangeable with the word "photo". The easiest way to open an image is to drag the photo or bitmap file from your Windows file explorer onto the Photo & Graphic Designer Window. Or you can select the File -> Open or Import menu options.
the reduced size, there should be more than enough resolution in your photos for high quality results on your website, so it's rarely necessary to import digital camera images at full resolution for web use. However, if you are importing a large photo into a print or animation document, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 asks you if you want to import a lower resolution version of your photos. If your document is to include many photos, you may want to choose this reduced resolution option.
Using photos as fills You can also use any bitmap as a fill style for any drawn shape. Simply drag the file over the shape (which can be from your file system, or from the Bitmap or Fill galleries), and hold the "Shift" key down before you drop. This will replace the existing color fill with a bitmap, fitted to the object. Again you can use the Fill Tool to adjust the size, angle and position.
Optimization on import When importing high resolution photos (anything above 1920 pixels either wide or high) into a web document, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically resizes the photo down to HD screen size without asking you if you want to import a lower resolution version.
necessary to accommodate all your photos. This means you can very quickly build a photo gallery website showing your photos! Just choose a gallery template from the Designs Gallery , then import your set of photo files. The page is copied as many times as required to fit in all your photos. Make sure you choose the reduced size option when importing a lot of large photos! Using photos as fills You can also use any bitmap as a fill style for any drawn shape.
larger than your page size (your screen is probably only about 1200 pixels across, and a typical digital photo is 3 or 4 times as wide, sometimes a lot more) To reduce the size, just drag a corner handle using the Selector Tool, or enter a new width in the Selector Tool InfoBar width field.
Replacing photos If you drag and drop a photo file (from Windows Explorer or from the Bitmap Gallery) onto an existing photo it will replace that photo, but keep the same container or frame size. This makes it very easy to replace photos on templates. You can use the Fill Tool to adjust the size, position and angle of the photo inside its outline. This is not true for photo documents , where dropping a photo on the page will always import it as a new photo document.
You can choose a different size to which photos should be scaled, or elect for them to be imported at 96dpi (default screen resolution) so that at 100% zoom they are displayed at 1:1. Or you can choose to have photos imported at the dpi which is indicated in the photo file itself. Note that some digital cameras set this dpi value wrongly and so this third option may not always give you the results you expect.
Replacing multiple photos at once Most of the web templates provided in the Designs Gallery will allow you to replace multiple images at once, by dragging and dropping multiple image files from Explorer onto the canvas. Or use "File" > " Import" and select multiple images in the file dialog ("Ctrl + click" adds to the current selection, "Shift + click" allows you to select a range of files). The incoming photos are used to replace the images in the document.
You can choose a different size to which photos should be scaled, or elect for them to be imported at 96dpi (default screen resolution) so that at 100% zoom they are displayed at 1:1. Or you can choose to have photos imported at the dpi which is indicated in the photo file itself. Note that some digital cameras set this dpi value wrongly and so this third option may not always give you the results you expect.
Using photos as fills You can also use any bitmap as a fill style for any drawn shape. Simply drag the file over the shape (which can be from your file system, or from the Bitmap or Fill galleries), and hold the "Shift" key down before you drop. This will replace the existing color fill with a bitmap, fitted to the object. Again you can use the Fill Tool to adjust the size, angle and position.
Initial Photo size When you import a photo into a drawing or web document, by default if it's bigger than 500 pixels wide the photo is automatically scaled down to 500 pixels. This is because it's rarely useful to drop a huge digital camera photo into a drawing document and have it displayed at its full size, so it's scaled down to a more manageable size.
Photo resolution One fundamental difference between Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and other photo tools is that when you resize a photo it retains the full resolution. Scaling an image to be smaller, just increases the dpi or ppi (pixels per inch). In other words no pixels are lost, they are just made smaller. 96ppi image on the left when scaled down to half size becomes twice the resolution, 192ppi. The status line shows the resolution of any selected image.
Zero-memory Copies One of the most revolutionary differences between Photo & Graphic Designer and other software is that when you copy any photo on the page, it doesn't really make a complete new copy of the original imported photo but instead just displays another 'view' of the original image. Photo & Graphic Designer's rendering engine is fast enough that it can display any number of copies of the same image 'on the fly' this way. This saves huge amounts of memory and dramatically reduces files sizes.
The Bitmap Gallery The Document handling chapter has general information about galleries. The Bitmap Gallery shows all the bitmaps or photos used in any document, along with information about its pixel size and file size. You can open it by clicking it in the Galleries bar, or from within the " Utilities" > "Galleries" menu, or "F11". This shows the Bitmap Gallery for the above document, and shows the original JPEG image of the girl which is embedded into the native .web file.
Filling shapes with a bitmap Select the shape on the page, then select the bitmap in the gallery and click the fill button. Alternatively drag the image from the Bitmap Gallery and drop it onto any shape while holding "Shift". You can adjust the size, angle etc in the Fill Tool . Setting a Bitmap Transparency This is for the more advanced user. You can use any bitmap as a transparency mask on any filled shape or bitmap. The lightness of the bitmap affects how transparent the selected object is.
background color of the GIF (usually white). Restore Previous restores the area covered by the frame to what it was before the frame was displayed. This is interpreted by some browsers to mean that the frame should be cleared to the background before each frame is displayed and by others to mean that the frame should be shown on top of the previous frame. As browsers interpret these values in different ways, you may need to experiment to achieve the desired result.
Filling shapes with a bitmap Select the shape on the page, then select the bitmap in the gallery and click the fill button. Alternatively drag the image from the Bitmap Gallery and drop it onto any shape while holding "Shift". You can adjust the size, angle etc in the Fill Tool . Setting a Bitmap Transparency This is for the more advanced user. You can use any bitmap as a transparency mask on any filled shape or bitmap. The lightness of the bitmap affects how transparent the selected object is.
background color of the GIF (usually white). Restore Previous restores the area covered by the frame to what it was before the frame was displayed. This is interpreted by some browsers to mean that the frame should be cleared to the background before each frame is displayed and by others to mean that the frame should be shown on top of the previous frame. As browsers interpret these values in different ways, you may need to experiment to achieve the desired result.
Setting a Bitmap Transparency This is for the more advanced user. You can use any bitmap as a transparency mask on any filled shape or bitmap. The lightness of the bitmap affects how transparent the selected object is. The bitmap transparency size, rotation and tiling can be controlled from the Transparency Tool InfoBar. Deleting images from the Gallery When you delete a bitmap from the page, it remains in the Bitmap Gallery. Any unused bitmaps will be deleted from the file when saved and re-opened.
Deleting images from the Gallery When you delete a bitmap from the page, it remains in the Bitmap Gallery. Any unused bitmaps will be deleted from the file when saved and re-opened. However you can force the deletion of any bitmap by selecting it and pressing the Delete button. If the bitmap is used in the document, it will be replaced by the standard X bitmap. Setting the page background to a bitmap Select the bitmap in the gallery and click the Background button. This will tile the image.
Setting the page background to a bitmap Select the bitmap in the gallery and click the Background button. This will tile the image. When exporting the page as HTML, this image is tiled across the whole visible page background of the browser, unless you've also given the pasteboard (the area around the page) a different background. Save Select the bitmap and click Save will save the original image. In the case of an embedded JPEG this will save the original JPEG file.
Save Select the bitmap and click Save will save the original image. In the case of an embedded JPEG this will save the original JPEG file. Other bitmap types are best saved as PNG bitmap type. Bitmap Properties The Properties button will display information about the selected bitmap in the gallery. It also provides a way to stop image smoothing when bitmaps are enlarged. Usually all bitmaps are smoothed when enlarged, or zoomed into, on screen.
Bitmap Properties The Properties button will display information about the selected bitmap in the gallery. It also provides a way to stop image smoothing when bitmaps are enlarged. Usually all bitmaps are smoothed when enlarged, or zoomed into, on screen. There is a check-box option in the Properties dialog to turn this feature off, so that individual pixels are visible when you zoom in. Note that this option only affects scaled up bitmaps.
Embedded JPEG files JPEG files are hugely compressed from their original state, being up to 10 times smaller than the original uncompressed image. In the above example, the original uncompressed image requires more than 7mb of memory, but as the Bitmap Gallery shows, this JPEG file is only 1mb. A very significant reduction. This is why JPEG images are the standard file type for digital photography and use on the web.
Extracting the original JPEG Right click on any image in the Bitmap Gallery and select the Save menu option to save the original JPEG back to your file system.
Blending & Merging photos By making copies of photos on top of each other, and applying different effects to the copies, combined with Photo & Graphic Designer's advanced transparency controls, you can easily create blended photo compositions. For example to selectively blur parts of a photo takes a few seconds. By placing the blurred copy with the 'hole' created by the transparency effect over the sharp original, the blended result shows the sharp face area through.
An Example Using a Mask The left picture is rather under exposed on the right side of the girl's face. The version on the right has had just the right side of her face brightened. These are the steps to re-create this effect: Switch the mask on, and draw around the area you want to brighten with the Freehand tool. Select the Photo tool and adjust the brightness (you can also adjust contrast, saturation, temperature and blur/sharpen).
In this example the transparency has been graduated across the area, so the effect fades right to left. Just select the Transparency tool and adjust the main transparency slider (if the shape has become unselected, select it inside the photo group using Ctrl+click). To create a graduated fade like in this example just drag across the image in the Transparency tool. This shows an arrow indicating the direction and size of the graduated transparency.
Photo display quality Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can display photos in one of five useful quality levels. The top two settings smooth the screen pixels so avoiding visible pixels or rough sections along the edges (anti-aliasing). Change the quality level using the Quality entry in the Window menu. Very High Displays images using bicubic sampling. This displays images Quality at the best quality, particularly for large hi-res images that are (default) scaled down or zoomed out a lot.
Saving & Exporting Photos Selecting the Save option will always save a native .xar file file (unless you're editing a Photo document ? see Photo Document section below). To save a photo as a JPEG, PNG or other image file type, it's necessary to use the Export option, or the shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + E". You may select from a very wide range of file types, such as JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, PDF, PSD, Flash (.swf), BMP, as well as other lesser well known types.
or height into the "W" or "H" field on the InfoBar. Check the image size is correct at 100% Type "Ctrl + Shift + E" to start the export process Enter a filename, and ensure JPEG is selected from the file type dropdown In the preview dialog simply click the export button To save any image as a PNG go through the same process except choose the PNG file type.
Example: To resize a photo and save as a new JPEG This process is very quick and simple: Drop your photo onto Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 (either onto a blank page or onto the title bar to create a new document) In the Selector Tool either drag a corner handle to resize the image, or enter the required width or height into the "W" or "H" field on the InfoBar.
Photo Edit Attributes All edits performed using the Photo Tool, such as any altering of the brightness, contrast, color, blur or sharpen values, or even the more advanced levels adjustment, are all just stored on the photo as attributes. See the terminology section . Just as you can alter the color of a shape or line without altering the underlying shape, so Photo Tool attributes alter the visible appearance of the photo without affecting the original image (this is called non-destructive editing).
Editing the outline of Photos You can use the Shape Editor Tool to directly adjust the outline shape of a photo. Similarly you can apply outlines the same way as for any shape, and shadow, etc. Using the Shape Editor Tool you can push or pull on the sides. This example also has a black outline and soft shadow added. To restore the image back to its original rectangular shape, select the "Un-clip" in the clip mode of the Photo Tool InfoBar.
Cropping photos The easiest way to crop a photo is to just drag on it when in the Enhance Tool , or you can just drag one of the 8 control handles around the outside to adjust the edge of any selected photo. For more advanced cropping control, select the Clip button on the Photo Tool flyout bar which provides aspect ratio control and precise numeric clipping control. This also provides an Un-clip button that will remove any clip rectangle and restore the original image.
Cropping photos with the Shape Erase Tool The Shape Erase Tool (on the same flyout bar as all the other shape editing and drawing tools) lets you crop a photo by dragging a nib over it. If you do this with the softness setting set to 0 (hard erase), the crop is permanent, just as when using the clip tool discussed above. If you use a soft nib with the erase tool you get soft edges wherever you erase.
Cropping photos with a mask If you want to make non-rectangular photo shapes or cut pieces out of a photo, use a mask. First select the photo and then turn on Mask Mode. Turn on Mask Mode by clicking on this icon at the bottom of the main toolbar on the left. The view turns pink. Now use any of the standard drawing tools to draw onto the mask layer over your photo, just as you would draw onto a normal drawing layer. Then select the photo underneath, or clear the selection (press "Esc").
Screenshots In combination with a built-in screen capture feature you can easily capture and create screen shots.You can either use the Screen Capture utility which is included in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 or use the screenshot capability built into Windows. Using Windows to capture screenshots Press the "Print screen" button on your keyboard. This places a screen capture of the whole screen on the clipboard. Alternatively, select "Alt + Print screen" which will capture just the current window.
Using Windows to capture screenshots Press the "Print screen" button on your keyboard. This places a screen capture of the whole screen on the clipboard. Alternatively, select "Alt + Print screen" which will capture just the current window. In Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 select "Ctrl + V" to paste, and select "Bitmap" to have the results pasted onto the page. You can now crop, add text annotation, resize as required and save the results. It's best to save this type of image as a PNG file.
Screen capture utility This utility offers some advantages over the method above, including the option to capture the mouse pointer in the image. Open it by choosing Utilities > Screen Capture. Screen area: Here you can choose the screen area you would like to capture. You can capture the full screen, the active window in its entirety, or just the content of the active window without the window border. Options: Here you can choose whether or not the mouse pointer is included in the screenshot.
want to capture and press the chosen key combination, or wait for the chosen time period to elapse if the timer option was chosen. The screenshot is taken and inserted into Photo & Graphic Designer or saved to file, depending on the option chosen. If you selected the "Capture always" option you can take additional screenshots by pressing the key combination again (this is unavailable with the timer option).
Coloring photos With any photo selected just click on the Color Line to apply a color to any photo. Clicking the white color patch will turn the image black and white. Technically this is called a "contone" (it's a continuous tone from black to white), or sometimes a "duotone". Simply click a pale yellow color on the color line to create a yellow contone picture. Or, right click on the Color Line which shows a context menu for you to apply the selected color as either the light or dark color.
Color Selection/Removal You can use the Color Select/erase tool to either erase colors from a photo (eg. to remove the background) or to select areas of color with a soft mask so that you can modify just those selected areas (or all but those selected areas) with the Photo Enhance tools described above. So for example you could select just the blue sky in a photo and then use the Photo Hue| tool to add some red to the sky, or brighten/darken everything except the sky.
Integration with external Photo Editors While Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides a great many photo editing and compositing features, it is not a "pixel editor", and for these purposes you may want to use a separate program. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 makes integration with these easy.
Resize, rotate and position a photo within its frame Photos in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are treated like a "bitmap filled" rectangle. The shape of your photo is really a fully editable outline around the image contained inside. So when you crop, or edit the outline shape, you're not affecting the fill, which is clipped inside the shape. Photos and bitmaps on the page are always contained within an outline shape.
Horizon Straighten Using the Fill Tool , as previously described, means it's easy to straighten the horizon of an askew picture. Select the Fill Tool and click on any photo. This will show the fill handles, which are arrows showing the extent of the fill inside the shape. Drag on the end of one of the fill arrows to resize, and rotate as required. The following shows a landscape (created using the panorama stitching feature of Photo & Graphic Designer) that has a sloping horizon.
Viewing a scaled photo at its full size The Zoom to 1:1 button on the Photo Tool infobar adjusts the zoom so that the selected image is shown at full size, which is where each pixel of the image is mapped to each screen pixel. This is useful if you want to edit an image that's been scaled down on the page, but want to see it at its full size while you work on it.
Making a photo its full size The Scale photo to 100% button on the Photo Tool infobar takes the currently selected photo and scales it to its full size on the page. So for example if the selected photo is scaled down to 500 pixels wide, but the original imported photo was 1000 pixels wide, the photo on the page will be scaled up to 1000 pixels wide. When the document zoom is 100%, that means that each pixel of the image is mapped to each screen pixel.
Optimizing Photos and Bitmaps With the ever increasing resolution and file size of digital camera JPEGs, if you have a document containing many images, the file size can quickly become very large. For example, a multi-page document containing 20 full resolution JPEGs, each of 5mb, would produce a .xar file of over 100mb*. Furthermore, these photos are often unnecessarily high resolution.
By default for JPEG images the settings are such that the photo will be optimized to a 96dpi (normal screen resolution) JPEG at the size that it appears on your page. This is normally what you will want for photos in a website. When optimizing non-JPEG images, Photo & Graphic Designer will automatically decide whether it's best to optimize to a PNG or JPEG, depending on the nature of the image itself.
the image can be stored and exported as a JPEG without an unacceptable loss in quality. Note that after optimizing the original unoptimized and now unreferenced photo remains in the Bitmap Gallery . This means it is still in memory and so the memory requirements of your design will not have been reduced. Simply save your design and reload after optimizing, to eliminate the original large images.
Converting objects or drawings to bitmaps You can easily create a bitmap from any object, or part of your drawing, including from other bitmaps. The bitmaps can be any size or resolution and can contain transparency. You can also create bitmaps with reduced numbers of colors which can be useful for web use. To create a bitmap from objects: 1. Select the object/s on the page. 2. Right click and choose Create Bitmap Copy or choose Create bitmap copy from the Arrange menu ("Ctrl + Shift + C"). 3.
Photo Documents Sometimes it's useful to work on one photo alone, rather than as "objects on a page". This is called a photo document or "photo mode" in Photo & Graphic Designer, and it behaves more like a traditional photo editor.
Editing Photo Files You can use Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to easily edit your JPEG photos and save back the modified JPEG. And unlike with most photo editors, you can do this multiple times without loss of quality, even though the JPEG format is a lossy format. That's becauseXara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is able to save your edits in a lossless way, along with the original photo. Here's how it works.
Tracer "Utilities" > "Bitmap editor " allows you to trace a bitmap, converting it to editable vector shapes. The tracer is typically used to trace two types of artwork-photographs and simple line art or logos. The tracer can be used for either type of work and selecting the correct trace mode is the easiest way to control this.
Grayscale-256 shades of gray. 256 color-256 colors. Photographic-16 million (24 bit) colors. Selecting more colors than exist in the original bitmap is usually not beneficial. The only time increasing the colors is useful is when tracing a heavily dithered 256-color bitmap and you want near-photographic quality. Each of these modes can have different settings for passes, color tolerance and so on. To restore the settings to their saved defaults click "Reset settings" .
traces the outlines, the more control handles are required on each shape and hence the more memory is required for the final object. This option has no effect on corners, only on smooth curves. Smoothing This controls how accurately corners (sharp changes of direction) are traced. Increasing the smoothing takes longer to trace the image but can reduce the final file size.
Trace mode This lets you specify the maximum number of colors in the final object: Monochrome-2 colors. Grayscale-256 shades of gray. 256 color-256 colors. Photographic-16 million (24 bit) colors. Selecting more colors than exist in the original bitmap is usually not beneficial. The only time increasing the colors is useful is when tracing a heavily dithered 256-color bitmap and you want near-photographic quality. Each of these modes can have different settings for passes, color tolerance and so on.
the final value has any effect. Accuracy This controls how accurately the tracer follows the outlines of the original bitmap. The more accurately it traces the outlines, the more control handles are required on each shape and hence the more memory is required for the final object. This option has no effect on corners, only on smooth curves. Smoothing This controls how accurately corners (sharp changes of direction) are traced.
Passes (Range 1-5) The greater the number of passes, the longer the trace operation takes and the greater the resultant file size, but the final result is closer to the original. With each pass, the tracer attempts to more closely match any shading in the original bitmap. Obviously, this increases the memory required for the final object. You may require an object with minimum shading and just broad areas of color. Use one pass for this.
Remove noise If you scan a photograph you often scan small specks of dust sticking to the photo's surface. These produce "noise", or small, unwanted areas of a different color. Also many bitmaps try to improve the look by "dithering" pixels and this introduces unwanted noise (especially common for 256 or fewer color bitmaps). When tracing 256-color bitmaps that are heavily dithered, you should set remove noise to high (if you zoom into the bitmap in the document, you can see if it is dithered).
Minimum area Areas smaller than the size set in this control are ignored (size is in pixels). Examples are scanned photographs with a lot of fine detail such as blades of grass. Initial and final color tolerance Color tolerance is how great a color change is required before the tracer considers two areas to be of a different color. Initial color tolerance is used for the first of multiple passes. It is similar to the broad brush strokes used to create the underlying colors on a conventional painting.
Initial and final color tolerance Color tolerance is how great a color change is required before the tracer considers two areas to be of a different color. Initial color tolerance is used for the first of multiple passes. It is similar to the broad brush strokes used to create the underlying colors on a conventional painting. Final color tolerance is used for the last pass. It is similar to merging the edges of color transitions to simulate shading.
Accuracy This controls how accurately the tracer follows the outlines of the original bitmap. The more accurately it traces the outlines, the more control handles are required on each shape and hence the more memory is required for the final object. This option has no effect on corners, only on smooth curves. Smoothing This controls how accurately corners (sharp changes of direction) are traced. Increasing the smoothing takes longer to trace the image but can reduce the final file size.
Smoothing This controls how accurately corners (sharp changes of direction) are traced. Increasing the smoothing takes longer to trace the image but can reduce the final file size.
Opacity Masks The Transparency tool allows you to apply either flat or graduated transparency to any object or group. But sometimes you need more advanced control over the transparency (or opacity) of an object. The Opacity Mask system takes any object, or group of objects, and uses the color (usually black to white shading) of these objects to define which parts of any other object are transparent or opaque. See the Opacity Masks section of the Transparency chapter for more information.
The Photo Tools In this chapter Using the Photo Tools Common photo functions Enhance Tool Color Select / EraseTool Clip Tool Photo Tool Notes The Red Eye Tool Content Aware Photo Resize The Brightness Levels Dialog Panorama Stitching Perspective Correction Tool EXIF Tool Photo Clone Tool Page 1011
Using the Photo Tools To access the photo tools , move your mouse pointer over the Camera icon in the main toolbar on the left of the window. A flyout bar appears with icons for each of the available photo tools. If you're in the Selector Tool a double click on a photo will switch into the Photo Tool .
Common photo functions The following buttons are available on the infoBar when you are in the Enhance, Clip, Red eye or Content-aware scaling photo tools. Rotate by 90° controls The two rotate icons will rotate the selected photo or photos by 90 degrees anti-clockwise or clockwise.
Rotate by 90° controls The two rotate icons will rotate the selected photo or photos by 90 degrees anti-clockwise or clockwise. Previous & Next When you 'open' a photo using Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 the photo is loaded into a new Photo Document, because Photo & Graphic Designer assumes you want to edit or view the photo itself rather than use it as part of a drawing or other document.
Previous & Next When you 'open' a photo using Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 the photo is loaded into a new Photo Document, because Photo & Graphic Designer assumes you want to edit or view the photo itself rather than use it as part of a drawing or other document. When you've opened a photo you can use the 'Previous' and 'Next' buttons on the Photo Tool infobar to close the current photo document and open the next (or previous) photo in the same folder as the current photo.
Zoom 1:1 Select a photo and click the Zoom 1:1 button. The Zoom to 1:1 adjusts the zoom so that the selected image is shown at full size, which is where each pixel of the image is mapped to each screen pixel. Use this option if you want to work on a photo at full size in a document where you have scaled the photo down. Scale photo to 100% The Scale photo to 100% operation takes the currently selected photo and scales it to its full size. It also puts the photo onto the pixel grid.
Scale photo to 100% The Scale photo to 100% operation takes the currently selected photo and scales it to its full size. It also puts the photo onto the pixel grid. So for example if the selected photo is scaled down to 500 pixels wide, but the original imported photo was 1000 pixels wide, the photo on the page will be scaled up to 1000 pixels wide. When the document zoom is 100%, that means that each pixel of the image is mapped to each screen pixel.
Enhance Tool Click the Camera icon to enter the Enhance tool . The Photo Tool provides a direct and very fast way of cropping, adjusting the brightness levels and sharpening photos, even for ultra high-resolution images. This tool provides: One-click auto-enhance your photos; this is particularly good for dull, underexposed images. Manually adjust the brightness, contrast, color saturation, hue and blur or sharpness of photos. Crop images.
Auto Enhance Clicking the "Enhance" button will analyze the overall brightness and contrast of the picture and automatically adjust the enhance values to obtain the best image. It is particularly effective with under-exposed (dark) images. After applying automatic enhancement to a photo you can adjust the values that were chosen, using the controls to the right of the "enhance" button. Clicking the "Compare" button will restore the original, clicking it again restores the last enhance values.
Pop-up slider controls The pop-up sliders can be used in one of two ways: 1. Click and release the pop-up arrow. The slider control now remains on screen and you can adjust the values as many times as you like by dragging the slider control. Alternatively, if the mouse is held over the control, the mouse-wheel can be used to make small adjustments up or down. The slider will hide when you click anywhere else in the document. 2.
The changes are applied only to the unmasked areas of the image. You can also apply a soft mask this way, by applying transparency to the mask shapes. See the Mask chapter for more information on this. Or use the Color Select/Erase tool to select colors in the photo and then make a soft mask from that color selection.
Auto Enhance Clicking the "Enhance" button will analyze the overall brightness and contrast of the picture and automatically adjust the enhance values to obtain the best image. It is particularly effective with under-exposed (dark) images. After applying automatic enhancement to a photo you can adjust the values that were chosen, using the controls to the right of the "enhance" button. Clicking the "Compare" button will restore the original, clicking it again restores the last enhance values.
Brightness/Contrast/Color Temperature/Saturation/Hue Brightness Contrast Saturation Color Temperature The image is altered as you adjust these values. The saturation alters the color intensity. At the minimum setting of -100 this will make a picture black and white. The Color Temperature control makes a picture more 'warm' or 'cool'. The Hue control applies a particular color tint to the image and allows you to control the intensity of the selected color.
Blur/Sharpen This control blurs images if it's taken below zero, and sharpens images above 0. For sharpen it's recommended that only small values be used, and typically only on images that have been reduced in size a lot. You can enter blur values larger than the -100 maximum value available on the slider. E.g. entering -400 will produce a very blurred image. Using Enhance on parts of photos When you have a photo selected, the enhance controls apply to the whole photo.
Using Enhance on parts of photos When you have a photo selected, the enhance controls apply to the whole photo. If you want to apply them to just part of a photo, draw a mask shape first. Go into mask mode, draw around the area of the photo you want to modify, then return to the Photo Tool and start adjusting the enhance controls. The changes are applied only to the unmasked areas of the image. You can also apply a soft mask this way, by applying transparency to the mask shapes.
Easy crop While in the Enhance tool you can drag on the handles shown around the edge of the selected photo to quickly adjust the cropping of the photo without needing to go into the Clip Tool.
Cropping or clipping images The simplest way to clip a photo is just start dragging on or across the photo with the Enhance Tool selected. The clipping is performed instantly after releasing the mouse. The resulting clipped photo has clip handles around it, where you can adjust the clip borders afterwards. This is a non-destructive operation meaning that you can both adjust the clip region after you've copped the image and even un-crop to restore the whole image.
Color Select / EraseTool The Color Erase and Selection tool serves two purposes; to erase (make transparent) parts of photos based on colors and secondly, to allow only those areas to be adjusted using the Photo Tool Enhance operations (such as Brightness, Blur, Hue, Adjust etc). So you can, for example, adjust the brightness of the blue sky in your photo, or change the color of a flower, without affecting other parts of the picture. One of these photos shows the real colors.
Color marker with color selection (white area). Resize the color marker using the resize arrows around it. You can drag to re-position it, and press the Delete key to remove a marker. If you have multiple markers you can just click on the marker to select it (the selected marker shows the 4 red resize arrows around it). Each subsequent click will add a new marker.
So to change the hue of the sky, you can select the Hue control - adjust the strength value and Hue value to the desired color. Note the Make mask operation is a one-way operation. Once the mask has been created the colour selection points are lost. Make Soft Mask If instead of just erasing areas of your photo, you want to adjust the brightness, sharpness, or color, etc, then use the Make soft mask to turn the erased areas into a mask, so that subsequent Enhance operations affect only the erased areas.
the color selections.
Color Markers Each time you click, a small round black marker is placed on the photo. This indicates the point from which the color is picked. It doesn't just pick the color of a single pixel but averages the color under this round marker. You can adjust the size of the marker (zoom in first) to change the area that is averaged to create the selection color. Color marker with color selection (white area). Resize the color marker using the resize arrows around it.
changes). Now go into the Photo Tool and adjust any of the Enhance controls such as Brightness, Contrast etc. The first time you make a change to any slider the mask mode is cleared so you can better see the whole photo (but the mask remains operative) - all subsequent changes of the Enhance controls will now only apply to the non-masked areas. So to change the hue of the sky, you can select the Hue control - adjust the strength value and Hue value to the desired color.
Modifying the input mask After applying color selection with a mask, you may subsequently need to adjust the mask that was used to protect parts of the image from the selection. Press the Edit Input Mask button on the infobar, and the mask you previously provided is shown to you again in mask mode. You can now modify the mask as required, or, if you no longer want the mask at all, use "Window" > "Clear Mask".
Color Select Tool - Infobar Controls Color Select Tool Infobar. Example To adjust the colour, or perhaps the saturation, of a blue sky, first use the Color Erase tool to click on the blue to erase it. You will almost certainly have to perform several clicks and / or adjust the Color Tolerance and Fade controls to ensure all required parts of the sky are erased.
If you want to select an earlier masked part of the photo (e.g. you want to alter an existing masked part only, and not the whole photo) then you can Ctrl+click on the appropriate part of the photo to select the mask 'inside' the photo. Now you can adjust the Enhance values as usual. Refer to the Mask tool section to discover more.
Make Soft Mask If instead of just erasing areas of your photo, you want to adjust the brightness, sharpness, or color, etc, then use the Make soft mask to turn the erased areas into a mask, so that subsequent Enhance operations affect only the erased areas. When you click the Make soft mask the mask mode is turned on (page goes pink), and the erased parts are left un-masked.
Using Input Masks to protect areas If you want to change a color in only one part of a photo, but to not affect that same color in other parts, you can use a mask to protect parts of the photo. You can apply the mask either before you start to apply color selection, or apply a mask to an existing color selection. Applying masking before Turn on mask mode and use any of the drawing tools to indicate the part(s) of the photo you want color selection to work on.
Clip Tool Alternatively you can enter Clip Tool by selecting the Clip icon on the Photo Tool fly-out bar. This provides a range of additional crop options. You can enter exact pixel values, and select from various crop aspect ratios For interactive clipping and some more options regarding aspect ratio, enter the Clip Tool with the Clip Tool button. This alters the InfoBar to look like this: As you drag over the photo, the clip rectangle is highlighted.
will change the outline of any clipped photo, and also arbitrarily formed shapes with a bitmap fill, to that rectangular outline of the complete photo or bitmap used as the fill. You may have to select the Clear button to clear the crop rectangle (or click outside the rectangle). Adjusting the clip region Because the un-clip button restores the clip rectangle (showing the area outside faded), you can easily make fine adjustments to a clipped photo.
Clear Press the "Clear" button, or just click outside the marked clip region to clear the current clip rectangle. Rule of Thirds There's a photography guideline that helps the composition of many photographs called the "rule of thirds". Put simply this involves placing key objects in your photos at thirds across your picture. For example it's often better to position the horizon one third of the way down a picture rather than being across the center.
In photo mode, there is a one-pixel grid applied to the photo (when at 96dpi, the default resolution) and the clip rectangle snaps to this grid. This makes it very easy to get pixel exact clipping. For highly accurate or exact pixel snapping, it's recommended to operate in photo mode and to zoom in so you can see the pixels clearly. See Photo documents for more information.
Rule of Thirds There's a photography guideline that helps the composition of many photographs called the "rule of thirds". Put simply this involves placing key objects in your photos at thirds across your picture. For example it's often better to position the horizon one third of the way down a picture rather than being across the center. When you drag a clip region across your photos lines are displayed at thirds across and down the image to help position objects to follow these composition guidelines.
See Photo documents for more information.
Un-clip Press the Un-clip button with any clipped photo selected, to restore the original photo. This restores the clip rectangle, which you can adjust or clear by clicking outside it. The Un-clip button in the Clip Tool will change the outline of any clipped photo, and also arbitrarily formed shapes with a bitmap fill, to that rectangular outline of the complete photo or bitmap used as the fill. You may have to select the Clear button to clear the crop rectangle (or click outside the rectangle).
Adjusting the clip region Because the un-clip button restores the clip rectangle (showing the area outside faded), you can easily make fine adjustments to a clipped photo. Just select the photo, press the Un-clip button and adjust the sides of the clip rectangle as required. Double click inside the photo to clip it again. Width / Height After drawing a clip rectangle, you can enter values directly into the width and height fields on the InfoBar to set the clip rectangle dimensions to exact values.
Width / Height After drawing a clip rectangle, you can enter values directly into the width and height fields on the InfoBar to set the clip rectangle dimensions to exact values. Lock Aspect Select the "Lock aspect" check-box to constrain the clip rectangle to a specific aspect ratio as you drag. The radio buttons to the right of the check-box determine the aspect ratio used. Select "Current" to maintain the aspect ratio to that of the photo before the clip.
Lock Aspect Select the "Lock aspect" check-box to constrain the clip rectangle to a specific aspect ratio as you drag. The radio buttons to the right of the check-box determine the aspect ratio used. Select "Current" to maintain the aspect ratio to that of the photo before the clip. Note that the clip rectangle automatically changes between landscape and portrait orientation as you drag a corner of the rectangle. So if you drag sideways it tends to create a clip in landscape orientation.
Clipping in Photo Documents In photo mode, there is a one-pixel grid applied to the photo (when at 96dpi, the default resolution) and the clip rectangle snaps to this grid. This makes it very easy to get pixel exact clipping. For highly accurate or exact pixel snapping, it's recommended to operate in photo mode and to zoom in so you can see the pixels clearly. See Photo documents for more information.
Photo Tool Notes 1. You can select different photos while using the photo tools by just clicking on them. This also works for photos inside groups. 2. If you click and drag, while in the Enhance Tool, it will start a crop on the photo that you started dragging on. Or, if you start dragging on the background, the crop will be applied to the first photo you touch during the drag. 3.
The Red Eye Tool Select the Red Eye Tool from the Photo Tool flyout bar. The Red Eye Tool allows you to quickly remove red eye effects from faces in your photos. Click the icon shown above to enter red eye mode. Then: Zoom into the red eyes in your photo using the Zoom Tool or just using "Ctrl + Mousewheel". Click and drag from the centre of the red eye outwards, to drag a circular red eye patch. The red color is removed from the area within this circle.
red eye patches are good enough for removing red eye effects. The edge of the red eye ellipse has a 3 pixel feather applied by default, so there is no hard edge to the area from which the red is removed. You can easily adjust this feather value by selecting the red eye ellipse (as above) and adjusting the feather value with the main feather control (on the right hand side of the top bar), in the same way that you edit the feather values of ordinary shapes.
Content Aware Photo Resize Photo & Graphic Designer includes the ability to stretch photos using a new technique that retains the proportions of key aspects of the photo. The human eye is particularly sensitive to changes in aspect ratio of everyday objects, and most people can tell something is wrong with images that are even slightly squashed or stretched. Here is an example photo of the famous Torii Gate in Japan. Clearly the gate itself is the main subject of this picture.
Select a photo, go into the Photo Tool , and the InfoBar should look like this; First click the Prepare button to prepare the photo for the scaling. This starts an analysis of the photo to calculate which parts of the image can be stretched and which parts should be kept. This process can take some time depending on the resolution of the photo, and how many processors your computer has.
chapter to find out more about masks, but here's a brief summary of how to use masks with Content Aware Scaling. To protect one or more areas from being distorted, select the mask at the bottom of the main toolbar on the left of the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 window, or the menu "Window" > "Mask mode on" . Selecting the mask control turns on mask mode This covers the entire drawing area in a pink colored mask layer. You can now use any of the drawing tools to cut holes out of the mask.
Preparing Your Photo The content aware scaling feature is part of the Photo tools . Select your photo and from the Photo Tool fly-out bar. Select the Content Aware Scaling button. The right end of the InfoBar will now show a set of buttons. Select a photo, go into the Photo Tool , and the InfoBar should look like this; First click the Prepare button to prepare the photo for the scaling.
'interesting' content. Note this is not just a crop of the girl, but that every element, cloud, and grass that appears in the original is still there in the zoomed version. The program automatically detects the surfer is the 'region of interest' and so enlarges him only. Using Masks With Content Aware Scaling Using the mask feature you can provide further control by protecting areas of the picture from being distorted. Masked areas will not be distorted at all.
saves the resizing information in the document. The advantage of this is that you can later re-adjust the photo using the Content Aware feature. There is a significant file size overhead of saving photos like this.
Optimize Photos that have been prepared to enable Content Aware resizing have a lot of additional data stored alongside them, to enable further adjustments. When you save a document this additional data is saved also, meaning that you can load such a document and continue to adjust the width or height without having to do a new Prepare operation. When you've finished scaling the photo you are recommended to 'fix' the changes by using the Optimize feature.
button. Note: You can't mask more than half the image. The prepare operation will give an error if you try this. Adjusting a mask, or adding a new mask You can't add a mask to an image that has already been stretched. Instead, if you want to add a new mask or adjust an existing one, you have these options: 1. Click the Reset button and draw a new mask 2. Click undo as many times as necessary to get back the mask, and then use the normal drawing tools to adjust the mask shapes. 3.
Content-aware photo zoom An alternative to content aware scaling is the whereby the photo remains the same size and the content is intelligently zoomed inside it. Here's an example of the effect. Use the zoom slider on the Infobar to control content-aware photo zoom. The picture remains the same size, but the program automatically detects and scales (zooms) the 'interesting' content.
onto the mask layer. There is another alternative that you can 'fix' a stretched image using the Optimize feature, and then apply a new mask. This is not recommended in most cases because it will produce lower quality results than resetting the image and applying a mask to the original image. Alternative Content Aware Scaling When stretching photos there are two alternative ways to scale the image. The method of just dragging the size arrows sometimes works not so well with some image types.
Using Masks With Content Aware Scaling Using the mask feature you can provide further control by protecting areas of the picture from being distorted. Masked areas will not be distorted at all. See the Masks chapter to find out more about masks, but here's a brief summary of how to use masks with Content Aware Scaling.
Alternative Content Aware Scaling When stretching photos there are two alternative ways to scale the image. The method of just dragging the size arrows sometimes works not so well with some image types. However by holding the "Alt" key when dragging one of the side handles in the Content-aware Scale Tool performs a different intelligent scale using an alternative algorithm.
Content Aware Scaling notes You can only compress an image to half its initial width or height If you save a document with a photo that has been prepared for Content Aware resizing, then it saves the resizing information in the document. The advantage of this is that you can later re-adjust the photo using the Content Aware feature. There is a significant file size overhead of saving photos like this.
The Brightness Levels Dialog Click the Levels Tool icon on the Photo Tool fly-out bar. The Levels Tool provides detailed control over the brightness levels of photos. It's a very powerful, multi-purpose tool that not only shows a histogram of the brightness levels of the photo, but provides a greater degree of control than the simple brightness or contrast controls. It can lighten shadows without affecting other parts of the picture.
1. The first image shows a good spread, from the darkest to lightest shades, with a predominance of mid-brightness shades. 2. The second image is obviously very dark, and the histogram reflects this with peaks at the dark (left) end. 3. The third image has peaks at the bright (right) end which are typical for images that have a bright sky. There is nothing wrong with this and the overall exposure is about right and you can see a good distribution of shades across the histogram.
If you have a photo taken with the wrong light setting, they will come out orange or blue. This control can help fix this, although in bad cases it will never be possible to make them perfect. Tip: If there are no gray objects in the picture, find anything that is meant to be white and look for an area that's in shade or less than bright white. Tip: If you have multiple pictures taken with the same color cast, you can copy the correction from one to another using the Copy / Paste Attributes feature.
The default straight line means no change, so dark shades are mapped to dark, and light to the same light shades. But as you alter the controls the green line is altered to reflect the new mapping. So, for example, increasing the brightness or gamma control will change the line like this; You can see now that it's no longer a straight line mapping, and that the darker input shades will be mapped to corresponding lighter output shades.
histogram makes it easy to see if there is a lot of pure white (peaks at the far right end), and by adjusting the white output level slider you can easily control this. Dragging the "White output level" slider inwards slightly alters the green line: Meaning the maximum white value is brought down slightly. Brightness Curves In the Levels dialog you can create a manual brightness curve which provides very detailed control over brightness levels for any photos.
and then select "Edit -> Paste attributes" ("Ctrl + Shift + A"). Levels Tool notes 1. The Levels dialog works in conjunction with the Brightness and Contrast sliders. You can use both sets of controls together or separately. All will alter the overall brightness levels, and all changes are reflected in the histogram and green mapping line. 2. The Levels dialog is non-modal, which means that while it's on screen you can continue to use Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 as usual.
Adjusting brightness Dragging on the center gray triangle adjusts the brightness (technically this is altering the gamma). It does the exact same thing as the brightness slider on the InfoBar. The brightness slider alters the darker shades in a picture more than it does the lighter shades, so it is particularly good for revealing details in shadows.
The corrected histogram now shows a much better balance (it's largely at the white end, but that's to be expected in a snow scene). Auto Levels The Auto button will automatically adjust the white and black points to correspond to the lightest and darkest shades in the selected picture. This works better for some images than others (the above snow scene works perfectly, so in fact this can be corrected with a single click).
Using one of the low contrast examples above, this is the altered histogram, showing the before, after and altered green mapping function line. You can see the black and white points are moved inwards. This is reflected in the green line which shows that mid-shades are now mapped to dark, and the lightest white points (about 80% along the horizontal) are now mapped to white. Thus the narrow range of input shades is mapped to the full dark-to-light range of output shades.
Right click on a control point to delete it. Use the Toggle curve button to temporarily disable the curve. The Curves control is used in combination with the other Levels controls, such as the central gamma control, and the black and white input and output levels. This means you can have both a manually entered curve, and still make general adjustments such as adjusting the gamma, or even the contrast on the main Photo Tool Infobar. This example shows a manually entered curve with three control points.
Selecting the black, gray and white points The three eye-dropper icons can be used to pick the black, gray or white points on the photo, and adjust the three controls for you automatically. These tools have the advantage that they also adjust the white balance or color cast that your photo might have. Click and drag one of the icons from the levels dialog over your photo. As you do this you will see the photo change. Release the mouse buttons when you're happy with the change.
The corrected histogram now shows a much better balance (it's largely at the white end, but that's to be expected in a snow scene). Auto Levels The Auto button will automatically adjust the white and black points to correspond to the lightest and darkest shades in the selected picture. This works better for some images than others (the above snow scene works perfectly, so in fact this can be corrected with a single click).
Using one of the low contrast examples above, this is the altered histogram, showing the before, after and altered green mapping function line. You can see the black and white points are moved inwards. This is reflected in the green line which shows that mid-shades are now mapped to dark, and the lightest white points (about 80% along the horizontal) are now mapped to white. Thus the narrow range of input shades is mapped to the full dark-to-light range of output shades.
Right click on a control point to delete it. Use the Toggle curve button to temporarily disable the curve. The Curves control is used in combination with the other Levels controls, such as the central gamma control, and the black and white input and output levels. This means you can have both a manually entered curve, and still make general adjustments such as adjusting the gamma, or even the contrast on the main Photo Tool Infobar. This example shows a manually entered curve with three control points.
Color cast - fixing the white balance The middle of the three eye-droppers sets the gray point and this is mostly useful for altering the white balance of your photos. You drag it from the Levels Dialog, like the others, but drag it over any point in the picture that is meant to be gray. In doing this the balance of colors is altered to try and make the item under the mouse pointer a pure shade of gray, and thus alters the color balance of the whole picture.
button on the Photo Tool's InfoBar also does the same thing, but has the advantage that pressing it again restores the altered settings. Advanced Levels - The Green Line For the more advanced user, the levels control is really mapping the range of input brightness levels to an alternative set of output levels. Overlaid on the red histogram is a green line that represents the mapping function. The default straight line means no change, so dark shades are mapped to dark, and light to the same light shades.
changed. Output Levels The two lower controls adjust the minimum (black) and maximum (white) final output levels. Adjusting these has the effect of reducing the contrast. Tip: It is usually recommended that for printing purposes the photos do not contain pure white, but instead have a maximum "whiteness" of around 90%, especially when printed in black and white.
The histogram graph shows both the original histogram (dark red) of the unmodified photo and the modified histogram (pale red overlaid) that is the result of the adjusted curve. Applying the same Levels correction to multiple images It's common that photographs taken together under the same conditions suffer from the same exposure or color cast problems. It's easy in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to copy any levels adjustment from one image to any other.
Auto Levels The Auto button will automatically adjust the white and black points to correspond to the lightest and darkest shades in the selected picture. This works better for some images than others (the above snow scene works perfectly, so in fact this can be corrected with a single click). Reset The "Reset" button will reset all levels parameters back to their starting values.
component colors that make up the full color image. In other words the color balance is not altered (all colors are affected equally), it just alters the overall brightness levels. The dropdown menu at the top of the dialog shows "Joined RGB" to reflect this. However, you can adjust the levels of each red, green or blue component (channel) separately, by selecting from the dropdown list. And each of these color components has its own set of controls that work independently of the "Joined RGB" controls.
This example shows a manually entered curve with three control points. In this example the mid to dark shades have all be lifted (lightened), but the brighter shades of the photo (right side of the curve) have not been altered at all. The histogram graph shows both the original histogram (dark red) of the unmodified photo and the modified histogram (pale red overlaid) that is the result of the adjusted curve.
Reset The "Reset" button will reset all levels parameters back to their starting values. The "Compare" button on the Photo Tool's InfoBar also does the same thing, but has the advantage that pressing it again restores the altered settings. Advanced Levels - The Green Line For the more advanced user, the levels control is really mapping the range of input brightness levels to an alternative set of output levels. Overlaid on the red histogram is a green line that represents the mapping function.
Note that when you use the "Auto" button or drag the black, gray, or white eye-dropper pickers, these functions alter the separate RGB components, rather than the "joined RGB" controls. This is how they correct the color balance. The side-effect of this mean the joined RGB controls appear not to have changed. Output Levels The two lower controls adjust the minimum (black) and maximum (white) final output levels. Adjusting these has the effect of reducing the contrast.
This example shows a manually entered curve with three control points. In this example the mid to dark shades have all be lifted (lightened), but the brighter shades of the photo (right side of the curve) have not been altered at all. The histogram graph shows both the original histogram (dark red) of the unmodified photo and the modified histogram (pale red overlaid) that is the result of the adjusted curve.
Advanced Levels - The Green Line For the more advanced user, the levels control is really mapping the range of input brightness levels to an alternative set of output levels. Overlaid on the red histogram is a green line that represents the mapping function. The default straight line means no change, so dark shades are mapped to dark, and light to the same light shades. But as you alter the controls the green line is altered to reflect the new mapping.
Output Levels The two lower controls adjust the minimum (black) and maximum (white) final output levels. Adjusting these has the effect of reducing the contrast. Tip: It is usually recommended that for printing purposes the photos do not contain pure white, but instead have a maximum "whiteness" of around 90%, especially when printed in black and white.
Applying the same Levels correction to multiple images It's common that photographs taken together under the same conditions suffer from the same exposure or color cast problems. It's easy in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to copy any levels adjustment from one image to any other. Just copy the source image to the clipboard in the usual way ("Ctrl + C"), and then select "Edit -> Paste attributes" ("Ctrl + Shift + A"). Levels Tool notes 1.
Joined RGB - or separate Red, Green and Blue When altering the overall brightness or contrast, this operation is performed equally across the RGB component colors that make up the full color image. In other words the color balance is not altered (all colors are affected equally), it just alters the overall brightness levels. The dropdown menu at the top of the dialog shows "Joined RGB" to reflect this.
This example shows a manually entered curve with three control points. In this example the mid to dark shades have all be lifted (lightened), but the brighter shades of the photo (right side of the curve) have not been altered at all. The histogram graph shows both the original histogram (dark red) of the unmodified photo and the modified histogram (pale red overlaid) that is the result of the adjusted curve.
Output Levels The two lower controls adjust the minimum (black) and maximum (white) final output levels. Adjusting these has the effect of reducing the contrast. Tip: It is usually recommended that for printing purposes the photos do not contain pure white, but instead have a maximum "whiteness" of around 90%, especially when printed in black and white.
modified histogram (pale red overlaid) that is the result of the adjusted curve. Applying the same Levels correction to multiple images It's common that photographs taken together under the same conditions suffer from the same exposure or color cast problems. It's easy in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to copy any levels adjustment from one image to any other. Just copy the source image to the clipboard in the usual way ("Ctrl + C"), and then select "Edit -> Paste attributes" ("Ctrl + Shift + A").
Brightness Curves In the Levels dialog you can create a manual brightness curve which provides very detailed control over brightness levels for any photos. To create a manual curve just click or drag on the histogram area, and you will see a control point added and a curve. Right click on a control point to delete it. Use the Toggle curve button to temporarily disable the curve.
Applying the same Levels correction to multiple images It's common that photographs taken together under the same conditions suffer from the same exposure or color cast problems. It's easy in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to copy any levels adjustment from one image to any other. Just copy the source image to the clipboard in the usual way ("Ctrl + C"), and then select "Edit -> Paste attributes" ("Ctrl + Shift + A"). Levels Tool notes 1.
Levels Tool notes 1. The Levels dialog works in conjunction with the Brightness and Contrast sliders. You can use both sets of controls together or separately. All will alter the overall brightness levels, and all changes are reflected in the histogram and green mapping line. 2. The Levels dialog is non-modal, which means that while it's on screen you can continue to use Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 as usual.
Compare & Restoring the original The Compare button can be used to reset all the Enhance and Levels Tool values back to their defaults, returning your photo to its original state. Press the compare button a second time, your previous values are reinstated. Therefore you can use the compare button to quickly toggle between your edited photo and the original photo so you can see the effects of the changes you've made.
Panorama Stitching Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes a tool that can automatically stitch together up to 8 photographs into a single wide, high-resolution panorama. Creating high-quality panoramas can be a very complex and technical process, often requiring special equipment or lenses and accurately exposed and aligned photographs.
Optimizing images Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will always stitch photos at the full resolution, even if you reduce the size of the image on the page. This is often a desirable thing since it produces the maximum quality, highest resolution results. But it does mean that the stitching process can take a few minutes. So sometimes you may prefer to reduce the resolution of the images before you stitch them together, especially if you only require a medium resolution final result, perhaps for the web.
Optimizing images Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will always stitch photos at the full resolution, even if you reduce the size of the image on the page. This is often a desirable thing since it produces the maximum quality, highest resolution results. But it does mean that the stitching process can take a few minutes. So sometimes you may prefer to reduce the resolution of the images before you stitch them together, especially if you only require a medium resolution final result, perhaps for the web.
Perspective Correction Tool This tool is available on the Photo Tool fly-out. It's designed to be a simple one-click way to automatically correct common perspective effects. The image on the left, taken inside a very large Basilica building in Rome, shows the common perspective effects of photos taken with a camera close to the ground. To get a 'straight on' photo would require it to be taken from a height of probably 30 feet.
EXIF Tool With the EXIF button in the Photo Tool fly-out bar you open the EXIF dialog. This dialog shows the embedded EXIF values of an JPEG photo. This dialog is mostly transparent (so it doesn't get in the way too much). By clicking the small down arrow on its title bar you can configure which actual EXIF values are shown and how transparent the dialog is. EXIF data is now preserved on export of JPEG photos and across an Optimize Photo operation.
Photo Clone Tool This is a tool (on the Photo Tool fly-out) that rapidly and effectively erases objects from images. The Clone Tool allows you to either copy or 'clone' parts of a photo and replace the unwanted objects with the cloned area, effectively erasing the objects. You can either automatically clone parts of the same photo (by allowing Photo & Graphic Designer to choose the most suitable area of the photo to clone) or manually (by choosing the area from the same or another photo yourself). 1.
smoothness control. This is only active immediately after you've drawn the clone shape. If you edit the clone outline using the other tools such as the Shape Editor, this control become disabled. Magic Erase Click this button to allow Photo & Graphic Designer to automatically select areas of the same photo to copy and clone into the clone shape. Continue to click to view all other possible automatic replacements.
Clone Tool Infobar Outlines on or off With outlines on all clone shapes on the selected photo are shown with a dotted outline. The current or selected clone shape is shown with an animated 'marching ants' outline, resize handles and an arrow pointing from the source point. Size slider This allows the clone shape to be enlarged or reduced. This is particularly useful if you use a larger feather value (which blends the edge of the clone shape inwards) in that you can compensate by enlarging the clone shape.
Dragging on the 8 resize handles around the shape will enlarge or reduce the clone shape size Dragging the feather slider control on the Infobar, or the main feather control on the top bar, will adjust the edge blend. You can delete a clone shape by selecting it and pressing the Delete key The clone copy will always be made from the image you see on the page, including all previously applied clones and other edits already made to the image.
Clone Tool Operation Summary To erase a part of a photo, select the Clone Tool and draw around the area you want to erase. Then either: Click the Magic erase button in the Clone Tool Infobar to allow Photo & Graphic Designer to automatically select areas of the same photo to clone into the clone shape. Drag outside this area on the same or another photo to set the source point for the copy. You can switch on or off visible outlines for the clone shapes with this icon on the Clone Tool Infobar.
3D Extrude Tool In this chapter Introduction Extruding a shape Extrude Tool InfoBar Textures & Photos Extruding Text Copying 3D extrude attributes Putting shadows behind Page 1111
Introduction The Extrude Tool provides a fast and easy way of turning 2D drawn shapes and text into high quality 3D "extruded" versions, with colored light illumination and very high quality shading. It is based on the technology used in the Xara 3D stand-alone program. On-screen dragging allows real-time 3D object rotation, dragging of the extrude depth, and adjustment of three lights in 3D space around the object. The InfoBar provides control over the bevel type drawn down the extruded length.
Extruding a shape To turn a 2D shape into a 3D extruded object, go into the Extrude Tool on the main toolbar and simply click and drag on your object to rotate it in 3D space. Initially, your extrusion is given a default depth. The face color of the 3D shape is determined by the fill color of the original shape and the color of the extrude (or side) by its line color. After creating an extrude in this way, move your mouse pointer around over the 3D object.
Extrude Tool InfoBar Extrude on/off Slider type list Slider and numeric value for selected parameter Bevel type Bevel size slider and value Lights on/off Gloss/matt Rounded/mitred corner You can adjust a 3D extruded object by manipulating it directly on the page as described above, or by selecting it and using the controls on the InfoBar of the Extrude Tool.
An alternative shortcut to adjust the bevel size is to drag on the side of the 3D object holding "Ctrl" (while in the Extrude Tool ). Lights Lights on/off You can adjust the lighting of your shape in 3D space by turning on the lights. There are 3 lights, each of which can be given their own color and position in 3D space around the 3D shape. In this example the face color of the shape is set to white.
Turning extrudes on and off Extrude on/off Once a shape or other object has been extruded, there are only limited modifications that can be made to the original object with the extrusion in place. For example, if you've extruded a shape, it's not possible to then edit that shape in the Shape Editor Tool because it's no longer a simple 2D shape that you can interact with.
In this example the face color of the shape is set to white. But you can see that it appears green because there is a green light shining almost directly onto the front face of the shape. By adjusting the colors of the face and extrude and the positions and colors of the three lights, you can enhance the realism of the 3D objects in your design. Behind the object is a beige / orange colored light and another that is a purple color.
Extrusion depth The easiest way to adjust the depth of an extrusion is to simply click and drag on it, as described above. However, you can also use the slider on the left of the Extrude Tool InfoBar to adjust it. Make sure that Extrude depth is selected in the dropdown list to the left of the slider (this is the default setting) and then use the slider to adjust the extrude depth.
color selected in the color editor dropdown list changes to match your selection, so you can quickly select the different colors on your extrude to modify them. Gloss / Matt Use this toggle button to make the surface of a 3D object more or less reflective. With the gloss option on lights placed at the correct position behind the object will "bounce off" the sides to good effect. Mitred corner / Rounded corner You can choose either Mitred or Rounded corners for your 3D object.
Bevel Type & Size The bevel type determines the profile of the extruded side of your 3D shape and of its edges and corners. By default it's set to rounded which gives a flat side with rounded corners. The bevel type dropdown list contains a large selection of different bevel types you can choose from. You can adjust the size of the bevel using the slider to the right of the bevel type list.
Mitred corner / Rounded corner You can choose either Mitred or Rounded corners for your 3D object. "Mitre" gives square edges, while "Round" produces rounded edges.
Lights Lights on/off You can adjust the lighting of your shape in 3D space by turning on the lights. There are 3 lights, each of which can be given their own color and position in 3D space around the 3D shape. In this example the face color of the shape is set to white. But you can see that it appears green because there is a green light shining almost directly onto the front face of the shape.
Gloss / Matt Use this toggle button to make the surface of a 3D object more or less reflective. With the gloss option on lights placed at the correct position behind the object will "bounce off" the sides to good effect. Mitred corner / Rounded corner You can choose either Mitred or Rounded corners for your 3D object. "Mitre" gives square edges, while "Round" produces rounded edges.
Mitred corner / Rounded corner You can choose either Mitred or Rounded corners for your 3D object. "Mitre" gives square edges, while "Round" produces rounded edges.
Textures & Photos When you extrude a photo, the photo remains on the front face of your 3D object. Therefore, you can produce impressive 3D photo effects in seconds by simply importing a photo and extruding it. This effect is created by extruding a photo, rotating it slightly, creating a reflected copy using the Selector Tool , and the 3D angle adjusted to match. It's then given a graduated transparency to create the faded reflection. You can use any photo or texture on the face of your extrude.
Extruding Text Extrude text the same way that you extrude any shape; just click and drag on the text while using the Extrude Tool . As you would expect, doing this on more than a few words can be rather slow and is not recommended. Because text is usually black, unless you change the color the extruded result will also be entirely black, so making it difficult to see.
Copying 3D extrude attributes You can copy and paste the style of the 3D extrusion, from one 3D object to any other. This works the same way as for all Photo & Graphic Designer attributes. Simply copy the source extruded object to the clipboard, and then select a new one and select "Edit" > "Paste format/ attributes" . Note this will only paste the 3D attributes onto another 3D extruded objects. So you will have to extrude any shape first before pasting the 3D attributes.
Putting shadows behind Using the Shadow Tool you can enhance the 3D effect by placing a soft shadow behind the object. Simply apply the Shadow Tool and drag on the 3D object. The left example is using a wall shadow, the right us using a floor shadow.
Web Graphics and Websites In this chapter What Makes Photo & Graphic Designer Different A Website In 6 Steps Website Toolbar Creating a website Using Templates, Clipart & Widgets Previewing Your Website Photo Resolution - It's All Automatic! Text Page Size Exporting a Website Stretchy Objects Groups Links, Buttons & Navigation Bars Using Shadows Repeating Objects Layers, Mouseover (Rollover) & Pop-ups Web Properties Dialog Creating Buttons, Banners And Other Web Graphics Publishing Your Website Embedding Mo
What Makes Photo & Graphic Designer Different Traditional web authoring tools are really just HTML editors - they are designed to create text layout. They provide few, if any, graphical capabilities. You are expected to use separate graphics tools to create your web graphics and photos. This is despite the fact that the vast majority of websites are primarily graphical designs, where the text element plays only a minor part in the overall design.
For The Professional Photo & Graphic Designer - A Rapid Prototyping Tool Photo & Graphic Designer provides unprecedented flexibility as a rapid prototyping tool. For the first time you can focus purely on the design of your website, with almost no limitations to your page layout. Photo & Graphic Designer provides all the graphics tools to create optimized graphics, photos and more, and creates cross-browser, cross-platform, standards compatible HTML. Forget creating mock-up websites in Photoshop.
A Website In 6 Steps For those with short attention spans (that's most of us), you can discover the main benefits of Photo & Graphic Designer by just following the instructions in the "Websites Intro" document in the Designs Gallery. Click the button, open the Introduction category and just double click on the document thumbnail. Here you can find out how to change your website colors, edit your text, drag and drop photos, move objects around the page and more.
Website Toolbar The Website Toolbar at the top of the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides convenient access to the main web functions you'll use regularly. Export and preview web page/website Link Website Options Export Move your mouse pointer over each button in the flyout bar to see a tooltip describing the button.
Creating a website There are two ways to create a new website. Either by starting with a pre-designed template and then customizing this with your own text, photos and color scheme. Or by creating a website from scratch, placing all the required elements, text, graphics, photos and placeholders on the page as you require.
Using Templates, Clipart & Widgets Open the Designs Gallery by clicking the Designs Gallery tab on the Galleries bar or select "File" > "New from Designs Gallery" . The "Web Theme" folders in the gallery contain collections of website designs and associated graphic files that each follow a specific theme. Double click to open any file as a new document. Each theme section has a collection of alternative page layouts and some other useful page elements such as buttons or expanding text panels.
A placeholder image is automatically rendered for you and this will appear on your page. Preview your page to see your working Flash animation. Alternatively you can create your own placeholder object (e.g., a rectangle) and use the Placeholder tab of the Web Properties dialog to associate it with your Flash file. Coloring Imported Clipart When you import a clipart graphic by dragging from the Design Gallery, using the Import option, or dragging a .web or .
Adding New Pages To Your Website You can drag any template design from the Designs Gallery onto your page. If this is a page template, it will add a new page to your website, after first asking if you want to match any color changes. If you drag a clipart item such as a button, heading or photo object, this gets added onto the page where you dropped it, and again you will be asked if you want to match any color changes you've made.
Flash Clipart Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes the ability to create Flash animations from scratch (see the Flash Animations section in the pdf manual), but also includes a range of Flash templates you can customize. Flash templates cannot be dragged onto the page directly, but have to be opened as a separate animation document, where you can customize it as required, and then save the Flash (.swf) file to your local disk. Then use "File" > "Import" or drag and drop the .
Coloring Imported Clipart When you import a clipart graphic by dragging from the Design Gallery, using the Import option, or dragging a .web or .xar file onto your page, you will usually be asked whether you want to match the colors. If you select not to, then any Named Colors used in this graphic will be added to the Color Line. See 'Importing named colors ' in the Color Handling chapter for details.
Previewing Your Website Click the Export & Preview button on the Website bar to open a browser window that shows you exactly what your final website will look like. When creating your website in Photo & Graphic Designer, your working document shows an accurate static preview, but to check the behaviour of pop-ups, mouseover effects and Flash it's necessary to use this true Browser Preview. Note: This internal preview uses a simplified version of the Internet Explorer browser.
Photo Resolution - It's All Automatic! When importing high resolution photos (anything above 1920 pixels either wide or high) into a web document, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically resizes the photo down to HD screen size without asking you if you want to import a lower resolution version.
Text Use the Text tool to add text and edit text in your website. See the Text Handling chapter for full details of the Text tool. Web Safe Fonts These fonts are safe to use in websites because the vast majority of computers and other devices will have these fonts. You can use other fonts if you embed them in your website and if the font license permits it ? see the Text Handling chapter for details. If you turn any text object into a graphic, you are free to use any font.
Web Safe Fonts These fonts are safe to use in websites because the vast majority of computers and other devices will have these fonts. You can use other fonts if you embed them in your website and if the font license permits it ? see the Text Handling chapter for details. If you turn any text object into a graphic, you are free to use any font. See the Groups section below for details about this.
Text Panels Just as some Design Gallery buttons stretch to accommodate the text, so some text panels can adapt to the width or length of text entered into them. The panel background changes to accommodate longer or wider blocks of text. You can adjust the width of a text column by going into the Text tool and dragging the column width handles (under the first line of text). Most of the Design Gallery templates provide a few text panels in keeping with the theme.
Page Size The pages in the Designs Gallery are designed to be a width that is known to fit the vast majority of computer screens. Creating wider pages is not recommended, even though you will probably have a wider computer screen, experience shows most viewers prefer to have a fixed width page. However you can adjust the page size to be anything. You can set any page size you like by selecting the Page size tab of the Options dialog (right click and choose Page options or Page Options from the File menu).
Changing The Page Size of Templates You can change the vertical size of the pre-designed templates by just dragging on the bottom edge of the page. As you do this, footer objects will automatically stay with the bottom of the page and any background panels will stretch automatically also, so the page design is maintained for any page length.
Exporting a Website To save your website, that is the HTML and associated files for publishing to the web, use File->Export Website or click this button on the top bar. This saves a .htm file for each page and a folder alongside these which contains all the graphic files that make up your website. When you export a website, all the pages are exported together, and each page has _1, _2 ... appended to the end of the name you give when you export.
Stretchy Objects Many of the graphic objects, such as 'stretch buttons' and text panels, can automatically adjust their size depending on the size or length of text. Most template sets, and all of the buttons in the Button folder in the Designs Gallery , have both fixed width and stretchy versions. It's recommended that if building a set of navigation buttons (typically either a horizontal or vertical collection of links or buttons) that you use fixed width so they are all the same size.
Groups You can group together any selection of objects on the page. Many of the items in the template designs from the Designs Gallery such as buttons, text panels, and photo objects are grouped items. Groups act much like a single object, in that you can drag them around the page, resize and rotate them as if they were one object. Create a group by selecting the objects to be grouped and then choosing Arrange->Group (Ctrl+G).
Converting Text To Be A Graphic As mentioned above only a very limited number of fonts are available in web browsers. If you want to use a different font on a button or, say, as a heading, you can do this by ensuring it is converted to a graphic, and all you need to do is group the object to make this happen automatically. You can still edit the text inside the group, but groups are automatically converted into a graphic when the website is exported.
Soft Groups There is another type of group, called a 'Soft Group', which is a more loosely connected set of objects. See the Object Handling chapter for details. Synchronized Text There is another useful feature of Soft Groups. If you have the same text on two or more objects within a Soft Group, the text will be synchronized when you edit it. This is the mechanism used to keep the button text the same on both the normal and MouseOver buttons - see below.
Synchronized Text There is another useful feature of Soft Groups. If you have the same text on two or more objects within a Soft Group, the text will be synchronized when you edit it. This is the mechanism used to keep the button text the same on both the normal and MouseOver buttons - see below.
Links, Buttons & Navigation Bars You can add a web link to any object, a button, graphic or some text. Select the object and just click the Link Properties icon in the website toolbar, then enter the web address that you want to link to. Enter the web address you want to link to in the highlighted field. The Link tab of the Website Properties dialog allows you to control what happens when you click the linked object on the page.
option. Select the object on your page that you want to link to the file. Then choose the Link to file option and browse for your file. This copies the file into a support folder alongside your design file, so that the file gets published along with the rest of your site. The folder is named using the name of your design file, with "_files" appended. Click OK, preview your page and try the link. When you want to modify the file, just go through the same process - browse for your new/updated file.
choose Repeat on all pages. This will make the button bar a repeating object and copy it from the current page onto all other pages in the same location. Any updates you make to one instance will automatically be applied to all other copies of your navigation bar. See Repeating objects for more information. Tip: If you use 'Paste in Place ' (Shift+Ctrl+V) it will put it at exactly the same position on the destination page.
Link to Anchor You can link to any text or object anywhere in your website by using 'anchors'. First you need to apply a name to the object you want to link to. This is called the anchor. Right click the item (which can be a graphic or some text) and then select Names or choose Names from the Utilities menu to display the name dialog. Enter any unique name you like and click Add .
Button Bars (NavBars) Most websites, and so most of the template designs we provide, have a row or column of buttons to navigate around the website or to other places. In Photo & Graphic Designer these are really just a collection of separate buttons, and you can edit any button directly by just clicking on it as usual. You can move each individual button, or delete it in the usual way, but sometimes you may want the whole row or column of buttons to move together.
Link to File Sometimes you may want to provide a document, movie or other file to visitors to your site. To do this use the Link to file option. Select the object on your page that you want to link to the file. Then choose the Link to file option and browse for your file. This copies the file into a support folder alongside your design file, so that the file gets published along with the rest of your site. The folder is named using the name of your design file, with "_files" appended.
key. To add a new button, just copy an existing one, and the easiest way to do that is to drag on an existing button with the right mouse button. You can then just edit the link as required. If you need to adjust the position of any item slightly just select it and use the arrow keys. To update a navigation bar across all pages, if it's not an automatic site navigation bar, just right click and choose Repeat on all pages.
Changing Button Text This is easy - in the Text tool , just click on the button text and edit it. Hint: if you triple-click on the button text that selects the whole line of text for easy replacement when you type. Mouseover (Rollover) Buttons You will have noticed that most buttons highlight as you move the mouse pointer over them in your browser. This is called a mouseover, or sometimes a rollover effect.
Mouseover (Rollover) Buttons You will have noticed that most buttons highlight as you move the mouse pointer over them in your browser. This is called a mouseover, or sometimes a rollover effect. This is all automatic for most buttons used in the templates or from the Button section of the Designs Gallery . But you can also create your own mouseover buttons ? see the Layers section below.
Adding New Buttons In the Designs Gallery , each Theme has a collection of button graphics that you can just drag onto the page. Typically there are two types of button. The ones called Stretch Button will elongate to accommodate the button label text. In addition under Page Elements there is a Buttons category that has a set of general button designs that can be added to your page in the same way. Or you can copy any existing button.
Button Bars (NavBars) Most websites, and so most of the template designs we provide, have a row or column of buttons to navigate around the website or to other places. In Photo & Graphic Designer these are really just a collection of separate buttons, and you can edit any button directly by just clicking on it as usual. You can move each individual button, or delete it in the usual way, but sometimes you may want the whole row or column of buttons to move together.
Using Shadows See the Shadow Tool chapter for details on how to add and edit shadows. Note that because a shadow itself is semi- transparent (part of the objects below show through the shadow) objects with shadows are converted to PNG images when saved on a web page (it's the only image format that supports transparency). PNG images can be quite large, especially for photos. It's perfect for images such the above shadow graphic. You may find you can convert the whole graphic to a JPEG to save space.
Repeating Objects It's common to have items like navigation buttons, headers or logos repeating on all pages of your document or website. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 provides the ability to repeat any item in the same place on any of your web pages. When you update one of the copies, all changes are automatically replicated across all pages. See the Repeating Objects section of the Object Handling chapter for details.
Layers, Mouseover (Rollover) & Pop-ups As mentioned earlier all objects have a stacking order on the page - from the backmost to the frontmost item. In addition, all items can be placed into named layers. Each layer can have any number of objects, and has the ability to be turned on or off. When the layer is turned off all objects on that layer become invisible. The layers are controlled from the Page & Layer Gallery in the Galleries bar. See the Layers & Page & Layer Gallery chapter for full details.
: The MouseOver layer must always be above, that is on top of, the MouseOff layer, as shown in the above example. To edit the objects on a layer both the 'eye' and 'lock' icons have to be open - this means you can see and edit the layer (as shown above in the MouseOff layer). Mouseover (Rollover) Buttons Almost all the ready-made buttons from the Designs Gallery have a mouseover effect in Photo & Graphic Designer.
" layer, if you have mousedown effects on the static layer(s). Next you may have a popup layer. If the objects on this popup layer have mouseover effects, then the next layer following the popup layer must be the layer holding those effects. It must have a name that begins with "MouseOver", E.g. "MouseOverPopup1". And then if the popup layer also has mousedown effects, a layer whose name begins with "MouseDown" must follow containing those effects.
Here are the steps to create a pop-up text block like this: 1. Select a layer in the Page & Layer Gallery and click New to create a new layer. 2. Draw a rounded rectangle with the Rectangle tool, click a (pale) color patch on the Color Line to give it a fill color. For good measure give it a soft shadow (select the Shadow tool and just drag on the rectangle). 3. Create a block of text on top of your rectangle. Select the Text tool and drag diagonally across the rectangle. Type your text.
Mouseover Effects There are two types of mouseover effect you can control. Firstly the one used by mouseover buttons, where any object with a web address can display an overlapping graphic object that appears on a layer called MouseOver . See below for more detail. There is a more powerful mouseover ability where you can make the contents of any layer appear as your mouseover, or click any object on your page. This pop-up layer can contain text, graphics, photos or any combination of these things.
Creating Your Own Mouseover Buttons You can create your own mouseover buttons from scratch by drawing the necessary elements from rectangles, text, etc. Just draw the main parts of the button on the MouseOff layer (remember to group it) and place the corresponding 'highlight' version on the MouseOver layer. As long as the MouseOff version has a web address link, then the MouseOver version will automatically be displayed as you move the mouse over it on the web page.
Static layer n ... Static layer 2 MouseOff Note that you only need to be concerned with these ordering rules if you are building complex pages with multiple popup effects! If you are just using the template designs provided in the Designs Gallery, you should not have any problems with layer ordering.
Note: The mouseover layer appears and disappears as you move the mouse pointer on and off the triggering object. If you use a click method to display the layer (from the Link dialog), then the layer is revealed by a click on the object, and is hidden when you click anywhere else on the page.
The MouseOff and MouseOver Layers All the main objects on your website are placed on the bottom layer, usually called MouseOff. Buttons that highlight when you move the mouse over them on the web page have an alternative graphic on the layer called MouseOver . If you open the Page & Layer Gallery you can show or hide any layer by checking or un-checking the visibility icon (the eye symbol). This is a way of showing what your MouseOver elements will look like on your page.
layer so it overlaps the linked object. Technical note: Any graphic object on the MouseOver layer will be displayed as long as at least 50% overlaps with the object on the MouseOff layer. The two versions of mouseover buttons are kept in sync by using the SoftGroups feature. When you select the button on one layer, it automatically selects the Soft Grouped version on the other layer, even if the layer is switched off.
Moving Objects From One Layer To Another You can cut an object (Ctrl+X), select a new layer (click on its name in the Page & Layer Gallery) and Paste (Ctrl+V) or right click a page and choose Paste > Paste in current layer . A useful alternative is called Paste in Place (Ctrl+Shift+V), or Edit -> Paste -> Paste in place in current layer, which will paste it at exactly the same position you copied it from. Or you can use the Page & Layer Gallery and drag an object from one layer to another.
of Web Properties. You can set the size you want for the popup photo by setting the "Popup image width " value (which defaults to 500 pixels). And that's it ? now when a visitor clicks on the photo thumbnail, a larger copy of the photo appears as a popup. Another advantage of these photo popups over popup layers is that the large photo is only loaded by the web browser when the visitor clicks on a thumbnail.
Mouseover (Rollover) Buttons Almost all the ready-made buttons from the Designs Gallery have a mouseover effect in Photo & Graphic Designer. These are created by having two versions of each button, the main one on the MouseOff layer and a 'highlight' one on the MouseOver layer. Normally you do not need to know or care about this because both buttons behave as one - the changes you make to one, such as editing the label text, are reflected on the other version.
effects, a layer whose name begins with "MouseDown" must follow containing those effects. Then you can have another popup layer, followed again by any mouseover and mousedown layers for that popup layer. And so on - you can have as many popup layers as you like. MouseDown popup n MouseOver popup n PopUp layer n ... MouseDown popup 1 MouseOver popup 1 Popup layer 1 MouseDown MouseOver Static layer n ...
drag on the rectangle). 3. Create a block of text on top of your rectangle. Select the Text tool and drag diagonally across the rectangle. Type your text. You probably want to hide the pop-up layer now, so click the eye icon against your new layer in the Page & Layer Gallery. 4. Back on the base (MouseOff) layer (click it in the Page & Layer Gallery to set this as current layer) now select the text you want to trigger the pop-up, using the usual method (in the Text tool).
Creating Your Own Mouseover Buttons You can create your own mouseover buttons from scratch by drawing the necessary elements from rectangles, text, etc. Just draw the main parts of the button on the MouseOff layer (remember to group it) and place the corresponding 'highlight' version on the MouseOver layer. As long as the MouseOff version has a web address link, then the MouseOver version will automatically be displayed as you move the mouse over it on the web page.
MouseOver Static layer n ... Static layer 2 MouseOff Note that you only need to be concerned with these ordering rules if you are building complex pages with multiple popup effects! If you are just using the template designs provided in the Designs Gallery, you should not have any problems with layer ordering.
dialog instead. Note: The mouseover layer appears and disappears as you move the mouse pointer on and off the triggering object. If you use a click method to display the layer (from the Link dialog), then the layer is revealed by a click on the object, and is hidden when you click anywhere else on the page.
Layer ordering in website documents If your website document has mouseover effects, popup layers and perhaps even mouseover effects on those popup layers, there are some important rules you need to follow in terms of how you order the layers in your document. Considering the layers in turn from background to foreground (which is working upwards in the Page & Layer Gallery), first you must have all the static layers. These are layers which are always visible and are not used as popups.
To do this, place all the objects you want to pop-up on a new layer (in the Page & Layer Gallery click New - don't use the MouseOver layer), then set the Mouseover property (Web Properties dialog) of the original object to trigger the display of this layer when you mouseover any other object. For example you can make a pop-up, like this, appear as you mouse over some text: Here are the steps to create a pop-up text block like this: 1.
Moving Objects From One Layer To Another You can cut an object (Ctrl+X), select a new layer (click on its name in the Page & Layer Gallery) and Paste (Ctrl+V) or right click a page and choose Paste > Paste in current layer . A useful alternative is called Paste in Place (Ctrl+Shift+V), or Edit -> Paste -> Paste in place in current layer, which will paste it at exactly the same position you copied it from. Or you can use the Page & Layer Gallery and drag an object from one layer to another.
photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then select it and choose the "Popup photo" option in the Link tab of Web Properties. You can set the size you want for the popup photo by setting the "Popup image width " value (which defaults to 500 pixels). And that's it ? now when a visitor clicks on the photo thumbnail, a larger copy of the photo appears as a popup. Another advantage of these photo popups over popup layers is that the large photo is only loaded by the web browser when the visitor clicks on a thumbnail.
Pop-up Layers A more powerful alternative allows you to display the contents of any layer as a result of mousing over, or clicking, any object. This can be used for a range of different pop-up effects such as pop-up photos, menus or detailed object descriptions.
each photo thumbnail using the Image Tab of the Web Properties dialog. Note that this feature works on objects other than photos, such as shapes and groups, but can't be used directly on text. You can put text inside a group (Ctrl+G) to work around this restriction.
Pop-up Photos This option gives you a very easy way to add popup photos to your website, without adding any layers! Simply import your photo and use the Selector tool to scale it right down so it appears as just a small photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then select it and choose the "Popup photo" option in the Link tab of Web Properties. You can set the size you want for the popup photo by setting the "Popup image width " value (which defaults to 500 pixels).
Web Properties Dialog The Web properties dialog is a multi-tabbed dialog which allows you to add and configure most of the web related features in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and set different web properties on objects, on pages and on your whole website. Open it by right clicking an object and choosing Web Properties or by using the "Utilities" > "Web properties… " menu option (shortcut Ctrl + Shift + W).
Link Tab The settings on this tab apply to the selected object(s) or selected text. Typically you use this tab to add a link to an object on your web page (eg. a button or photo), or to some text, so that when a visitor to your site clicks on the object/text, they are redirected to another page. You can add links to other pages in your website, to a URL (web address) or even cause a pop-up window to appear.
Select this option to link to another page in the current website, or if you are in a presentation document, to link to the next or previous presentation step. The drop-down list allows you to select which page or step to link to. TIP: If you have many pages in your website document, giving each one a name makes it much easier to set up and maintain your page links, because the page list will show the page names instead of just "Page 2", "Page 3", etc.
go through the above linking process again and browse for your updated file. Also if you move or copy your website design to another computer, or give a copy to someone else, you need to make sure the support folder accompanies the design file, since it now contains an important part of your website! Note : You cannot apply a transition to a link to a file.
Open the link in this frame (the frame that contains this object). Parent frame (_parent) Open the link into the parent window or frameset that contains this frame. Same window (_top) Open the link into the main browser window, replacing any existing frames. If you want the link to be loaded into a specific frame in the browser, type the name of the frame in this field. Clickable area This option lets you specify what area of the object must be clicked on to invoke the link.
Link to web address Enter a web or email address to link to that address. If you leave the "Correct address automatically" checkbox selected, your address will be adjusted if required when you click OK or Apply . For example, if you enter "www.Xara.com" it will correct it to "http://www.Xara.com/". You can put an email address in the Link address field, in which case clicking the link will launch the reader's email program with the To: field filled in.
This link option is useful if you want to add a document, movie or any other file to your website to make it available to your visitors. For example you may have a PDF document that you want to make available. Select the object or text that you want to link. Then turn on this Link to file option and use the Browse button to browse for the file on your computer. The name of the file appears in the text field to the left of the Browse button. Click OK and your link is applied.
This option lets you choose how the selected text link should be displayed. It is selected by default, meaning that the text link will show with the link color you have defined for the whole website. You can set this color on the Website tab (see Website Tab section). If you uncheck this option, then the selected text link will keep the color that you give it on the page. So you can give different links different colors if desired.
Link to... Select this option to link to another page in the current website, or if you are in a presentation document, to link to the next or previous presentation step. The drop-down list allows you to select which page or step to link to. TIP: If you have many pages in your website document, giving each one a name makes it much easier to set up and maintain your page links, because the page list will show the page names instead of just "Page 2", "Page 3", etc.
Because there is a separate copy of your file held in the support folder for your design, you need to update that copy whenever you modify the file and want to publish the modified version. Or you can just go through the above linking process again and browse for your updated file.
Open the link in a new browser window. Same frame (_self) Open the link in this frame (the frame that contains this object). Parent frame (_parent) Open the link into the parent window or frameset that contains this frame. Same window (_top) Open the link into the main browser window, replacing any existing frames. If you want the link to be loaded into a specific frame in the browser, type the name of the frame in this field.
Link to anchor This option allows you to jump the visitor to a specific part of any page in your website. To setup an anchor point, first go to the page and object you want to be jumped to. Select the object and add a name to it by right clicking and choosing the Names... option. Then select the object to which you want to add the link and choose the anchor name you added from the list provided with the "Link to anchor" option.
photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then select it and choose this "Popup photo" option in the Link tab of Web Properties. You can set the size you want for the popup photo by setting the "Popup image width " value. And that's it ? now when a visitor clicks on the photo thumbnail, a larger copy of the photo appears as a popup. Another advantage of these photo popups over popup layers is that the large photo is only loaded by the web browser when the visitor clicks on a thumbnail.
Link to File This link option is useful if you want to add a document, movie or any other file to your website to make it available to your visitors. For example you may have a PDF document that you want to make available. Select the object or text that you want to link. Then turn on this Link to file option and use the Browse button to browse for the file on your computer. The name of the file appears in the text field to the left of the Browse button. Click OK and your link is applied.
Use common website link colors This option lets you choose how the selected text link should be displayed. It is selected by default, meaning that the text link will show with the link color you have defined for the whole website. You can set this color on the Website tab (see Website Tab section). If you uncheck this option, then the selected text link will keep the color that you give it on the page. So you can give different links different colors if desired.
Popup layer You can add any content you like to a separate layer on your page and have that content shown as a popup only when your visitor clicks on a link. For example you could add some descriptive text about a photo on your web page and have that text only shown to the user if they click on the photo. The Popup Layer section above includes some step by step instructions on adding layer popups. Note that all the content on the popup layer is loaded as soon as the visitor visits your page.
If you want the link to be loaded into a specific frame in the browser, type the name of the frame in this field. Clickable area This option lets you specify what area of the object must be clicked on to invoke the link. However it is not supported for HTML websites (the rectangle surrounding the object is always used), it works only when exporting to Flash. Shape of object : The user must click inside the exact outline of the object to invoke the link.
Popup photo This option gives you a very easy way to add popup photos to your website, without using layers. Simply import your photo and use the Selector tool to scale it right down so it appears as just a small photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then select it and choose this "Popup photo" option in the Link tab of Web Properties. You can set the size you want for the popup photo by setting the "Popup image width " value.
Use common website link colors This option lets you choose how the selected text link should be displayed. It is selected by default, meaning that the text link will show with the link color you have defined for the whole website. You can set this color on the Website tab (see Website Tab section). If you uncheck this option, then the selected text link will keep the color that you give it on the page. So you can give different links different colors if desired.
Open link in This option does nothing if either of the "Pop-up layer" or "Pop-up photo" link options are selected. But for other links it allows you to tell the web browser how the target web page should be loaded. By default it is set to "Not specified" which usually means the browser will open the link in the same browser window and frame as the link. The dropdown list contains four options that cause the browser to do special things.
Clickable area This option lets you specify what area of the object must be clicked on to invoke the link. However it is not supported for HTML websites (the rectangle surrounding the object is always used), it works only when exporting to Flash. Shape of object : The user must click inside the exact outline of the object to invoke the link. Rectangle surrounding object : The user can click anywhere in the rectangle surrounding the object (the bounding box) to invoke the link.
Page Tab The options on this tab apply to the current page, not to the selected object(s). The current page is indicated with black angle lines just outside each corner of the page. All fields on this tab are optional; you do not necessarily need to fill in these fields for every page of your site. If you want the same title, description and keywords on every page of your site, you can set these just once on the Website tab instead of setting them on every page here.
For those familiar with HTML, the keywords are entered into the page header as metadata:Advanced: The keywords are inserted as metadata into the page header ('" tag.
Website Tab The settings on this tab apply to the entire current document/website, so it doesn't matter what object or page is selected. Title, Description & Keywords: These fields are just as described in the Page Tab section above. You can optionally set these fields here so that they apply to every page in your site, unless overridden by the Page Tab settings for a page. So for example a page that doesn't have its own title set in the Page Tab will get the title you specify here.
button to open the Color Editor so you can choose any other color. Mouse Over : Text links will change to this color when a visitor moves the mouse pointer over them. Visited : Text links that point to a page which the visitor has already visited will display with this color instead of the Mouse Off color. Clip to page edges (enabled by default): If you have objects in your website that overlap the web page borders, click this checkbox to crop these objects so that only the portion on the page is visible.
Website Link Colors This section of the Website Tab allows you to control how text links appear on your website. Underline Text Links : Underlining is commonly used to highlight clickable links in text, so this option is selected by default. Uncheck it if you don't want your text links underlined. Mouse Off : Here you can choose the color you would like to be used for all your text links.
Mouse-over Tab The options on this tab specify what should happen when a visitor moves the mouse pointer over the selected object. So for example you can pop-up some text or a whole layer of content when a visitor hovers their mouse pointer over a photo on your web page. By default when a pop-up layer is triggered it will appear instantly. But you can apply a transition effect to the popup layer so that it appears with an effect, such as fading in or sliding in.
Image Tab Photo pop-up This section of the Image tab lets you add pop-up photos and other photo gallery features to your web page easily. Simply import your photo and use the Selector tool to scale it right down so it appears as just a small photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then with the photo still selected, select the Pop-up photo checkbox on this tab. Choose the size you would like for the pop-up photo by entering a value in the pop-up width field (default 500 pixels).
For those familiar with HTML, this text is also used as the "ALT" text on the image that is exported for the currently selected object, whether or not the image also has a pop-up. Web browsers show this text on the page in place of the image, if the image can't be obtained for some reason. Web image type Due to the nature of HTML websites, most objects you see and can select on the page in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 have to be converted to bitmap images during the process of exporting your website.
Photo pop-up This section of the Image tab lets you add pop-up photos and other photo gallery features to your web page easily. Simply import your photo and use the Selector tool to scale it right down so it appears as just a small photo thumbnail on your webpage. Then with the photo still selected, select the Pop-up photo checkbox on this tab. Choose the size you would like for the pop-up photo by entering a value in the pop-up width field (default 500 pixels).
on the page in place of the image, if the image can't be obtained for some reason. Web image type Due to the nature of HTML websites, most objects you see and can select on the page in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 have to be converted to bitmap images during the process of exporting your website. This all happens automatically for you when you preview and export, but the controls on this tab give you some control over how these images are created.
Image Captions You can optionally show a caption below each pop-up photo. Enter the caption text in this field in the Image Tab. Note that this feature works on objects other than photos, such as shapes and groups, but can't be used directly on text. You can put text inside a group (Ctrl+G) to work around this restriction. For those familiar with HTML, this text is also used as the "ALT" text on the image that is exported for the currently selected object, whether or not the image also has a pop-up.
image. Higher quality means a larger JPEG file size.
Web image type Due to the nature of HTML websites, most objects you see and can select on the page in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 have to be converted to bitmap images during the process of exporting your website. This all happens automatically for you when you preview and export, but the controls on this tab give you some control over how these images are created. Remember that each group, shape, heading, logo, photo, panel background, etc. is exported as a separate image.
Placeholder Tab The Placeholder tab is used to add and edit manually editable widgets. These are widgets you insert onto your web page by manually pasting in HTML code for the widget or by importing a Flash or movie file. You won't normally need to use the Placeholder tab on widgets that you've added from the Designs Gallery , because the code and files that make those widgets function are handled for you automatically. See the Website Widgets chapter for full details.
export your website the file will be included in the _htm_files folder along with all the generated images for your site. See the Document Handling chapter for information about support folders. Replace with graphic file Select this option if you want to insert a graphic or image into your website in place of the placeholder object (eg. a PNG, GIF or other web compatible image file). Use the Browse button to select the file.
Replace with Flash Select this option to replace the placeholder object with a Flash animation. Use the Browse button to locate the Flash (.swf) file you want to use. The chosen file is automatically copied to the support folder for the current design, so that when you export your website the file will be included in the _htm_files folder along with all the generated images for your site. See the Document Handling chapter for information about support folders.
Replace with graphic file Select this option if you want to insert a graphic or image into your website in place of the placeholder object (eg. a PNG, GIF or other web compatible image file). Use the Browse button to select the file. The chosen file is automatically copied to the support folder for the current design, so that when you export your website the file will be included in the _htm_files folder along with all the generated images for your site.
Replace with HTML code With this option you can paste in HTML code which you've obtained from somewhere else. For example many sites provide widgets which you can add to your page by pasting the HTML in here. Follow the instructions given by the provider. Click here for a list of recommended widgets and related advice on the Xara website. WARNING: As with tracker code, you need to be careful to insert only code which you know is safe and from a trustworthy source.
Publish Tab You will need a web hosting company to host your website. MAGIX Online World is recommended for this, although quite often your existing Internet provider will include 'web space' as part of your normal subscription. Most companies also offer the ability to purchase your own domain name (e.g. like www.Xara.com) and have this set to point to your web pages. The dialog shown below contains MAGIX Online World as a suggested hosting solution in its Profile list.
the program. Standard profiles : When you select the standard profile, a banner appears immediately below the profile list. This banner is downloaded from the web hosting company (so it will only appear if you are online). Click a button on the banner to find out more about the MAGIX Online World web hosting solution on its website. If you decide to sign up for hosting, you will be given a username and password with which to connect. You enter those details in the FTP Details section of this dialog.
for more information. Note: Many web servers use case-sensitive filenames. So, for example, the web address xara.com/products.htm is not the same thing as xara.com/Products.htm. To reduce confusion and the likelihood of errors Photo & Graphic Designer enforces that all page names are all lower-case and contain only allowable characters. This means that spaces are not allowed in page names. We suggest using an underscore as an alternative separator.
Re-publish changed files only By default Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 keeps track of the files that make up your published website and when you come to re-publish after making changes to your site, it attempts to re-publish only the files that have changed. This makes re-publishing much quicker in most cases. However Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not know if you have deleted or modified files in your web space using another tool.
Publishing Once you've set your Publish details, you can then select "File" > "Publish Website" . Your website will be published. See Publishing your website for more information. Note: Many web servers use case-sensitive filenames. So, for example, the web address xara.com/products.htm is not the same thing as xara.com/Products.htm. To reduce confusion and the likelihood of errors Photo & Graphic Designer enforces that all page names are all lower-case and contain only allowable characters.
Creating Buttons, Banners And Other Web Graphics Photo & Graphic Designer is great tool for creating any standalone web graphics for use with other programs or other web authoring tools. You can draw these objects from scratch using the drawing tools, or use ready made web clipart from the Designs Gallery. Just draw, design or import an item from the Designs Gallery onto a blank page.
Publishing Your Website You will need a web hosting company to host your website. MAGIX Online World is recommended for this, although quite often your existing Internet provider will include 'web space' as part of your normal subscription. Most companies also offer the ability to purchase your own domain name (e.g. like www.Xara.com) and have this set to point to your web pages.
user, choose Magix web hosting. 2. In the FTP Host Address box, type in your FTP host address. If you have a domain name this is often the same as your domain name. For example, for MAGIX Online World users, this would be ftp.magix-online.com. If you chose the Magix web hosting option in the profile list, the FTP host address is set for you automatically. 3. In the FTP username box, type in your FTP username.
1. After you have clicked Export (or Publish), Photo & Graphic Designer displays a small window that shows the progress of data transmission. 2. As soon as the transfer is finished, you can open a browser window and navigate to the URL of your published website. MAGIX Online World users can open their website via their Online World web address: http://yourname.magix.net/public. Note : If you entered a sub-folder in the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog, your website is saved there.
Embedding Movies, Flash And Other Widgets You can very easily embed movies, MP3 audio files, Flash animations, animated GIFs, PDFs, photo gallery and slideshow widgets and unlimited types of other interactive widgets on your website with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. See the Website Widgets chapter for details. You can create your own Flash and GIF animations using Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. See the Animations chapter.
Animations In this chapter Introduction Core Principles Your First Animation Exporting a Flash File Exporting animations as AVI Creating animated GIFs Animation properties The Animation Frame Gallery Photos Animation Frame Rate and Tween Steps Cropping, Clipping and Animation Size Animation Speed Animation smoothness Rotation The Name Gallery Groups What Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 features does Flash support? Color Transforms—Animating Color Changes Transparency URLs in Flash Advanced Flash Commands
Introduction Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 takes a traditional animator's approach to animation. You create key frames (or "snap-shots") of your animation through time, and Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically creates all the in-between frames for you, a process called 'tweening'. An example start frame The next key frame has the star shape moved, rotated a little, reduced in size, and changed to a different color.
5. Transparency: Adjust the overall (flat) transparency of the objects. 6. Color changes: Change the fill (flat) color of objects. The last item, color changes, can be applied to contoned (colored) photos. You can't transform a full color photo into a contoned one, but you can change a photo with one contone color into another color. Note: the above six transform types are absolutely key to all Flash animations.
What Flash can and cannot do The Flash format does not support some of the advanced effects that Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 offers, for example complex graduated transparency, feathering and most of the advanced color fill types. However, it does support a range of effects that include simple transparency. So, for example, if you fade the star on the 2nd key frame above to be 100% transparent, you'll get an animation where the star moves, reduces in size, and then fades.
& Graphic Designer 2013 Flash animations. What you can't do with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Flash Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not support more complex Flash features such as scripting (programming), audio, or embedded movies. Additionally, since Flash vector rendering is relatively primitive compared to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's, there are advanced Photo & Graphic Designer effects such as feathering that cannot be used in Flash.
The 6 core types of animation In order to keep Flash files very compact, the types of shape tweening supported by Flash are limited to six basic types of animation. These are sometimes called the 6 core transforms, because these are the main ways you can transform an object from one key frame to the next. 1. Move: Move objects from one position to another. 2. Scale: Enlarge or reduce objects in size. 3. Squash or skew: Squash or skew objects. 4. Rotate: Rotate objects. 5.
What you can't do with Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Flash Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does not support more complex Flash features such as scripting (programming), audio, or embedded movies. Additionally, since Flash vector rendering is relatively primitive compared to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's, there are advanced Photo & Graphic Designer effects such as feathering that cannot be used in Flash.
Core Principles In your animation you are likely to have some objects that remain static between key frames (i.e. no tweening is necessary) and other objects you will want to animate. To tell Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 which objects you want to animate, it's necessary to give each object a name (via the Add Names button on the Selector Tool InfoBar). For more information on naming objects, see section "Naming Objects" in the "Document Handling" chapter.
Your First Animation To create a new animation: Create a new animation document. To do this: Choose "File" > "New" > "Animation" ("Ctrl + Shift + N"). A new document will open, and you will see the animation button bar appear that contains some relevant buttons. 1. Draw a simple shape, such as a rounded rectangle with the Rectangle Tool (but it can be any shape). 2. Click the Apply Name icon on the Selector InfoBar and name it "shape". 3. Click the Copy Frame button to create your 2nd key frame. 3.
Exporting a Flash File To export your animation as a Flash file: Select "File" > "Export Animation" and then choose Flash under Save As Type . Or click the Export Animated Flash button. This will save the finished SWF file into the location you choose. Previewing a Flash Object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 To view your animation as it would look in a web page, click the Preview Flash button to instantly see a browser preview.
Previewing a Flash Object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 To view your animation as it would look in a web page, click the Preview Flash button to instantly see a browser preview. The preview page will show your finished animation as well as useful information, such as the animation's dimensions, file size, etc. It also includes simple instructions on inserting your animation into a web page.
Inserting a Flash Object in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 For those using Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 you can simply drop the Flash file onto your web page to insert it into your website. A static placeholder image is automatically created and placed on your page. Preview your page and you should see your working Flash animation! Alternatively you can create a placeholder object manually.
Inserting using a different web authoring tool To place your SWF animation into your HTML click the View HTML link on the Flash preview screen to get code that you can paste into your web page using your preferred HTML editor. Note: You must change the SWF file name in the code to match the actual name of your exported SWF file. You must also place your SWF file into the same directory as your web page for the code to work.
Exporting animations as AVI As well as exporting animations as animated GIFs and Flash animations, you can also export in the .AVI file format. In an animation document, choose Export Animation from the File menu, and choose AVI animation (*.AVI) from the Save As Type drop-down list in the Export File dialog. Click the Options button to choose the export settings, or just click the Export button to use the current or default settings.
Creating animated GIFs Animated GIFs are an alternative way to present animated sequences in the web. An animated GIF is just a GIF file that contains a sequence of images, rather like frames in a movie. Every Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013-frame is one frame in the final animation, just like a flip-book. Opening an animation document To create an animated GIF, you must first open an animation document. To do this choose "File" > " New" > "Animation". You will then have access to the Frame Gallery .
Opening an animation document To create an animated GIF, you must first open an animation document. To do this choose "File" > " New" > "Animation". You will then have access to the Frame Gallery . Creating the animation To create an animated GIF: 1. Choose "Utilities" > "Galleries" > "Frame Gallery", or click the Frame Gallery icon on the Galleries toolbar. 2. Draw what you want to appear in this first frame. 3. In the Frame Gallery, click New to create the next frame. 4.
Creating the animation To create an animated GIF: 1. Choose "Utilities" > "Galleries" > "Frame Gallery", or click the Frame Gallery icon on the Galleries toolbar. 2. Draw what you want to appear in this first frame. 3. In the Frame Gallery, click New to create the next frame. 4. Set the background and overlay flags as required. 5. Create the objects you want to appear in this frame. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have built up the sequence of frames.
Exporting the animation To save the animation, choose "File" > "Export Animation" .
Animation properties To alter the animation's properties, right click on a frame in the Frame Gallery and select Properties . You can then change a number of options detailed below. The Frame tab In the Frame tab you can set: Name: The name of this frame. This is just as a reminder to you, and is not exported with the animated GIF. Background: If this is set, the frame covers all previous frames. This is useful if you want to create a background and then build up an animation on top of this background.
Preview in Browser You can select options suitable for the graphic and then load it into your browser so you can preview it: Background options: Alter the background of the animated GIF to see which gives the best result. Additional information: The preview page will contain useful information such as potential downloading times when placed in a web page. Browser preview: Press this button to launch a preview in your web browser.
The Frame tab In the Frame tab you can set: Name: The name of this frame. This is just as a reminder to you, and is not exported with the animated GIF. Background: If this is set, the frame covers all previous frames. This is useful if you want to create a background and then build up an animation on top of this background. Often the first frame in the animation is a background frame. If the first frame is not a background frame, the animated GIF uses the page background as its background.
Additional information: The preview page will contain useful information such as potential downloading times when placed in a web page. Browser preview: Press this button to launch a preview in your web browser. AVI Options Options : Select from a range of codecs you have installed Quality : Set the quality value of the AVI (up to 100%) Key frame every ...: Enable/disable the outputting of key frames and set the frequency. Transparency : Select to make the AVI background transparent.
Flash Options Here are several options for Flash animations, most of them are described above Link to be applied to whole animation Flash Movie Speed JPEG quality Area to save GIF Options In the GIF Options tab you can set the color usage in GIF animations. (Not available for Flash animations). Click Options in the Export Animation dialog to show the GIF Options tab in the Animation Export Options dialog. Palette colors: Set the preferred color palette for your animated GIF.
the animation. This can be useful if you don't need a specific page size.
GIF Options In the GIF Options tab you can set the color usage in GIF animations. (Not available for Flash animations). Click Options in the Export Animation dialog to show the GIF Options tab in the Animation Export Options dialog. Palette colors: Set the preferred color palette for your animated GIF. The help guide contains more information on the difference between these options. Number of Colors in Palette: This option is available only when using optimized palettes.
Animation Loop and Speed In the Animation Loop and Speed tab you can alter the animation rate and frequency: Loop: Lets you specify how many times the animation should repeat itself. Display each frame for: If you want the same delay between each frame in the animation enter a value here. To specify a different delay for individual frames, use the frame tab (described above). This field reads "many" if the animation has more than one inter-frame delay time.
Preview in Browser You can select options suitable for the graphic and then load it into your browser so you can preview it: Background options: Alter the background of the animated GIF to see which gives the best result. Additional information: The preview page will contain useful information such as potential downloading times when placed in a web page. Browser preview: Press this button to launch a preview in your web browser.
AVI Options Options : Select from a range of codecs you have installed Quality : Set the quality value of the AVI (up to 100%) Key frame every ...: Enable/disable the outputting of key frames and set the frequency. Transparency : Select to make the AVI background transparent. Area to save: Setting the area to save to be Drawing will create an AVI animation that is only as large as it needs to be ? i.e. the same as the outer bounds of the animation. This can be useful if you don't need a specific page size.
The Animation Frame Gallery By default the Animation Frame Gallery is displayed open on the right hand side of the Photo & Graphic Designer window (next to the Page & Layer Gallery ) when you open or create an animation document. To toggle display of the Frame Gallery, choose " Utilities" > "Galleries" > "Frame Gallery", or click the Frame Gallery icon on the Galleries toolbar. This shows a list of the key frames in your document. To view any key frame just click its name in the gallery.
The Animation Properties dialog A shortcut to display the Animation Properties dialog is to simply double click on a frame name in the Frame Gallery The All Frames Visible (the eye) and Edit All Frames (the padlocks) buttons on the Frame Gallery are useful because they allow you to view or edit all frames together, one on top of the other. This is particularly useful if you want to select objects that are on multiple frames.
Copying Objects You can copy objects from one frame to another in the usual way (i.e. copy the content, select the new frame and then paste into the new frame). The "Edit" > "Paste in Place " option ("Ctrl + Shift + V") is particularly useful when doing this, as this will always paste objects back to the exact position they came from but on the new frame.
Photos Because Flash files usually consist of vector shapes, and the transforms are relatively simple, the files can be very small. Photos and bitmaps can be embedded into Flash animations, but unless you are careful it will result in huge animation files. You can perform all core Flash transforms on bitmaps or photos (i.e. you can move, scale, squash, rotate, fade and re-color.). Flash files can include both PNG and JPEG images just as .
compression, which is usually the best compression type for these types of images Bitmap Quality Flash Player version 8 and later has higher quality bitmap display. This is particularly evident when rotating or scaling bitmaps and photos, whereas older versions of the player tend to produce pixelated, and rather jerky movements. You can tell which version of the Flash Player you have by right clicking on any Flash animation in your web browser and looking at the About menu.
Non-JPEG Bitmaps Other types of bitmaps, for example, BMP, TIFF, or PNG bitmaps, are usually a lot larger and thus less suitable for use in Flash animations (for photos JPEG compression is a lot better than PNG). However if you include a low resolution PNG image (that is one of 96dpi or less ? the status line shows you the resolution of any selected image) then this is kept as a PNG image in the Flash file. Higher resolution images (>96dpi) will be converted into a JPEG (transparent JPEG if required) .
Bitmap Quality Flash Player version 8 and later has higher quality bitmap display. This is particularly evident when rotating or scaling bitmaps and photos, whereas older versions of the player tend to produce pixelated, and rather jerky movements. You can tell which version of the Flash Player you have by right clicking on any Flash animation in your web browser and looking at the About menu. It's therefore recommended to export your Flash animation as Version 8 if you're using bitmaps or photos.
Animation Frame Rate and Tween Steps Flash animations run at a fixed frame rate. The faster the frame rate, the smoother the resulting animation and the larger the Flash file. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 animations default to showing 24 frames per second, but you can change this. When you create each key frame, you determine how long the period is until the next key frame.
Cropping, Clipping and Animation Size Before long you'll start to consider creating some Flash animations like you see on the web, say with some wording or a photo that whizzes in from one side. To create an animation like this, all you need to do is set the page size in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to the size you want for your flash animation. So if for example you want a Flash banner which is 468 pixels wide and 60 pixels high, set the page size in your animation document to 468x60.
Animation Speed When you create a new keyframe, it defaults to having a period of half a second. So the animation from that keyframe to the next will take half a second. The longer you set the period, the slower the animation. To set the frame period for any frame, first select the desired frame in the Frame Gallery (click on it), and then click the Animation Properties button (or just double click the frame name).
Animation smoothness Flash movies play at a constant frame rate. The faster the frame rate, the smoother the animation. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 defaults to showing 24 frames per second. To change the rate select the Flash Options tab of the Animation Properties dialog. The Flash Options tab, where you can change the movie speed as well as the Flash export version. Note: The faster the frame rate, the larger the resulting Flash file.
Rotation Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 calculates and generates the tween frames automatically by working out how to transform the shapes from one key frame to the next. But sometimes it's not possible to know exactly what type of rotation is required. Take this example. Suppose you tween from the first clock face to the second: You might expect it to rotate clockwise, but of course it could go counter clockwise: In fact there are other ways it could rotate.
The Rotate command To force the rotation to be around any other point you can use a special keyword "rotate" appended to the front of the object name. Or you can use "rotate +" to force the rotation to go clockwise or "rotate -" to make it go counter clockwise. To take the simple two keyframes animation example shown on the previous page, where the hour hand needs to move from 12 o'clock to 8 o'clock.
The Name Gallery To display the Name Gallery : Choose "Utilities -> Galleries ->Name Gallery" . The Name Gallery lists all fonts, bitmaps, named colors and object names used in any drawing or animation. You can see folder sections for each type of name. The important thing here is the object names for animation, the top folder, as you have to give names to all objects you want to animate from one key frame to the next.
You can also create, apply and remove names from objects using the Names dialog which you can access using Utilities > Names, or by pressing the Names button on the Selector Tool InfoBar. The Names dialog is much simpler to use, but is not as powerful as the Name Gallery for examining which names are applied to which objects. However since you can create new names, apply existing names and remove names with the Names dialog it's often all you need to create complete animations.
Groups Groups are treated specially when creating animations. To save you naming each individual part of a group, you can instead name the whole group and then copy the group to the next keyframe. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will animate the whole group from one keyframe to the next. And you can apply the normal transformations to the group (resize, rotate, squash, but not group transparency ? see the next page).
Group Transparency If you want to fade a grouped object, you need to apply transparency to each individual object in the group. There are two ways you can do this: Select each object in the group in turn and adjust its transparency. Or un-check the Make Groups Transparent as a Whole option in the Options dialog (" Utilities" > "Options", then the General tab).
What Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 features does Flash support? The Flash vector rendering is quite primitive compared to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's, and so you can't use many of the more advanced Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 features such as feathering, complex transparency and fill types, bevels, soft shadows, or contours. Lines (strokes) are limited to be being simple constant thickness, round ended lines. No line dashing is supported.
What can be animated: As listed at the start of this chapter, these are the golden rules as to what you can change from one keyframe to the next: Move: Move objects from one position to another. Scale: Enlarge or reduce objects in size. Squash or skew: Squash or skew objects. Rotate: Rotate objects. Transparency: Adjust the overall (flat) transparency of the object. Color transform: Change the fill (flat) color of objects. Or any combination of the above.
Non-moving Objects You can add new objects by just drawing them on any keyframe. They will appear in the animation at the start of the frame and will vanish at the next keyframe, unless they appear on that frame as well. So the simplest way to have an object appear static on all frames is to ensure it's copied to all the frames.
Color Transforms—Animating Color Changes This is what you can and cannot do with color transforms in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Flash: You can animate simple flat color changes of objects from one keyframe to the next. You can change the line color independently of the fill color. You can change photo contone colors. You cannot adjust the position of gradient fills. You can use RGB, HSV or CMYK colors.
Transparency As mentioned earlier, you can adjust the flat transparency of objects (not group transparency) and Flash supports this (for both static objects and tweening transparency changes), but Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's graduated transparency is not really supported with Flash. There is just one situation where you can use graduated transparency, and that is on flat color filled objects.
URLs in Flash To make an object in your Flash animation a clickable link, just select the object you want to make clickable and select "Utilities" > "Web Properties ("Ctrl + Shift + W"). Enter the required URL. (If you require the link to open in a new browser window or browser frame select the target web frame by selecting from the 'Open Link In ' dropdown menu). If you want to make text clickable select the Rectangle Surrounding Object option.
Advanced Flash Commands Accelerating and Decelerating Usually the tween steps are evenly spaced between keyframes, producing a linear animation from one keyframe to the next. By appending < and > symbols to the front of the object name, you can make objects speed up or slow down. So naming an object >Name means that it starts fast and slows. The opposite,
If you want the jump to occur by just moving over an object, select the Mouse-Over tab instead of the Link tab, and select from the similar 'Jump to frame ' option. Now in your animation if you click or mouseover the object the animation will redirect to the the new frame and proceed from there. See the "River Thames" example file in the Designs Gallery . This uses a Goto command to loop from frame 4 to 3, and a URL frame re-direct to jump to Frame 1 if you click the Replay link in the corner.
Accelerating and Decelerating Usually the tween steps are evenly spaced between keyframes, producing a linear animation from one keyframe to the next. By appending < and > symbols to the front of the object name, you can make objects speed up or slow down. So naming an object >Name means that it starts fast and slows. The opposite,
If you want the jump to occur by just moving over an object, select the Mouse-Over tab instead of the Link tab, and select from the similar 'Jump to frame ' option. Now in your animation if you click or mouseover the object the animation will redirect to the the new frame and proceed from there. See the "River Thames" example file in the Designs Gallery . This uses a Goto command to loop from frame 4 to 3, and a URL frame re-direct to jump to Frame 1 if you click the Replay link in the corner.
Stop and Goto Commands You can append Stop or Goto commands onto the Frame names (separated by a semi-colon ;) to control the sequence flow. So for example if your first frame was named "Frame 1;Goto Frame 6", then the animation sequence would jump to Frame 6 at the start of Frame 1. This may produce tween errors, but these can be ignored. It also waits for the specified period of the frame with the Goto command on before jumping, but frames with Goto or Stop commands do not tween.
Clickable Buttons & Mouse-over Effects You can make the animation sequence jump to any keyframe either by clicking on an object or just by moving the mouse pointer over any object. To do this select the object you want to use as the trigger, open the Web Properties dialog (Ctrl+Shift+W) and on the Link tab, select the Jump to Frame option. If you want the jump to occur by just moving over an object, select the Mouse-Over tab instead of the Link tab, and select from the similar 'Jump to frame ' option.
Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Flash Animation Summary Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 keyframes are "snapshots" of your animation at any point in time. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically produces a smooth blend or tween of objects from one keyframe to the next to produce a smooth Flash animation. There is no timeline. Instead, the Frame Gallery shows your snap shot keyframes though time (top down). Just click the frame name to see and edit that keyframe.
Printing In this chapter Show print borders Selecting and setting up a printer The print dialog box Print Options: Output tab Print Options: Print Layout tab Page 1298
Show print borders The "Window" > "Show Print Borders" menu shows a yellow and red line around the page (non-printing) showing the print margins and borders. The page boundary is shown by a yellow rectangle and the printing area by a red rectangle. The printing area is determined by the margins on the currently selected printer. Some printers let you adjust the margins, but few let you print right up to the edge of the page.
Selecting and setting up a printer "File" > "Printer Setup" opens the standard Windows Print Setup dialog: Selecting a printer also selects a suitable paper size and paper orientation. Note that these are the size and orientation of the sheets of paper used in the printer. They are separate from the size/orientation of the document. Portrait prints the page without rotation. Landscape prints the page turned through 90° (these buttons are duplicated in the Print options dialog box, described later).
Properties button This displays a dialog box letting you set options for the selected type of printer. This dialog box is not controlled by Photo & Graphic Designer. Network button If your computer is connected to a network, this lets you connect to shared printers on the network. This dialog box is not controlled by Photo & Graphic Designer.
Network button If your computer is connected to a network, this lets you connect to shared printers on the network. This dialog box is not controlled by Photo & Graphic Designer.
The print dialog box Choose "File" > "Print" ("Ctrl + P"). Print button When you have selected the required options click this to start printing. Printer… button This opens the "Print Setup" dialog box (described earlier). Options button This opens a tabbed dialog box that lets you set additional print options. These are described later . Pages All Pages: Prints every page of the document. Current Page(s): Prints the currently selected page or spread.
2 will print just page 2. 1,3,5-7 will print pages 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. 2,3,6-8,11-12 will print pages 2,3,6,7, 8,11 and 12. The Options section of the dialog will indicate if your page range is OK or invalid. Double page spreads If the document comprises a double-page spread, you can print both sides or just the left or just the right page. This option is dimmed when the spread comprises a single page (see Document Handling for how to select single or double-page spreads).
Print button When you have selected the required options click this to start printing. Printer… button This opens the "Print Setup" dialog box (described earlier). Options button This opens a tabbed dialog box that lets you set additional print options. These are described later . Pages All Pages: Prints every page of the document. Current Page(s): Prints the currently selected page or spread. Selected Objects: This option is available when any objects in the document are selected.
After checking this option, when you click Print Photo & Graphic Designer displays the standard Windows Save dialog box so you can specify a file name and location for the file. Print files have a default extension of .prn. If you want to create a PDF file we recommend selecting the "File -> Export…" option and selecting PDF. This produces a higher quality, and usually more compact PDF file than you'd get from printing to a PDF file.
Printer… button This opens the "Print Setup" dialog box (described earlier). Options button This opens a tabbed dialog box that lets you set additional print options. These are described later . Pages All Pages: Prints every page of the document. Current Page(s): Prints the currently selected page or spread. Selected Objects: This option is available when any objects in the document are selected. When active, only the selected objects are printed.
If you want to create a PDF file we recommend selecting the "File -> Export…" option and selecting PDF. This produces a higher quality, and usually more compact PDF file than you'd get from printing to a PDF file. For more information on exporting as PDF refer to Importing and Exporting . Number of copies Sets how many copies of the document to print. Collated This is dimmed except when printing multiple copies of a double-page spread as two separate pages.
Options button This opens a tabbed dialog box that lets you set additional print options. These are described later . Pages All Pages: Prints every page of the document. Current Page(s): Prints the currently selected page or spread. Selected Objects: This option is available when any objects in the document are selected. When active, only the selected objects are printed.
. Number of copies Sets how many copies of the document to print. Collated This is dimmed except when printing multiple copies of a double-page spread as two separate pages. With this option selected, pages are printed as left-right-left-right, etc. With this option deselected, all the left-hand pages are printed then all the right-hand pages. Printers that hold a page image in memory take some time to process the image. The printer can then print multiple copies at its maximum speed.
Pages All Pages: Prints every page of the document. Current Page(s): Prints the currently selected page or spread. Selected Objects: This option is available when any objects in the document are selected. When active, only the selected objects are printed. Note that other objects within the bounds of the selected objects are not printed ? only the objects which are actually selected are printed. Hidden objects, objects on hidden layers and the guides layer never print.
Collated This is dimmed except when printing multiple copies of a double-page spread as two separate pages. With this option selected, pages are printed as left-right-left-right, etc. With this option deselected, all the left-hand pages are printed then all the right-hand pages. Printers that hold a page image in memory take some time to process the image. The printer can then print multiple copies at its maximum speed. For such printers it is often faster to manually collate the pages after printing.
Double page spreads If the document comprises a double-page spread, you can print both sides or just the left or just the right page. This option is dimmed when the spread comprises a single page (see Document Handling for how to select single or double-page spreads). Or the "Print/export individual pages" is active in the Page Options , so that the two pages of a double-page spread are treated as individual single pages.
Print to File You can select the Print to File option to create a document that you can give to a printing company (if they are able to accept this type of file). After checking this option, when you click Print Photo & Graphic Designer displays the standard Windows Save dialog box so you can specify a file name and location for the file. Print files have a default extension of .prn. If you want to create a PDF file we recommend selecting the "File -> Export…" option and selecting PDF.
Number of copies Sets how many copies of the document to print. Collated This is dimmed except when printing multiple copies of a double-page spread as two separate pages. With this option selected, pages are printed as left-right-left-right, etc. With this option deselected, all the left-hand pages are printed then all the right-hand pages. Printers that hold a page image in memory take some time to process the image. The printer can then print multiple copies at its maximum speed.
Collated This is dimmed except when printing multiple copies of a double-page spread as two separate pages. With this option selected, pages are printed as left-right-left-right, etc. With this option deselected, all the left-hand pages are printed then all the right-hand pages. Printers that hold a page image in memory take some time to process the image. The printer can then print multiple copies at its maximum speed. For such printers it is often faster to manually collate the pages after printing.
Print Options: Output tab Print layers There are two options: Print All Foreground Layers. Print only the currently Visible Foreground Layers. Note that only foreground layers are printed. Background layers are never printed. Print As Normal is suitable for most types of document. However some printers do not reproduce consistent colors when printing bitmaps or vector objects that are the same color (this is a fault with the printer driver).
same thing as "pixels-per-inch", which is what you see on screen. Generally, it's never necessary to print at more than 600 pixels-per-inch, and typically 300 pixels per inch produces perfectly adequate print results, especially if anti-aliased. Fill quality Using this option, you can choose how many steps make up the graduated fills in your document when it is printed. The Normal setting is suitable for most purposes. This option is dimmed for PostScript printers.
Print layers There are two options: Print All Foreground Layers. Print only the currently Visible Foreground Layers. Note that only foreground layers are printed. Background layers are never printed. Print As Normal is suitable for most types of document. However some printers do not reproduce consistent colors when printing bitmaps or vector objects that are the same color (this is a fault with the printer driver).
Print As Normal is suitable for most types of document. However some printers do not reproduce consistent colors when printing bitmaps or vector objects that are the same color (this is a fault with the printer driver). This is noticeable if objects overlap onto bitmaps or onto objects with transparency applied to them. In this case, select Bitmap or Anti-Aliased Bitmap and retry. The choice between Bitmap and Anti-Aliased Bitmap depends on the printer and personal preference.
Transparency resolution When printing, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013's transparency effects are created using bitmaps. This option controls the resolution of those bitmaps when sent to the printer. Automatic is suitable for most drawings, and means Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 automatically selects a resolution suitable for the current printer. This might be unsuitable if printing to a very high resolution printer such as image setting devices.
Fill quality Using this option, you can choose how many steps make up the graduated fills in your document when it is printed. The Normal setting is suitable for most purposes. This option is dimmed for PostScript printers. Text options If your printer has problems reproducing fonts, select the Print All Text as Shapes option. All text is then converted to vector shapes before the document is sent to the printer. This may be slower, but will reproduce exactly what you see on screen.
Text options If your printer has problems reproducing fonts, select the Print All Text as Shapes option. All text is then converted to vector shapes before the document is sent to the printer. This may be slower, but will reproduce exactly what you see on screen.
Print Options: Print Layout tab Most options in print layout are dimmed if you have Best Fit or Automatic Fit selected. We recommend using these options as they are the easiest way to print. However you can choose custom options (see "custom fit" below). Best fit Your design will be moved to the center of the page and it will be expanded or shrunk to suit the paper size. This option is best if you have a large or small design and want it to fit on one page.
Best fit Your design will be moved to the center of the page and it will be expanded or shrunk to suit the paper size. This option is best if you have a large or small design and want it to fit on one page. Automatic fit Your design will be orientated as necessary, but Photo & Graphic Designer will not change the size.
Automatic fit Your design will be orientated as necessary, but Photo & Graphic Designer will not change the size. We recommend this option if you are having any difficulty getting the orientation right (there are at least four places where you can set the page orientation, sometimes more for some printer drivers). This option is best if you have a set size for your design and don't want it altered. Custom fit Allows you to have control over your print out, including orientation, size and margins.
Custom fit Allows you to have control over your print out, including orientation, size and margins. The Orientation buttons can be used to choose the orientation of the printout. The scale can be altered using the Scale field. The top and left margin fields can be changed (these set where the top left-hand corner of the page appears on the printer's paper).
Multiple fit To print multiple copies on one page, choose Multiple Fit , enter a value for the number of copies needed across the page (rows), the number down the page (columns), and the distance between each (gutter).
Importing and Exporting In this chapter General notes on exporting and importing Import and Export Supported File Formats Importing files Exporting files PDF Export JPEG, PNG, GIF and BMP export dialog overview Dreamweaver integration Other bitmaps Export dialog box The Designs Gallery Page 1329
General notes on exporting and importing You may want to export Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 documents to other applications, or export them for use on a website. Or you may want to import designs from other sources. For easy transfer, Photo & Graphic Designer offers a wide range of import and export options. Firstly, it is important to note the distinction between saving and exporting files: Saving deals with storing your work so that you can open it and work on it at a later date.
Import and Export Supported File Formats You can change the order of supported import and export file formats in the File > Export and File > Import dialogs by editing the FileFormats.xml file found in the program folder where you installed Photo & Graphic Designer. Import formats It is important that you use the three letter file extensions listed below when you load files into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Bitmap Import Formats .BMP Windows Bitmap .CUT Halo CUT (256 color) .
.EPS CorelDRAW 3 & 4 EPS .EPS FreeHand 3.0 EPS .EPS Photoshop EPS (For importing data from Photoshop into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, use PSD files instead of EPS files for best results) .EPS XaraX EPS Other Import Formats .ART Xara Studio .WEB Xara Webster files .AFF Acorn Draw .CDR CorelDRAW (3,4 & 5) .CDT CorelDRAW Template .CMX Corel CMX 5 & 6 .DRW Acorn Draw .HTM, .HTML Graphics on HTML pages, HTML files .WMF Windows Metafile (16bit) .EMF/ .WMF Enhanced Windows Metafile .RTF Text .
.EPS Xara Xtreme EPS Other Export Formats .AVI AVI animation (animation documents) .XAR CorelXARA .XAR Photo & Graphic Designer .WEB Xara Webster files .WMF Windows Metafile .EMF Enhanced Windows Metafile .PSD Photoshop (see importing and exporting PSD files ) .CMX Corel CMX 5 & 6 .HTM Image map .HTM, .HTML Website (HTML) .SWF Flash (animated Flash export with automatic tweening and single frame Flash export - see Flash Animations ) .RTF Rich Text Format .SVG Internet Scalable Vector Graphics .
Import formats It is important that you use the three letter file extensions listed below when you load files into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Bitmap Import Formats .BMP Windows Bitmap .CUT Halo CUT (256 color) .DCM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) image format .DCX DCX .FAX Fax image from a fax received or created with fax software .GIF Graphics Interchange Format .ICO Microsoft Windows Icon (16 color) .JPG JPEG JPEG2000 (.JP2, .J2C, .J2K, .JPX, .JPF) .MXB MAGIX Bitmap .
.WEB Xara Webster files .AFF Acorn Draw .CDR CorelDRAW (3,4 & 5) .CDT CorelDRAW Template .CMX Corel CMX 5 & 6 .DRW Acorn Draw .HTM, .HTML Graphics on HTML pages, HTML files .WMF Windows Metafile (16bit) .EMF/ .WMF Enhanced Windows Metafile .RTF Text .WIX For internal use by Xara Palette Import Formats .CPL CorelDRAW Palette .PAL CorelDRAW Palette .PAL Microsoft Palette .PAL PaintShop Pro Palette .ACT Adobe Color Table .
.EMF Enhanced Windows Metafile .PSD Photoshop (see importing and exporting PSD files ) .CMX Corel CMX 5 & 6 .HTM Image map .HTM, .HTML Website (HTML) .SWF Flash (animated Flash export with automatic tweening and single frame Flash export - see Flash Animations ) .RTF Rich Text Format .SVG Internet Scalable Vector Graphics .
Export formats Bitmap Export Formats (see GIF, PNG, BMP and JPEG export dialog overview ) .BMP Windows Bitmap .DCX DCX .PCX PCX .GIF CompuServe GIF .GIF Animated GIF files (see Creating animated GIF files ) .JPG JPEG JPEG2000 (.JP2, .J2C, .J2K, .JPX, .JPF) .PDF (see Creating PDF files ) .PCT PICT .PNG PNG .RAS Sun Raster .TGA TrueVision TARGA .TIF TIFF (RGB) .WBMP Wireless Bitmap Image. Black and white (1-bit) bitmap image format used by mobile devices EPS Export Formats .AI Illustrator EPS .
Importing files To import a file: Select "File -> Import" - This normally merges the file's contents into the existing document. With some formats you get the choice of importing the document into the current page or adding it as a new page. Or select "File -> Open" - This opens the file as a new document. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports drag and drop import of files.
Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013). TIFF with transparency (if exporting a TIFF from Photoshop (Save As) you can select the Save Transparency checkbox). Mac or PC byte order TIFF files. TIFF with layers and transparency (if saved from Photoshop the rules for blend mode compatibility are the same as for PSD files). JPEG in TIFF (transparency is not possible in this case). Usually TIFF files have a file extension of .tif.
Replacing Image Files You can replace any loaded image or image-filled shape with your own images. To replace an image simply drag your own file (JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP) from your Windows File Explorer and drop it on top of the picture that you want to replace. Your photo will automatically be scaled appropriately to replace the existing photo. The new photo will be selected and you'll be put into the Fill Tool so that you can easily adjust the position and scale of your photo if desired.
Importing a Photoshop PSD file To import a PSD file, import the file as normal with File > Import, or just drag and drop the .psd file into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Attention : Only Designer Pro can import PSD files with 16bit colors or CMYK color model The layers in the PSD file, and the layer visibility setting will be preserved and will become Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 layers. You can view them by opening the Page & Layer Gallery .
TIFF Import Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 TIFF import supports a much wider range of TIFF file types, including: CMYK TIFF files. Fax TIFF files (black and white images. Multi-page faxes will be imported as multiple pages into Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013). TIFF with transparency (if exporting a TIFF from Photoshop (Save As) you can select the Save Transparency checkbox). Mac or PC byte order TIFF files.
PDF Import PDF is a complex vector graphics format that has evolved over 10 years or more and contains numerous sub-formats and options. PDF was designed as a portable document format for viewing and printing only, and was not intended as a file format for transferring data between applications. However Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 should load the vast majority of PDF files. PDF is now the recommended way of transferring vector files from Adobe Illustrator to Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
RAW photo import You can import RAW digital camera files, either by using the Import menu option or just drag & drop the file onto the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Supported file extensions include: *.crw, *.cr2, *.rw2, *.nef,*.mrw,*raf,*.kdc,*.orf, *.dng, *.ptx, *.pef, *.anw, *.x3f However there are many different extensions used for RAW files by different camera manufacturers, so if you have a RAW file with a file extension not listed above it's worth trying to import it anyway.
Importing from a website You can import text and graphics directly from web pages on the Internet into your document, or copy and paste text and graphics directly from a web browser onto your page. To import from an online web page: 1. Choose "File" > "Import text and graphics from web" (or "Ctrl + Alt + W"). 2. Type in the web address (URL) of the page or graphic you want to import. 3. Click Import.
Exporting files To export a file: Right click and choose Export Or select "File" > "Export". Or press "Ctrl + Shift + E". An Export dialog box will appear. Choose a name for your file, and select the required format from the Save As Type dropdown list. Some of the supported formats are detailed below. Exporting as PDF The PDF format is an ideal way to distribute your document for a variety of uses.
Exporting as Windows metafiles (.wmf) Files in this format can be read by Word and several other programs. Exporting as Extended Metafile Format (EMF) Modern Windows applications support this enhanced type of vector graphic format. This format is also available to applications that provide a Paste Special menu option. Note that Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can contain features, such as advanced fill styles, that cannot be represented in vector formats such as EMF.
The three most common Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 transparency types (Mix, Stain and Bleach) are compatible with Photoshop transparency (blending mode) types (Normal, Multiply and Screen). But because Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is vector object-based, it's possible for each individual object to have its own transparency type and value. In Photoshop this is not possible, and you can only set the opacity or blending mode for a whole layer.
Exporting as PDF The PDF format is an ideal way to distribute your document for a variety of uses. It can be used to supply artwork to a printing company, or it can be used to import in to other programs such as Adobe Illustrator 9 and later. This is described in detail in the next section. Exporting as Flash You can export a drawing to Adobe's SWF Flash format (static). This is best suited to vector designs, and can provide very small file sizes.
bitmaps. Those vector parts that can be exported as vectors are exported as vectors. Exporting as a bitmap JPEG, GIF and PNG are universal formats supported by most modern computer applications. PNG is the highest quality. JPEG is better suited to photographic work, but can produce acceptable, compact files (you can control the quality and file size). GIF format only supports 256 colors, and although common on many websites, PNG is a better format.
Graphic Designer 2013, you will get an alert warning you of this when you export. This may look OK when you export. Transparency types other than Mix, Stain and Bleach are not compatible with Photoshop. Text You can export text from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to be editable text in Photoshop, but the text must be on a layer on its own (on import you may be asked to update the text objects for them to be editable in Photoshop.
Exporting as Flash You can export a drawing to Adobe's SWF Flash format (static). This is best suited to vector designs, and can provide very small file sizes. You can then use the SWF in a website, or import it into Flash for use in Flash animations. You can also create animated Flash. See Flash Animations for more details on Flash export. Exporting as AVI Select File > Export animation and choose the AVI type from the type list.
files (you can control the quality and file size). GIF format only supports 256 colors, and although common on many websites, PNG is a better format. PNG also supports semi-transparent graphics (use the True Color + Alpha option), but this is not correctly supported by older Microsoft Internet Explorer versions (it is by all other web browsers). The fewer colors you have in a file, the smaller the file and the lower the quality.
You can export text from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to be editable text in Photoshop, but the text must be on a layer on its own (on import you may be asked to update the text objects for them to be editable in Photoshop.) Text that is on a layer with any other graphic objects will be rasterized into that layer, and thus not be editable. Export DPI You will be able to set the DPI of the bitmaps in the exported PSD file.
Exporting as AVI Select File > Export animation and choose the AVI type from the type list. Click the Options button on the file dialog to change the codec and other settings used for the export. Exporting HTML You can easily create multi-page websites with full WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) using the HTML export option.
256 colors or less. See also GIF, PNG, BMP and JPEG export dialog overview . Important Bitmaps are output at the current view quality so for best results make sure that "Window" > "Quality " or the slider on the Standard control bar is set to anti-aliased. Exporting a Photoshop PSD file Photoshop is a bitmap editor, so when exporting to PSD format all the vector objects in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are rasterized. You can select the resolution (dpi) when exporting.
You will be able to set the DPI of the bitmaps in the exported PSD file. A DPI of 96 is the normal Windows screen resolution, and so exporting at 96dpi will appear in Photoshop at the same size at 100% as it does at 100% in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. For print work you should choose a higher DPI. You can select to export the whole Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 page area or just the areas of the visible objects only.
Exporting HTML You can easily create multi-page websites with full WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) using the HTML export option. See the separate chapter Web Graphics & Websites for a detailed description! You can use 'File->Export website ' or press the 'Export website' button on the Website toolbar to export HTML quickly, to save choosing HTML from the long list of export formats shown in the File->Export dialog. Exporting as Photo & Graphic Designer EPS This saves the document as an EPS file.
Bitmaps are output at the current view quality so for best results make sure that "Window" > "Quality " or the slider on the Standard control bar is set to anti-aliased. Exporting a Photoshop PSD file Photoshop is a bitmap editor, so when exporting to PSD format all the vector objects in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are rasterized. You can select the resolution (dpi) when exporting. Always save your work in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 prior to exporting.
A DPI of 96 is the normal Windows screen resolution, and so exporting at 96dpi will appear in Photoshop at the same size at 100% as it does at 100% in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. For print work you should choose a higher DPI. You can select to export the whole Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 page area or just the areas of the visible objects only.
Exporting as Photo & Graphic Designer EPS This saves the document as an EPS file. It is the recommended EPS format for exporting to (for example) DTP programs, as all information is retained. Exporting as ArtWorks EPS This saves the document so that you can load it into ArtWorks, Computer Concepts' illustration program for Acorn RISC computers. Files in this format cannot be loaded into other programs on the PC. Some features, such as transparency, do not exist on ArtWorks.
alter your original objects in the future, just load Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, make any changes and then export the required objects again. To export as a PSD file choose "File" > "Export" then select Adobe Photoshop in the Save as Type list. Layers Layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are retained when exporting to PSD format. Each layer is rasterized as a separate PSD layer, including layer names.
For the parts of your drawing that you want to remain separate layers in Photoshop, place them on separate layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. If you use Stain or Bleach transparency, make sure that those objects are on a layer of their own. Do not use any transparency type other than Mix, Stain, or Bleach. If you want your text to be editable in Photoshop, place it on a layer of its own, with no other graphic objects.
Exporting as ArtWorks EPS This saves the document so that you can load it into ArtWorks, Computer Concepts' illustration program for Acorn RISC computers. Files in this format cannot be loaded into other programs on the PC. Some features, such as transparency, do not exist on ArtWorks. Exporting as Illustrator EPS This is recommended for older versions of Adobe Illustrator (for version 9 onwards we recommend using PDF export, see above). Exporting as Windows metafiles (.
Layers Layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are retained when exporting to PSD format. Each layer is rasterized as a separate PSD layer, including layer names. Layers visibility is also passed through, so layers set to invisible in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will be exported and set to invisible in Photoshop. You can turn the layers on and off in Photoshop using the Layers palette.
If you want your text to be editable in Photoshop, place it on a layer of its own, with no other graphic objects.
Exporting as Illustrator EPS This is recommended for older versions of Adobe Illustrator (for version 9 onwards we recommend using PDF export, see above). Exporting as Windows metafiles (.wmf) Files in this format can be read by Word and several other programs. Exporting as Extended Metafile Format (EMF) Modern Windows applications support this enhanced type of vector graphic format. This format is also available to applications that provide a Paste Special menu option.
Photoshop. You can turn the layers on and off in Photoshop using the Layers palette. Transparency and layers The three most common Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 transparency types (Mix, Stain and Bleach) are compatible with Photoshop transparency (blending mode) types (Normal, Multiply and Screen). But because Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is vector object-based, it's possible for each individual object to have its own transparency type and value.
Exporting as Windows metafiles (.wmf) Files in this format can be read by Word and several other programs. Exporting as Extended Metafile Format (EMF) Modern Windows applications support this enhanced type of vector graphic format. This format is also available to applications that provide a Paste Special menu option. Note that Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can contain features, such as advanced fill styles, that cannot be represented in vector formats such as EMF.
The three most common Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 transparency types (Mix, Stain and Bleach) are compatible with Photoshop transparency (blending mode) types (Normal, Multiply and Screen). But because Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is vector object-based, it's possible for each individual object to have its own transparency type and value. In Photoshop this is not possible, and you can only set the opacity or blending mode for a whole layer.
Exporting as Extended Metafile Format (EMF) Modern Windows applications support this enhanced type of vector graphic format. This format is also available to applications that provide a Paste Special menu option. Note that Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can contain features, such as advanced fill styles, that cannot be represented in vector formats such as EMF. In this case parts of the image will be exported as bitmaps. Those vector parts that can be exported as vectors are exported as vectors.
you can only set the opacity or blending mode for a whole layer. This means that for maximum compatibility and editability in Photoshop, you should place objects that use Stain and Bleach transparency on a layer of their own in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. This way, when you export, these objects remain as separate editable layers, and with the correct transparency type (or blending mode as Adobe calls it).
Exporting as a bitmap JPEG, GIF and PNG are universal formats supported by most modern computer applications. PNG is the highest quality. JPEG is better suited to photographic work, but can produce acceptable, compact files (you can control the quality and file size). GIF format only supports 256 colors, and although common on many websites, PNG is a better format.
when you export. Transparency types other than Mix, Stain and Bleach are not compatible with Photoshop. Text You can export text from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to be editable text in Photoshop, but the text must be on a layer on its own (on import you may be asked to update the text objects for them to be editable in Photoshop.) Text that is on a layer with any other graphic objects will be rasterized into that layer, and thus not be editable.
Important Bitmaps are output at the current view quality so for best results make sure that "Window" > "Quality " or the slider on the Standard control bar is set to anti-aliased. Exporting a Photoshop PSD file Photoshop is a bitmap editor, so when exporting to PSD format all the vector objects in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are rasterized. You can select the resolution (dpi) when exporting. Always save your work in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 prior to exporting.
A DPI of 96 is the normal Windows screen resolution, and so exporting at 96dpi will appear in Photoshop at the same size at 100% as it does at 100% in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. For print work you should choose a higher DPI. You can select to export the whole Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 page area or just the areas of the visible objects only.
Exporting a Photoshop PSD file Photoshop is a bitmap editor, so when exporting to PSD format all the vector objects in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are rasterized. You can select the resolution (dpi) when exporting. Always save your work in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 prior to exporting. Then, if you wish to alter your original objects in the future, just load Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, make any changes and then export the required objects again.
For print work you should choose a higher DPI. You can select to export the whole Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 page area or just the areas of the visible objects only. Summary In order to get maximum compatibility and editability in Photoshop: For the parts of your drawing that you want to remain separate layers in Photoshop, place them on separate layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. If you use Stain or Bleach transparency, make sure that those objects are on a layer of their own.
Layers Layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 are retained when exporting to PSD format. Each layer is rasterized as a separate PSD layer, including layer names. Layers visibility is also passed through, so layers set to invisible in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will be exported and set to invisible in Photoshop. You can turn the layers on and off in Photoshop using the Layers palette.
If you want your text to be editable in Photoshop, place it on a layer of its own, with no other graphic objects.
Transparency and layers The three most common Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 transparency types (Mix, Stain and Bleach) are compatible with Photoshop transparency (blending mode) types (Normal, Multiply and Screen). But because Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 is vector object-based, it's possible for each individual object to have its own transparency type and value. In Photoshop this is not possible, and you can only set the opacity or blending mode for a whole layer.
Text You can export text from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to be editable text in Photoshop, but the text must be on a layer on its own (on import you may be asked to update the text objects for them to be editable in Photoshop.) Text that is on a layer with any other graphic objects will be rasterized into that layer, and thus not be editable. Export DPI You will be able to set the DPI of the bitmaps in the exported PSD file.
Export DPI You will be able to set the DPI of the bitmaps in the exported PSD file. A DPI of 96 is the normal Windows screen resolution, and so exporting at 96dpi will appear in Photoshop at the same size at 100% as it does at 100% in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. For print work you should choose a higher DPI. You can select to export the whole Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 page area or just the areas of the visible objects only.
Summary In order to get maximum compatibility and editability in Photoshop: For the parts of your drawing that you want to remain separate layers in Photoshop, place them on separate layers in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. If you use Stain or Bleach transparency, make sure that those objects are on a layer of their own. Do not use any transparency type other than Mix, Stain, or Bleach.
Image slicing Large, complex graphics for web pages can produce large files which take a long time to download over the Internet. You can reduce this problem by "slicing" the image into sections which can be downloaded separately. Another use of slicing is optimization. For example, if you have a photo on a plain flat color background, then you can optimize the graphic by exporting just the high detail area (photo) as a JPEG or 256-color GIF, and the other areas as, say, a 2-color GIF.
Export the graphic in slices You do not need to specify how to slice the image as Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does this automatically from the information in the Name Gallery . 1. Select the complete image including any slices 2. Select "File -> Export image in slices". 3. Select the file format (this will apply to all areas of the image other than your slice). 4. The file name is the HTML file that contains the HTML code for the sliced image. You can change the file name if required. 5. Click Save.
PDF Export The Portable Document Format (PDF) provides the best way to transfer drawings and document to others. The free Adobe PDF Reader is very popular and enables anyone to view and print your PDF document. For very complex vector graphics, PDF can be very slow (sometimes 20 times or more than Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013), so drawings that take a few seconds to draw in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can take minutes, especially when printing.
Exporting PDF files PDF versions PDF has evolved over the years as more features have been added. Typically along with each new version of PDF, and new version of Adobe Reader is released to support the new PDF features. Unfortunately, to confuse everyone, the version number of PDF Reader and the PDF file do not match. So, for example, Adobe Reader version 5 is required to read PDF versions 1.4. PDF version 1.
The PDF filter includes support for embedding fonts within a PDF document where permission has been granted by the font vendor for this purpose. Where fonts are not embedded, if readers do not have the correct font on their system, then usually a "best guess" font is substituted by the reading application, resulting in loss of fidelity. During the export of a PDF file, you are warned about missing fonts or where required fonts could not be embedded.
altered any of the preset values, the next time you export a PDF it remembers the last settings, and the Custom option will be shown. The following section provides an overview of this feature. While the four presets included in the PDF Export Filter will cover most typical scenarios for generating PDF output, situations may arise when greater control is required in order to specify the properties of the resulting document. To customize the output filter settings: 1.
PDF versions PDF has evolved over the years as more features have been added. Typically along with each new version of PDF, and new version of Adobe Reader is released to support the new PDF features. Unfortunately, to confuse everyone, the version number of PDF Reader and the PDF file do not match. So, for example, Adobe Reader version 5 is required to read PDF versions 1.4. PDF version 1.4 was the first version to support transparency and so is the minimum generally recommended version to use.
correct font on their system, then usually a "best guess" font is substituted by the reading application, resulting in loss of fidelity. During the export of a PDF file, you are warned about missing fonts or where required fonts could not be embedded. If you intend to distribute your PDF file or submit it to a service bureau for printing it is recommended that you: Ensure that the target platform has legal copies of any required fonts. Flash Embedding If you export to PDF version 1.
option will be shown. The following section provides an overview of this feature. While the four presets included in the PDF Export Filter will cover most typical scenarios for generating PDF output, situations may arise when greater control is required in order to specify the properties of the resulting document. To customize the output filter settings: 1. Select the preset that is closest to the desired type of PDF. 2. Click Advanced Options.... 3. Modify the desired filter settings. 4.
Objects not supported by PDF Some Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 features do not exist in PDF, so the conversion to PDF has to simulate these features, usually by converting to a bitmap or bitmap fill. Transparency PDF version 1.3 does not support transparency. Any objects containing transparency will be exported as bitmaps, a process sometimes called "flattening". Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 does this automatically. The resulting PDF file should still look correct however.
chapter for information on embedding Flash into your document. To export a PDF file 1. Choose File > Export (shortcut Ctrl+ñ+E). 2. Select PDF or PDF/X (*.pdf) from the Save As Type list. 3. Name the file then click Save. The PDF Export dialog will appear: The four preset options will be suitable for most PDFs. They are: Draft quality (96 DPI, no font embedding) The draft setting is typically used when proofing a design and offers the fastest mode of PDF generation.
button is clicked, the PDF Export Filter options appear in a separate dialog box grouped within the following categories: General, Objects, Document, Layers, Pre-Press (only Designer Pro) and Security. PDFs for import into Adobe Illustrator (V9 onwards) PDF is the best format to use if you need to transfer designs from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to recent versions of Adobe Illustrator.
Flash Embedding If you export to PDF version 1.5 or higher, you can include embedded Flash objects in your document. Recent versions of Adobe Reader will play the Flash animation while viewing the PDF. This feature is not supported by all PDF viewers however. See the Web Graphics & Websites chapter for information on embedding Flash into your document. To export a PDF file 1. Choose File > Export (shortcut Ctrl+ñ+E). 2. Select PDF or PDF/X (*.pdf) from the Save As Type list. 3.
2. Click Advanced Options.... 3. Modify the desired filter settings. 4. Click Export to generate the PDF document. The modified settings will automatically be stored under the Custom option for use from that point on. When the Advanced Options button is clicked, the PDF Export Filter options appear in a separate dialog box grouped within the following categories: General, Objects, Document, Layers, Pre-Press (only Designer Pro) and Security.
To export a PDF file 1. Choose File > Export (shortcut Ctrl+ñ+E). 2. Select PDF or PDF/X (*.pdf) from the Save As Type list. 3. Name the file then click Save. The PDF Export dialog will appear: The four preset options will be suitable for most PDFs. They are: Draft quality (96 DPI, no font embedding) The draft setting is typically used when proofing a design and offers the fastest mode of PDF generation. The following settings are used: PDF version 1.4. No fonts are embedded.
following categories: General, Objects, Document, Layers, Pre-Press (only Designer Pro) and Security. PDFs for import into Adobe Illustrator (V9 onwards) PDF is the best format to use if you need to transfer designs from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to recent versions of Adobe Illustrator. Vector shapes, bitmaps, text and the simple fill and transparency types will all transfer with no loss of fidelity. Layers Adobe Illustrator 9 & 10 fully support editing of layers exported in PDF files.
Customizing PDF export using advanced options If you select the Advanced Options button you can customize any of the above presets. Once you have altered any of the preset values, the next time you export a PDF it remembers the last settings, and the Custom option will be shown. The following section provides an overview of this feature.
PDFs for import into Adobe Illustrator (V9 onwards) PDF is the best format to use if you need to transfer designs from Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 to recent versions of Adobe Illustrator. Vector shapes, bitmaps, text and the simple fill and transparency types will all transfer with no loss of fidelity. Layers Adobe Illustrator 9 & 10 fully support editing of layers exported in PDF files. Unselect the Exclude Invisible Layers option to make sure all layers in your design are included.
PDF Export Filter Settings: General Options The General Options tab in the PDF Export Filter provides a range of settings that can be configured to specify PDF document attributes including version compatibility, how content is encoded, and which pages are to be rendered. PDF Version compatibility The PDF Export Filter supports versions 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 and 1.7 of the PDF format to ensure compatibility with a wide range of applications. Unless PDF version 1.
are not included in the PDF base 14 fonts supported by Adobe Reader. Note that only those fonts that are not restricted by copyrighting restrictions will be embedded in the PDF file. By default this option is enabled. Note : PDF/X documents (Designer Pro only) require that all fonts are embedded in the resulting document. When exporting PDF/X with font embedding turned on, all fonts are embedded.
PDF Version compatibility The PDF Export Filter supports versions 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 and 1.7 of the PDF format to ensure compatibility with a wide range of applications. Unless PDF version 1.3 compatibility is required, select PDF version 1.4 or greater as the output format as this will provide support for transparency. Color Model The color encoding standard for the PDF document can be selected from RGB and Native.
Note: pages will be exported to the PDF document in the order in which they appear in the original design.
Color Model The color encoding standard for the PDF document can be selected from RGB and Native. The Native option represents colors in the PDF file as they are specified in the drawing using RGB and/or CMYK. Note: If there are bitmaps in your design, you cannot use the Native option to create a CMYK color PDF for use in pre-press, because CMYK colors cannot be assigned to bitmap objects. Designer Pro features an option to convert all colors to CMYK.
Options Optimize for fast web viewing (linearization). Linearization of PDF files generated by the export filter encodes the PDF for optimal transfer and viewing over the Internet. Be default this option is enabled. Embed fonts when permitted. Select this option to include copies of fonts in the PDF file that are not included in the PDF base 14 fonts supported by Adobe Reader. Note that only those fonts that are not restricted by copyrighting restrictions will be embedded in the PDF file.
Page Generation When generating a PDF document from a multi-page design, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 optionally allows a range of pages to be specified. To specify which pages are to be rendered to the resulting PDF document: Select All to export all pages contained within the design Select Current Page to export the currently selected page or Select Selected objects to print only those objects that are selected.
PDF Export Filter Settings: Objects Options The Objects tab in the PDF Export Filter provides a series of settings that can be used to specify how design elements are rendered in a PDF document. Bitmap Compression Choose the compression scheme for bitmapped images that appear in the document by selecting from the options in the dropdown list. Supported compression schemes include: Native (use the bitmap compression in the document), None (do not apply compression), JPEG and Flate .
custom value by checking the Use Custom DPI option and specifying an integer value between 20 and 600. The default preset value for rasterization is 150. The higher the resolution, the larger the PDF file. It is not usually necessary, even for the highest quality printing to use a value above 300dpi. Options Include hyperlinks: Select this option to preserve any objects containing hyperlinks in the outgoing PDF file. By default, this option is selected for standard PDF documents.
Bitmap Compression Choose the compression scheme for bitmapped images that appear in the document by selecting from the options in the dropdown list. Supported compression schemes include: Native (use the bitmap compression in the document), None (do not apply compression), JPEG and Flate . Flate is lossless compression, the same compression used in PNG graphic files or zip archives.
By default, this option is not selected and text is encoded using the ANSI encoding scheme. Selecting this option specifies that text should be encoded using Unicode. Preserve bitmap tiling: This option determines the method that the export filter uses to generate tiles in the PDF file. By default, the preserve bitmap tiling option is selected and a series of individual bitmaps are used to fill the corresponding object.
JPEG Quality Use the slider control to set the JPEG quality index when using JPEG compression for bitmapped images. Values range from 0 to 100, with higher values specifying increased quality and lower values specifying increased compression and the loss of some image fidelity. The default JPEG quality is 85.
does not natively support groups, grouping is emulated using clipping masks.
Rasterization Resolution (DPI) For Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 graphic objects that cannot be exported as native vector PDF objects (things like soft shadows, feathered objects, bevels), Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 will automatically rasterize, that is convert to a bitmap.
Options Include hyperlinks: Select this option to preserve any objects containing hyperlinks in the outgoing PDF file. By default, this option is selected for standard PDF documents. This option is not selected and disabled for PDF/X documents, since hyperlinks are not allowed. Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 supports a number of different link types and mouse-over actions, which are used mainly when creating websites.
PDF Export Filter Settings: Document Options The Document tab contains items that can be used to specify authoring information and how a PDF document will be opened within Adobe Reader. Description Within this section, the title, author, subject and keywords for the outgoing PDF document can be optionally added. Select Include Document Information to embed these details in the resulting PDF file. By default this feature is not selected.
particularly useful when generating PDF documents in which layers are used. The default Reader display setup option is Page only . Note : This feature is not available for PDF/X documents. File Embedding A unique feature supported by the PDF document format is its ability to embed files at the document level. The Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 PDF Export Filter allows one file of any size and type to be added to the exported PDF.
Description Within this section, the title, author, subject and keywords for the outgoing PDF document can be optionally added. Select Include Document Information to embed these details in the resulting PDF file. By default this feature is not selected. Initial View Select from among the document viewing options in the dropdown list to specify the magnification level of the resulting PDF file when it is viewed in applications that support this feature. The default magnification level is 100%.
Initial View Select from among the document viewing options in the dropdown list to specify the magnification level of the resulting PDF file when it is viewed in applications that support this feature. The default magnification level is 100%. Note : This feature is not available for PDF/X documents.
Reader Display Setup When generating a PDF file that is intended for display in Adobe Reader, you can select from among the display setup options in the dropdown list to specify how the viewer is configured when the file is opened. Options are included for displaying only the page, the bookmarks panel and page, the pages panel and page, a full screen version of the document, the layers panel and page (PDF 1.5) and the attachments panel (PDF 1.6).
File Embedding A unique feature supported by the PDF document format is its ability to embed files at the document level. The Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 PDF Export Filter allows one file of any size and type to be added to the exported PDF. When the PDF document is opened by applications that support file embedding (such as Adobe Reader or Acrobat), the embedded file appears in the attachments list panel.
PDF Export Filter Settings: Layer Options Page 1424
Page 1425
The Layers tab within the PDF Export Filter provides a means to specify how layers within a drawing are rendered for in the PDF document. General Options Exclude invisible layers. This option can be checked to exclude all invisible layers in the outgoing PDF file. To eliminate guide layers from a PDF document, set the layer to invisible in the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Page & Layer Gallery and export the drawing with this option checked. Layering Methods (standard PDF only) 1.
General Options Exclude invisible layers. This option can be checked to exclude all invisible layers in the outgoing PDF file. To eliminate guide layers from a PDF document, set the layer to invisible in the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Page & Layer Gallery and export the drawing with this option checked. Layering Methods (standard PDF only) 1. Do not generate Reader layers: Separate layers do not appear in the resulting PDF document. This option is enabled by default. 2.
Layering Methods (standard PDF only) 1. Do not generate Reader layers: Separate layers do not appear in the resulting PDF document. This option is enabled by default. 2. Enable Reader layers in a single page (PDF 1.5 and above only): Layers are rendered within the document on a single page, with layering labels included for display within Adobe Reader's Layer Gallery. 3. Generate bookmarks for each page: Select this option to include bookmarks in the resulting PDF document for each page of your document.
Crop and Printer’s Marks Include crop and printer's marks in the PDF document. Select this option to include crop and printer's marks in the outgoing PDF document. This feature is particularly useful when submitting PDF files to be printed through a service bureau. By default this feature is unselected. Note: to use this feature you must check the Output Printer's Marks option and select the desired types of marks to be included within the Imagesetting tab of the Print Options dialog.
PDF Export Filter Settings: Security Options The Security tab provides support for specifying security attributes and permissions settings that determine how the PDF document can be used once it is distributed. These options are only available for standard PDF documents and cannot be used when generating PDF/X files. To include these security settings in the outgoing PDF document, check "Apply security". By default this feature is not selected.
None: This setting will not apply any document encryption. This is the default encryption option for the document. 40-bit RC4: This setting will apply a 40-bit encryption algorithm to the document. 128-bit RC4: This setting will apply a 128-bit encryption algorithm to the document. 128-bit AES: This setting will apply the 128-bit AES encryption algorithm to the document.
File Open Password To password-protect a PDF document, specify and confirm a password. This password will be required when a user attempts to open the document for viewing. Note that it is strongly recommended that a document also be encrypted if a file open password is applied as this security scheme is known to be relatively easy to compromise. As a result, file open passwords should only be used as a means of security to prevent inexperienced users from accessing sensitive documents.
the responsibility for respecting these permissions settings is left to the application that is used for processing the PDF document.
Document Encryption and Permissions Password To encrypt a PDF document, select an encryption method and specify and confirm a password. This password will be required when a user attempts to make changes to the document, including modifying security and permissions settings. The encryption password is often referred to as the owner or master password and it may also be used to open the PDF document.
Document Permissions Settings The document permissions settings section allows you to specify actions that can be undertaken on an encrypted PDF document when it is rendered or processed by another application. Within the Document Permissions Summary section, check any of the following settings to allow a user to perform the following tasks: Printing: Selecting this option allows a user to print the PDF document. By default this option is selected.
JPEG, PNG, GIF and BMP export dialog overview The Export settings dialog has two preview windows, Image A on the left and Image B on the right, so you can compare alternative export settings or file types, side-by-side. Just click on the left or right preview window to change the active preview. Above the preview window is a small dropdown that lets you select from the most common four export types, JPEG, PNG, GIF and BMP.
Zoom Tool: Click on a preview to zoom in. Shift-click to zoom out. Drag over an area of the preview to zoom into that area. Push Tool: Lets you drag the image around in the preview window. Zoom to Fit: Scales the preview image to fit the window. Zoom to 100%: Scales the image to full-size (100%). Zoom to Resolution of Image (1:1): Has no effect for GIFs. Scales the image so one pixel in the bitmap is one pixel on screen. This is useful for previewing detail in the bitmap.
control over those palette colors. See Color Selector above on how to select a color, or click on a color in the Color Palette ). Lock a Color You can specify the number of colors you want in the palette of exported bitmaps. You may want to ensure that certain colors always appear in the palette; you can lock these colors. Click on a color to select it, then select the Lock button. A small square appears in the bottom left of the color to tell you it is a locked color.
percentage. Scale is more suitable than Size if you want, for example, a bitmap 50% bigger than the original. Resolution: (Dimmed for GIF & BMP) Type the resolution into the DPI field. If you are exporting an image for viewing on screen (i.e. a website), you do not need a setting higher than 96 DPI. 96 DPI also ensures the bitmap is the same size as the objects on screen (at 100% magnification). Area to Save The bitmap can be created using one of these areas of the document: Page: The whole page area.
An image map lets you have "clickable" areas on the graphic when displayed in a browser. Clicking one of these areas jumps to a new web page. If you want to create an image map, use "Utilities -> Web Address" to add web addresses (URLs) to the different parts of your drawing. Export Image Map to Clipboard: This copies the image map HTML to the clipboard so you can paste it into your text or web page editor. There is an option on the Bitmap Size tab to save the HTML IMG tab to the clipboard.
Preview Controls These buttons alter the preview of the images, but do not affect the exported file: Zoom Tool: Click on a preview to zoom in. Shift-click to zoom out. Drag over an area of the preview to zoom into that area. Push Tool: Lets you drag the image around in the preview window. Zoom to Fit: Scales the preview image to fit the window. Zoom to 100%: Scales the image to full-size (100%). Zoom to Resolution of Image (1:1): Has no effect for GIFs.
Buttons These buttons (except Transparent Background) apply when exporting 256 color images or less. These files are created with a limited palette of colors, and these controls provide a great degree of control over those palette colors. See Color Selector above on how to select a color, or click on a color in the Color Palette ). Lock a Color You can specify the number of colors you want in the palette of exported bitmaps.
bitmap is fixed, so changing one dimension automatically changes the other. Size is more suitable than Scale if you want to create a bitmap of a particular size in pixels. Scale: (Dimmed for JPEG & PNG). This lets you scale the bitmap up or down by a percentage. Scale is more suitable than Size if you want, for example, a bitmap 50% bigger than the original. Resolution: (Dimmed for GIF & BMP) Type the resolution into the DPI field. If you are exporting an image for viewing on screen (i.e.
) are used to name the exported files. Image Map An image map lets you have "clickable" areas on the graphic when displayed in a browser. Clicking one of these areas jumps to a new web page. If you want to create an image map, use "Utilities -> Web Address" to add web addresses (URLs) to the different parts of your drawing. Export Image Map to Clipboard: This copies the image map HTML to the clipboard so you can paste it into your text or web page editor.
Palette Options tab This tab allows you to alter the color settings of your exported image. Dithering & Palette The Dithering and Palette options only apply when you export with 256 color or less, and affect how the image is displayed and its color palette. It is recommended to always use an Optimized palette. Set Dither to none, which produces smaller files but may be banded, or Error Diffusion , which creates higher quality results, but larger files.
Make a Palette Color Transparent Make this color entry transparent. Note the difference between this option, which makes parts of the selected objects transparent, and Make The Image Background Transparent which makes those areas behind the selected objects transparent. Delete a Palette Color Delete this color from the palette. Any areas in the bitmap that use the deleted color then use the nearest color in the palette. The fewer colors in the palette, the smaller the bitmap file.
use, select this. Put HTML Image Tag on Clipboard This lets you save out the basic HTML IMG tag information when you save the bitmap. You can then paste the tag into your text or external HTML page editor. Options tab With this tab you can alter JPEG compression and turn on progressive/interlacing options if required. Progressive: (JPEG only) Selecting this option creates a progressive JPEG. This is useful when the JPEG is large and used on a web page.
Name: Image maps are named. (Names must be unique within a document.) If you are merging this image map into an existing file, you can either type in a new map name or choose the name of an existing map. This lets you replace an existing map with new data. Approximate curves with lines: Image map polygons are a series of straight lines and this option lets you select how closely any curves in the clickable areas are followed. (Note that circles are a special case in image maps.
Bitmap Size tab With this tab, you can change the size of the exported image. Bitmap Size and Resolution You can change the size of the exported bitmap by changing: Size: Type the required width or height into one of the fields. Note that the aspect ratio of the bitmap is fixed, so changing one dimension automatically changes the other. Size is more suitable than Scale if you want to create a bitmap of a particular size in pixels. Scale: (Dimmed for JPEG & PNG).
resolution increases. Transparent: (GIF and PNG only) This makes any areas not covered by the selected objects transparent. Selecting this option automatically makes one entry in the palette transparent. Export each layer to a file of its own: Selecting this option when exporting a design that contains multiple layers results in a separate file being exported for each layer. The names of each layer (as set in the Page & Layer Gallery ) are used to name the exported files.
Options tab With this tab you can alter JPEG compression and turn on progressive/interlacing options if required. Progressive: (JPEG only) Selecting this option creates a progressive JPEG. This is useful when the JPEG is large and used on a web page. Web browsers will start displaying the image before the JPEG file has completely downloaded.
circles are a special case in image maps.) Very closely gives the best approximation. This increases the size of your web page and so makes it slower to download. Save all clickable areas as rectangles: Ignore the shape of clickable areas. Save all clickable areas as simple rectangles that totally enclose the clickable area. Browser Preview Using the A and B preview boxes in the Export dialog box (shown above), you can select the best compromise of file size and quality for web graphics.
Image Map An image map lets you have "clickable" areas on the graphic when displayed in a browser. Clicking one of these areas jumps to a new web page. If you want to create an image map, use "Utilities -> Web Address" to add web addresses (URLs) to the different parts of your drawing. Export Image Map to Clipboard: This copies the image map HTML to the clipboard so you can paste it into your text or web page editor. There is an option on the Bitmap Size tab to save the HTML IMG tab to the clipboard.
Browser Preview Using the A and B preview boxes in the Export dialog box (shown above), you can select the best compromise of file size and quality for web graphics. However the best test is checking how the graphic looks in a web browser. This tab provides a number of options for that preview. Click the Browser Preview button to launch your web browser and preview the graphics before exporting.
Dreamweaver integration You can create graphics in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 and link them into Dreamweaver. Then, if you need to make further edits, Dreamweaver can tell Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 which source file to load. This applies to GIFs, BMPs, JPEGs and PNGs. Exporting a file Before exporting the bitmap you must save the Photo & Graphic Designer document. You only need to do this once so Photo & Graphic Designer knows where to find the document on your computer. 1.
Exporting a file Before exporting the bitmap you must save the Photo & Graphic Designer document. You only need to do this once so Photo & Graphic Designer knows where to find the document on your computer. 1. Choose File -> Export. 2. Enter a name and file type. Important: save the bitmap in the same folder as the Dreamweaver document. 3. Click Export to move to the second dialog box, then alter any required export settings (described above). 4. On the Image Map tab select Add Design Note. 5.
Using the bitmap in Dreamweaver Import the bitmap into Dreamweaver in the regular way: 1. In Dreamweaver, position the cursor where you want the bitmap. 2. Click the Insert Image button in the Objects palette. 3. Select the bitmap file name. 4. Click Select to insert the bitmap. Check the Dreamweaver help for more information on importing graphics. Editing the bitmap from within Dreamweaver Before editing the bitmap, you need to make Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 the default editor: 1.
Editing the bitmap from within Dreamweaver Before editing the bitmap, you need to make Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 the default editor: 1. In Dreamweaver, select "Edit -> Edit with External Editor". 2. Select GIF. 3. Click + in the Editors field. 4. Browse to the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 folder. 5. Select Photo & Graphic Designer.exe 6. Select Make Primary to make Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 the default editor for GIFs. You can repeat steps 2 thru 6 for JPEGs and PNGs. Then: 1.
Other bitmaps Export dialog box Bitmaps other than GIF, PNG BMP and JPEG (for example TIF) use this Export dialog box. Not all options apply to all types of bitmap: Bitmap size and resolution Lower resolutions produce smaller files but at reduced image quality. The best resolution depends on where the bitmap will be used. For display on screen a resolution of 96 DPI is adequate. For printing, higher resolutions are required.
The Designs Gallery The Designs Gallery contains thousands of professionally designed graphics and templates. This includes small pieces of graphical 'clipart' you can drag onto any page design, whole page templates for web pages, newspapers, brochures, calendars, etc and complete template websites. Opening the Gallery By default the Designs Gallery is available as a flyout near the top right corner of the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 window.
content does. You can also right-click on a thumbnail and choose Import to new page to force any design to be imported onto a new page in your document. The gallery also contains color scheme files, which allow you to change the color of your website design (drag and drop onto your page, or just double click to apply the scheme) and website widgets which add dynamic content to your website.
Working with Templates Using the templates available in the Designs Gallery is the quickest and easiest way to create high quality designs such as Photo Albums, Websites, Calendars, Cards, Newsletters and other Documents. To load a template, open the Designs Gallery and double click on a template thumbnail in one of the design categories. Once loaded, you can customize the template to produce your own personalized high-quality design.
The easiest and most convenient way to edit photos in your design is to use the built-in Photo Tools . These can be found on the Photo Tools fly-out bar on the main toolbar. Enhance Tool Clip Tool Clone Tool Red-eye Tool Content Aware Photo Scaling/Zooming Levels Tool Panorama Tool Perspective Correction Tool EXIF Tool Use the Photo Enhance Tool to perform the most common adjustments to your photo, such as adjusting brightness, contrast and saturation.
You can add new passages of text to the design by just clicking and typing, or, to create a block of text with a set width and height, click and drag diagonally on the page while in the Text Tool and then enter your text into the text frame that appears. You can easily make a passage of text automatically flow around photos and other objects on your page. All you have to do is right click on an object and choose "Repelling & Anchoring" to make that object repel text that is underneath it.
the design. It's better to edit the theme colors as described above so that all instances of that color, and shades of that color, are updated in your design. Once you've changed the theme colors in your document, if you then paste in or import templates which still use the original theme colors, you'll be presented with a choice. You may want to import the new objects with their original colors, in which case choose the 'Don't match' option.
Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work. Create whole web sites with a single multi-page Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design. Or create web graphics for use on your website created with another web authoring tool. All the categories in the Designs Gallery with names beginning with "Web" contain either web graphic templates or complete web page templates from which you can easily build a finished website.
For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Replacing photos To replace a photo simply drag your own image file (JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP) from your Windows File Explorer and drop it on top of the picture that you want to replace. Your photo will automatically be scaled appropriately to replace the template photo. The new photo will be selected and you'll be put into the Fill Tool so that you can easily adjust the position and scale of your photo if desired (see below). Alternatively you can load your photos into the current design using "File -> Import".
Levels Tool Panorama Tool Perspective Correction Tool EXIF Tool Use the Photo Enhance Tool to perform the most common adjustments to your photo, such as adjusting brightness, contrast and saturation. You can also crop photos while in this tool by just dragging on the photo. Or go into the dedicated Clip Tool for more clipping options. The Clone Tool is useful for removing unwanted parts of an image non-destructively, by copying one part of a photo to another.
point moves. Right click on it and choose Anchor to text. After anchoring, move the object to where you want it relative to the text, using the Selector Tool. Now as you edit the text and the anchor point moves, the anchored object moves too. See the Text Tool chapter for more details.
When working with website documents, setting the page background color actually sets the background color for the whole browser window when you view your exported website. To set a repeating background texture, drag the photo or bitmap onto your document. Open the Bitmap Gallery, scroll to the photo you just loaded, click on it to select it, and then click the Background button on the Gallery.
See the information about Repeating Objects in the Object Handling chapter for details. Links To add a link to a button or any other object, select it using the Selector Tool and then click the Link icon on the Website toolbar. Or choose Utilities->Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W). To add a link to some words in a paragraph of text, go into the Text tool, drag across the text you want to link to select it and then add a link as described above.
Adjusting a photo in its frame You'll often want to adjust the position, scale and rotation of a photo in its frame. Select the Fill Tool, then click on the photo. You will see a two-way fill arrow appear on the photo. You can move the photo around inside the frame by dragging on the image away from the fill arrow. By dragging on the ends of the fill arrows, you can rotate and scale the photo within the frame. Hold "Ctrl" down when doing this to keep the picture upright while scaling.
You can add new passages of text to the design by just clicking and typing, or, to create a block of text with a set width and height, click and drag diagonally on the page while in the Text Tool and then enter your text into the text frame that appears. You can easily make a passage of text automatically flow around photos and other objects on your page. All you have to do is right click on an object and choose "Repelling & Anchoring" to make that object repel text that is underneath it.
the design. It's better to edit the theme colors as described above so that all instances of that color, and shades of that color, are updated in your design. Once you've changed the theme colors in your document, if you then paste in or import templates which still use the original theme colors, you'll be presented with a choice. You may want to import the new objects with their original colors, in which case choose the 'Don't match' option.
Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work. Create whole web sites with a single multi-page Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design. Or create web graphics for use on your website created with another web authoring tool. All the categories in the Designs Gallery with names beginning with "Web" contain either web graphic templates or complete web page templates from which you can easily build a finished website.
For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Editing photos The easiest and most convenient way to edit photos in your design is to use the built-in Photo Tools . These can be found on the Photo Tools fly-out bar on the main toolbar. Enhance Tool Clip Tool Clone Tool Red-eye Tool Content Aware Photo Scaling/Zooming Levels Tool Panorama Tool Perspective Correction Tool EXIF Tool Use the Photo Enhance Tool to perform the most common adjustments to your photo, such as adjusting brightness, contrast and saturation.
You can add new passages of text to the design by just clicking and typing, or, to create a block of text with a set width and height, click and drag diagonally on the page while in the Text Tool and then enter your text into the text frame that appears. You can easily make a passage of text automatically flow around photos and other objects on your page. All you have to do is right click on an object and choose "Repelling & Anchoring" to make that object repel text that is underneath it.
the design. It's better to edit the theme colors as described above so that all instances of that color, and shades of that color, are updated in your design. Once you've changed the theme colors in your document, if you then paste in or import templates which still use the original theme colors, you'll be presented with a choice. You may want to import the new objects with their original colors, in which case choose the 'Don't match' option.
Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work. Create whole web sites with a single multi-page Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design. Or create web graphics for use on your website created with another web authoring tool. All the categories in the Designs Gallery with names beginning with "Web" contain either web graphic templates or complete web page templates from which you can easily build a finished website.
For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Changing text Double click on the text you want to edit to go into the Text Tool, or just click the Text Tool icon on the main Toolbar. You can drag over the text to select it and then type to replace it, just as in a Word Processor.
pointer over the color to see the tooltip showing the color name. Sometimes there will also be several colors linked to a theme color that will change at the same time; these are shown on the Color Line with smaller color squares, but normally you won't need to edit these because they change automatically with the main theme colors. You can also click on any object in the design to select it and then click a named or palette color on the Color Line to change the object's color.
Adding Pages You can easily add more pages to your design to create multi-page web sites or multi-page documents. Simply drag a page template from the Designs Gallery onto your document and it will be added as a new page immediately following the current page. HTML Web Sites NOTE: Although Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes facilities for website creation, the Web Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work.
chapter for full details. Exporting your website Click the 'Export & preview website" button on the Website toolbar to instantly preview a website in a popup Internet Explorer window, or the "Export website" to export your site. button For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Changing colors Editing theme colors individually To edit a template's theme colors, right click on one of the larger square named color patches on the left of the Color Line at the bottom of the window and choose Edit in the menu that appears. This opens the Color Editor. There will usually be several named theme colors in the Color Line - hover the mouse pointer over the color to see the tooltip showing the color name.
loaded, click on it to select it, and then click the Background button on the Gallery. Changing The Page Size of Templates You can change the vertical size of the pre-designed templates by just dragging on the bottom edge of the page. As you do this, footer objects will automatically stay with the bottom of the page and any background panels will stretch automatically also, so the page design is maintained for any page length.
To add a link to a button or any other object, select it using the Selector Tool and then click the Link icon on the Website toolbar. Or choose Utilities->Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W). To add a link to some words in a paragraph of text, go into the Text tool, drag across the text you want to link to select it and then add a link as described above. The Link tab of the Web Properties dialog allows you to create links to URLs, other pages in your site, anchors in your site or even to popup layers.
Editing theme colors individually To edit a template's theme colors, right click on one of the larger square named color patches on the left of the Color Line at the bottom of the window and choose Edit in the menu that appears. This opens the Color Editor. There will usually be several named theme colors in the Color Line - hover the mouse pointer over the color to see the tooltip showing the color name.
Changing The Page Size of Templates You can change the vertical size of the pre-designed templates by just dragging on the bottom edge of the page. As you do this, footer objects will automatically stay with the bottom of the page and any background panels will stretch automatically also, so the page design is maintained for any page length. Adding Pages You can easily add more pages to your design to create multi-page web sites or multi-page documents.
(Ctrl+Shift+W). To add a link to some words in a paragraph of text, go into the Text tool, drag across the text you want to link to select it and then add a link as described above. The Link tab of the Web Properties dialog allows you to create links to URLs, other pages in your site, anchors in your site or even to popup layers. See the Web Graphics & Websites chapter for full details.
Page background color If you drag a color from the Color Line over the page, and drop it, it will set the page background to that color. Once you've set the color this way, if you want you can refine it using the color editor. Right click on the page and choose Change Page Background from the menu. The color editor appears allowing you to edit the page color.
Buttons & Navigation bars The buttons navigation bars on the website templates are made up of 2 state buttons. When a page is viewed in a web browser the buttons highlight when the mouse pointer is moved over them. In the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design this is achieved by having the 2 button states drawn on separate layers which are named "MouseOff" and "MouseOver". Open the Page & Layer Gallery to see the layers . By default the MouseOver layer is turned off.
Changing The Page Size of Templates You can change the vertical size of the pre-designed templates by just dragging on the bottom edge of the page. As you do this, footer objects will automatically stay with the bottom of the page and any background panels will stretch automatically also, so the page design is maintained for any page length. Adding Pages You can easily add more pages to your design to create multi-page web sites or multi-page documents.
Or choose Utilities->Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W). To add a link to some words in a paragraph of text, go into the Text tool, drag across the text you want to link to select it and then add a link as described above. The Link tab of the Web Properties dialog allows you to create links to URLs, other pages in your site, anchors in your site or even to popup layers. See the Web Graphics & Websites chapter for full details.
Adding Pages You can easily add more pages to your design to create multi-page web sites or multi-page documents. Simply drag a page template from the Designs Gallery onto your document and it will be added as a new page immediately following the current page. HTML Web Sites NOTE: Although Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes facilities for website creation, the Web Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work.
See the Web Graphics & Websites chapter for full details. Exporting your website Click the 'Export & preview website" button on the Website toolbar to instantly preview a website in a popup Internet Explorer window, or the "Export website" to export your site. button For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
HTML Web Sites NOTE: Although Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 includes facilities for website creation, the Web Designer and Designer Pro products include much improved facilities and so these products are recommended for website creation work. Create whole web sites with a single multi-page Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design. Or create web graphics for use on your website created with another web authoring tool.
Click the 'Export & preview website" button on the Website toolbar to instantly preview a website in a popup Internet Explorer window, or the "Export website" to export your site. button For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Buttons & Navigation bars The buttons navigation bars on the website templates are made up of 2 state buttons. When a page is viewed in a web browser the buttons highlight when the mouse pointer is moved over them. In the Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 design this is achieved by having the 2 button states drawn on separate layers which are named "MouseOff" and "MouseOver". Open the Page & Layer Gallery to see the layers . By default the MouseOver layer is turned off.
Links To add a link to a button or any other object, select it using the Selector Tool and then click the Link icon on the Website toolbar. Or choose Utilities->Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W). To add a link to some words in a paragraph of text, go into the Text tool, drag across the text you want to link to select it and then add a link as described above. The Link tab of the Web Properties dialog allows you to create links to URLs, other pages in your site, anchors in your site or even to popup layers.
Exporting your website Click the 'Export & preview website" button on the Website toolbar to instantly preview a website in a popup Internet Explorer window, or the "Export website" to export your site. button For other types of document export to one of the many standard file formats supported by Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 for distribution such as PDF, JPEG, PNG and many more.
Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer In this chapter Changing the blank template document Options in the Utilities menu General tab Grid and Ruler tab Internet tab Mouse tab Page Size tab Backups Tab Effects & Plug-ins tab Photo Editing Scaling tab Tune-ups tab Units tab View tab Control bars Gallery docking and undocking Restoring the default control bars/galleries Page 1504
Changing the blank template document The blank template documents are the options available under "File" > "New" . Pre-designed templates are available from the Designs Gallery (or " File" > "New from Designs Gallery "). To add a template document: 1. Open an existing document ("File" > "Open", or "Ctrl + O") or create a new one with the New button on the Standard control bar or "Ctrl + N". 2. Make any required changes (these could be changing the page size, adding a logo or adding a message).
Options in the Utilities menu Keyboard shortcut: "Ctrl + Shift + O" or right click the page/pasteboard and choose Page Options. This menu option opens the Options dialog box. This lets you set various options for Photo & Graphic Designer.
General tab This page describes the General tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Current layer always visible and editable With this option selected, selecting a layer in the Page & Layer Gallery automatically makes it visible and editable. With this option unset, the visible and editable states of a layer remain unchanged when you select that layer. Give new objects most recent attributes Examples of attributes are line width, dash pattern, arrowheads, color, fill color and type of fill.
for more on transparencies. When applying transparency to a group of objects, by default Photo & Graphic Designer will apply the transparency to the group as if it were one object (i.e. you will not see individual transparencies within the group). Unselecting this option will make Photo & Graphic Designer add transparency to each object in the group separately. Maintain imported layer names With this option set, layer information is preserved when you import templates or other files.
This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press. If the document uses scaled units (for example, 1inch to 1mile), this text box shows the distance in the scaled units. When nudging, "Ctrl" and "Shift" increase the nudge distance by five and ten times, respectively. Duplication distance "Edit" > "Duplicate " (Ctrl + D) creates a duplicate which is offset from the original object. These text boxes set the offset distance.
Current layer always visible and editable With this option selected, selecting a layer in the Page & Layer Gallery automatically makes it visible and editable. With this option unset, the visible and editable states of a layer remain unchanged when you select that layer. Give new objects most recent attributes Examples of attributes are line width, dash pattern, arrowheads, color, fill color and type of fill.
Document is intended to be a website This option tells Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 that the document is primarily intended to be exported as a website. It subtly changes the behavior of the program in terms of how it handles links on objects.
Give new objects most recent attributes Examples of attributes are line width, dash pattern, arrowheads, color, fill color and type of fill. With this option set, new objects take the attributes of the object that was last drawn or selected. For example, you might give an existing shape a red fill and green line color. If you then draw a new shape it will also have a red fill and green line color.
just one of the group's members is ignored when exporting the website. However with this option turned on, the link is automatically promoted up to the group, just as if it had been applied to the group instead of to one of its members. So for example if you inadvertently apply a link to the text on a button, instead of to the whole button, with this option on the link is applied to the whole button for you. This option is on by default in all web templates.
Ask before setting current attribute This applies when changing a current attribute (this happens when you change an attribute with no objects selected). With this option set, you are asked to confirm whether you want to change the attribute. With this option unset, the change is made without confirmation. Make groups be transparent as a whole. See Transparency for more on transparencies.
chapter. Angle constraint This applies when rotating or moving an object with "Ctrl" pressed. You can either select from the menu or type in a value in degrees. Nudge size This applies when moving objects using the arrowï€ keys on the keyboard. This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press. If the document uses scaled units (for example, 1inch to 1mile), this text box shows the distance in the scaled units.
Make groups be transparent as a whole. See Transparency for more on transparencies. When applying transparency to a group of objects, by default Photo & Graphic Designer will apply the transparency to the group as if it were one object (i.e. you will not see individual transparencies within the group). Unselecting this option will make Photo & Graphic Designer add transparency to each object in the group separately.
Nudge size This applies when moving objects using the arrowï€ keys on the keyboard. This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press. If the document uses scaled units (for example, 1inch to 1mile), this text box shows the distance in the scaled units. When nudging, "Ctrl" and "Shift" increase the nudge distance by five and ten times, respectively. Duplication distance "Edit" > "Duplicate " (Ctrl + D) creates a duplicate which is offset from the original object.
Maintain imported layer names With this option set, layer information is preserved when you import templates or other files. With Import layers into the active layer instead selected, all imported objects appear in the current layer and the layering information in the incoming data is ignored. Import layers into new layers will create a layer for each imported layer. IMPORTANT: Note that you should not change this setting if you use any of the web templates in the Designs Gallery .
"Edit" > "Duplicate " (Ctrl + D) creates a duplicate which is offset from the original object. These text boxes set the offset distance. Positive values create the duplicate above or to the right of the original object. Negative values create the duplicate below or to the left.
Recent file list size The File menu shows a list of the most recently loaded or saved files in its 'Open recent' sub-menu. This list gives a quick way to reload any of those files. This option lets you change the number of files listed (between 1 and 20 files). Marquee Object Selection This option enables you to change the default setting for marquee selection (where you drag a selection rectangle over the objects you want to select).
Marquee Object Selection This option enables you to change the default setting for marquee selection (where you drag a selection rectangle over the objects you want to select). So you can choose to have objects touching the selection rectangle selected or only the objects wholly inside the rectangle. Document is intended to be a website This option tells Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 that the document is primarily intended to be exported as a website.
Document is intended to be a website This option tells Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 that the document is primarily intended to be exported as a website. It subtly changes the behavior of the program in terms of how it handles links on objects.
Show Windows compatible text lengths See Browser text compatibility in the Text Handling chapter. Angle constraint This applies when rotating or moving an object with "Ctrl" pressed. You can either select from the menu or type in a value in degrees. Nudge size This applies when moving objects using the arrowï€ keys on the keyboard. This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press.
Angle constraint This applies when rotating or moving an object with "Ctrl" pressed. You can either select from the menu or type in a value in degrees. Nudge size This applies when moving objects using the arrowï€ keys on the keyboard. This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press. If the document uses scaled units (for example, 1inch to 1mile), this text box shows the distance in the scaled units.
Nudge size This applies when moving objects using the arrowï€ keys on the keyboard. This text box defines how far the object moves for each key press. If the document uses scaled units (for example, 1inch to 1mile), this text box shows the distance in the scaled units. When nudging, "Ctrl" and "Shift" increase the nudge distance by five and ten times, respectively. Duplication distance "Edit" > "Duplicate " (Ctrl + D) creates a duplicate which is offset from the original object.
Duplication distance "Edit" > "Duplicate " (Ctrl + D) creates a duplicate which is offset from the original object. These text boxes set the offset distance. Positive values create the duplicate above or to the right of the original object. Negative values create the duplicate below or to the left.
Grid and Ruler tab This page describes the Grid and Ruler tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Grid and Ruler spacing Major Spacing defines the distance between the major grid and ruler divisions. The units used for the grid and rulers are defined by the units you use for the major spacing. For example entering a major grid spacing of 2cm will set the grid and ruler units to centimeters regardless of the page units specified in the units options.
Grid and Ruler spacing Major Spacing defines the distance between the major grid and ruler divisions. The units used for the grid and rulers are defined by the units you use for the major spacing. For example entering a major grid spacing of 2cm will set the grid and ruler units to centimeters regardless of the page units specified in the units options. Grid type Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 allows the use of a standard Rectangular grid or an Isometric grid.
Grid type Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 allows the use of a standard Rectangular grid or an Isometric grid. Origin (0,0 point) Normally, the origin for the grid and rulers is at the bottom left-hand corner of the page. If you wish to move it to a different location, change the origin value. Coordinate Direction Here you can change the direction of page coordinates so that, for example, Y values increase as you go down the page.
Origin (0,0 point) Normally, the origin for the grid and rulers is at the bottom left-hand corner of the page. If you wish to move it to a different location, change the origin value. Coordinate Direction Here you can change the direction of page coordinates so that, for example, Y values increase as you go down the page. This is useful when you want the 0,0 point to be the top left corner and increase down the page like it does for HTML.
Coordinate Direction Here you can change the direction of page coordinates so that, for example, Y values increase as you go down the page. This is useful when you want the 0,0 point to be the top left corner and increase down the page like it does for HTML.
Internet tab This page describes the Internet tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Internet Cache When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 downloads gallery items from the Internet, it stores them in a reserved area of disk memory called a "cache". When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 uses these items in the future, it can load them directly from the cache, which is much more efficient than downloading over the Internet. Cache Usage indicates the amount of cache space currently in use.
to most users.
Internet Cache When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 downloads gallery items from the Internet, it stores them in a reserved area of disk memory called a "cache". When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 uses these items in the future, it can load them directly from the cache, which is much more efficient than downloading over the Internet. Cache Usage indicates the amount of cache space currently in use. This gives an idea as to whether the cache size is correct.
Connection Type Over faster modems, ISDN, and networks, Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 can speed up downloads by using multiple connections. These multiple connections are invisible to you and you just see an increase in speed. If you connect to the internet using a dial-up modem, select the appropriate speed option. If you are not sure about your modem, use the default setting. If you connect to the Internet using broadband (like ADSL or cable), select dual ISDN or better.
Proxy Server Settings If your computer is using an Internet proxy, then it will list its details here. This information is not relevant to most users.
Mouse tab This page describes the Mouse tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Mouse button function Photo & Graphic Designer gives you a range of possible actions when you click either the left or right mouse buttons. For example, if you're left-handed, you may prefer to use the right-hand button as the normal button. You would therefore assign the normal click to the right mouse button (you can also set both buttons to have the same action if you wish).
Snapping is described in Object Handling. These text boxes define how close you can drag an object before it snaps to a magnetic object. These are distances on the screen and independent of any document scaling.
Mouse button function Photo & Graphic Designer gives you a range of possible actions when you click either the left or right mouse buttons. For example, if you're left-handed, you may prefer to use the right-hand button as the normal button. You would therefore assign the normal click to the right mouse button (you can also set both buttons to have the same action if you wish). Possible actions: Normal click - At least one button should always be assigned as the normal click. "Shift + click".
Magnetic Snap Radii Snapping is described in Object Handling. These text boxes define how close you can drag an object before it snaps to a magnetic object. These are distances on the screen and independent of any document scaling.
Page Size tab This page describes the Page Size tab of the Utilities, Options dialog These options apply only to the selected document. Paper Options relating to setting the page size (paper, orientation, spread) are described in "changing the page size" in Document Handling . If the Lock page size option is turned on, you can't resize a page by dragging the bottom or right edges and any Push objects that get pushed off the bottom edge of the page will not cause the page to grow.
as if they were designed as separate pages in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Document All pages in document the same: When this option is selected, all the pages in your multi-page document will be given the same dimensions. So if you change the dimensions on one page, all the other pages will update too. This is normally required when working on print documents, because typically each page will need to print to the same paper size.
Paper Options relating to setting the page size (paper, orientation, spread) are described in "changing the page size" in Document Handling . If the Lock page size option is turned on, you can't resize a page by dragging the bottom or right edges and any Push objects that get pushed off the bottom edge of the page will not cause the page to grow. Spread Outer margin sets the size of the margin (or Pasteboard) around the page. Bleed determines the bleed area size around your document.
Spread Outer margin sets the size of the margin (or Pasteboard) around the page. Bleed determines the bleed area size around your document. Show page shadow sets whether a shadow is displayed under the page (this is only on-screen, it is not exported or printed). If you select Double page spread you can create a document consisting of two pages. This option adds a second page to your document.
Document All pages in document the same: When this option is selected, all the pages in your multi-page document will be given the same dimensions. So if you change the dimensions on one page, all the other pages will update too. This is normally required when working on print documents, because typically each page will need to print to the same paper size. However for website documents this option should normally be unset, because you're likely to want pages of different lengths in your site.
Backups Tab This tab allows you to turn the automatic backup facility on and off. This facility saves a copy of all your modified open documents at regular intervals. It's recommended that you work with this backup option turned on, so your work is saved regularly. You can also choose whether you are prompted about unsaved documents when closing the program, or if instead all open documents should be backed up and restored for you when you next start up.
Effects & Plug-ins tab This page describes the Effects & Plug-ins tab of the Utilities, Options dialog For more on Live Effects refer to Live Effects . Photoshop Plug-ins Clicking Setup lets you add and remove folders of Live Effects plug-ins. Effects Here you can set the default resolution of Live Effects and locked effects. New Effects Are Locked By Default This will make any Live Effects you create locked by default, so they will not change if you move or resize them.
Photoshop Plug-ins Clicking Setup lets you add and remove folders of Live Effects plug-ins. Effects Here you can set the default resolution of Live Effects and locked effects. New Effects Are Locked By Default This will make any Live Effects you create locked by default, so they will not change if you move or resize them. Default Live Effect resolution If a Live Effect resolution is set to Automatic , then any Live Effects on an object will, by default, be produced at screen resolution.
Effects Here you can set the default resolution of Live Effects and locked effects. New Effects Are Locked By Default This will make any Live Effects you create locked by default, so they will not change if you move or resize them. Default Live Effect resolution If a Live Effect resolution is set to Automatic , then any Live Effects on an object will, by default, be produced at screen resolution.
New Effects Are Locked By Default This will make any Live Effects you create locked by default, so they will not change if you move or resize them. Default Live Effect resolution If a Live Effect resolution is set to Automatic , then any Live Effects on an object will, by default, be produced at screen resolution.
Default Live Effect resolution If a Live Effect resolution is set to Automatic , then any Live Effects on an object will, by default, be produced at screen resolution. If you wish to print your design you can set one Live Effect to a higher DPI and all effects on that object (as long as the other effects are set to automatic) will automatically be rendered at the highest DPI. It won't then be necessary to alter each effect one by one.
Default Locked effect resolution This is the default resolution for locked effects. If you wish to change the DPI of a locked effect, you need to recreate that effect. Please note: this only applies to locked effects, and does not apply to a locked Live Effect.
Photo Editing This page describes the Photo Editing of the Utilities, Options dialog Photo Editing You can choose what should happen when you save a Photo Document with a modified photo in it. By default the original photo file is preserved in a .xar file in a "Masters" sub-folder and the original opened photo file is overwritten. You can choose to have the original photo file saved in the "Masters" folder instead, or you can choose to not have the original photo preserved at all.
Photo Editing You can choose what should happen when you save a Photo Document with a modified photo in it. By default the original photo file is preserved in a .xar file in a "Masters" sub-folder and the original opened photo file is overwritten. You can choose to have the original photo file saved in the "Masters" folder instead, or you can choose to not have the original photo preserved at all. See the Editing Photo Files section of the Photo Handling chapter for details.
Editing Bitmaps Here you can select the bitmap editor that you want to use to edit bitmaps in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. See Integration with external Photo Editors in the Photo Handling chapter for details. Bitmap transfer Always use bmp Images will always be transferred as bmp files. This is the fastest way to transfer images to and from the bitmap editor, but bmp does not support transparency.
Bitmap transfer Always use bmp Images will always be transferred as bmp files. This is the fastest way to transfer images to and from the bitmap editor, but bmp does not support transparency. So if you want to edit bitmaps that include some transparency, or you want to introduce some transparency while editing the image, don't use this option. Always use png Images will be transferred to the bitmap editor as uncompressed png files, preserving any transparency in the image.
Scaling tab This page describes the Scaling tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Described in Measurement Units in Document Handling .
Tune-ups tab This page describes the Tune-ups tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Redraw The value set in this option is used when redrawing the document on the screen and during exporting and printing. Normally automatic gives the best results, but if you have an old computer with limited memory you can specify a lower value. This may, however, slow down redraws. Gallery cache When displaying items in a gallery, Photo & Graphic Designer reads the information off disk into a cache.
objects in your design, generally making redraws and object drags faster at the expense of larger memory usage. Or reduce it to lower the amount of memory that Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 uses for caching. In complex designs, some cacheable objects will not be cached if there is insufficient memory to do so. This dialog also shows you how much memory is currently being used for caching. Live drag is described in Document Handling .
Redraw The value set in this option is used when redrawing the document on the screen and during exporting and printing. Normally automatic gives the best results, but if you have an old computer with limited memory you can specify a lower value. This may, however, slow down redraws. Gallery cache When displaying items in a gallery, Photo & Graphic Designer reads the information off disk into a cache. This speeds up gallery redraw speed for recent items. The default value is generally suitable.
Gallery cache When displaying items in a gallery, Photo & Graphic Designer reads the information off disk into a cache. This speeds up gallery redraw speed for recent items. The default value is generally suitable. You may want to reduce it if memory is tight, or increase it if you use galleries frequently. Undo size Applies only to the selected document-described in Undo & Redo .
Undo size Applies only to the selected document-described in Undo & Redo . Cache Control Complex objects including layers, groups, bevels, shadows, blends, molds, contours, ClipViews and Live Effects can be cached as bitmaps when they are rendered. This means that the next time these objects need to be redrawn, the bitmap can often be used instead of re-rendering the objects, making redraws and object drags very much faster. The difference is particularly noticeable with complex documents.
Cache Control Complex objects including layers, groups, bevels, shadows, blends, molds, contours, ClipViews and Live Effects can be cached as bitmaps when they are rendered. This means that the next time these objects need to be redrawn, the bitmap can often be used instead of re-rendering the objects, making redraws and object drags very much faster. The difference is particularly noticeable with complex documents.
Units tab This page describes the Units tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Described in Measurement Units in Document Handling .
View tab This page describes the View tab of the Utilities, Options dialog Display Show progress bar: During long operations Photo & Graphic Designer can display a progress bar on the status line. If instead you'd prefer an hourglass to replace the mouse pointer until the operation is completed, uncheck the Show Progress Bar setting. The hourglass and progress bar are for information only-they have no effect on the document itself.
displayed. However, when you perform actions on shadows and bevels such as Convert to Editable Shapes, Combine Shapes, Export as EPS and Export as Flash , Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 creates a new bitmap using the resolution you specify here. For on-screen use (such as web page graphics) 96 DPI is the best value. For work that will be printed, you may need a higher value. Changes to this value apply to new auto-generated bitmaps; it has no effect on existing bitmaps.
Display Show progress bar: During long operations Photo & Graphic Designer can display a progress bar on the status line. If instead you'd prefer an hourglass to replace the mouse pointer until the operation is completed, uncheck the Show Progress Bar setting. The hourglass and progress bar are for information only-they have no effect on the document itself. Interactive fill dragging: Interactive fill dragging allows you to see how fills and transparencies look as you drag the fill handles.
This lets you select the size of the color bar at the bottom of the screen. A scroll bar is displayed when the number of colors is wider than the width of the color bar. Edit local colors in: This affects the color model displayed when editing a local color. Automatic displays the color model of the original color style that the local color is based upon. For example, the HSV color model for a color style defined in HSV. This is important if you need to ensure your objects are in CMYK, for example.
Dithering These options set the dithering method used to display your document on the screen. It is recommended that you leave this on its default setting. Bitmaps These options apply only to the current document. They have no affect on any other documents currently loaded. Never smooth: When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 scales a bitmap, it usually smoothes (interpolates) between the individual pixels to give a smooth look to the bitmap. Usually this gives the best results.
Delete unused colors when saving and loading: When this option is selected, any unused named colors in your document will be deleted when you save/load. This prevents your Color Line becoming cluttered with named colors which are not used in the design. This is particularly useful when loading older designs, because earlier versions of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 used to create named colors implicitly. So many older designs contain numerous unused named colors.
Bitmaps These options apply only to the current document. They have no affect on any other documents currently loaded. Never smooth: When Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 scales a bitmap, it usually smoothes (interpolates) between the individual pixels to give a smooth look to the bitmap. Usually this gives the best results. Check this option if you if you do not want this effect. DPI when auto-generated: Some features such as shadows and bevels are created using bitmaps.
colors implicitly. So many older designs contain numerous unused named colors. Load them with this option turned off and it's hard to identify the important used named colors on the Color Line from the unused ones.
Color Color line size: This lets you select the size of the color bar at the bottom of the screen. A scroll bar is displayed when the number of colors is wider than the width of the color bar. Edit local colors in: This affects the color model displayed when editing a local color. Automatic displays the color model of the original color style that the local color is based upon. For example, the HSV color model for a color style defined in HSV.
Control bars You can move Photo & Graphic Designer's control bars to different places around the window, re-order the buttons, create new control bars, move or copy buttons between control bars and many other operations. You cannot change the tool-dependent InfoBar or the contents of the fly-out bars which are on the main toolbar and top bars. Full screen mode Photo & Graphic Designer has two configurations of control bars: One configuration appears when the window is its normal size.
Docked and free floating control bars Normally, control bars are docked (attached to the edges of the window). Moving the window also moves docked control bars. Control bars can also be floating. These do not follow movements of the window. Floating control bar Docked control bar You can hide a floating control bar either using the Control Bars dialog box (described above) or by clicking its Close icon.
Or click New on the Control Bars dialog box. This lets you create a new control bar and allocate a name to it. The new control bar is empty. You can then drag buttons to it. Moving buttons is described below. Deleting control bars You can only delete control bars that are empty. Therefore move any buttons to another control bar. Close the control bar (either click on the Close icon or use the Control Bars dialog box). The control bar is automatically deleted when you quit Photo & Graphic Designer.
Full screen mode Photo & Graphic Designer has two configurations of control bars: One configuration appears when the window is its normal size. The second configuration appears after you choose "Window" > "Full Screen". Any changes to one configuration of control bars (for example, resizing or moving) have no effect on the other configuration. Changes to individual buttons (for example, setting an option) apply in both normal and full screen modes.
Floating control bar Docked control bar You can hide a floating control bar either using the Control Bars dialog box (described above) or by clicking its Close icon. To make a control bar float, drag it away from the edge of the window either onto the editing area or off the Photo & Graphic Designer window. To dock a control bar, drag it over: The edge of the window. Or the menu bar. Or another control bar. A floating control bar has a double line outline while dragging.
You cannot move buttons onto or off the InfoBar. Hiding buttons and tools Move the unwanted buttons or tools to another control bar and then hide that control bar (described above). If you need the button or tool in the future, use the Control Bars dialog box to redisplay the control bar. You cannot delete buttons or tools. Fly-out menus Some buttons have a small black triangle which indicates that there is a fly-out bar, which appears when the mouse pointer is held over the button for a short period.
Displaying & hiding control bars The display of control bars is controlled by the Control Bars dialog box ("Window" > "Control Bars "). Against the name of each control bar is a check box. A tick in the check box shows that the control bar is currently displayed. Click on the required control bar's check box to display or hide that bar. You can also quickly turn Control Bars on or off if you right-click in any empty area at the top of the program window.
The edge of the window. Or the menu bar. Or another control bar. A floating control bar has a double line outline while dragging. This changes to a single line when in a docking position. If you want the control bar to remain floating, hold down "Ctrl" while dragging. Resizing a control bar Move the pointer over the edge of the control bar. It changes to a double-headed arrow. You can now drag the edge to resize the control bar.
Some buttons have a small black triangle which indicates that there is a fly-out bar, which appears when the mouse pointer is held over the button for a short period. You cannot customize the contents of these flyout bars, but you can drag the button as a whole onto and off bars, just as you do with ordinary buttons.
Docked and free floating control bars Normally, control bars are docked (attached to the edges of the window). Moving the window also moves docked control bars. Control bars can also be floating. These do not follow movements of the window. Floating control bar Docked control bar You can hide a floating control bar either using the Control Bars dialog box (described above) or by clicking its Close icon.
palette" both ALT-keys do only copy the button. 3. Drag the button to: o A different place on the same control bar. o Or another control bar. o Or onto the editing area/off Photo & Graphic Designer to create a new control bar. You cannot move buttons onto or off the InfoBar. Hiding buttons and tools Move the unwanted buttons or tools to another control bar and then hide that control bar (described above).
Resizing a control bar Move the pointer over the edge of the control bar. It changes to a double-headed arrow. You can now drag the edge to resize the control bar. Creating new control bars To create a new control bar: Drag a button onto the editing area or off the window. This opens a new control bar containing the button. Or click New on the Control Bars dialog box. This lets you create a new control bar and allocate a name to it. The new control bar is empty. You can then drag buttons to it.
Creating new control bars To create a new control bar: Drag a button onto the editing area or off the window. This opens a new control bar containing the button. Or click New on the Control Bars dialog box. This lets you create a new control bar and allocate a name to it. The new control bar is empty. You can then drag buttons to it. Moving buttons is described below. Deleting control bars You can only delete control bars that are empty. Therefore move any buttons to another control bar.
Deleting control bars You can only delete control bars that are empty. Therefore move any buttons to another control bar. Close the control bar (either click on the Close icon or use the Control Bars dialog box). The control bar is automatically deleted when you quit Photo & Graphic Designer. Changing the size of buttons Buttons can be large or small as selected in the Control Bars dialog box. Moving buttons and tools To move buttons or tools: 1. Move the mouse pointer over the button you want to move. 2.
Changing the size of buttons Buttons can be large or small as selected in the Control Bars dialog box. Moving buttons and tools To move buttons or tools: 1. Move the mouse pointer over the button you want to move. 2. Hold down "Alt" (left ALT) to move the button or "AltGr" (right ALT) to copy the button when used on user-defined control bars and other control bars. Although on the predefined "Button palette" both ALT-keys do only copy the button. 3.
Moving buttons and tools To move buttons or tools: 1. Move the mouse pointer over the button you want to move. 2. Hold down "Alt" (left ALT) to move the button or "AltGr" (right ALT) to copy the button when used on user-defined control bars and other control bars. Although on the predefined "Button palette" both ALT-keys do only copy the button. 3. Drag the button to: o A different place on the same control bar. o Or another control bar.
Hiding buttons and tools Move the unwanted buttons or tools to another control bar and then hide that control bar (described above). If you need the button or tool in the future, use the Control Bars dialog box to redisplay the control bar. You cannot delete buttons or tools. Fly-out menus Some buttons have a small black triangle which indicates that there is a fly-out bar, which appears when the mouse pointer is held over the button for a short period.
Fly-out menus Some buttons have a small black triangle which indicates that there is a fly-out bar, which appears when the mouse pointer is held over the button for a short period. You cannot customize the contents of these flyout bars, but you can drag the button as a whole onto and off bars, just as you do with ordinary buttons.
Gallery docking and undocking It is possible to dock one or more galleries on either side of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. See moving and docking a gallery .
Restoring the default control bars/galleries Choose "Window" > "Control Bars" and click Reset to restore the control bar setup to the default setting.
Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts In this chapter Introduction File menu Edit menu Arrange menu Utilities menu Share Menu Window menu Help menu Key shortcuts Page 1594
Introduction This chapter describes the operations available on each of the menus and those available via keyboard shortcuts. In many cases the operations described in this chapter apply to the selected object. In most cases, the described action also applies when you have several selected objects. We use selected object as shorthand for selected object or objects. Often you can select options from either a menu, a control bar or a keyboard shortcut.
File menu New (Standard control bar or Ctrl+N) Opens a new document. New from Designs Gallery This option opens the Designs Gallery if it's not open already, allowing you to choose a template for a new document. Click on the folder icons in the gallery to open a folder and double-click on a template thumbnail to start a new document using that template. You can also open the Designs Gallery by clicking the tab in the Galleries bar.
for more information). Note the difference between Open and Import: both load a variety of file formats but Open opens a new document. Import loads the file into the current open document. Import from Web (Ctrl+Alt+W) Extract all images from a specified web site. Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export . Lets you export the document in any of the export formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar.
Export Website Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so.
for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
New (Standard control bar or Ctrl+N) Opens a new document. New from Designs Gallery This option opens the Designs Gallery if it's not open already, allowing you to choose a template for a new document. Click on the folder icons in the gallery to open a folder and double-click on a template thumbnail to start a new document using that template. You can also open the Designs Gallery by clicking the tab in the Galleries bar.
loads the file into the current open document. Import from Web (Ctrl+Alt+W) Extract all images from a specified web site. Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export . Lets you export the document in any of the export formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG.
Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so.
Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
New from Designs Gallery This option opens the Designs Gallery if it's not open already, allowing you to choose a template for a new document. Click on the folder icons in the gallery to open a folder and double-click on a template thumbnail to start a new document using that template. You can also open the Designs Gallery by clicking the tab in the Galleries bar. Open (Standard control bar or Ctrl+O) Opens a new editing window and loads a file into it. This file can be: An Photo & Graphic Designer .
Extract all images from a specified web site. Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export . Lets you export the document in any of the export formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG. Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".
Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so. Then the website is published to your web space.
Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Open (Standard control bar or Ctrl+O) Opens a new editing window and loads a file into it. This file can be: An Photo & Graphic Designer .xar file to view or edit an existing Photo & Graphic Designer document, Or any of the other import formats (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). This opens a new document showing the drawing in the file. Open recent A list of the most recently loaded or saved files. Provides a quick way to reload any of these files.
Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG. Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a PNG. Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .
during the publishing operation. Preview Flash This option is only enabled when the current document is an animation document. It exports your animation as Flash and brings up a pop-up window showing your Flash animation running. The window also includes basic information about your Flash animation, such as the size of the Flash file. The button on the animation toolbar is a quicker way to invoke this operation.
Open recent A list of the most recently loaded or saved files. Provides a quick way to reload any of these files. You can change the number of files in this list (refer to Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer for details). Close (Ctrl+W) Closes the current editing window. Photo & Graphic Designer remains loaded. You are warned if the file has unsaved changes. Save (Standard control bar or Ctrl+S) Saves the selected document.
Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a PNG. Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .htm files as necessary without prompting), or to a temporary location if it has not yet been exported as a website.
The button on the animation toolbar is a quicker way to invoke this operation. Export Animation Also in the animation toolbar displayed under the standard toolbar in an animation document. Export an animation for use in a website. Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information).
Close (Ctrl+W) Closes the current editing window. Photo & Graphic Designer remains loaded. You are warned if the file has unsaved changes. Save (Standard control bar or Ctrl+S) Saves the selected document. Save As Lets you save the selected document under a different name or to a different directory or drive. Save All Saves all loaded documents. Save Template Saves the selected document as a template document (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .htm files as necessary without prompting), or to a temporary location if it has not yet been exported as a website. Then a browser window is shown displaying the page of the website from which you launched the preview window. You can also preview your website by clicking the button on the Web toolbar.
Export an animation for use in a website. Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information). Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc.
Save (Standard control bar or Ctrl+S) Saves the selected document. Save As Lets you save the selected document under a different name or to a different directory or drive. Save All Saves all loaded documents. Save Template Saves the selected document as a template document (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Import (Ctrl+Alt+I) Loads a file into the selected document. The file can be any of the import formats (see Importing & Exporting for more information).
website from which you launched the preview window. You can also preview your website by clicking the button on the Web toolbar. You can navigate through the pages of your website using the navigation 'arrow' buttons at the top of the preview window, and click the 'home' button on the left to return to the page that was initially viewed in the preview. Click a browser type at the top of the preview window to preview your website in your preferred browser.
for more information). Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information).
Save As Lets you save the selected document under a different name or to a different directory or drive. Save All Saves all loaded documents. Save Template Saves the selected document as a template document (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Import (Ctrl+Alt+I) Loads a file into the selected document. The file can be any of the import formats (see Importing & Exporting for more information).
You can navigate through the pages of your website using the navigation 'arrow' buttons at the top of the preview window, and click the 'home' button on the left to return to the page that was initially viewed in the preview. Click a browser type at the top of the preview window to preview your website in your preferred browser.
This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information).
Save All Saves all loaded documents. Save Template Saves the selected document as a template document (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Import (Ctrl+Alt+I) Loads a file into the selected document. The file can be any of the import formats (see Importing & Exporting for more information). Note the difference between Open and Import: both load a variety of file formats but Open opens a new document. Import loads the file into the current open document.
the page that was initially viewed in the preview. Click a browser type at the top of the preview window to preview your website in your preferred browser. Previews your page in Google Chrome Previews your page in Mozilla Firefox Previews your page in Internet Explorer Previews your page in Opera Previews your page in Safari Export Website Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar.
Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information).
Save Template Saves the selected document as a template document (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Import (Ctrl+Alt+I) Loads a file into the selected document. The file can be any of the import formats (see Importing & Exporting for more information). Note the difference between Open and Import: both load a variety of file formats but Open opens a new document. Import loads the file into the current open document. Import from Web (Ctrl+Alt+W) Extract all images from a specified web site.
Previews your page in Google Chrome Previews your page in Mozilla Firefox Previews your page in Internet Explorer Previews your page in Opera Previews your page in Safari Export Website Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space.
Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory.
Import (Ctrl+Alt+I) Loads a file into the selected document. The file can be any of the import formats (see Importing & Exporting for more information). Note the difference between Open and Import: both load a variety of file formats but Open opens a new document. Import loads the file into the current open document. Import from Web (Ctrl+Alt+W) Extract all images from a specified web site. Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export .
Previews your page in Internet Explorer Previews your page in Opera Previews your page in Safari Export Website Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first.
Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Import from Web (Ctrl+Alt+W) Extract all images from a specified web site. Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export . Lets you export the document in any of the export formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG. Export PNG Also in Export toolbar.
Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so. Then the website is published to your web space.
for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Export (Ctrl+Shift+E) Or right click and choose Export . Lets you export the document in any of the export formats supported by Photo & Graphic Designer (see Importing & Exporting for a list of formats). Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG. Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".
This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so. Then the website is published to your web space. A progress indicator appears during the publishing operation.
Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Export JPEG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose Export - Export JPEG.) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a JPEG. Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a PNG. Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .
during the publishing operation. Preview Flash This option is only enabled when the current document is an animation document. It exports your animation as Flash and brings up a pop-up window showing your Flash animation running. The window also includes basic information about your Flash animation, such as the size of the Flash file. The button on the animation toolbar is a quicker way to invoke this operation.
Export PNG Also in Export toolbar. Or right click and choose " Export" > "Export PNG ".) Lets you export selected objects, a page or the whole document as a PNG. Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .htm files as necessary without prompting), or to a temporary location if it has not yet been exported as a website.
also includes basic information about your Flash animation, such as the size of the Flash file. The button on the animation toolbar is a quicker way to invoke this operation. Export Animation Also in the animation toolbar displayed under the standard toolbar in an animation document. Export an animation for use in a website. Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information).
Preview Website Export and preview all the pages within your website. The pages are exported to the same location they were last exported to (overwriting .htm files as necessary without prompting), or to a temporary location if it has not yet been exported as a website. Then a browser window is shown displaying the page of the website from which you launched the preview window. You can also preview your website by clicking the button on the Web toolbar.
Also in the animation toolbar displayed under the standard toolbar in an animation document. Export an animation for use in a website. Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information). Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options .
Export Website Also in Export toolbar. Export the current document as HTML. Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so.
for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Publish Website This performs the same operation as the button on the Web toolbar. It exports and then publishes the current document as a website to your web space. If you haven't already entered the FTP details for your web space, the Publish tab of the Web Properties dialog will be displayed first. Then if you haven't already exported the site locally, the export dialog will appear to allow you to do so. Then the website is published to your web space.
Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Preview Flash This option is only enabled when the current document is an animation document. It exports your animation as Flash and brings up a pop-up window showing your Flash animation running. The window also includes basic information about your Flash animation, such as the size of the Flash file. The button on the animation toolbar is a quicker way to invoke this operation. Export Animation Also in the animation toolbar displayed under the standard toolbar in an animation document.
Export Animation Also in the animation toolbar displayed under the standard toolbar in an animation document. Export an animation for use in a website. Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information). Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options .
Export image in slices (Ctrl+I) This exports the selected objects as several sections (see Web Graphics for more information). Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information).
Document Info This displays an information box about the selected document, including which fonts and Live Effects plug-ins are used in the current document. Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information).
Page Options Also right click and choose Page Options . Allows you to edit the page layout, size, etc. Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information).
Printer Setup Sets options relating to the current printer or print file (refer to Printing for more information). Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Print Options Alter the various options when printing, including orientation and scaling (refer to Printing for more information). Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Print (Ctrl+P) Sets options relating to printing the document and lets you print the document (refer to Printing for more information). Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Exit Closes all windows and removes Photo & Graphic Designer from memory. You are warned if any files have unsaved changes.
Edit menu This section covers Undo (Standard control bar or Ctrl+Z) Redo (Standard control bar or Ctrl+Y) Cut (Edit control bar or Ctrl+X) Copy (Edit control bar or Ctrl+C) Paste (Edit control bar or Ctrl+V) Paste bitmap Paste in place (Ctrl+Shift+V) Paste format/attributes (Ctrl+Shift+A) Paste position Paste size Paste replacing selection Paste in current layer Paste in place in current layer Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) Paste opacity mask in place Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Selec
Paste the clipboard contents into the selected document. The wording of this option reflects the contents of the clipboard (refer to Object Handling ). Sometimes, when you paste the contents of the clipboard into a document, it could be inserted using several different formats. If this is the case the Paste Special dialog box will appear so you can choose a format. Paste unformatted text Pastes any text on the clipboard into your document without any formatting.
Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Paste bitmap Pastes any bitmaps on the clipboard into your document. Paste in place (Ctrl+Shift+V) The same as Paste, except your object will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving objects from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position.
Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) See Opacity Masks Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it.
Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Undo (Standard control bar or Ctrl+Z) Undo the previous operation. The description of this option reflects the last operation performed. For example, Undo Cut (refer to Undo & Redo ). Redo (Standard control bar or Ctrl+Y) Cancel the last Undo command. The description of this option reflects the last Undo operation (refer to Undo & Redo). Cut (Edit control bar or Ctrl+X) Cut the selected object to the clipboard.
If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and moves the currently selected object to the position of the copied group as a whole. The currently selected object is pasted or moved into the center position of the copied object or group of objects. Paste size This option applies the size of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object.
objects. Paste size This option applies the size of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object. If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and resizes the currently selected object around its center to the exact size of the copied group as a whole.
Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object.
Redo (Standard control bar or Ctrl+Y) Cancel the last Undo command. The description of this option reflects the last Undo operation (refer to Undo & Redo). Cut (Edit control bar or Ctrl+X) Cut the selected object to the clipboard. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ). Copy (Edit control bar or Ctrl+C) Copy the selected object to the clipboard. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected.
Paste size This option applies the size of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object. If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and resizes the currently selected object around its center to the exact size of the copied group as a whole.
resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object. If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and resizes the currently selected object around its center to the exact size of the copied group as a whole. Paste replacing selection This is similar to Paste position , except that the copied object on the clipboard replaces the currently selected object and retains the deleted item's position.
Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original.
Cut (Edit control bar or Ctrl+X) Cut the selected object to the clipboard. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ). Copy (Edit control bar or Ctrl+C) Copy the selected object to the clipboard. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected. The object remains in place in the document (refer to Object Handling ). Paste (Edit control bar or Ctrl+V) Or right click and choose Paste .
as a whole. Paste replacing selection This is similar to Paste position , except that the copied object on the clipboard replaces the currently selected object and retains the deleted item's position. The copied object is pasted into the center position of the deleted object. Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed.
Paste replacing selection This is similar to Paste position , except that the copied object on the clipboard replaces the currently selected object and retains the deleted item's position. The copied object is pasted into the center position of the deleted object. Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed.
Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages .
Copy (Edit control bar or Ctrl+C) Copy the selected object to the clipboard. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected. The object remains in place in the document (refer to Object Handling ). Paste (Edit control bar or Ctrl+V) Or right click and choose Paste . Paste the clipboard contents into the selected document. The wording of this option reflects the contents of the clipboard (refer to Object Handling ).
deleted item's position. The copied object is pasted into the center position of the deleted object. Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed. Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it.
Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it.
selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Paste (Edit control bar or Ctrl+V) Or right click and choose Paste . Paste the clipboard contents into the selected document. The wording of this option reflects the contents of the clipboard (refer to Object Handling ). Sometimes, when you paste the contents of the clipboard into a document, it could be inserted using several different formats. If this is the case the Paste Special dialog box will appear so you can choose a format.
except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed. Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Paste bitmap Pastes any bitmaps on the clipboard into your document.
displayed. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery .
copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Paste bitmap Pastes any bitmaps on the clipboard into your document. Paste in place (Ctrl+Shift+V) The same as Paste, except your object will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving objects from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Paste format/attributes (Ctrl+Shift+A) This option lets you copy attributes (such as the line pattern or fill color) between objects. It is a quick way of applying multiple attributes.
Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) See Opacity Masks Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving opacity masks from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object.
Documents.
Paste in place (Ctrl+Shift+V) The same as Paste, except your object will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving objects from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Paste format/attributes (Ctrl+Shift+A) This option lets you copy attributes (such as the line pattern or fill color) between objects. It is a quick way of applying multiple attributes.
Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) See Opacity Masks Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving opacity masks from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object.
Paste format/attributes (Ctrl+Shift+A) This option lets you copy attributes (such as the line pattern or fill color) between objects. It is a quick way of applying multiple attributes. When you Paste Attributes, the attributes of the objects on the clipboard are applied to all the objects currently selected (refer to Object Handling ).
, except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving opacity masks from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ).
Paste position This option applies the position of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which moves to the exact same position as the copied object. If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and moves the currently selected object to the position of the copied group as a whole. The currently selected object is pasted or moved into the center position of the copied object or group of objects.
Delete the selected object. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ). Select All (Ctrl+A) Select all objects in editable layers (editable and locked layers are described in Layers ). Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice.
Paste size This option applies the size of a copied object on the clipboard to a currently selected object, which resizes around its center to the exact size of the copied object. If multiple items have been copied to the clipboard, Photo & Graphic Designer treats them as if they are a group and resizes the currently selected object around its center to the exact size of the copied group as a whole.
Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object.
Paste replacing selection This is similar to Paste position , except that the copied object on the clipboard replaces the currently selected object and retains the deleted item's position. The copied object is pasted into the center position of the deleted object. Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed.
. Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages .
Paste in current layer The same as Paste in place, except your object will only be pasted into the current layer. This is useful if you want to display or hide just your pasted object when layers above or below are displayed. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it.
selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Paste in place in current layer The same as Paste in current layer, except your object will be pasted into the current layer in the exact same position from which you copied it. Note: To open a layer, double-click on it in the Page & Layer Gallery . Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) See Opacity Masks Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it.
Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Paste opacity mask (Ctrl+Shift+M) See Opacity Masks Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving opacity masks from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object.
Paste opacity mask in place The same as Paste opacity mask , except your opacity mask will be pasted in the exact same position from which you copied it. This is useful for moving opacity masks from one layer or page to another, without changing its X/Y position. Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ).
Delete (Edit & Standard control bars or Delete) Or right click and choose Delete . Delete the selected object. The description of this option reflects the type of object selected (refer to Object Handling ). Select All (Ctrl+A) Select all objects in editable layers (editable and locked layers are described in Layers ). Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values.
Select All (Ctrl+A) Select all objects in editable layers (editable and locked layers are described in Layers ). Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate .
Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object.
Find/Replace (Ctrl+Alt+F) Find/Replace for text objects, see chapter Text Handling, section Find & Replace . Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original.
Duplicate (Edit control bar or Ctrl+Alt+D) Or right click and choose Duplicate . Copy the selected object placing the copy slightly offset from the original. The copy becomes the selected object. The offset distance can be customized (see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages .
Clone (Ctrl+K) Like Duplicate copies the selected object, but places the copy directly over the original. The copy becomes the selected object. Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Pages Or right click and choose Pages . The Pages submenu lets you add or remove pages from your multi-page document, duplicate the current page or move the current page up and down. Read more on multi-page documents in Multi-page Documents.
Arrange menu This section covers Move to Layer in Front (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+U) Bring to Front (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+F) Move Forwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+F) Move Backwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+B) Put to Back (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+B) Move To Layer Behind (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+D) Group (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+G) Ungroup (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+U) Apply soft group (Ctrl+Alt+G) Remove soft group (Ctrl+Alt+U) Apply/Remove ClipView (Q
Move Backwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Backwards . Move the selected object one step towards the back (refer to Object Handling). Put to Back (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Put to Back . Move the selected object behind all others in the same layer (refer to Object Handling ). Move To Layer Behind (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+D) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move to Layer Behind .
For Apply ClipView, the rear object in the selection (the object behind the other selected objects) 'clips' or 'masks' the other objects (the effect is similar to viewing the other objects through a window the shape of the rear object). Remove ClipView removes any clipping applied to the objects in the ClipView. See Object Handling . Apply opacity mask Shortcut to quick apply an opacity mask, see Opacity masks in chapter Transparency Flatten photo group Converts a photo group to a single bitmap.
Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text.
Move to Layer in Front (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+U) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move to Layer in Front . Move the selected object forward by one layer. The selected object becomes the back object in the new layer. In an animation document, this option is Move To Next Frame . Bring to Front (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+F) Or right click and choose Arrange > Bring to Front . Move the selected object to the front of all other objects in the same layer.
Or right click and choose Ungroup . Split the group or groups into separate objects. Dimmed unless the selected object is a group. Or, for several selected objects, there is at least one group. Apply soft group (Ctrl+Alt+G) Or right click and choose Apply soft group . Make the selected objects form a soft group. Unlike groups, soft groups can include objects on different layers. Refer to Object Handling (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) for details.
Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes. Only shapes in the selection are combined. Unselected shapes do not change (refer to chapter Shape handling for more information). Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape.
The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website. Read more in the Object Handling Chapter .
Bring to Front (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+F) Or right click and choose Arrange > Bring to Front . Move the selected object to the front of all other objects in the same layer. See Object Handling for more information. Move Forwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+F) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Forwards . Move the selected object one step towards the front (refer to Object Handling ). Move Backwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Backwards .
Make the selected objects form a soft group. Unlike groups, soft groups can include objects on different layers. Refer to Object Handling (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) for details. Remove soft group (Ctrl+Alt+U) Or right click and choose Remove soft group . Disband the selected soft group, so the objects are separately selectable objects again. Apply/Remove ClipView (Q/Alt+Q) This option reads: Apply ClipView when there are two or more objects selected. Remove ClipView when there is a ClipView selected.
handling for more information). Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape. Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects.
Move Forwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+F) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Forwards . Move the selected object one step towards the front (refer to Object Handling ). Move Backwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Backwards . Move the selected object one step towards the back (refer to Object Handling). Put to Back (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Put to Back .
. Disband the selected soft group, so the objects are separately selectable objects again. Apply/Remove ClipView (Q/Alt+Q) This option reads: Apply ClipView when there are two or more objects selected. Remove ClipView when there is a ClipView selected. For Apply ClipView, the rear object in the selection (the object behind the other selected objects) 'clips' or 'masks' the other objects (the effect is similar to viewing the other objects through a window the shape of the rear object).
Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve .
Move Backwards (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move Backwards . Move the selected object one step towards the back (refer to Object Handling). Put to Back (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Put to Back . Move the selected object behind all others in the same layer (refer to Object Handling ). Move To Layer Behind (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+D) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move to Layer Behind .
Remove ClipView when there is a ClipView selected. For Apply ClipView, the rear object in the selection (the object behind the other selected objects) 'clips' or 'masks' the other objects (the effect is similar to viewing the other objects through a window the shape of the rear object). Remove ClipView removes any clipping applied to the objects in the ClipView. See Object Handling .
Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring .
Put to Back (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+B) Or right click and choose Arrange > Put to Back . Move the selected object behind all others in the same layer (refer to Object Handling ). Move To Layer Behind (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+D) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move to Layer Behind . Move the selected object one layer backwards. The selected object becomes the front object in the new layer. In an animation document, this option is Move To Previous Frame .
Apply opacity mask Shortcut to quick apply an opacity mask, see Opacity masks in chapter Transparency Flatten photo group Converts a photo group to a single bitmap. Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+L) Or right click and choose Align . Used to align several objects. Has no effect when a single object is selected (refer to Object Handling for more information). Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information).
Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details.
Move To Layer Behind (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+Shift+D) Or right click and choose Arrange > Move to Layer Behind . Move the selected object one layer backwards. The selected object becomes the front object in the new layer. In an animation document, this option is Move To Previous Frame . Group (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+G) Or right click and choose Group . Group the selected objects together to appear as a single object (refer to Object Handling ).
Flatten photo group Converts a photo group to a single bitmap. Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+L) Or right click and choose Align . Used to align several objects. Has no effect when a single object is selected (refer to Object Handling for more information). Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information).
Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details. Repeat on all pages (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+R) Or right click and choose Repeat on all pages . The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages.
Group (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+G) Or right click and choose Group . Group the selected objects together to appear as a single object (refer to Object Handling ). Ungroup (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+U) Or right click and choose Ungroup . Split the group or groups into separate objects. Dimmed unless the selected object is a group. Or, for several selected objects, there is at least one group. Apply soft group (Ctrl+Alt+G) Or right click and choose Apply soft group .
Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes.
The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages. The command automatically creates an appropriate Repeating:AutoRepeat name and applies it to all copies, so from this point on it will be updated when you select Update repeating objects . Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating . The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website.
Ungroup (Arrange control bar or Ctrl+U) Or right click and choose Ungroup . Split the group or groups into separate objects. Dimmed unless the selected object is a group. Or, for several selected objects, there is at least one group. Apply soft group (Ctrl+Alt+G) Or right click and choose Apply soft group . Make the selected objects form a soft group. Unlike groups, soft groups can include objects on different layers. Refer to Object Handling (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) for details.
Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes. Only shapes in the selection are combined. Unselected shapes do not change (refer to chapter Shape handling for more information).
Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating . The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website. Read more in the Object Handling Chapter .
Apply soft group (Ctrl+Alt+G) Or right click and choose Apply soft group . Make the selected objects form a soft group. Unlike groups, soft groups can include objects on different layers. Refer to Object Handling (Soft Groups, Soft Groups ) for details. Remove soft group (Ctrl+Alt+U) Or right click and choose Remove soft group . Disband the selected soft group, so the objects are separately selectable objects again.
Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes. Only shapes in the selection are combined. Unselected shapes do not change (refer to chapter Shape handling for more information). Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape. Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e.
. Page 1739
Remove soft group (Ctrl+Alt+U) Or right click and choose Remove soft group . Disband the selected soft group, so the objects are separately selectable objects again. Apply/Remove ClipView (Q/Alt+Q) This option reads: Apply ClipView when there are two or more objects selected. Remove ClipView when there is a ClipView selected.
Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape. Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects.
Apply/Remove ClipView (Q/Alt+Q) This option reads: Apply ClipView when there are two or more objects selected. Remove ClipView when there is a ClipView selected. For Apply ClipView, the rear object in the selection (the object behind the other selected objects) 'clips' or 'masks' the other objects (the effect is similar to viewing the other objects through a window the shape of the rear object). Remove ClipView removes any clipping applied to the objects in the ClipView. See Object Handling .
Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve .
Apply opacity mask Shortcut to quick apply an opacity mask, see Opacity masks in chapter Transparency Flatten photo group Converts a photo group to a single bitmap. Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+L) Or right click and choose Align . Used to align several objects. Has no effect when a single object is selected (refer to Object Handling for more information). Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information).
Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details.
Flatten photo group Converts a photo group to a single bitmap. Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+L) Or right click and choose Align . Used to align several objects. Has no effect when a single object is selected (refer to Object Handling for more information). Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information).
Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details. Repeat on all pages (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+R) Or right click and choose Repeat on all pages . The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages.
Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+L) Or right click and choose Align . Used to align several objects. Has no effect when a single object is selected (refer to Object Handling for more information). Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information).
Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details. Repeat on all pages (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+R) Or right click and choose Repeat on all pages . The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages. The command automatically creates an appropriate Repeating:AutoRepeat name and applies it to all copies, so from this point on it will be updated when you select Update repeating objects .
Join Shapes (Arrange control bar or Ctrl +J) Used to create holes within shapes (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes.
. The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages. The command automatically creates an appropriate Repeating:AutoRepeat name and applies it to all copies, so from this point on it will be updated when you select Update repeating objects . Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating . The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website.
Break Shapes (Arrange control bar) Cancels a Join Shapes command (refer to Shape Handling for more information). Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes. Only shapes in the selection are combined. Unselected shapes do not change (refer to chapter Shape handling for more information).
. Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating . The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website. Read more in the Object Handling Chapter .
Combine Shapes (Arrange control bar) The Combine Shapes sub-menu lets you: Add shapes together. Or subtract the top shape from the other shapes. Or discard parts of other shapes not covered by the top shape. Or use the top shape to slice the other shapes. Only shapes in the selection are combined. Unselected shapes do not change (refer to chapter Shape handling for more information). Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape.
. The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website. Read more in the Object Handling Chapter .
Convert Line to Shape This option converts a line into a shape. Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects.
Convert to Editable Shapes (Arrange control bar Ctrl+Shift+S) Convert predefined objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and text into shapes, i.e. Photo & Graphic Designer no longer sees them as rectangles, ellipses or text but as a collection of straight and curved lines. Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve .
Create Bitmap Copy (Ctrl+Shift+C) Create Bitmap Copy creates a bitmap version of the selected objects. Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring .
Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve Or right click and choose Fit Text to Curve/Remove Text From Curve . Lets you fit a line of text to an arbitrary curve or remove text from a curve (see Text Handling for more information). Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details.
Repelling and Anchoring Or right click and choose Repel text under, Anchor to text or Repelling and Anchoring . Make the object repel underlying text, and anchor an object within a column of text. See Repelling text objects and Anchored Graphics for details. Repeat on all pages (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+R) Or right click and choose Repeat on all pages . The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages.
Repeat on all pages (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+R) Or right click and choose Repeat on all pages . The selected object will be copied to the same place on all pages. The command automatically creates an appropriate Repeating:AutoRepeat name and applies it to all copies, so from this point on it will be updated when you select Update repeating objects . Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating .
Stop updating (Shift+Ctrl+Alt+O) Or right click and choose Stop updating . The "Arrange" > "Stop updating " operation allows you to turn off the repeating nature of an instance of a repeating object, or on all copies of that object in your website. Read more in the Object Handling Chapter .
Utilities menu This section covers Galleries Color Editor (Ctrl+E) Names Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Bitmap-Editor Optimize Photo Optimize all Images Bitmap Tracer Animation Screen Capture Check spelling as you type Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Galleries Color Gallery (Galleries control bar or F9) Displays or hides the Color Gallery (see Color Handling ). Page & Layer Gallery (Galleries control bar or F10) Displays or hides the Page & Layer Gallery. Only used in non-animation documents (see Layers ).
. Only used in animation documents (see Web Graphics). Name Gallery (Galleries control bar or Ctrl+Shift+F9) Displays or hides the Name Gallery (see Document Handling ). Color Editor (Ctrl+E) Or right click and choose Fill Color . Opens the Color Editor (refer to Color Handling). Names Or right click and choose Names . Opens the Apply/remove names dialog . Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Opens the Web Properties dialog, which allows web features such as links, popup layers, anchors, etc.
Animation Properties: With this dialog box you can change the options for the animation and for each frame. Preview All Frames: Use this to preview all the frames of your animation. This is not very useful for Flash animations as it shows only the key frames with no tweening. Preview GIF Animation in Browser: This item creates an animated GIF file from the frames in your document and opens it in your web browser so you can see what it looks like.
Galleries Color Gallery (Galleries control bar or F9) Displays or hides the Color Gallery (see Color Handling ). Page & Layer Gallery (Galleries control bar or F10) Displays or hides the Page & Layer Gallery. Only used in non-animation documents (see Layers ). Bitmap Gallery (Galleries control bar or F11) Displays or hides the Bitmap Gallery (see Bitmap Handling ). Line Gallery (Galleries control bar or Shift+F12) Displays or hides the Line Gallery (see Drawing Lines ).
Opens the Apply/remove names dialog . Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Opens the Web Properties dialog, which allows web features such as links, popup layers, anchors, etc. to be added to your document. See Web Properties Dialog for details! Bitmap-Editor When a bitmap is selected, this opens the Bitmap Editor. In the Program Options ("Utilities -> Options -> Effects & Plug-ins Tab") you can also choose the enclosed Xtreme Photo Designer 7 or any other program for bitmap editing.
Check spelling as you type This option activates the Spell Checker in the Text Tool . Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Color Editor (Ctrl+E) Or right click and choose Fill Color . Opens the Color Editor (refer to Color Handling). Names Or right click and choose Names . Opens the Apply/remove names dialog . Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Opens the Web Properties dialog, which allows web features such as links, popup layers, anchors, etc. to be added to your document. See Web Properties Dialog for details! Bitmap-Editor When a bitmap is selected, this opens the Bitmap Editor.
your document and opens it in your web browser so you can see what it looks like. There is a button on the animation bar for quick access to this operation. Preview FLASH Animation in Browser: Pops up a window displaying your animation as Flash, as it will appear in a web browser when you export. Use this to preview Flash animations. There is a button on the animation bar for quick access to this operation. Screen Capture Open the Screen Capture Tool.
Names Or right click and choose Names . Opens the Apply/remove names dialog . Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Opens the Web Properties dialog, which allows web features such as links, popup layers, anchors, etc. to be added to your document. See Web Properties Dialog for details! Bitmap-Editor When a bitmap is selected, this opens the Bitmap Editor.
Screen Capture Open the Screen Capture Tool. Check spelling as you type This option activates the Spell Checker in the Text Tool . Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Web Properties (Ctrl+Shift+W) Opens the Web Properties dialog, which allows web features such as links, popup layers, anchors, etc. to be added to your document. See Web Properties Dialog for details! Bitmap-Editor When a bitmap is selected, this opens the Bitmap Editor. In the Program Options ("Utilities -> Options -> Effects & Plug-ins Tab") you can also choose the enclosed Xtreme Photo Designer 7 or any other program for bitmap editing.
. Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Bitmap-Editor When a bitmap is selected, this opens the Bitmap Editor. In the Program Options ("Utilities -> Options -> Effects & Plug-ins Tab") you can also choose the enclosed Xtreme Photo Designer 7 or any other program for bitmap editing. For further information on the bitmap editor, read the program help or the electronic manual (PDF) of the according program. Optimize Photo Or right click and choose Optimize Photo . Optimize bitmap resolution for use in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 designs.
Optimize Photo Or right click and choose Optimize Photo . Optimize bitmap resolution for use in Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 designs. See Photo Optimization for details. Optimize all Images Optimizes all photos and bitmaps in the design. See Photo Optimization . Bitmap Tracer Opens the Tracer dialog box (see Bitmap Handling ).
Optimize all Images Optimizes all photos and bitmaps in the design. See Photo Optimization . Bitmap Tracer Opens the Tracer dialog box (see Bitmap Handling ). Animation This menu is only available in animation documents and offers three choices: Animation Properties: With this dialog box you can change the options for the animation and for each frame. Preview All Frames: Use this to preview all the frames of your animation.
Bitmap Tracer Opens the Tracer dialog box (see Bitmap Handling ). Animation This menu is only available in animation documents and offers three choices: Animation Properties: With this dialog box you can change the options for the animation and for each frame. Preview All Frames: Use this to preview all the frames of your animation. This is not very useful for Flash animations as it shows only the key frames with no tweening.
Animation This menu is only available in animation documents and offers three choices: Animation Properties: With this dialog box you can change the options for the animation and for each frame. Preview All Frames: Use this to preview all the frames of your animation. This is not very useful for Flash animations as it shows only the key frames with no tweening.
Screen Capture Open the Screen Capture Tool. Check spelling as you type This option activates the Spell Checker in the Text Tool . Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Check spelling as you type This option activates the Spell Checker in the Text Tool . Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Options (Ctrl+Shift+O) Or right click and choose Page Options . Opens the Options dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Share Menu The share menu includes various facilities for sharing the currently selected image with other MAGIX and third party services. So for example you can select a photo on your page and quickly send it to a MAGIX Online Album, to Facebook, or to Flickr. If you have other compatible MAGIX programs installed, you can also send the image to those. For example you can send to MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX to include an image from Designer in a movie.
objects to video" entry will be included in the menu, allowing you to send the selection to that application for inclusion in a movie.
Publish Online - Upload objects to Facebook Send the selection to Facebook. A dialog appears allowing you to optionally specify a filename, description and search keywords for your image, and to choose whether the image should be private or public. Click the Upload button to proceed and a login window appears. If you already have a Facebook account, enter the details, or click the Sign Up button to join Facebook.
Publish Online - Upload objects to Flickr Send the selection to Flickr. The process for this is similar to that for Facebook above, except of course you must login with your Flickr account details. Publish Online - MAGIX Online Album Send selected objects Send the selection to MAGIX for inclusion in a new or existing online album. Login with your MAGIX Online World account details. You can opt to have the login details saved on your computer so that you don't need to login again in future.
Publish Online - MAGIX Online Album Send selected objects Send the selection to MAGIX for inclusion in a new or existing online album. Login with your MAGIX Online World account details. You can opt to have the login details saved on your computer so that you don't need to login again in future. Open Online Album This opens a web browser window so you can view your albums. Online Media Manager Open the Online Media Manager in a window so that you can manage the photos included in your albums.
Publish Online - Publish website This initiates a publish operation on the current document - the same operation that's available from the File menu and web toolbar. Publish Online - Free web space & more This option will open a web browser onto a page telling you about the free MAGIX web hosting services available and other related information.
Publish Online - Free web space & more This option will open a web browser onto a page telling you about the free MAGIX web hosting services available and other related information. Sending images to other installed MAGIX applications If you have other compatible MAGIX applications installed, the Share menu will include options to send the selected image to those applications.
Sending images to other installed MAGIX applications If you have other compatible MAGIX applications installed, the Share menu will include options to send the selected image to those applications. For example if you have Movie Edit Pro MX installed, an "Add objects to video" entry will be included in the menu, allowing you to send the selection to that application for inclusion in a movie.
Window menu This section covers Show Mask (Standard control bar or Ctrl+M) Invert Mask (Ctrl+Shift+I) Clear Mask (Ctrl+D) Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Multiple Page View New View Arrange Views Cascade Arrange Icons Control Bars Bars Quality (Standard control bar) Show Printer Colors Show Document Tabs Full Screen (8 on numeric keypad) Show Grid (#) Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Show Print Borders Snap to Grid (.
Choosing multiple page view shows all the pages in your document. New View Opens a new window onto the selected document. Arrange Views Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows as tiles. Cascade Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows stacked behind each other so that the title bars are visible. Arrange Icons Tidies up any icons for minimized Photo & Graphic Designer windows. Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ).
Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (.
Show Mask (Standard control bar or Ctrl+M) Enter the Mask mode. See the Masks chapter for details! Invert Mask (Ctrl+Shift+I) Inverts the mask. Screen areas that were protected by the mask are now unprotected and vice versa. See the Masks chapter for details! Clear Mask (Ctrl+D) Clears the mask. Removes all shapes from the mask layer, so the whole screen is protected by the mask. See the Masks chapter for details! Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects.
Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ). Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen. In Designer Pro you can also show CMYK color separations here. Show Document Tabs Toggles display of the document tabs that provide quick access to each open document at the top of the Photo & Graphic Designer window.
With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details. You can also adjust the snapping distance; see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer for more details. Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents). A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes.
Invert Mask (Ctrl+Shift+I) Inverts the mask. Screen areas that were protected by the mask are now unprotected and vice versa. See the Masks chapter for details! Clear Mask (Ctrl+D) Clears the mask. Removes all shapes from the mask layer, so the whole screen is protected by the mask. See the Masks chapter for details! Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values.
Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen. In Designer Pro you can also show CMYK color separations here. Show Document Tabs Toggles display of the document tabs that provide quick access to each open document at the top of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Clicking on a tab makes that document the selected document.
Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents). A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes.
Clear Mask (Ctrl+D) Clears the mask. Removes all shapes from the mask layer, so the whole screen is protected by the mask. See the Masks chapter for details! Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Multiple Page View Or right click and choose Multiple Page View .
Toggles display of the document tabs that provide quick access to each open document at the top of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Clicking on a tab makes that document the selected document. A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes. Full Screen (8 on numeric keypad) Toggles between full-screen and normal screen modes. Show Grid (#) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid . Makes the on-screen grid visible (see Document Handling ).
Clear Selection / Reset current attributes (Esc) Deselect all objects. If nothing is selected, the current attributes are set back to its default values. You can easily get this by pressing ESC twice. Multiple Page View Or right click and choose Multiple Page View . By default Photo & Graphic Designer shows only the current page of the currently open document. Choosing multiple page view shows all the pages in your document. New View Opens a new window onto the selected document.
Full Screen (8 on numeric keypad) Toggles between full-screen and normal screen modes. Show Grid (#) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid . Makes the on-screen grid visible (see Document Handling ). Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper.
Multiple Page View Or right click and choose Multiple Page View . By default Photo & Graphic Designer shows only the current page of the currently open document. Choosing multiple page view shows all the pages in your document. New View Opens a new window onto the selected document. Arrange Views Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows as tiles. Cascade Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows stacked behind each other so that the title bars are visible.
Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid . Makes the on-screen grid visible (see Document Handling ). Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen.
New View Opens a new window onto the selected document. Arrange Views Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows as tiles. Cascade Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows stacked behind each other so that the title bars are visible. Arrange Icons Tidies up any icons for minimized Photo & Graphic Designer windows. Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars.
Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (. on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid .
Arrange Views Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows as tiles. Cascade Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows stacked behind each other so that the title bars are visible. Arrange Icons Tidies up any icons for minimized Photo & Graphic Designer windows. Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars.
Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (. on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid . With this option set, an object snaps to any grid point it is dragged close to (see Document Handling).
Cascade Displays all Photo & Graphic Designer windows stacked behind each other so that the title bars are visible. Arrange Icons Tidies up any icons for minimized Photo & Graphic Designer windows. Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars. Quality (Standard control bar) Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ).
selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (. on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid . With this option set, an object snaps to any grid point it is dragged close to (see Document Handling). Snap to Guides (2 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Guides . With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling).
Arrange Icons Tidies up any icons for minimized Photo & Graphic Designer windows. Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars. Quality (Standard control bar) Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ). Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed.
Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid . With this option set, an object snaps to any grid point it is dragged close to (see Document Handling). Snap to Guides (2 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Guides . With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling). Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects .
Control Bars Displays the Control Bars dialog box (described in Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer ). Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars. Quality (Standard control bar) Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ). Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen.
Snap to Guides (2 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Guides . With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling). Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects . With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details.
Bars Menu entries to switch on and off the most important control bars. Quality (Standard control bar) Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ). Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen. In Designer Pro you can also show CMYK color separations here.
With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling). Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects . With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details. You can also adjust the snapping distance; see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer for more details. Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents.
Quality (Standard control bar) Selects how objects are displayed from wire frame to anti-aliased (see Document Handling ). Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen. In Designer Pro you can also show CMYK color separations here.
Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects . With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details. You can also adjust the snapping distance; see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer for more details. Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents).
Show Printer Colors Allows you to simulate what the document will look like when printed. This doesn't alter your document, and is just a different way of viewing it on screen. In Designer Pro you can also show CMYK color separations here. Show Document Tabs Toggles display of the document tabs that provide quick access to each open document at the top of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Clicking on a tab makes that document the selected document.
Graphic Designer for more details. Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents). A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes.
Show Document Tabs Toggles display of the document tabs that provide quick access to each open document at the top of the Photo & Graphic Designer window. Clicking on a tab makes that document the selected document. A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes. Full Screen (8 on numeric keypad) Toggles between full-screen and normal screen modes. Show Grid (#) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid .
("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents). A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes.
Full Screen (8 on numeric keypad) Toggles between full-screen and normal screen modes. Show Grid (#) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid . Makes the on-screen grid visible (see Document Handling ). Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper.
Show Grid (#) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Grid . Makes the on-screen grid visible (see Document Handling ). Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen.
Show Guides (1 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Show Grid/Guides > Show Guides . Displays or hides the Guides layer which contains all guidelines and guide objects. Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (.
Show Print Borders Most printers have a non-printing margin (the print border) around the edge of the paper. With Show Print Borders selected two rectangles are displayed on screen. One shows the edge of the paper, the other shows the printable area. Snap to Grid (. on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid . With this option set, an object snaps to any grid point it is dragged close to (see Document Handling).
Snap to Grid (. on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Grid . With this option set, an object snaps to any grid point it is dragged close to (see Document Handling). Snap to Guides (2 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Guides . With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling). Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects .
Snap to Guides (2 on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Guides . With this option set, an object snaps to any guide it is dragged close to (see Object Handling). Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects . With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details.
Snap to Objects (* on numeric keypad) Or right click and choose Snap to > Snap to Objects . With this option selected, dragging a handle close to another object snaps the handle to the object; see Object Handling for more details. You can also adjust the snapping distance; see Customizing Photo & Graphic Designer for more details. Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents).
Documents Loaded A list of the currently open documents. Clicking on a name makes that document the selected document ("Ctrl + F6" also switches between open documents). A "*" after the document name indicates that it currently has unsaved changes.
Help menu This section covers Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 help Help Movies More Photo & Graphic Designer Tip of the Day Register Update program Affiliate program Download templates Info pop-ups About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 help Use the command Help in the Help menu to open the start page of the program Help. Here you can work through the Help step-by-step and jump to specific sections via the tree structure on the left-hand side.
Affiliate program If you didn't sign up for the affiliate program when you unlocked Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, you can use this option to join the program or to change the affiliate option you chose previously. Select this option to bring up the affiliate dialog, which tells you all about the affiliate program. You can start earning commission from your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 website, or have it donated to charity, just by choosing from the three options shown in the dialog.
Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 help Use the command Help in the Help menu to open the start page of the program Help. Here you can work through the Help step-by-step and jump to specific sections via the tree structure on the left-hand side. Help This command is available at almost every point of this program and opens the program Help at the corresponding topic. Use this command to get help on any function of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
are displayed in a pop-up message. You can disable each pop-up by checking Don't show me again in the message window. With Turn all on all messages are enabled again, with Turn all off all messages are turned off. About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Displays copyright info and version number of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
Help This command is available at almost every point of this program and opens the program Help at the corresponding topic. Use this command to get help on any function of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013. Shortcut: F1 Movies A list of movies to help you make the most out of Photo & Graphic Designer. More Photo & Graphic Designer In this menu there are useful internet links to Xara's website and useful online resources. Tip of the Day See the tip of the day.
Displays copyright info and version number of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
Movies A list of movies to help you make the most out of Photo & Graphic Designer. More Photo & Graphic Designer In this menu there are useful internet links to Xara's website and useful online resources. Tip of the Day See the tip of the day. There is also a check box below the Tip of the Day where you select whether or not you see a tip each time you start Photo & Graphic Designer. Register "Help -> Register" allows you to register your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 software.
More Photo & Graphic Designer In this menu there are useful internet links to Xara's website and useful online resources. Tip of the Day See the tip of the day. There is also a check box below the Tip of the Day where you select whether or not you see a tip each time you start Photo & Graphic Designer. Register "Help -> Register" allows you to register your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 software. You will normally only see this option if you are installing from CD for the first time.
Tip of the Day See the tip of the day. There is also a check box below the Tip of the Day where you select whether or not you see a tip each time you start Photo & Graphic Designer. Register "Help -> Register" allows you to register your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 software. You will normally only see this option if you are installing from CD for the first time.
Register "Help -> Register" allows you to register your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 software. You will normally only see this option if you are installing from CD for the first time. The register option allows you to register your software if you purchased your CD from somewhere other than Xara, for example, from a reseller. If you purchased the software from Xara directly, and/or registered in the past, you can click "Register Now" to stop any further registration messages appearing.
Update program Opens a dialog box giving you access to TalkGraphics, The Outsider, The XaraXone, The Xara Gallery , and the Support site. Affiliate program If you didn't sign up for the affiliate program when you unlocked Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, you can use this option to join the program or to change the affiliate option you chose previously. Select this option to bring up the affiliate dialog, which tells you all about the affiliate program.
Affiliate program If you didn't sign up for the affiliate program when you unlocked Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013, you can use this option to join the program or to change the affiliate option you chose previously. Select this option to bring up the affiliate dialog, which tells you all about the affiliate program. You can start earning commission from your Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 website, or have it donated to charity, just by choosing from the three options shown in the dialog.
Download templates Allows you to browse to a network location to download updated Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 templates to your Designs Gallery . Info pop-ups At several places in Photo & Graphic Designer, when you chose a specific tool, introductory usage hints are displayed in a pop-up message. You can disable each pop-up by checking Don't show me again in the message window. With Turn all on all messages are enabled again, with Turn all off all messages are turned off.
Info pop-ups At several places in Photo & Graphic Designer, when you chose a specific tool, introductory usage hints are displayed in a pop-up message. You can disable each pop-up by checking Don't show me again in the message window. With Turn all on all messages are enabled again, with Turn all off all messages are turned off. About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Displays copyright info and version number of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
About Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Displays copyright info and version number of Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013.
Key shortcuts This section covers The tools The galleries Zooming Manipulating documents Manipulating objects Text Tool Special characters (in Text Tool) Feather Tool Other The tools Selector Tool Freehand & Brush Tool Shape Editor Tool Pen Tool Rectangle Tool Ellipse Tool QuickShape Tool Text Tool Fill Tool Transparency Tool Shadow Tool Bevel Tool Contour Tool Blend Tool Mould Tool Live Effects Tool Photo Tool Extrude Tool Push Tool Zoom Tool F2 or V or Alt + S F3 or N F4 Shift + F5 Shift + F3 or M Shift
Line Gallery Name Gallery Ctrl + F9 Ctrl + Shift + F9 Zooming Previous zoom Zoom to selection Zoom to drawing Zoom to page Zoom in (enlarge) Ctrl + R Ctrl + Shift + Z Ctrl + Shift + J Ctrl + Shift + P Ctrl + + on the numeric keypad Zoom out (reduce) Ctrl + on the numeric keypad Zoom to 100% 1 Zoom to 200% 2 Zoom to 300% 3 Zoom to 400% 4 Zoom to 50% 5 You can also zoom and slide the document using a mouse-wheel (Ctrl+Mouse-Wheel zooms in/out).
Manipulating objects When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
Repeat on all pages Ctrl + Shift + Alt + R Update repeating objects Shift + Alt + R Stop repeating Ctrl + Shift + Alt + O Move the selected objects cursor (arrow) keys with the Selector Tool (see Nudging objects ) Move the selected handles cursors (arrow) keys in tools other than the selector. Text Tool Cursor keys Move the text cursor up up, down, left or right one character at a time. Home Move the text cursor to the start of the line. End Move the text cursor to the end of the line.
Special characters (in Text Tool) Ctrl + Space Ctrl + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt +.
The tools Selector Tool Freehand & Brush Tool Shape Editor Tool Pen Tool Rectangle Tool Ellipse Tool QuickShape Tool Text Tool Fill Tool Transparency Tool Shadow Tool Bevel Tool Contour Tool Blend Tool Mould Tool Live Effects Tool Photo Tool Extrude Tool Push Tool Zoom Tool F2 or V or Alt + S F3 or N F4 Shift + F5 Shift + F3 or M Shift + F4 or L Shift + F2 F8 or T F5 or G F6 Ctrl + F2 Ctrl + F3 Ctrl + F7 F7 or W Shift + F6 Ctrl + F5 P E Shift + F8 or H or Alt + X (or the Space bar when not in the Text Tool
on the numeric keypad Zoom out (reduce) Ctrl + on the numeric keypad Zoom to 100% 1 Zoom to 200% 2 Zoom to 300% 3 Zoom to 400% 4 Zoom to 50% 5 You can also zoom and slide the document using a mouse-wheel (Ctrl+Mouse-Wheel zooms in/out). Manipulating documents When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
Move object forwards Ctrl + Shift + F Move object backwards Ctrl + Shift + B Move object to layer in front (drawing Ctrl + Shift + U documents) Move object to layer behind (drawing Ctrl + Shift + D documents) Move to next frame (animation documents) Ctrl + Shift + U Move to previous frame (animation documents) Ctrl + Shift + D Group objects Ctrl + G Ungroup objects Ctrl + U Apply Soft Group Ctrl + Shift + G Remove Soft Group Ctrl + Shift + U Clone object Ctrl + K Duplicate object with offset Ctrl + Alt+ D C
Home End Ctrl + left/right cursor Ctrl + Home Ctrl + End Ctrl + A Ctrl + B Ctrl + I Ctrl + C Ctrl + L Ctrl + Shift + L Ctrl + V Ctrl + W Ctrl + Ctrl + Shift + Ctrl + < Ctrl + > Alt + cursor keys ¿ Delete Backspace Shift + cursor keys Shift + End Move the text cursor to the start of the line. Move the text cursor to the end of the line. Move the text cursor left/right one word. Move the text cursor to the start of the first line in a text object.
Ctrl + Alt +.(Full stop) … Ctrl + Alt + C Ctrl + Alt + R Ctrl + Alt + T Ctrl + Alt + B © ® ™ • Ellipsis (An ellipsis is three dots) Copyright Registered Trademark Bullet Feather Tool You can control the feather slider with your mouse and keyboard. When the feather text box or slider are selected: Mouse wheel up/down increases or decreases feathering Ctrl + Mouse wheel up/down increases or decreases in larger increments. Page up/page down keys increases or decreases in larger increments.
The galleries Fonts Gallery Clipart Gallery Fill Gallery Frame Gallery Color Gallery Page & Layer Gallery Bitmap Gallery Line Gallery Name Gallery Shift + F9 Shift + F10 Shift + F11 Shift + F12 F9 F10 F11 Ctrl + F9 Ctrl + Shift + F9 Zooming Previous zoom Zoom to selection Zoom to drawing Zoom to page Zoom in (enlarge) Ctrl + R Ctrl + Shift + Z Ctrl + Shift + J Ctrl + Shift + P Ctrl + + on the numeric keypad Zoom out (reduce) Ctrl + on the numeric keypad Zoom to 100% 1 Zoom to 200% 2 Zoom to 300% 3 Zoom t
Show grid Show guides Snap to grid Snap to guides Snap to objects Select full screen Show rulers Undo Redo # 1 on numeric keypad . on the numeric keypad 2 on the numeric keypad * on the numeric keypad 8 on the numeric keypad Ctrl + Shift + R or Ctrl + L* Ctrl + Z or < or, Ctrl + Y or > or . Manipulating objects When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
Slice shapes Ctrl + 4 Join Shapes Ctrl + J Apply ClipView Q Remove ClipView Alt + Q Create opacity mask O Ungroup opacity mask Alt + O Convert to editable shapes Ctrl + Shift + S Open the alignment dialog box Ctrl + Shift + L* Web address Ctrl + Shift + W Repeat on all pages Ctrl + Shift + Alt + R Update repeating objects Shift + Alt + R Stop repeating Ctrl + Shift + Alt + O Move the selected objects cursor (arrow) keys with the Selector Tool (see Nudging objects ) Move the selected handles cursors (arrow)
Delete Backspace Shift + cursor keys Shift + End Delete the character to the right of the text cursor. If the cursor is on the end of a text line, join this line to the line below. Delete the character to the left of the text cursor. If the cursor is at the start of a text line, join this line to the line above. Select all text between the cursor position and the beginning of the line. Select all text between the cursor position and the end of the line.
Zooming Previous zoom Zoom to selection Zoom to drawing Zoom to page Zoom in (enlarge) Ctrl + R Ctrl + Shift + Z Ctrl + Shift + J Ctrl + Shift + P Ctrl + + on the numeric keypad Zoom out (reduce) Ctrl + on the numeric keypad Zoom to 100% 1 Zoom to 200% 2 Zoom to 300% 3 Zoom to 400% 4 Zoom to 50% 5 You can also zoom and slide the document using a mouse-wheel (Ctrl+Mouse-Wheel zooms in/out). Manipulating documents When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
Stop repeating Ctrl + Shift + Alt + O Move the selected objects cursor (arrow) keys with the Selector Tool (see Nudging objects ) Move the selected handles cursors (arrow) keys in tools other than the selector. Text Tool Cursor keys Move the text cursor up up, down, left or right one character at a time. Home Move the text cursor to the start of the line. End Move the text cursor to the end of the line. Ctrl + left/right cursor Move the text cursor left/right one word.
Special characters (in Text Tool) Ctrl + Space Ctrl + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt +.
Manipulating documents When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below . New document Ctrl + N New animation document Ctrl + Shift + N Open document Ctrl + O Close document Ctrl + W Switch document Ctrl + Tab Print document Ctrl + P Save document Ctrl + S Import Ctrl + Alt + I Import graphics from Web Ctrl + Alt + W Export Ctrl + Shift + E Time a document redraw Ctrl + Shift + T Show grid # Show guides 1 on numeric keypad Snap to grid .
Ungroup objects Ctrl + U Apply Soft Group Ctrl + Shift + G Remove Soft Group Ctrl + Shift + U Clone object Ctrl + K Duplicate object with offset Ctrl + Alt+ D Copy object to clipboard Ctrl + C Cut selection to clipboard Ctrl + X Paste object from clipboard Ctrl + V Paste object in original position Ctrl + Shift + V Paste opacity mask Ctrl + Shift + M Paste attributes Ctrl + Shift + A Create bitmap copy Ctrl + Shift + C Export sliced image Ctrl + I * Add shapes Ctrl + 1 Subtract shapes Ctrl + 2 Intersect sha
Ctrl + I Ctrl + C Ctrl + L Ctrl + Shift + L Ctrl + V Ctrl + W Ctrl + Ctrl + Shift + Ctrl + < Ctrl + > Alt + cursor keys ¿ Delete Backspace Shift + cursor keys Shift + End Apply the italic attribute. Copy the selected region of text to the clipboard. Select all characters in the line containing the text cursor. Insert 'Lorem ipsum' dummy text Paste text at the text cursor position (if the clipboard contains text). Swap the case of the character to the right of the text cursor.
are selected: Mouse wheel up/down Ctrl + Mouse wheel up/down Page up/page down keys Home/end keys select increases or decreases feathering increases or decreases in larger increments. increases or decreases in larger increments. minimum or maximum feather values.
Manipulating objects When in the Text Tool, shortcuts marked with a star (*) have a different action-see below .
Repeat on all pages Ctrl + Shift + Alt + R Update repeating objects Shift + Alt + R Stop repeating Ctrl + Shift + Alt + O Move the selected objects cursor (arrow) keys with the Selector Tool (see Nudging objects ) Move the selected handles cursors (arrow) keys in tools other than the selector. Text Tool Cursor keys Move the text cursor up up, down, left or right one character at a time. Home Move the text cursor to the start of the line. End Move the text cursor to the end of the line.
Special characters (in Text Tool) Ctrl + Space Ctrl + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt +.
Text Tool Cursor keys Move the text cursor up up, down, left or right one character at a time. Home Move the text cursor to the start of the line. End Move the text cursor to the end of the line. Ctrl + left/right cursor Move the text cursor left/right one word. Ctrl + Home Move the text cursor to the start of the first line in a text object. Ctrl + End Move the text cursor to the end of the last line in a text object. Ctrl + A Selects all characters in a text object. Ctrl + B Apply the bold attribute.
Ctrl + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt +.(Full stop) … Ctrl + Alt + C Ctrl + Alt + R Ctrl + Alt + T Ctrl + Alt + B © ® ™ • EN dash (An EN dash is longer than a minus, and is a more correct 'dash') EM dash (An EM dash is a long dash) Ellipsis (An ellipsis is three dots) Copyright Registered Trademark Bullet Feather Tool You can control the feather slider with your mouse and keyboard.
Special characters (in Text Tool) Ctrl + Space Ctrl + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt + NumPad ? ? Ctrl + Alt +.
Feather Tool You can control the feather slider with your mouse and keyboard. When the feather text box or slider are selected: Mouse wheel up/down increases or decreases feathering Ctrl + Mouse wheel up/down increases or decreases in larger increments. Page up/page down keys increases or decreases in larger increments. Home/end keys select minimum or maximum feather values.
Other Color Editor Options dialog Mask mode on Invert Mask Clear Mask Xara Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 Help Ctrl + E (opens and closes) Ctrl + Shift + O Ctrl + M Ctrl + Shift + I Ctrl + D F1 Page 1876
More about Xara Group In this chapter About Xara Group Ltd.
About Xara Group Ltd. One of the oldest independent UK software developers, Xara has been developing software since 1981. From Wordwise, one of the earliest microcomputer word processors, to Xara Designer Pro, the world's fastest, and many believe the world's best drawing and illustration software, Xara has developed a wide range of products covering the whole realm of publishing software. Xara has pioneered many technologies taken for granted nowadays.
Other Xara products There are trial versions and demo movies for many of these products at http://www.xara.com/products . Xara Designer Pro X (formerly Xtreme Pro) is our top of the range product and includes all the features and templates of Web Designer and Photo & Graphic Designer.
Legal In this chapter Xara Customer End User License Agreement Copyright Acknowledgements Page 1880
Xara Customer End User License Agreement © 2012 Xara Group Ltd IMPORTANT NOTICE: The Photo & Graphic Designer 2013 software ("Software") is the copyright of Xara Group Limited ("Xara") whose principal place of business is at Gaddesden Place, Hemel Hempstead, Herts, HP2 6EX, United Kingdom and may not be stored on any computer or copied without the license of Xara. You are offered a license on the terms of the End User License Agreement ("EULA") set out below.
only and not to the contract of sale of the CD-ROM. E. INCLUDED ONLINE ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE The Software may provide online access to third party software, e.g. Widgets or Gadgets, which are offered by third parties online. The Software can only provide access to such software if your PC is connected to the internet. If you agree to this EULA you agree that the Software may provide such access to third party software.
profits or any indirect or consequential loss arising from the use of or inability to use the Software or from errors or deficiencies in it whether caused by negligence or otherwise, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. H. CONSUMERS Nothing in this Agreement shall affect your statutory rights as a consumer. I. LAW This Agreement shall be governed by English law. J.
Copyright This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right of duplication, circulation, and translation are reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in form of copies, microfilms or other processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines, especially data processing machines, without the express written consent of the publisher. All copyrights reserved. All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers.
Acknowledgements Our thanks to Alan Burns, Paul Shotan, William Clegg, Gary Bouton,Vladimir Konstantinovich, Simone Pampado, Andy Jeffery, Dusan Kastelic, and Martin Preismann among many other individuals who have contributed artwork to the clipart collection. The Geotype font is provided by kind permission of Gary Bouton and remain © Gary Bouton, see www.theboutons.com . Some fonts copyright © FontBank Inc., all rights reserved. Other fonts are provided by third parties who retain the copyright.
folder of your Photo & Graphic Designer installation for details of each license. The Russian dictionary is Copyright (c) 1997-2008, Alexander I. Lebedev. See README_ru_RU.txt in the "dict" folder of your program installation for details and license. Perspective correction photo tool based on ShiftN technology provided by Marcus Hebel, www.shiftn.de : ShiftN version 3.5, May 2009 All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
